IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) k A f/ ^ .^. .«* i^ :/. '/. IX) LL 1.25 2.0 Ui HI U 1.4 Ml 1.6 % a^ ■^ '/. Photographic ^Sciences Corporation A ■^ V ^ « « 33 WIST MAIN STRUT WHSTIR.N.Y. MSM ( 7 1* ) 173.4.103 >^^^**^ ^ ^V^ V i\ VV^ ^^S z V ^c CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHIVI/ICiVIH Collection de microfiches. Cenadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Inttitut Canadian de microreproductions hietoriques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et biblographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checlced below. D D D D D □ Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur □ Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagie 1—1 C^ Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaurie et/ou pellicul6e I I Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque I I Coloured maps/ Cartes giographiques en couleur Coloured inic (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur Bound with other material/ Reli6 avec d'autros documents Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ Lareliure serr^e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distortion ia long de la marge intirieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que ccrtaines pages blanches ajouties l< ;s d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte. mais. lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pas tti filmAes. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplAmentaires: Virloui pigingi. L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a 6tA possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une modification dans la methods normale de filmage sont indiqute ci-dessous. □ Coloured pages/ Pages de couleur □ Pages damaged/ Pages endommagies n Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restauries et/ou pelliculAes r~7] Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ D D Pages d6color4es, tacheties ou piqutes Pages detached/ Pages d6tach6es Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of prir Qualiti inigaie de I'impression Includes supplementary materii Comprend du materiel supplimentaire I I Pages detached/ r~7] Showthrough/ I I Quality of print varies/ I I Includes supplementary material/ The c to the Their possil of the filmin Origin begini the lai sion, other first p sion, or illud Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible Pages wholly or pat.lally obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to ensure the be^t possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont At6 filmies A nouveau de fa^on A obtenir la meilleure image possible. The la shall c TINUE whichi Maps, differe entirel' beginn right ai require methoi ( fhis item Is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiquA ci-dessous 10X 14X 18X 22X 26X 30X A 12X lex 20X 24X 28X 32X laire 8 details ques du It modifier liger une e filmage 1/ uAes The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanlcs to the generosity of: Library of the Public Archives of Canada The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and iegibiiity of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol —^(meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol ▼ (meaning "END"), whichever applies. L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grice A la g4n4rosit6 de: La bibiioth^que des Archives publiques du Canada Les images suivantes ont AtA reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de la nettetA de l'exemplaire film6, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont ia couverture en papier est imprimie sont fiimto en commenqant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration. soit par le second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont filmte en commenQ...it par la premiere page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernlAre page qui compone une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaltra sur la dernidre image de cheque microfiche, seion le cas: le symbols -^ signifie "A SUIVRE ", le symbole V signifie "FIN". lire Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to bt entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc.. peuvent Atre filmAs A des taux de reduction diffirents. Lorsque le document est ti op grand pour Atre reproduit en un seui clichA, 11 est film* A partir de i'angle supArleur giuche, de gauche A droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants iliustrent ia mAthode. }y errata ed to mt ine pelure, agon A 1 2 3 32X 1 2 3 4 5 6 A-roj? lilUll) steam \ SCOTCH STBA] WONGS, METALLIC LII CHANDELIERS MOE LIGHTS, WINDSAILS, fortl PIPES, VALVES ftmiihodi V Detr( EVERY DESCRIP 8PEE] MaTALUO AND Wo 's Row ■nd Plea Wrlt« for iLLuaxBA ▲▼•nuf , I 1. MARINE COPPERSMITHS, BRM FINISHERS. Steam Fitters and Sheet Uetal Workers. lUanfMJtare and Keep la Stock the foUowtog MARUnS SPECIALTIES: SCOTCH STEAM WHISTLES, y 32 s. J It- 1 ve '^ Qe ■I )o- ten f * - '*^.T"^J " Smtatb or H. D. Edwabdr. OaoaoB W. Bdwamos. Fkame W. Bon V E8TABL.I8HEO 1855. ^^. EDWARDS ,j^ Ship Chandlery and Marine Hardware. ^A^e have fitted out more Vessels than any other ooncern on the Great Lakes. \A^e have the largest establish- ment of the kind in the country. — AGENTS FOR 7 sec. Tlie fog signal is situated on the old light-house crib on the W. side of the West Pier, and about 1,000 feet from its outer end, entrance to Charlotte Harbor, mouth of Genesee River, Lake Ontario, New York. The bell will be discontinued as a fog signal unless the steam whistle should be disabled, when it will be struck by ma- chinery every thirty seconds, as heretofore. IVine Mile Point Steam Foir Horn,— From and after the oneniog of navigation in the spring of 1894, the fog bell lieretofore maintained at Nine Mile Point light-station, on the west extremity of Stmcoe Island, at the «'a8t end of Lake Ontario, in the County of Frontenac. OnUirio, will be discontinued, ard replaced by a steam fog horn which \ill give blasts of 8 seconds' duration, with intervals of 22 seconds between the blasts. The fog alarm building is a square wooden building painted white, with a brown roof, and stands immediately north-west of the light- house tow'-'r. The horns point out to the south-vrest, and are elevated 16 feet above the level of the lake. Tlie machinery is in duplicate, so that in the event of one horn or boiler becoming inoperati e the other may be put in operation. LAKE ERIE. Niagara Klver (near Buiffblo).— Two spar buoys will be placed oppo- site and above the water works crib, on the Canada side. Seneca Slioal.— A black spar buoy, in seventeen feet of water, has been placed on Seneca Shoal. BUFFALO BREAKWATER (N. end) LIOHT-STATION.- During thick or foggy weather, a lOinch steam whistle will be sounded at Buffalo Breakwater (north end) Light Station, Lake Erie, New York, giving blasts of three seconds' duration, separated by silent intervals of twenty-seven seconds, thus: Silent Silent Blast interval Blast interval 8 sec. 27 sec. 8 sec. 37 sec. /' r 2 ▲DDITIONH AND CHAN6B8. The hell will be discontinued as a fog sig^^a^ unless the steam whistle should be disabled, when the bell will be struck by maciiinery u triple blow every 80 seconds. Pretque Isle Bay.— The north pier has been extended and the light house moved out. ASHTABULA L.IOHT-STATION.— During thick or foggy weather, a 6-inch :9team whistle will sotind bksts of three seconds' duration, separated by alternate silent intervals of twelve and forty-two seconds at Ashtabula Light- Station, Ohio. The fog signal is situated on the outer end of the West Pier, entrance to Ashta- bula Harbor, Lake Erie, Ohio. Falrport. — The range lights have been started. Black River Range Light.— Three fixed lights, two red and one white, arranged vertically 4 feet apart, with the white light in the middle, will be shown from lens lanterns suspended from a triangular, pyramidal, skeleton iron tower, located near the shore end of the west pier, and about 1,170 feet from its outer end, entrance to Black River harbor, Lake Erie, Ohio. The lights in connection with the light on the outer end of the west pier form a range on the centre line of the pier, and the range, tlierefore, marks the west side of the channel to the harbor. Toledo Harbor, Straight Channel through the Maumee Bay.— The straight channel into the Maumee fiay was buoyed and the buoys in the old channel discontinued. Bar Point Shoal LIgh t-Yesse I. — Formerly moored about H miles to the southward and westward of Bar Point, mouth of Detroit River, Michigan, will be moved about 400 feet to the westward to a position approximately the same as that occupied by the private light-vessel formerly maintained there. True bearings of prominent objects are: Bois Blanc Light'iouae (Canadian), N. by E. i E., 18,300 feet. Detroit River (Bir Point) Lighthouse, 8. f W., 13,800 feet. The vessel lies about 600 feet to the westward of u line drawn from Bois Blanc, (Canadian) Lighthouse to Detroit River (Bar Point) Lighthouse. ' DETROIT IM;ER Limekiln Crossing Light- Vessels. — Two small light-vessels placed to mark Limekiln Crossing, Detroit River, Michigan „ The ve«iseis are flat-bottomed pcows, with trunk cabins. Th. hulls arejAinted white, marked with red letters on each side, r 3spectively, "LIMEKII^kN WOSS- ING (SOUTH)" and "LIMEKILN CROSSING (NORTH)." * ' The vessels each siiow one flxed white light from a lens lantern suspended 19 feet above the vf^tar from a crane on an upright rising 3 feet above a tripod. During thick or foggy weather a bell will be struck by hand. True bearings and distances of prominent objects:— For Limek'ln Crossing (South) Light- Vessel : Texas Dock. N., 4,680 feet. Head of Bois Blanc Island Range Liglit (front), 8. by W. f W., 8,600 feet. East end of railroad ler on Stony IsTund (Canada Southern), N. W. by N., 4,200 feet. For Limekiln Crossing (North) Light- Vessel: Texas Dock, N. i E. , 2,000 feet. Head of Bois Blanc Island Range Light (front), S. by W., 6,100 feet. East end of railroad pier on Stony Island (Canada Southern), W. N. W., 2,400 feet. Ballard's Reef Light- Vessel. —A flat-bottomed scow with trunk cabin. The hull is painted lead color, with the words "BALLARD'S REEF" in black letters on each side, moored In about 18 feet of water off the easterly end of Ballard Reef, .making off from Grosse Isle, west side of Detroit River, Michigan. The vessel shows one flxed red lens lantern light at a height of 19 feet above the water, suspended from a cross-arm on an upright rising three feet above a square platform surmounting a tripod. e s h E 8 a VI '% ADDITIONS AND CHANGES. 8 During thick or foggy weather a bell will be struck by hand. Fort Maiden Range, front light (Canadian). S. by E. k E, (S. 16« 27' E. true). Qrosse Isle, Lower Range, front light, N. by W. t W. (N. 13» 26' W. true). Mamajuda Lighthouse. N. i W. (N. 5° 05' W. true). LAKE ST. CLAIR. Light for Triangnlallon Purposes.— A fixed white lens-lantern light was established, and will be maintained until further notice, by the U. 8. Engineers for triangulation purposes, on the structure recently erected in 8i feet of water near the mouth of the Old Cut, and about 800 feet north-wester' y from the range line marked by the St. Clair Plats Range Lights, Lake St. Clair, > ichigan. The light is shown at a height of 20 feet from a pole rising from a platform 6 feet above the water, supported on a cluster of piles. From the light St. Clair Flats Canal (Upper) Light-house bears N. 84° E (E. i N.). and St. Clair Flats Cana) (Lower) Light house bears 8. 58° 08' E. (S. E. by E. i E.) 7,900 feet. linted lOSS- LAKE HURON. Lake Huron LI|rht-VeMsel.— Moored in about 20 feet of water, in the southern end of Lake Huron, to the northward and AVtestward of North west Shoal, and shows at the foremast head a group of 3 fixed white lens lantern lights. The focal plane of the light is 40 feet above lake level, and visible, in clear weather, 13^ miles. The vessel has two masts, schooner rigged, no bowsprit, and has a black circu- lar cage-work day mark at the foremast head. The hull is straw-colored, with "LAKE HURON" in large black letters on each side and "No. 81" on each bow. The fog signal is a 6-mch steam whistle, and in thick or foggy weather sounds blasts of 2 seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of 10 seconds. Fort Gratiot Light-house S. by W. i W. li miles. Tile vessel is anchored with a mushroom anchor, and passing vessels should not approach nearer than 200 feet. FORT OB4TIOT LIGHT-8TATION.— This light has been changed from a!* fixed white light varied by a white flash every two fuinutes, to a fixed white light varied by a \vhite flash every minute. r. w., I cabin. black lallard Ive the pquare STRAITS OF MACKINAC. Poe Rec-r Light-Vessel.— Moored in about 80 feet of water in the eastern entrance to the Strait of Mackinac, on the eastern end of Poe Reef, north side of the south channel of the Strait. The vessel shows at the foremast heiai a group of ii fixed white lens-lantern lights, 40 feet above lake level, and visible, in clear weather. 18^ miles. The vessel has two masts, schooner rigged, no bow sprit, and has a black circu- lar cage work day mark at foremast head. The hull is painted red, with "Poe Reef" in large black letters on each side uivl " No. 02" on each bow. The fog signal is a 6 inch steam whistle, and in thick and foggy weather sounds blasts of 5 seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of 10 secon-ls, Northeast point of Bois Blanc Island, N. | E. Spectacle Reef Lighthouse, N. E. by E, i E. Forty-Mile Point, 8.E. by E. Cheboygan Light-house, H.W. i W., Si miles. CHEBOYC34N LIf3HT-§TAT10M.-Ttiis light has been changed from a fixed white light varied by white flashes evury 90 seconds, to a fixed white light varied by a white Qash •every minute. ADDITIONS AND CHANOBS. GEORGIAN BAY. Bustard Rocks IVIaIn Light.— The main lighthouse on the Bustard Rocks, at the mouth of French River, Georgian Bay. District of Algoma. Ontario, has been replaced by a new tower built 20 feet N.E. 4 E. from the old one. The new building is a square wooden tower, painted white, surmounted by a hexagonal iron lantern painted red. The height of the tower from its base to the vane on the lantern is 37 feet. The light will be as heretofore, fixed white. It will be elevated 48 feet above the level of the Bay. and should be visible 12 miles from all points of approach, except over the dangerous rocks and shoals to the N. Eastward and Eastward. The illuminating apparatus will be dioptric, of the 7th order. Besides serving as a back tower for the two ranges described below, this light is intended for a coast light. Bustard Rocks, Front Light of Inner Range.— The front range light-house on the Bustard Rocks has been replaced by a new tower, built near the site of the old one, 229 feet N.E. i E. from the main light building. It is a square wooden tower, painted white, surmounted by a s(iuare wooden lantern painted red. and is 28 feet high from its base to the vane on the lantern. The light will be as heretofore, fixed white, catoptric, elevated 39 feet above the water, and will be visible 6 miles in, and over a small arc on each side of, the line of range. The above described two liglns in range lead in, from a point just clear of the north Bustard Rock, to the intersection of this range with the French River rarn-e. Bustard Rocks, Front Light of Outer Rtfnge. (New Light.)— An additional ran^e light-house has been erected on the Bustard Rocks. 193 feet W. by S. from the mam tower. The building is a square wooden tower, painted white, surmounted by a square wooden lantern painted red, and is 28 feet high fiom the base to the vane on the lantern. The light will be fixed white, catoptric, elevated 27 feet above the level of the Bay. and sliould be visible 10 miles in, and over a small arc on each side of, the line of range. This light, in one with the light in the main tower, leads in E. by N. from deep water clear of Isabel Rock on the north, and of all the shoals south-west of Bustard Rocks on the south. French River Back Range Light.— The back range tower of the French River range has been replaced by a new tower, built in the village 840 feet back, or N.E. by N., from the old tower. The new tower is a square wooden building, painted white, surmounted by a square wooden lantern painted red, and is 33 feet high from its base to the vane on the lantern. The light will be, as heretofore fixed red, catoptric, and should be visible 6 miles in, and over a small arc on eacu side of, the line of range. It is elevated 37 feet above the level of the Bay. The French River range will, as heretofore, lead in, from its intersection with the inner Bustard range, lo Lefroy Island, c^^ai of all obstructions. Giants Tomb Light-House.— A light-house established by the Govern- ment of Canada on the southern extremity of Giants Tomb Island, in the soutl -east portion of the Georgian Bay, in the East Riding of Simcoe, Ontario, was put in operation on the opening of navigation this year. The light is fixed white, elevated 40 feet above the level of the Bay, and should be visible 11 miles from all points of approach by water. The illuminating appa- ratus is dioptric of the 7th order. The light-house stands on the boulder and gravel beach at the southern extremity of the island, close to the water. It consists of a square wooden tower, with dwell- ing attached, painted white, the tower surmounted by an iron lantern painted red. The height of the building, from its base to the vane on the lantern, is 37 feet. ? Bustard ,. Ontario, nted by a Hse to the feet above approach, ird. The is light is ont range It near the 3 a square inted red. above the he line of ;ar of the r ranue. Jght.)— 13 feet W. ted white, from the ?el of the f, the line rom deep ' Bustard Br of the 340 feet ted by a vane on visible 6 3vated 37 ,ion with Qovern- outl -east IS put in should ng appa- Ktremily ,h dwell- ited red. et. ADDITIONS AND CHANGES. LAKE SUPERIOR. WHITEIPI§H POINT LIOHT-STATION.— This light has been changed from a tixed white to a fixed white varied by a red flash every 20 seconds. Ontonagon Pierhead Beacon Light, on the west pier at Ontonagon, will be moved about 430 feet nearer the outer end of the pier. The elevation and characteristics of the light will remain unchanged. §rPERIOR PIERHEAD LIGHT-STATION.— During thick or foggy weather, a 6-inch st^am Avhistle will sound blasts of 3 seconds' duration, sepa- rated by silent intervals of 12 seconds, at Superior Pierhead Light-station, Lake Superior. Wisconsin. The fog signal is situated on the South Pier, about 45 feet in rear of light-tower, and serves as a guide into Superior and AUouez Bay. Superior Bay. Tlje following described post lights will be established in Superior Bay, Wis- consin and Minnesota: Superior Bay Entrance Range Post Llghls.— Two fixed white lens-lantern lights, each on an upright on Wisconsin Point. Front light 18 feet above lake level, just inside the entrance to the soutlieasterly end of Superior Bay. Rear light 24 feet above lake level, 320 feet 8. W. | W. from front light. The range will f;uide into the southeasterly end of Superior Bay through the natural channel from iake Superior. Superior Bay Range Post Lights.— Two fixed white lens-lantern lights, each on an upright on Wisconsin Point, just inside the entrance to the south- easterly end of Superior Bay. Front light 16 feet above lake level, 380 feet E. of Superior Bay entrance front range. Rear light 21 feet above lake level, 290 feet S.E. I E. from Superior Bay front light. The range will guide up Superior Bay from inside the entrance past the old dock on Minnesota Point to the entrance to the dredged channel to Quebec 'ock. Quebec Channel f*o above lake level, on an upri west angle of the intersect channel to Quebec dock, m iK Light.— A fixed red lens-lantern light, 13 feet ing from a square pyramidal cluster of piles in the the main channel of Super. or Bay and the dredged (' channel through Superior Bay. Superior Bay Channel (Lower) Post Light.— A fixed white lens- lantern light, 13 feet above lake level, on an upright rising from a square pyramidal cluster of piles on the northeusterly side of the channel, aad about 3,500 feet from Quebec channel post light. Superior Bay Channel (Lower Middle) Post Light.— A fixed white lens-lantern light, 13 feet above lake level, on an upright rising from a square pyramidal cluster of piles on the northeasterly side of the channel, about 3,800 feet from Superior Bay Channel (lower) post light. Superior Bay Channel (Upper Middle) Post Light.- A fixed white lens-lantern light, 13 feet above lake level, on an upright rising from a square pyramidal cluster of piles about midway of the Middle Ground, northeasterly side of the channel, and about 4 700 feet from Superior Bay channel (lower middle) post light. Superior Bay Channel (Upper) Post Light.— A fixed white lens- lantern light, 13 feet above lake level, on an upright rising from a square pyramidal cluster of piles on the northwesterly end of the Middle Ground, abreast of the lum ber docks southeasterly of Connors Point, northeasterly side of the channel, and about 2,000 feet from Superior Bay channel (upper middle) post light. Connors Point Range Post Lights.— Two fixed lens-lantern lights, front light white, 13 feet above lake level, about \ mile E. of Connors Point; rear light red, 18 feet above lake level, about 590 feet N.E. by E. i E. from Connors Point front light. Each shown from an upright rising from a square pyramidal ADDITIONS AND OHANOBS. cluster of piles southeasterly of Rice Point, Superior Bay. The range will guide in the channel from the Northern Pacific Railroad bridge, St. Louis Bay, past Connors Point into Superior Bay. Rice Point Ranf^e Post Llvhts.— Two fixed lens-lantern lights, front light white, 13 feet above lake lerel, 590 feet N.W. by N. i N. from Rice Point rear light; rear light red . Each shown from an upright rising from a square pyramidal cluster of piles southeasterly of Rice Point. Superior Bay. (The rear light of this range is the rear light of the Connors Pcint range.) The range will guide in the channel along the northeasterly side^of Rice ^'oint from its southeasterly point nearly to the Ohio Central coal dock. Ohio Central Coal Dock Post Light.— A fixed red lens-lantern light. 18 feet above lake level, on an upriglit rising from a square pyramidal cluster of piles southeasterly of the northeasterly end of the Ohio Central coal dock, northerly end of Superior Bay. The light marks the turning point from th^ northerly part of Duluth harbor into the channel marked by the Rice Point range. North Channel, East Range, Post Lights.— Two fixed white tubular- lantern lights, each on uprights on a platform, natural color, supported by a square gyramidal-cluster of black piles, standing in 7 or 8 feet of water to the westward of iice Point and at the easterly end of the nortli channel. The focal plane of the front light is 13 feet above the water and of the rear light 18 feet above the same level. The rear light is about 600 feet north, 46° 30 east (N.E. i E.) from the front light, and the range guides in the easterly part of the channel to the west range. North Channel, West Range, Post Lights,— Two fixed white tubu- lar lantern lights, each on uprights on a wooden platform, natural color, supported on a square pyramidal cluster of black piles, standing in 7 or 8 feet of water, near the lumber dock, West Duluth, ".t the westerly end of the north channel. The focal plane of the front light is 13 feet abo\e the water and of the rear light 18 feet above the same level. The rear light is about 550 feet south, 46° 30' west (8. W. i W.) from the front light, and the range guides in the westerly part of the channel to the east range. South Channel, West Range, Post Lights.— Two fixed white tubu- lar-lantern lights, each on uprights on a wooden platform, natural color, supported on a square pyramidal cluster of black piles, standing in from 7 to 9 feet of water, near the lumber dock, West Duluth, at the westerly end of the south channel. The focal plane of the front light is 13 feet above the water, and of the rear light 18 feet above the same level. The rear light is about 950 feet south, 70° west ( W. S. W. i W.) from the front light (is also the rear light for the north channel, west range), and the range guides in the westerly part of the channel. LAKE MICHIGAN. Frankfort Pierhead Reavon Light.— A fog-bell struck by machinery, a double and a single blow alternately at intervals of 20 seconds. The bell-tower is situated 8 feet in rear of light-tower. Kewaunee Pierhead Light.— The tubular-lantern pierhead light at Kewaunee, west shore of Lake Michigan, Wisconsin, was moved out to the outer end of the recently extended pier. The light is shown from an inclosed glazed end of a conduit extending from the light-tower a distance of 335 feet, the focal plane being 33 feet above lake level. CHICAOO LIGHT-STATION.— This station has been discontinued. CHICAGO HARROR LIOHT-STATION.— A flashing red and white light alternately every 10 seconds; 3d order, visible 16 miles; light 67^ feet above lake level; conical iron tower, painted red with black trimmings, standing on a rect- angular rock-faced masonry pier, inside of and near the south-east extremity of the outer breakwater. A coast and harbo'* light. Fog-signal building alongside of tower. During thick and foggy weather, a 10- inch steam whistle sounds blasts of 5 seconds' duration, followed by a silent interval of 2S seconds. i'.i"ii rnimii I ^.^..M.-.' ,^^M^mm*m ADDn;ONS AND CHANGES. Oray't Beef L|iroacIiing fn)m either direction wlien the draw is open, two green lights fiankcd by two wliltc lights in a line north and south. All those lights sIk 'ild be visible a distance of three miles in clear weather, both I up and down the Bay. Light on Pottem iMland.— A mast light has been temporarily established M)y the Government of Canada on the outer point of Potters Island, opposite Nigger [island, on the south shore of tlie Bii\ of tjumte, Province of Ontario. Woller'g Bay LlglltM^ Cliiiilge.— The range lights at Weller's Bay, on [the north shore of lake Ontario, have been moved, and the colors of the lights [changed. -T . -raryv; V*.r«.l.l.»W 11 ADDITIONS AMD 0HANOB8. The Front Uaht tower now stands on the shore of the bay, at the southwest end of the Carrying Place road, 843 feet N. i W. from its previous position. The light has been changed from fixed red to fixed white; it is elevated 26 feet above the level of the lake, and should be visible 10 miles in the line of range and tc the eastward until cut off by Bald Head and to the westward until cut off by Presqu'ile Point. Vlie Back Light tower has also been moved to a new site distant 608 feet N. E. i E. (N. 46° E. true), from the front one. The light has been changed from fixed white to fixed red, and is elevated 87 feet above the lake level ; it should be visible 7 miles in, and over a small arc on each side of the line of range. "Vessels approaching from the westward will not open this light until nearly reaching the alignment, as it is screened by trees. The two light buildings are unchanged in character. There is a bar with about 10 feet on it across the mouth of the Bay, at a distance of two nautical miles from the front light. The new alignment leads over this bar, at or near its narrowest part, in practically the best water, and also leads clear of the extremity of the spit off Bald Head, which is 8,300 feet inside the bar. Vessels entering can now pick up the alignment in tlie deep water of the lake, cross the bar on the alignment, N. E. f E., and keep it until the extremity of Bald Head spit is passed at a distance of about 150 feet,, when they will be in the deep water of the bay, inside of all r^angers. The tripod beacon marking the end of Bald Head spit, has been washed away, and will not be replaced at present. See page 45. Port Hope Pierhead Light, Change. —The light is now fixed white, instead of a fixed red and white. White, square wooden tower, 110 feet from the outer end of breakwater protecting the east side of the harbor. Light 40 feet above the level of the lake, visible 4 miles. , Formerly the tower stood 250 feet from the end of the pier, and within 60 feet of the end a red lantern light was exhibited. When the lighthouse was moved to its present position, the red lantern was dispensed with. Bee page 45. Fort Niagara Life-Saving Station.— A. Life-Saving Station has been established on tlie Military Reservation, east bank of Niagara River, near its mouth. LAKE ERIE. Long Point Light-Station.— A. fog horn operated by steam and Cv>m- pressed air has been established at Long Point, East End, Light Station. The horn will sound blasts of seven seconds' dunition, with silent intervals of 80 seconds. The fog alarm building is situated about 200 yards south of the lighthouse and about 400 yards from the shore. It is of wood painted white. The horn is elevated 20 fe«t above the level of, the lake and faces toward the east. See page 80. Conneaut Pierhead Light.— A. fixed white light is shown from a lens lantern suspended from a post 20 feet above lake level, on the outer end of the west pier at Conneaut. The lignt is visible, in clear weather, about 6 miles. For many years the harbor at Conneaut has been in ruins, virtually closed to commerce. Last season the P. B. & C. R. R. Co. temporarily repaired the piers and dredged a narrow channel between them. The Qovernnuiut has made an appropriation to improve the harbor. The present project is to relocate the chatmel, and dredge to a depth of 17 feet and construct new piers. See page 61. ' Cleveland Light Station, Dlioontlnued.— At the opening of Naviga- tion, 1898, the fixed white light, 8^ order, shown from the lighthouse on the hill, east side of Cleveland Hiirbor, will be discontinued. See page 63. TOLEDO H4RBOR, STRAIGHT CHANNEL THROUGH MAimiEE RA¥.— The channel is now open to navigation with a depth of 15^ tf^*. at the onlmry stage of water, throughout the eutire length, which is about 7i miles, and a wi(^h of 200 feet on the bottom, except iu one section outside the main crib-lights where it is only 175 feet and 1,800 feit of the Turnout 8ubdivi8ion^ the ADDITIONS AND CHANOB8. Ill width is only 170 feet. Tlie new channel is now wider and is thought to be better than the old one. Range Lights and Pile-Protection Work.— The main and east crib lights of the Mauinee Bay range, are situated in the axis of the channel, about 1,000 feet apart, direction about 8. W. by W. i W. from seaward. To prevent vessels from colliding with tlie cribs, a pile protection has l)een constructed. At present the Turn-out channel is on tlie north side of the main and east crib lights, but the project is to have a channel on either side of the lights. Buoys.— The New or Straight cliannel will be buoyed on the opening of. navi- gation, and the buoys in the Old channel will be removed. See page 72. Raisin Point.— The blacii 2d class can buoy marl^ing this point will be removed on tlie opening of navigation, 1893. Point Mouille.— The black 2d class can buoy marking this point, will be removed on the opening of navigation, 1893. DETROIT RIVER. Rois Blanc Range Itlghts.— The wooden structures from which the range liglits at the head olBois Blauc Isliuid were exhibited, liave been replaced by iron skeleton towers, triangular in plan, with oval slotted targets, or beacons at their tops. The character of the lights is the same as heretofore. The front tower is 70 feet high, painted white. The rear tower is 90 feet high, painted red ; it stands 450 feet 8. by W. i W. from the front tower. Bee page 88. ST. CLAIR RIVER. RIack River Shoal. — A black 8|)ar buoy in 15 feet of water on theeeterly edge of the Middle Ground off the moutii of Black iliver, I'ort Huron Tlie lower side of grain elevator 8. W. i S. Lower end of dock, upi)iT side of mouth of Black River N. W. by W. i W. 650 yards. Fort Gratiot lighlliouae N. by W. Fort Oratiot Range Light.— The rear light is now shown from a white pyramidal, open frame-work tower, with day mark 14 feet long and 10 feet wide. The focal plane of the light is 80 feet above the lake level. See page 97. LAKE HURON. Weather §ignnlH at Thunder Bay and Tfllddle iNiands.— On the opening of navigation, storm, cautionary and wind-direction .signals will be displayed from or near the Li^e-Saviug Stations (m the above named islands. Submarine cables will be laid from the islands to the mainland, and connected by wire with Alpena. ST. MARY'S RIVER. Detour Reef. — A 2d (ilass black can buoy in 18 ft of water, on the easterly side of the reef off Detour Point. Frying Pan Island llglitliouse N. i K. 2i miles, Tangent N. W. side of Druinmond Island N. N. E. * E. Detour lighthouse N. W. by W. i W. 1.800 yartis. The Following Described Lights Have Reen Established on St. Mary's River t a ^. .. " lllll p ll f r -' f IV ,a,uym p ADDITIONS AND ORANGES. Sweet'f Point.— A flxed white lens-lantern light, showing through 360° of arc, on a crib structure standing in 7 feet of water. Marks the turning point in the channel, and guides up the river to the northward and westward. Round Island Lli^ht.— A flxed white lens-lantern light, visible 4 miles. The focal plane is 40 feet above the lake level. Square, wooden tower, black lantern, rising in tlie front of a H story frame dwellinjr. The tower and dw^ellingare painted buffj with white trimmings, red roof, with background of trees 90 feet high on the E. side of Round Island. There are two flxed red sectors. The white sector lies between and is bounded radially by the two red sectors, and illuminates 180° of the horizon, extending from N. i E. through eastward to 8. i W. The sotitherly red sector covers, and its easterly edge guides clear of, tlie slioals to the southward and westward of Round Island. The red sector to the nortli marks the turning point at its intersection with Winter Point range, foot of Mud Lake. Pilot Island Range litghtt.— Two flxed red lantern lights. , Front light on a wiiite post 27 feet above the lake level, on Pilot Island. Rear light shown from an iron skeleton tower 43 feet above lake level, on pile cluster 1,600 feet 8. by vV. i W. from front light, visible 5^ miles. Tlie range intersects the Winter Point range at the can buoy in Mud Lake, and leads up to Sailors' Encampment Winter Point Range.— Two flx(>d white lens-lantern lights, showing through 270' of arc. The front light is shown from an uprlglit on a cluster of piles and the reii'" light from an iron skeleton tower on the southern end of Neebish Island. The range guides up to or down from the mid-channel buoy in Mud Lake. The lights are 1,500 feet apart, direction N. W. | W. Encampment Crib.— A flxed red tubular-lantern light, shown from an upright on a crib in 8 feet of water, off the southern end of Sailors' Encampment. Marks a slioal and the western side of the entrance to Sailors' Encampment passage. East Range, Darii Hole. — Two flxed red tubular-lantern lights, shown from uprights on tlxe upper end of Sailors' Encampment. The range intersects with Point of Woods Range to mark the turning point in the channel, and leads to or from an intersection with the channel marked by the West Range, Dark Hole. The lights are 281 feet apart, direction 8. by E. Went Range, Dark Hole.— Two fixed white lens-lantern lights, shown from uprights on the upper end of Sailors' Encan'pment. The range intersects with East Range, Dark Hole, to mark the turning point in the channel, and leads to or from abn^ast the second black spar buoy below Harwi»od'H Point. The lights are 760 feet^apart, direction 8 i E. Point of Woods Range. — Two flxed red tubular-lantern lights, shown from uprights on the eastern side of N^eebish Island. This range guides through tlie Dark Hole passage, and by its intersection with the West Range, Dark Hole, marks the turning point to or from the lower reach of Little Mud Lake. The lights are 296 feet apart, direction N. W. i W. Hen and Chickens (Neeblsli Island) Range.— Two flxed red tubular- lantern lights, shown from uprights. The front light is on the most easterly of the small group of islands known as the lien and Chickens, and the rear light is on the northeasterly shore of Neebish Island. 1,700 feet S. W. i W. from front light. The range guides through the passage between Sugar Island and St. Joseph Island (Canadian). HnrM^ood's Point Range Liglits.— Two flxed white tubular -lantern ligiits, shown from uprights. On 8. E. end of Sugar Island, the rear light is 725 feet N. J W. from the front one. The range intersects with Dark Hole West Range at Little Mud Lake buoy, black No. 1)1 to tiie intersection with Hen and Chickens Kange ofT Stribbling's Point. The N. W. point of St Joseph's Island. East Nccblsli Range.— Two flxed red luhular-lartern lights, on uprights on Sugar Island at the foot of East Neebish. Tlie rapge guides through the upper reach of East Neebish, and its intersection with Indian Point range marks the turning point. The lights are 2l)B feet apart, direction 8, ADDITIONS AND CHANGK8. intersection with n Mud Lake, and Indian Point Ranire. — Two fixed white tubular-lantern lights, on up- rights on Indian Point, Bast Neebi8h. The range guides through the lower reach of East Neebish and its intersection with East Neebish Range marlts the turning point. The lights are 274 feet apart, direction N. W. by N. Dncic Islnnd Range. — Two fixed red tubular-lantern lights, on uprights near the water's edge on the channel side of the lower end of Duck Island, above Bast Neebish. The range shows upstream towards the lower Lake George crib- light, and the range between these may be followetl from the crib down to abreast of the head of Duck Island. The lights are 663 feet apart, direction S. i E. Lower Eiaifce George. — A. fixed witite tubular-lantern light, on an upright rising from a crib 50 .feet from the east side of the lower end of the main Lake George Channel. Marks the lower end of channel. middle lfe. The lights are TM feet apart, direction N, K. by K. Partridge Point Range.— Two fixed red tubular lantern lights, on up rights on the northwestern side of Sugar Island. The range Intersects with Farmers fldgcs range to mark the turning point in the channel abreast of Brusauts Point. The lights are 600 feet apart, direction S. by W. f W. mamstmmmmfi VI ADDITIONS AND 0HAN0E8. Topiail Island Banffe.--Two fixed red tubular-lanterD lights on uprights on the northwest side of Sugar Island. The range intersects with Sault Range to lead clear of the shoal extending southward from Topsail Island, and also intersects with Farmers Ridges range at the turning point in the cha'^nel. NoTK.— One lij^ht serves for the front ligbt of the TopsaU Island ^-an^e, and the rear light of Partridge Point ran^e. Baylleld Rock Rnn^e.— Two fixed white tabular-lantern lights, on up- rights on the northwestern side of Sugar Island. The range leads past Bayfield Rock " to the lower end of the canal, intersecting with Sault range to mark the channel clear of Topsail Island shoal. The lights are 945 feet apart, direction E. S. E | E. Sault Range.— Two fixed red tubular-lantern lights, on uprights on shore below the city of Sault Ste. Marie. Intersects w'th Bayfield Rock range to mark the channel to intersection of Topsail Island range, and also marks the turuing point in the channel on the Bayfield Rock range leading uo to the lowci entrance to the canal. The front light is 160 feet from the sh )re,- about one .nile below the city; the rear light is on the shore 535 feet W. by S. from the front one. . STRAITS OF MACKINAC. OLD IMACKINAC POINT LIGHT ST4TIOM.- Afiashing red light every 10 seconds, ith order, visible 15^ miles. Buff-brick tower forming the N. W. corner of Keeper's dwelling which is ')u£E brick with red roof. It stands 90 feet to the westward and a little in the rear of the fog-signal, on Old Mackinaj Point. The light is visible from N. W. i W. through the northward to E. i S. The focal plane is 60 feet above the level of the lake. Cheboygan liglithouse S E. by E. i E. 16t miles. McGul pin's Point lighthouse W. 2^ miles. St. Helena lighthouse N. W. | W. 8 miles. See page 161. 'WAIJGOSHANCJE LIC HT STATION, CHANGE.— The color of the tower, dwelling and fog-signal has been changed from a dull brown to a bright red and white, painted in alternate horizontal bands in such a way that the band imme- diately under the lantern goJlery is white, and that lower down the band of red covers the roof of the dwelling, tower and fog-signal house below the edge of the roof white. The first band immediately under the gallery is 8 feet wide, painted white; the second band 8 feet wide, painted red; the tliird band 9 feet wide, painted white, and the fourth band 11 feet wide, painted red, and will cover the roof of the dwelling. The gallery deck and lantern will remain black as heretofore. See page 162. Waugoshauce Sixteen-Foot Shoal.— A 2d class black nun buoy in 28 feet of water, about 15 yards N. W. of a small shoal of gravel and boulders, recently located about 900 yards W. f 8. of the Waugoshacce Eigh teen-Foot Shoal, the least depth of water over which is 15 feet 10 inches. St. Helena Lighthouse E. N. E i E. 12i miles; Waugoshance Lighthouse, S. E. by S 1^ miles; Gray's Reef Light-Vessel, W. S. W. I W. 4 miles; White Shoal Lieht-Vessel N. W. by N. 2| miles. The buoy is on a line between Waugoshance Lighthouse and the White Shoal Light- Vessel and a little northerly of a line between St. Helena Lighthouse and Gray's Reef Light-Vessel, which ranges should be useful in turning this buoy at night. Waugoshance Eighteen-Foot Shoal.- black horizontal stripes, has been discontinued. Beaver Island Channel.- A black spar buoy in 15 feel of water, about 1,100 yards N. N. E. f E. from the N. E. point of Beaver Islaud. The shoal is nearly dry about 20 vards to the southward and westward of the buoy, the N. W. point of island W. ^ S. This channel is good at the present stage of water for a draft of 18^ feet. The shoalest water extends from N. E. of Beaver Island through the 17-foot patch on the chart, apparently all the way across to <^jarden Islaml. There arc 6 fathoms close to the buoy. Whiskey Island Shoal.— A red spar buoy in 17 feet of water, on the extreme south point of the slioal, lying to tiie southward and westward of Whiskey Island, N. W. point of Beaver Island 8. E. by E., N. W. point of Trout Island W. 8. W. i W. -The 2d class nun buoy, red and ADDITIONS AMD 0HANOE8. yu LAKE MICHIGAN. nd the rear light of of of the dwelling. WHITE RITER L.I0HT-8TATI01V, CHATVOE.— This light has been changed from a fixed white light varied by a red flash every minute, to a fixed white light varied by a red flash every 40 seconds. See page 170. GRAND H4VEN LIGHT-STATIOW, CHANGE.-This light has been changed from a fixed white light varied by a white flash every ninety seconds, to a fixed white light varied by a white flash every minute See page 171. Kalamazoo Pierhead Reacon-Llslit, Change.— This light has been discoL'inued as a pierhead light, and re established without change of charac- teristic as a coast light in tlie old light-tower surm(^inting the Keeper's dwelling, on the N. side of the mouth of the Kalamazoo river. The focal plane is 58 feet above the lake level and the light is visible in clear weather 14f miles. See page 178. St. Joseph Pierhead Range Ught.— The fixed red tubular range light, which was discontinued in 1891. owing to the shifting of the channel over the outer bar, has been re-established on a post 35 feet high, on the outer end of the N. pier. The light should be visible on a clear night 2 or 8 miles and with the St Joseph Pierhead Beacon-Light forms a range, showing the direction of the pier, and the course for entering the harbor. See page 173, . ST. JOSEPH LIGHT-STATION, CHANGE.— The light on the blufiE has been changed from fixed white, varied by a white flash every ninety seconds, to fixed .vhite varied by a white flash every 45 seconds. The order of the light has not been changed. See page 173. St. JoHeph Channel Buoy, Change.— The black spar buoy that formerly marked the north side of the channel, has been removed, and a red spar buoy placed in 12 feet of water on the northwest point of the shoal, on the south side of channel. See page 176. Chicago Onter Breakwater Light, Change.— The fixed white lens- lantern on the N. W. end of the outer breakwater, has been removed to the Emer- gency Intake Water Works crib, an extensiou northwesterly of the outer break- water. The focal piane of the iight is now 45 feet above the level of the lake. Light shown from a post attached to S. E. side of building on crib, rising 8 feet above house. See page 179. KENOSHA, OR SOUTHPORT LIGHT-STATION, CHANGE. This light has been changed from a fixed white light varied by a white flash every 90 seconds, to a fixed white light varied by a white flash every 45 seconds. See page 180. MILWAUKEE LIGHT-STATION, CHANGE.— This light has f been changed from a fixed white light, varied by a white flash every two minutes, to a fixed white light varied by a white flash every 46 seconds. See page 184. Sheboygan Pierhead Range Light.— A flxed red lens-lantern range ■light hiis been established on a post 22 feet high on the oiiter end of the North Pier. tThe light should be visible in clear weather 2 or 3 miles, and with the Pierhead iBeacon light forms a range showing the direction of the piers and the course for [entering the harbor. See page 184. AHNAPEE PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A fixed red lens lantern light, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame tower, square in plan, upper part enclosed. Near the outer end of north pier, at the entrance to Ahnapec harbor. The focal plane is 37 feet above the lake level. See page 187. Ahnapee Pierhead Rnnge Light.— A fixed red lens-lantern range light visible 2 to 3 miles in clear weather. On a post 22 feet high on the outer ; end of the north pier. This light, with the Pierhead Beacon light, foras a range 'showing the direction of the pier and the course for entering the harbot. A Life I Saving Station has been established in this harbor. Poverty Island Passage, Change of Buoys.— The black spar buoy [on Gravelly Island 17-foot shoal, has been removed, and a black second-class can buoy put in its place. Ppverty Island light E. by 8. | S. 8^ miles. See page 191. ^^•"•ffWlP Vlll ADDITIONS AMD CHANGES. PoTertir Island Shoal. — The black and red horizontal stripes spar buoy on Poverty Island 15-foot shoal has been removed. A red second-class can buoy has been placed in 20 feet of water, marks a narrow rocky ledge with 23 feet of water over it. extending about 500 yards S. by E. from this buoy. Poverty Island light S. E. byE. I E., 2f miles. Gravelly Island S. W. f 8., H miles. SCirAVr ISLAND light-station^.— a fixed red light varied by a red flash every 15 seconds, 4th order, visible 15J miles. Red brick tower 48 feet hip'\. square at base, and octagonal above, and forming the N. W. corner of red brick dwelling with red roof. On the northerly end of Squaw Island, the most north- erly of the Beaver Island group. The light illuminates the entire horizon. The focal plane is 60 feet above the lake level. During thiclc or foggy weather a 10-inch steam whistle sounds blasts of 5 seconds' duration, separat':d by alternate silent inter- vals of 20 and 40 seconds. The log-signal house stands about 200 feet N. by IE. from the light cower, it is a red brick structure with corrugated iron roof painted brown. A coast light marks the turning point into Lake Michigan; Garden Island N. ; Tangent, E. bv 8. i 8. 3i miles. Seu'. Choix Pointe lighthon:^?, W. by N. | N. 16i miles; Scott's Point N. W. by N. i N. 9^ miles. See pa^'- itfl. Squsaur Island '^hoal.— Black, 2d-class nun buoy in 28 feet of water. Marks the northerly end of shoal making off from th*' JT. E. end of Squaw Island; Squaw Island lighthouse 8 by W. i W. 1| miles; Garden Island shoal buoy E. |. S. 3|- miles; Lansing buoy N. Si miles. See page 191. Lansing Shoal. — A red 2d-c]ass nun buoy in 28 feet of water. Marks the S. E. end of a shoal N. f E. from Squaw Island light. There is a spot with 19^ feet 700 yards N. W. f W. and another with 23 feet 1500 yards W. f N. from this buoy. Seul Choix Pointe lighthouse, W. i N. 16^ miles; Squaw Island lighthouse, 8. ^ W. 4i miles; Squaw Island buoy, 8. 3^ miles; Simmons Heef liglit-vessel E. 17^ miles. This buoy is intended to cover an extensive shoal. Garden Island Shoal. — A red and black rizontal striped spar buoy in 15 feet of water. Stands in the center of small shoal .^T. from Garden Island; Squaw Island buoy W. f N. 3f miles; W. end of Garden Island S. S. W. i W. 21 miles. See page 191. GREEN BAY. Sherwood's Point Ltght-Statlon.— A fog bell tower has recently been erected on Sherwood's Point, the south side of tlie entrance to Sturgeon Bay from Green Bay, from which a bell is sounded in thick and foggy weather. The bell is struck by muciiinery a single blow evci ' 12 seconds. The tower is a square pyra- midal structure. 25 feet higli, the lower part painted white, upper part buflF, roof bright red. It is situated 13 feet N. N. E. of tlie light tower. CHANGE IN PILOT RULES. At a meeting of the Board of Supervising Inspectors held in Washington, D. C. January 3l8t, 1893, Section 8 of Pilot Rules was changed so as to read as follows": (For rules see page 353). 1st. When steamers are running in the same direction, and the pilot of a steamer which is nstern shall desire to puss on tlie right or starbvoard hahd of the stranier ahead, ho sliall give one sliort blast of the steam whistle, as a signal of such denlre and intention, and shall put his lielrn to port, or if he shall desire to pass on th( left or port side of the steamer aheiid, lie shall give two short blasts of the steam whistle as a signal of such desire and intention, and shall put his helm to starboard. And the pilot of the steamer ahead shall answer by the same signals, or if he does not think it sale for the stcunicr astern to attempt to pass at that point, he shall immediately signify the same by giving several short and rapid blasts of the steam whistle, aiid under no circumstances shall the steamer astern attempt to pass the steamer ahead until such time as they have reached a point whei-e it can be safely ADDITIONS AND OHANOB8. IZ al Btripes spar buoy l-cla88 can buoy has th 23 feet of water rerty Island light 8. id light varied br a brick tower 48 feet N. W. comer of red ind, the most north- >ntire horizon. The gy weather a 10-inch iltemate silent inter- 200 feet N. bjr E. id iron roof painted S&v; Garden Island ovze, W. by N. 4 N. 91. a 23 feet of water, d of Squaw Island; i shoal buoy E. |. S. )f water. Marks the 9 a spot with 19i feet f N. from this buoy. I lighthouse, 8. i W . -vessel E. 17i miles. striped spar buoy in Jarden Island; Squaw S. W. i W. 21 miles. yrer has recently been Sturgeon Bay from weather. The bell is rer is a square pyra- pper part buff, roof done, when said steamer ahead shall signify her willingness by blowing the proper signals. The boat ahead shall in no case attempt to cross the bow or crowd upon -,he course of the passing steamer. 2d. That in the navigable channels of the Great Lakes and their tributary and connecting waters less than 500 feet in width, no steam vessel shall pass another going in the same direction, unless the steam vessel ahead be (Hsabled and signify her willingness that the steam vessel astern shall pass, when the steam vessel astern may pass at a rate of speed not exceeding five miles per hour. 8d. And when steam vessels, running in opposite directions, are about to meet in such channels, both such vessels shall be slowed down to a speed not exceeding tiVe miles per hour. 4th. That in such channels the descending steam vessel shall have the rifht of way. The pilot of such descending steamer shall signify his desire and iotentfon by giving the proper signal before the steamers have arrived at a distance of one^haff mile of each other. This rale when approved to take effect May 1, 1893. WATER TABLES. Showing in feet and decimals the mean elevation of the surface of Lake Huron and Lake Michigan, above the mean tide at New York,- from observations made at Port Austin and Sand Beach. The high water of 1838 is 584.84 feet above mean tide ai mew lorK ^jnj: Date. May. June. July. August. September. October. November. 1891 1892 580.45 579.83 580.40 580.16 580.43 580.45 580.33 580.53 580.14 580.36 579.77 580.15 579.46 579.82 By will be 1 subtracting Pound to CO l the figure rrespond w 8 iu the above table 1 ith the figures in the U 'or the year ible for tha 1891, from 534.34, it t year on page 284. TABLE showing in feet and decimals the mean elevation of the surface of Lake iBuperior, above mean tide at New York City, from observations made above the locks Rt St. Mary's Falls Canal: • in Washington, D. C. ,s to read as follows : and the pilot of a tarbviard hahd of the e, as a signal of such hall desire to pass on )rt blasts of the steam is helm to starboard, ignals, or if he does that point, he shall . blasts of the steam •n attempt to pass the hei-e it can be safely Date. May. June. July. AugruBt. September. October. November. 1891 1892 t—. — 601.281 600.940 601 180 601.300 601.292 601.440 601.304 601.451 601.238 601.509 601.294 601.400 601.185 600.123 N ,-! i if u The square flags indicate the character of the storm, whether moderate or severe. MODERATE STORM. SEVERE STORM. Northwesterly winds. Northeasterly winds. Northwesterly winds. Northeasterly winds. Southwesterly winds. Southeasterly winds. Southwesterly \«inds. Southeasterly winds. A red flag with a white center indicates that the winds expected will not lie so severe, but well-found, seaworthy vessels can meet them without ('anger. A red flag with a black center indicates that the storm is expected t.> be of marked violence. The pennants displayed with the flags indicate the direction of the wind ; red, easterly (from northeast to south) ; white, westerly (from southw^^st to north). The pennant above the flag indicates that the wind is expected to blow from the northerly quadrant ; below, from the southerly quadrant. Ry ni^ht n red light will indicate easterly winds, and a white light above a red light will indicate westerly winds. Hoisting signals for each quadrant is an opinion only, offered to aid the public The " Information Signal" consists of a red pennant of the same dimensions as the red and white pennants (direction .signals), and when displayed indicates that the local observer has received information from the central oflice of a storm covering a limited area, dangerous only for ve.ssels about to sail to certain points. The signal will serve as a notification to shipma.stcrs that the necessary information will be given them upon application to the local observer. MARK W. HARRINGTON, Cfiief of Weather Bureau. Washington, D. C, August 23, 1891. Note —These signals, principally for the information of maritime inten!Sts. are distinct from the system of weather, temperature and rain signals displayed throughout the country. Information si^aaL ■ \l il STORl SIQNAL CODE AS EIPLOTED AT CANADIAN LAKE STATIONS. <>(! ■ ll ' I NIGHT 1 NSlor;^ NIGHT ¥ N^Zor4 STATIONS. N.^Zoj4 Directions to Mariners, with Beference to Canadian Storm Warnings issued for the Lakes. Fig. No. 1.— This signal, if displayed on Lakes Superior, Erie or Ontario indicates " moderate gale is expected, at first from an Easterly direction." If displayed on Lake Huron or Georgian Bay, indicat*« a " moderate gale is expected, at first from a Southerly direction." Fig. No. 2. — If displayed on Lakes Superior, Erie or Ontario, indicates " moderate gale is expected, at first from a Westerly direction." If displayed on Lake Huron or Georgian Bay, indicates " moderate gale is expected, at first from a Northerly direction." Fig. No. 3. — If displayed on Lakes Superior, Erie or Ontario, indicates that a " heavy gale is expected, at first from an Easterly direction." If displayed on Lake Huron or Georgian Bay, indicates "heavy gale is expected, at first from a Southerly direction." Fig. No. 4. — If displayed on Lakes Superior, Erie or Ontario, indicates "heavy gale is expected, at first from u Westerly direction." If displayed on Lake Huron or Georgian Bay, indicates " heavy gale is expected, ai first from a Northerly direction." The Cone, when hoisted by itself, indicates that it is expected that the wind will attain a velocity of 25 miles an hour, but will not exceed 35 miles, and it is not intended that an ordinary well found vessel should stay in port, but simply as a warning to mariners that strong winds are expected from the quarter indicated. The Drum will always be hoisted when the velocity of the wind is expected to exceed 35 miles an hour. The night signal corresponding to Nos. 1 and 3 is two lanterns hang- ing perpend icithtrly. Niglit signal corresponding to Nos. 2 and 4 is two lanterns hanging horizontally. Note I.— Mariners will be able to obtain further information from Storm Signal Agents, or by consulting the daily probabilities. Note II.— Mariners must always bear in mind that the storm signals are merely cautionary, and do not necessarily mean that a storm will occur at the place where the signal is displayed, but that one is expected either there or within such a distance that vessels leaving port would be liable to be caught in it. Note III.— October and November are the months in which severe storms most frequently occur on the Lakes. In these fall storms on Lakes Erie and Ontario, the wind almost invariably commences at the S. E., works round through Honth to West and North-West, the time of the hardest blow being usually when the barometer begins to rise as the wind gets around to the West. On Lake Huron and the Georgian Bay, the wind tliough for the most part changing as on the Lower Lakes— not unfrequenily changes with great suddenness, chopping after a lull from S. 8. K. to N. W., and blowing hardest, as a rule, from the N. W. CANADIAN STORM SIGNAL STATIONS. KINGSTON, PI U ION, DK8ERONT0. COBOUHG, PORT HUPB, TORONTO, PUKT CRKDIT, OAKVILLE, HAMILTON, PORT UALHOUSIE, PORT UOLUORNE, PORT DOVER, PORT BURWELL. PORT 8TANLEY, PORT PELfiE ISLAND, AMHERSTBURO, HARNIA, BAYFIELD, QOUERIOH, KINCARDINE, SAUGEEN, ARTHUR. TOBERMORY. PRESyUE ISLE. OWEN SOUND, COLLING WOOD, MIDLAND. PERRY SOUND. 8AULT STE. MARIE, fl ■•I .\ ! Explanation of the Signals adopted by the United States Weather Bureau. 1. The Weather Bureau furnishes, when practicable, for the benefit of the general public and those interests dependent to a greater or less extent upon weather coiidi> tions, the "Forecasts," which are prepared at this office daily, at 10 a ra. and 10 p.m., for the following daj. These weather forecasts are telegraphed to observers at stations of the Weather Bureau, railway officials, and many others, and are so worded as to be readily communicated to the public by means of flags or steam whistles. The flags adopted for this purpose are five in number, and of the form and dimensions indicated below Explanation of Flag Signals. No 4. No. 6. Black TriangaUr White Flait with BUek Flag. Square In Centre. No. 8. No. 1. No. 8. White and Blue White Flag. Bine Flag. Flag. P M > t*] Clear or f«lr Rain or Loeal Baini. Temperatnre Cold Ware. weather. Snow. slguaU Number 1, white flag, six feet square, indicates clear or fair weather. Number 3, blue flag, six feet square, indicates rain or snow. Number 3, white and blue flag (parallel bars of white and blue), six feet square, indicates that local rains or showers will occur, and that the rainfall will not be general. Number 4, black trlanjrular flag, four feet at the base and six feet in length, always refers to temperature; when placed ai)ove numbers 1, 3 or 8, it indicates warmer weather; when placed lielow numbers 1, 2 or 3, it indic-ates colder weather; when not displayed, the indications are that the temperature will remain stationary, or that the change in temperatu.o will not vary more than four degrees from the the temperature of the same hour of the preceding day from March to October, inclusive, and not more than six degrees for the remaining months of the year. Number 5, white flag, six feet square, with black square in centre, indicates the approach of & sudden and decided fall in tempera- ture. This signal is not to be displayed unless it is expected that the temperature will fall to forty-two degrees or lower, and is usually ordered at least twenty-four hours in advance of the cold wave. When number 5 is displayed, number 4 is always omitted Alpena. Buffalo. Chicago Clevbland, Detuoit. Ahnepeb. Asiir-AND. AsirrAnuLA. Bay City. Baykif-ld. CAl'Ifi ViNCICNT. Cii.vni.KVOix. ClIAIlIiOTTB. Chichoygak. DULUTH. EllIE. Guand Haven. GiticiiN Bay. Manistee. DUNKIUK East Tawas. escanaba. Faiii Haven. FllANKFOIlT. Glionn Haven. Kkewaunbb. Kenosha. SX-A.TIOITS- Mauquettb. MiLWAUKEB. OSWEOO. Pout Hubon. Rochester. Sault Stb. Marib. Sandusky. Toledo. ST-A.TI01SrS. LUDINOTON. MACKfNAO City. Manitowoo. Menomineb. MiJsiiicaoN. Oscoda. PETOHIiEY. Racinb. Sand Beach. SlIEBOXGAN. SoDus Point. South Haven. St. Joseph. Sturgeon Bay. ToNA WANDA, White Pish 1'oint, lie United SCOTT'S 3t of the general I weather coiidi" m. and 10 p.m., to observers at id are so worded steam whistles, land dimensions No. 6. te FInic nith Blaek quurein Centre, Cold Ware. ler. Number 3, e and blue flag rains or showers black trianjrular iperature; when n placed Itelow the indications in temperatuio lie same hour of lian six degrees set square, with fall in tempcra- the temperature ast twenty-four , number 4 is BSTBR, Stb, Maris. SKY. Bio. Bbaob. >YOAN, Point. IIavkn. iBEIMI. KON Bay, kVANDA, Fl8U I'OINT. NEW COAST PILOT FOR THE LAKES, CONTAININa A aoMrLBTB LUT OV ALL IBM U0 M Liilit-Eoim, Foi Sipals anil Boop, ON BOTH THE AMERICAN AND CANADIAN BHORLJi, WITH A FULL UlSORiPnON OV ALL THI HARBORS AND BREAKWATERS COMPLETED AND IN PROGRESS, WITH DIRECTIONS FOR ENTERING THEM. A LIST OP ALL THE LIFE SAVING STATIONS, AND OTHER USEFUL INt'ORMATlON; Coiirses(C9rrecteilforMapetic7ariationoftlieCoiiipass),Di!!taices And Sailing Direotiont for all Lakea and BiTari, and Direotioni for Oorrectlng Oonrsei and Baaringt for Magnotio Variation and Deviation of the Oompaii. WITH TABLES OF DISTANCES FOB EAOE OF THE LAKES. Coinplled from the most reliable louroee, and from perBon&l notes and obierratloui ot orer fori> jreart experience on the lAkei. By GEORGE SCOTT, Detroit, Michigan, • Licensed Pilot of all the Lakes. FOURTH EDITION. REVISED AND ENLAItOED, WITH MAPS, DIAGRAMS AND ILLUBTIUTIU.>C>. DETROIT: THE mil PRESS PRINTINO OOMPANV. 18S9. l'» Entered according to Act of CouRress. in the year 1S80, By GEORGE SCOTT. In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. I). C. . • V' /\ -/ ^ 3 , .1] 1 CONTENTS. Variation of the Oompasa, 8, 4. To correct a ComiMwa course for Tarlatlon, 4. To correct a Oompasa bearing for Tariation, 4. Obart of magnAtio variation Cor the lakes, 6. To shape a Oompass course oorrectad for Tarlauon, •. Deviation of the Compass on iron and steel ships, 6. The magnet, 6. OompMS needle, 6. Semicircular deviation of the compass, 7, 8. To correct a compass for semicircular devia- tion by two magnets, 8, 9. Suadrantal deviation, 9. eellng error, 10. Deviation of the C!ompasa on wooden ships, 10. Directions for ascertaining the deviation of the Compass bv swinging the ship, 10, 11. Directions for correollog a Compass course for deviation, 18. To correct Compass bearings for deviation, 19. To shape a Compass course corrected for deviation, 18. To correct a Compass course at once for both deviation and variation, 14. To shape a Compass course corrected at once for both deviation and variation, 14. Directions for passing buoys, 17. Directions for marking the hand, and deep sea lead line, 18. ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. Lights, bhoys, sailing directions, etc., 91 to 89. LAKE ONTARIO. Lights, buoys, harbors, etc., on the east and south shores, 29 to 86. Oompaas courses and distances on the south shore, 86 to 40. Compass bearlnKS and distances from lights on the south shore to lights on the north shore, 41. Magnetic declinations, 41. Lights, buoys, harbors, etc., on the north shore, 42 to 49. Compass courses and distances on the north shore, 49 to 6a. NIAGARA RIVER. Lights, buoys, and sailing directions above the Palls, OS to 66. LAKE ERIE. Lights, buoys, harbors, etc., on the south shore, 66 to 78. Oompaas courses and distances on south shore, 78 to 79. Magnetic declinations, 79. Lignts, buuys, harbors, etc., on the north shore, 79 to H8. CompasH couraea and distanoea on the north shore, 88 to 80. Buoys at the mouth of and in Detroit river, 85 to 87. DETROIT RIVER Lights, buoys, and sailing dhrections, 88 to M. LAKE ST. OLAm. Lights, buoys, courses and distance!, eto., on both shores, 99, 98. ST. CLAIR FLATS. Lights, buoys, etc., 98, 94. ST. CLAIR RIVBBi Lights, buoys, etc., 94 to 97. LAKE HURON. Lights, buoys, harbors, etc., on the Amarlean shore, 97 to 108. Compass courses and distances on tha Ameri- can shore, 106 to 112. Magnetic deollnatlnrs, 118. Lights, buoys, harbors, etc., on the Canadian shore, 118 to 116. Compass courses and distances on the Cana- dian shore, 117 to 119. GEORGIAN BAY AND NORTH CHANNEL. Lights, buoys, harbors, and sailing diraotiona, 190 to 159. Compaaa courses and distanoea, 18S to UT. STRAITS OF MACKINAa Lights, buoys, harboni, etc., 168 to 164. Compass courses and distances, 188 to Ml. LAKE MICHIGAN. Lights, buoys, har^ ;rs, etc., on the east shon. 164 to 176. Lights, buoys, harbors, etc., on the west shon. 176 to 191. Oompaas courses and distances on both shorsa. 908 to 318 ^ Magnetic declinations, 818. GREEN BAT. Lights, buova, harbors, etc., 191 to 198. Counies und distances, SIS to 917. Magnetto deolluatlons, 917. [1] STRAITS OF ST. MART. Lights, buoys, etc., 919 to 989. LAKB SUPERIOR. Lights, buojra, harbors, etc., on the American shore, ft<9 to )289. Lights, buoys, harbora, etc., on Isle Rovale and Passage Island, 940, 941. Courses and distances on both shores, 841 tc M9. Magnetic declinations, 949. Llgbta on the Canadian shore, 900, MU. CONTEKT8. DIAGRAMS AND ILLUSTRATIONS. storm, cautionary, and wind direction signals. Weather sienalB- Magnetic chart, 6. Oswego breakwater, 82. Toroi'to harbor, 45. Buffalo brealcwater, 66. Erie harbor Preaque isle, 59. Cleveland breakwat«>r, 62. Lime-kiln Crossing cut, 80. Sand Beach breaitwaier, 100. Ooderich harbor, 114. Grand Hj.Ten. Mich.. ITS. St. Joseph harbor, 174. Michigan City breakwater, 175. Calumet ($ouUi Gbloago) harbor, 177. Chicago breakwater and harbor, 179. Racine harbor, 181. Milwauk*'e breakwater, 188. Sturgeon Bay Ship canal, 188. Grand Marafs, Mich., 224. Aflhiand, Chaquamegon bay, 234. Superior Cify, entrance to tit. Louis river, 990. Duiuth harbor, 287. Two Harbors (Agate bay), 988. Grand Marals, Minn., 9^. Diagrams to illustrate the rtmning lights, 256, 257.258. Life Saving Service, diagramfl to illustrate t)ie manner of working the Breeches-buoy and Life-car, 8«7, 268. K' TABLES. ' For registering bearings wbsn bwlngin^ ship, Deviation of the standard Compasn, 12. For converting points of the Compnss and their fractional parts into degrees, 15, 16. Of uistances objecrg can be seen at sea, 17 For converting Statute miles into Niiii'iiKht8, iliiiKraiua, and the rule of the road lit sen, !25.5 to 2b^. RuleN relating to fog signals for steamers, sail vuHselH, and tow boats, 2tii/. Steering and sailing rules, '..>60, 261, 262. GencraT rule'* for steamsbipa meeting and cros8.ng. -Mi, 263. The leud, 263. Code of engine signals, 263, 264. Nautical and statute miles, 264. < Life Having Hervice, 265 to 271. Treatment of frost-bites, 271, 272. To measure dl-^tances by sound, 879. To d> terinine the distanoe uf an object on shore, when ruuulug along the land, V^d, The barometer, 278. 274. The thertnometer, 274. Instrumental and other local indications of a^ proaching storms, 275, V7ii. Proverbs relating to clouds /376, 277, 278. Proverbs relating to the moon, 278, 279. Proverbs relating to rain, 2.9, 2H0. Proverbs relating to rainbow. 280. Proverbs relating to stars and meteors, 280, 881. Proverbs relatiuK to the sun, 281. SSi. St Cla>r Flats Ship-canal, 2»2, tttM. St. Mary's Falls Khlp-canai, 28;). Qreniesr depth of water on the lakes, 283. Area of the lakes, and their height above tb« •tta,284. -^^ "M:- PREFACE. ktlons of ap- In presenting the Fourth Edition of Scott's New^ Coast Pilot to the pnbiio, the author desires to say that the former Editions Lave been carefully revised and corrected and many additions made. The publication of a New Edition of the Coast Pilot at this time is rendered necessary by the many changes that have taken place in the Aids to Navigation and the improvements made to the Rivers and Harbors within the last two years, or since the last Edition of the Coast Pilot was published. Among the many new Aids to Navigation that have been established, and changes made during the last year may be mentioned the lights on Devil island, Two Harbors, Seul Choiz pointe, Chicago breakwater. Windmill Point ranges, and Grosse Isle ranges ; the light-vessels on Simmon's reef, White shoals, and Gray's reefs ; and the change in the character of tb& lights on Point Betsey, Porte des Morts, Saginaw river, Tawas, and Portage river, Lake Superior. Fog-signals on Devil island. Two Harbors, Lapoint, and Point Betsey ; and changes at Evanston and Mississagua straits (Canadian) ; buoys at Squaw island. Garden island, at the north end of Lake Michigan, and in the Strawberry passage. Green Bay ; and the removal of the iron buoys on Simmon's reef. White shoals, and Gray's reefs, and change from spar buoys to iron buoys o'^ 'Vienna and Waugoshance shoals. The straight channel in Maumee Jay has been out from the Bay ranger into the mouth of the river. Many lights have been established by the Canadian Government, and the canal con- necting the Bay of Qumte with Presque Isle bay is completed — all of which nave been carefully noted. The St. Mary's River range lights and beacons are now in the course of construction, and it is thought they will be in operation before the close of the season. A little map of Port Arthur and Fort William, and the Storm Signal Code, as employed at Canadian Lake Stations, with directions to mariners with reference to their use, has been introduced. A new Magnetic Chart for the year 1890, showing the lines of equal magnetic declinations (called Isogonic lines), is given. This chart shows the variation of the compass in the vicinity of the Lakes, and it is very important when we consider that all the courses taken from the charts of the Lake Survey, and the courses and bearings given in the U. S. Lighthouse and Buoy list)* are true, and require to be corrected for variation before being used. The Depth of Water given in the harbors are not always to be relied on, owing partly to the fluctuations of the water surface of the Lakts, but more particularly lo the formation of sand bars between or in advance of the piers. The only remedy for these obstructions is the extension of the piers and annual dredging. It is confidently believed that the "Coast Pilot" is now much improved, and will be of service to Vessel Masters as a ready reference. Bad mistakes are frequently made, not from a want of knowledge on the subject, but from a temporary incorrectness of thought ; this is fre- quently the case in applying variation, and deviation, in correcting com- pass errors. It will aho be of service to those who are not gifted with retentive memories. The work is particularly recommend to the young sailor who desires to succeed in his calling, who by carefully studying the charts, and the "Coast Pilot," can acquire a knowledge of the Lakes in a short time, what others have been years learning by personal observation. mmmm'mm v^ \ VABIATION OF THE COMPASS. VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. The True Meridian. — A line drawn direct from the north pole to the south pole, cutting the equator at right angles, is a true meridian. The Magnetic Meridian. — The direction taken by the north end of a freely suspended magnet (compass needle) is the magnetic meridian. The Magnetic Equator. — The term magnetic equator is applied to those places where the needle has no inclination or dip, but rests in a horizontal direction. The line of no dip (magnetic equator) nearly coin- cides with the geographical equator; proceeding north ward the north end of the needle is drawn downward at an increasing angle, called the dip^ until it becomes vertical; but proceeding southward the south end of the needle dips in the same manner. The lines of equal dip are nearly par- allel. The Magnetic Pole. — The term magnetic pole is generally applied to those positions on the earth's surface where the horizontal force disappears and a freely suspended needle becomes vertical. VariatioUc — The angle included between the true meridian and the magnetic meridian is called the variation of the compass. The error from the variation of the compass being entirely independent of the ship, affects every point of the compass to the same extent. This angle varies in different localities, and there is a small annual change; the easterly variation is decreasing, and the westerly variation is increasing at the rate of from 3' to 5' annually. A magnetic chart is given in this work showing the lines of equal variation, and tables of magnetic declinations, showing the variation of the compass at the most important points on each of the great lakes. These tables have been carefully selected from a chart and table of magnetic declinations in Professional Papers, Corps of Engineers, U. S. Lake Survey, corrected to the year 1890. TO CORRECT A COMPASS COURSE FOR VARIA- TION. Case I. — In this case, suppose the course has been steered and it ia desired to find the true course made good. If the Variation is Easterly^ that is if the north point of the compass is drawn to the eastward, or right hand, allow it to the right. If the variation is westerly, that is if the north point of the compass ia drawn to the westward or left hand, allow it to the left. Note. — AH courses and bearings given on the charts of the Lake Survey are True, and require to be corrected for variation and deviation where it exists. Example 1. The compass course steered E. by S. J S. or S. 73" 1' E. with variation 6* 37' E. gives the true or chart course 8. 67** 30' E. or £. S. Di. ExAMPLB 2. The compass course steered S. W. by W. or S. 56^ 15' W. with variation 4° W. gives the true or chart course S. 62° 16' W. or S. W. f W. nearly. ExAMPLB 3. The compass course steered N. E. or N. 46** E. with variation 8*» 26' E. gives the true or chart course N. 53" 26' E. or N. E. ' > ' T'E. E. or i6o 16' W. or with N. E. 6 VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. TO CORRTJOT A COMPASS BEARING FOR VARIA- TION. The oorreotion is precisely the same as in Case L for oorreoting a compass course for variation. EzAMPLK 1. An object bears S. E. or S. 46** E. the variation is 6° 37' W. the true bearing will ha S. 50» 37' E. or S. E. ^ E. ExAHPLK 2. An object bears W. by N. or N. 78" 46' W. the varia- tion is no 16' E. the true bearing will be N. 67° 30' W. or W. N. W. Note* — With easterly variation the true bearing is always to the right of the magnetic bearing, and with westerly variation to the left. But if the true bearing is given to find the magnetic, the rule must be reversed. TO SHAPE A COMPASS COURSE CORRECTED FOR VARIATION. Case II. It is required in this case to correct the course for varia- tion before steering; it is the reverse of Case I. ^ the variation is easterlyj aUoto it to the left. If the variation it xoMterly^ aUoto it to the right gives compass course. Example 1. The true or chart course from Devil island to Duluth, Lake Superior, is W. by S. f S. or 8. 70° 19' W. the variation at Devil island is about 8° E. and at Duluth 10° E.; one-half the sum of these variations 9° E. is the mean variation, which is approximately equal to } of a point of the compass; as the variation is easterly, the correction is made by applying the 9" or f of apoint to the left hand, making the corrected compass course S. W. by W. ^ W. or S. 61° 19' W. Example 2. The true, or chart course from Port Dalhousie to the Ducks, on Lake Ontario, is E. by N. f N. or N. 70° 19' E.; the variation at Port Dalhousie is 4° W. and at the Ducks about 7° W.; one-half the sum of these variations 5^° W. is the mean variation, which is practically equal to ^ a point of the compass, as the variation is westerly, the oorreo- tion is made oy applying the 6^° or ^ a point to the right hand, making the corrected compass course E. by N. i N. or N. 76° 66' £. Example S. The true or chart course from Chicago to Pilot island, entrance to Green bay, is N. 8° E. or N. f E. nearly, the variation at Chicago is 4° 12' E. and at Pilot island 3** 28' £.; one-half the sum of these variations 8° 60' E. is the mean variation, which is practically equal to f of a point of the compass, as the variation is easterly the cor- rection is made by applying the f of a point, or 3° 60' to the left hand, making the corrected compass course N. 4° 10' E. or N. f E. nearly. DEVIATION OF THE COMPASS ON IRON AND STEEL SHIPS.— Extracts from Naval Professional Papers, by T. A. Lyons, Lieut. Commander IT. S. N. The Sailor's Pocket Book, by Capt. F. G. D. Bedford, R. N., and the Reports ot the Liverpool Com- pass Committee. The Magniet. — The characteristic features of a magnet are two poles of equal strength but of different nature ; they are separated by a neutral ground. Induction. — The production of magnetic power in iron by the action of an external magnet is called " induction." The magnet pole LRIA- aoting a on iit 6° le varia- ^. W. B to the the left, must Im > FOB »r varia- iation U Duluth, at Devil of these equal to )rrection .king the to the rariation lalf the Eiotioally oorreo- making island, ition at sum of lotioally the oor- hand, ly. AND h by T. ook, by )1 Com- ire two ed by a by the et pole DEVIATION OF THE COMPASS. 7 by induction produces a pole of opposite character in the nearest part of the iron. THE COMPASS NEEDLE is a freely suspended magnet, that is free to move horizontally. Polarity. — The influence that gives directive force to the compass needle, causing it to point to the magnetic north, is called polarity. It is customary to regard the polarity which exists in the north end of the compass needle "north" (red) polarity, whence it follows that "south" (blue) polarity must pervade the regions of the terrestrial north, because it is a law of nature that bodies similarly magnetized will repel, while those dissimilarly magnetized will attract each other. Soft Iron, as regards magnetism, is iron which becomes instantly magnetized to its full capacity, when exposed to the influence of any magnetized body, and which loses its magnetism instantly when the influencing body is removed. Hard Iron, is iron which does not become magnetized by ordinary induction, but which, when magnetized, retains its magnetism, unafiFected by the influence of other magnetic bodies ; it becomes magnetic by in- duction aided by percussion ; permanent magnets are necessarily made of hard iron. Supposing south (blue^ polarity to pervade the northern hemisphere, then if a bar of " soft " iron be held in a vertical position, it becomes magnetic through the inductive agency of the earth's vertical force, the lower end will be magnetized with "north" (red) polarity, and the upper end with " south " (blue) polarity ; turn the bar eiu for end, and the polarity is instantly reversed ; the upper end of the bar will attract the north end of the compass needle, and the lower end will repel it. If the bar is laid horizontally in the meridian it will become magnetic through the inductive agency of the earth's horizontal force, the north end will be magnetized with " north " (red) polarity, and the other end with " south " (blue) polarity ; if the bar is turned transverse to the meridian, that is cast and west, it will lose its magnetism. THE DEVIATION of the compass on board an iron or steel ship is composed of three parts, namely, the /Semicircular Deviation, the Quadrantal Deviation, and the Heding Error. Some persons use the terms Variation and Deviation of the compass, as if they were of the same meaning. The well informed seaman mal zz a great distinction between the two, for the following reasons : The error from Variation of the compass, arises from the magnetic north not coinciding with the true north ; it is always the same at the same place and time ; it is inde- pendent of the ship entirely, and affects every point of the compass to the same extent. But it is not so with Deviation of the compass, which is caused by the iron in the ship, and which varies on almost every point of the compass. THE SEMICIRCULAR DEVIATION, so called because all the phases occur in a semicircle, is due chiefly to the permanent magnet- ism acquired while the ship was being built ; the ship has become a magnet partly by the inductive agency of the earth's magnetism, and partly by the great amount of hammering she has received. The direo- R 8 DEVIATION OF THE COMPASS. tion of the magnetism of the ship as affecting the compass may be inferred from the direction in which her head was while building. The direction of the ship's magnetic force coincides nearly with the line drawn on deck in a magnetic north and south direction, and the points of max- imum semicircular deviation are at right angles to the direction of the ship's head in building. In iron ships the north end of the compass is invariably drawn towards that part of the ship, which was furthest from the north while the ship was building. In an iron ship, built with her head to the north, the bow becomes magnetized with " north " (red) polarity, and the stern with '* south " (blue) polarity, and when she lies with her head in a north or south direction, there is no apparent attraction of the needle towards either side, because the attraction is in the direction of the needle, but with her head in all other directions there is a strong attraction towards the stern. With ships built with head to the south, the same principle will apply, the deviation being then towards the bow. When built with head to the east, the deviation is towards the star- board side (the south in building), and when built with head to the west, to the port side (the south in building). In ships built in intermediate positions the proceeding chixracteristics are combined, thus : If built with head to the N. E., the attraction will be aft and to starboard ; with head to the N. W., aft and to port. If the head be S. E. or S, W., the attraction will be forward and to star- board, or forward and to port respectively. The amount of original magnetism appears to have relation to the size of the vessel, or the quantity of iron used in her construction, in a ship of 400 tons built head to east, if a compass be carried fore and aft on a ceiicer line three or four feet from deck the deviation may be 10° or 12** when her head is north or south. In a ship 100^ tons it may, under tiie same circumstances, be 25* or 30°. It is convenient to regard the magnetism of a ship as taking effect in three disturbing forces, the one acting /ore and aft, one acting athwart- ship, and the third vertical. The one acting in a fore and aft direction produces a deviation named B, the one acting in an athwartship direc- tion producing a deviation named G ; therefore B and C constitute the semicircular deviation. The vertical force will produce no deviation when, as we here suppose, the ship is on an even keel. The only way of destroying the effect of one magnetic disturbing force, is to introduce another magnetic disturbing agent, whose force follows the same laws and has the same magnitude, but which acts in the opposite direction, or in other words the effects of hard iron must be corrected by hard iron, and the effects of soft iron by soft iron. If, therefore, in the semicircular deviation B and C are known, the direc- tion in which the counteracting force should be introduced can readily be determined, and the deviation corrected. TO CORRECT A COMPASS BY TWO MAGNETS.— This is the method mostly used in the merchant service. Bring the ship's head east or west magnetic ; then place a magnet in a fore and aft direction, with the middle of the magnet's length in the vertical plane, passing athwartship through the center of the compass card ; move the magnet nearer or farther off until the compass points correctly ; that may be r. The e drawn of raax- of the drawn h while Decomes ' south '* >r south Is either ut with irds the 11 apply, the star- ;he west, steristics ition will ort. If to star- I the size 1 a ship on a or 12® ider tiie feet in ithwart- irection direc- utn the viation turbing force s in the uust be If, I direc- readily ITS.— |ng the ind aft plane, \\e the that n. DEVIATION OF THE COMPASS. 9 Jiart of the semicircular deviation called B (produced by the fore-and-aft ,orce) is thus corrected. Similarly with the ship's head north or south magnetic, place a magnet athwartship parallel to the deck, with the middle of the magnet's length in the vertical plane, passing fore and aft through the center of the compass ; move the magnet near or farther off until the compass points correctly ; that part of the semicircular devia- tion called C (produced by the athwartship force of the ship) is thus corrected. The B or fore and aft magnet may be placed either on the port or starboard side of the compass, and the C magnet either before or abaft the compass, but neither magnet should be in the same horizontal plane as the card, nor should either be within twice the length of the compass needle from the centr" of the compass card. The magnets can be secured to the sides of the binnacle or to the deck, but care should be taken that they be not reversed if taken up for any purpose. The semicircular deviation of the compass in an iron ship alters when the vessel has lain a long time on the same course, or has been a long time alongside a wharf, or in a dry dock with her head in one direction. It is important that every new ship, after launching, should be turned around and kept with her head in the opposite direction from which she was built, in order that she may lose as much as possible of the magnet- ism, which has not been firmly hammered into her, before adjusting the compasses. THE QUADRANTAIi DEVIATION of the compass, so called because all its phases occur in a quadrant, is caused solely by the ** soft " iron in the ship ; it does not change by the lapse of time, or change of geographical position. The earth's magnetic force which produces the greatest force when the ship is on the quadrantal points, viz : N. E., S. E., S. W. and N. W., and no effect when she is on the cardinal points, viz : north, east, south and west. This will appear evident when we consider that when a ship heads north or south the attraction is in the direction of the needle ; and when heading east or west the soft iron loses its magnetism. Such deviation is caused chiefly by the iron beams of the ship, and generally is easterly when the ship's ^cMPA88. 11 whose distance should not be less than 8 miles) is to be taken with the standard compass and noted in a table she should be hauled around in the same manner to the next point, and when steady on it, the bearings of the same object is again observed and recorded, and so on nntil the bearings of the distant object has been taken successively on every point of the compass and recorded. The bearings of the distant object can be ascertained by taking the standard compass on shore to some place where the distant object and the ship is in line, and there observe its bearings. Or by footing up all the bearings, if taken by degrees, and dividing the sum by the number of observations this would give the mean bearing; theoretically, this is the more correct method. When it is not convenient to swing the ship, it is a good plan to take the standard compass on shore whenever an opportunity occurs, and take the bearings of some object in line with the binnacle, and then take the bearings when the compass is restored to the binnacle and note the dif- ference; of course this would give the deviation only on that point, and for the standard compass only. Another method is to watch the courses she makes when running on compass courses that are well known, and note the difference for that particular course. FORM GENERALLY UPED FOR REGISTERING BEARINGS WHEN SWINGING SHIP. Note. — The following are actual bearings taken of the Lower Lighthouse at the St. Clair Flats Canal from a point in Lake St. Clair, nine miles distant: OOBBECT MAGNETIC BBABIXO N. 28|*' E., OB N. TSf, B. ^ E. NBABLT. by Standard Oompass. North. N. by B. N. N.E. N. E. by N. N. E. N. E. by E. E. N. E. E. by N. Bast. E. by 8. B. 8. E. 8. E. by B. S. E. 8. E by S. 8. 8. E. 8. by B. Bearings of Liehchouse by Standard Compass. N. 84Vi« E. N. 22 E N. 19 N. 17U E N. 17 E, N. 16 N. 16 N. leyi N. 17 N. 18 N. 19^ N. 21>2 E, E E. E. E. E. E. E. E. E. N. 24 N. 2tt N.28U N. 80^ E. B. Deviation of Standard Compass. 4» E. «V jE. »M E. 11 E. IIV ^E. KM E. \^A\ E. 12 E. IIV^ fE. \oy ^E. d E. 7 fi. ^M 5E. 2Vi ^E. 2 w. Head by Standard Compass. W, South. 8. by W. 8. 8. W. 8.W.byS 8. W. 8. W. by W. 8. W. W. by S. West. W. by N. W.N. W. N. W. by W. N W. N. W. by N. N. N. W. N. by W. Bearings of LiKbthouse by Standard Compass. N. 82W' E. N. 34^ E. N. mi E. N. 88^ E. N. 39 E. N. 40 E. N. 41 E. N. 41 E. N. m^ E. N. 39 E. N. 38 E. N. 36H E. N. 34 E. N. 32^ E. N 30 B. N 87 B. Deviation of Standard Compass. 4 W. l^W. IViE. The sum of all the bearings 014<> -i- 32 - T&yi" E. nearly. Y "' 'i: 12 DEVIATION OF THE COMPASS. DEVIATION TABLE FOR THE STANDARD COMPASS. Ship's Head. Deviation. Coriect Mag- netic Course. Ship's Head. Deviation. Correct Mae- nelic Course. N. 4 E. N. 4 E. 8. • 4 W. 8. 4 B. N. by E. N. N. E. 6^E. N. \t\ E. 8. by W, 6 W. 8. 6WW. g^E. N. 32 E, 8. 8. W. 8 W. 8. 14W W. N, E. by N. HE. N. 4494 E. . 8. W. by 8. 10 w. 8. 88« W. 8. 34! W. 8. 4452 W. N. E. 11^ E. N. 56i?E. 8. W. low w. N. E. by E. E. N. E. 13^ E. N. 6«^E. 8. W. by W. W. 8. W. 11« w. 12^ E. N. 80 E. 12U w. 8. 65 W. E. by N. 12 E. 8, 8!*^ E. W. by 8. 12^ W. 8. 6«W W. E. 10^ E.' 8. 78U E. W. 12 W. 8. 78 W. E.byS. s. esy E. 8. 68>iS E. 8. 491.4 E. 8. 40^ E. 8. 81^ E. W. by N. W. N. W. low W. N. SAW W. N. 77 W. E. 8. E. ff^E. 9^ W. 8. E. by E. 7 E. N. W. by W. 8 W. N. 64W W. 8. E. 4^E. 2^E. N. W. 6^ W. N. 60j2 W. 8 E. by 8. N. W. bv N. N. N. W. 4^ W. N. 8«2 W. 8. 8. B. 8. 22^ E. !« W. N. 24 W. S. by E. 8 W. 8. mk E- N. by W. IViE. N. ^W. DIRECTIONS FOR CORRECTING A COMPASS COURSE FOR DEVIATION. Case III. In this case suppose the course has been steered, and it is desired to find the correct magnetic course made good. If the deviation is easterly, allow it to the right. If the deviation is westerly, allow it to the left. Note 1. The deviation is said to be easterly when the north point of the compass is drawn to the eastward or right hand, and westerly when the north point of the compass is drawn to the westward or left hand. Note 2. If the deviation table is in degrees the course should be expressed in degrees, otherwise in points and fractions of a point. In reading the compass by degrees, it is the custom on shipboard to read from north to 90® east or west, and from south to 90° east or west. Example 1. The compass course steered E. N. E. or N. 67° 30' E. with deviation by the table 12** 30' E. gives the correct magnetic course N. 80« E. or E. I N. nearly. Example 2. The compass course steered S. W. or S. 45** W. with deviation by the table 10° 80' W. gives the correct magnetic course 8. 34° 30' W. or S. W. I S. nearly. Example 3. The compass coarse steered E. S. E. or S. 67° 30' E. with deviation by the table 9** E. gives the correct magnetic course S. 58° 30' E. or E. S. E. f S. nearly. Example 4. The compass course steered W. by N. or N. 78° 45' W. with deviation by the table 10° 30' W. gives the correct magnetic course N, 89° 16' W. or W. \ N. nearly. XO CORRECT COMPASS BEARINGS FOR DEVIATION. The correction is applied in the same manner as in case HI, except that the deviation in the dirootion of the ship's head is applied, and not the deviation on the bearing. Example i. The shipls head by standard compass is E. N. E. the deviation when heading on that point of the compass as shown in the DEVIATION OF THE 0OMPAS8. 13 deviation table is 12* 30' E. a light bears N. 67« 80' W. or W. N. W. the correct magnetic bearing will be N. 65° W. or N. W. ^ W. nearly. Example 2. The ship's head by standard compass is S. W. the devia- tion when heading on that point of the compass as shown in the devia- tion table is 10** 30' W. a light bears N. 22« 30' E. or N. N. E. the cor- rect magnetic bearing will be N. 12° E. or N. by E. ^ E. nearly. Note. With easterly deviation the correct magnetic bearing is always to the right of the compass bearing, and with westerly deviation to the left. This rule is to be reversed when the correct magnetic bear- ing is given to find the compass bearing. TO Stt^ PE A COMPASS COURSE COBB^^CTED FOR DEVIATION. Case rV. It is required in this case to correct the compass course for deviation before steering ; it is the reverse of case III. If the Deviation is easterly, allow it to the left. If the deviation is westerly allow it to the right. Example 1. The correct magnetic course is E. with deviation by the table 11** 30' E. gives compass course corrected for deviation N. 78° 80' E. or E. by N. nearly. Example 2. The correct magnetic course is W. S. W. or S. 67° 30' W. with deviation by the table 12** 80' W. gives compass course corrected for deviation S. 80° W. or W. | S. nearly. Example 3. The correct magnetic course is N. N. E. or N. 22° 30' E. with deviation by the table 9° 30' E. gives compass course corrected for deviation N. 13° E. or N. by E. | fe. nearly. Example 4. The correct magnetic course is N. W. or N. 45° W. with deviation by the table 5° 80' W. gives compass course corrected for deviation N. 39° 30' W. or N. W. ^ N. nearly. \ with >urBe 8. I except Ind not E. the in the TO COBRECT A COMPASS COURSE AT ONCE FOB BOTH VABIATION AND DEVIATION. As in case I for correcting a compass course for variation, and alio in case III for correcting a compass course for deviation, it is supposed the course has been steered, and it is desired to find the true course made good. If both the deviation and variation are of the same name, that is both east or both west, add them together and apply them jointly according to their name. Example. The compass course steered is E. N. E. or N. 67° 30' E. the deviation by the table is 12° 30' E. and the variation 10° E. their sum is 22° 30' E. being applied to the right hand of E. N. E. gives the true course N. 90° E. or east. But if one be E. and the other W. take their difference, give it the name of the greater and apply it according to that name. EJxample. Take the same course E. N. E. or N. 67° 30' E. and let us suppose the deviation is 12° 30' W. but the variation still 10° E. their difference will be 2° 30' W. being applied to the left hand of E. N. E. gives the true course N. 66^ E. or N. E. by E. f E. nearly. 1 I 1 14 DEVIATION OF THE COMPASS. TO SHAPE A COMPASS COUBSE CORRECTED AT ONCE FOR DEVIATION AND VARIATION. ( Whefi the variation is rniall.) The oorreotion is applied in the same manner as in case II for shaping a oompastb course corrected for variation, and in cane lY for shaping a compass course corrected for deviation before steering. If both the deviation and variation are of the same name, that is both east or both west, add them together and apply them jointly according to their name. Take the 3d example in case lY, the true or chart course from Chicago to Pilot Island is N. 8^ E. or N. f E. nearly ; the deviation in that course by the table is 6° 30' E. and the mean variation S*' 60' E. their sum is 10° 20' E. or nearly f of a point of the compass, being applied to the left hand gives the correct compass course N. 2° 20' W. or N. J W. nearly. But if one be E. and the other W. take their difference, give it the name of the greater and apply it according to that name. Take the 1st example in case lY. The true or chart course from Devil island to Duluth is W. by S. * S. or S. 70«» 19' W. the deviation on that course by the table is 12° 30 W. or 1^ points of the compass nearly, the mean variation is 9° E. their difference 8° 30' W. which beiiig applied to the right hand gives the correct compass course S. 73° 49' W. or W. by S. ^ S. nearly. Note. In ahaping a course when the variation is large, the correction for the variation should be applied firftt to the true course to get the cor- rect magnetic course, and then the deviation for that point taken from the deviation table and applied to the correct magnetic course to get the compass course. The reason for applying the variation first is that the deviation changes according to the direction of the ship's head, while the variation is the same on all points of the compass. This rule gives only an approximate compass course, particularly when the deviation is large. There are several Graphic Methodo for reducing courses which give accurate results, a curve of deviations constructed upon the Napier method, or the straight line method of Archibald Smith are considered the best. TABLE OF THE ANGLES. 15 rED AT or shaping shaping a hat is hoth according m Chicago n in that 10' E. their applied to 3r N. i W. give it the )ur8e from ) deviation le compass ^hioh being 73° 49' W. ) correction ret the cor- aken from ) to get the is that the I, while the ^ives only 1 is large. lich give He Napier considered TABLE FOR CONVERTING POINTS OP THE COMPASS AND THEIB FRACTIONAL PARTS INTO DEGREES. North to East. Pointa. Degrees, fto. Points. North to West. North. e North. - H 1 24 82 H - N.J4E. H - s 48 46 r ^ N. J4W. - % 4 18 7 H - N. HE. % - 6 87 80 r « N. i^iW. - % 7 1 62 H - N.94E. H - 8 26 16 - r* N.%W. - H 9 60 87 % - N.byE. 1 11 15 1 N. by W. - 14 12 89 22 % - N. by E. ii B. H, - 14 3 45 - ^ N. by W. J4 W, - H 16 28 7 % - N. by E. Jii E. yi - 10 52 80 - Hi N. by W. % W. - % 18 16 62 H - N. by E. % E. 9i - 19 41 16 - % N. by W. % W. - H 21 5 87 % - N. N. E. 2 22 80 2 N. N. W. 9 - % 23 54 22 H - N. N. E. M E. H - 25 18 45 - H N. N. W. M W. - H 26 48 7 H - N. N. E. 14 E. •H - 28 7 80 - H N. N. W. ^ W. - H 29 81 52 H - N. N. E. H E. H - 80 66 16 - « N. N. W. % W. - H 82 20 87 H - N. E. by N. 3 88 46 8 N. W. by N. - H 85 9 28 « - N. E. 9i N. H - 86 88 46 r. « N. W. ?i N. - % 87 68 7 H - N. E. H N. % - 89 22 80 ~ 7jB N. W. ]4 N. - « 40 46 62 H - N. K. H N- « - 42 11 16 - « N. W. M N. - H 48 86 87 H- N. E. 4 45 4, N. W, - ^ 46 24 82 H - N. E. a E. H - 47 48 45 - « N.W. J^. % .> A 1 !> n,:J/f SCOTT'S NEW COAST PILOT. Throughout this work all courses and bearings have been corrected for mag- netic variation. The distances are expressed in statute miles. ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. JVes^ or Main Channel into Ogdensburgh River, Sailing^ Directions. — A straight course may be Bteered from buoy to buoy, on either side. The red buoys should be kept well aboard, as tne current sets directly across the channel at the rate of about 1^ miles per hour. The outer edge of the shoal on lower side of channel lies parallel with the shore (N. E. f E.j for one-half mile, from the Og- densDurg Shoal buoy, and then curves in to the outer end of the Central Vermont Railway and Steamer wharves, at the lower end of the city, which are built out to deep water. Between these wharves and to the month of the Oswegatchie river, and lying close to the shore, is a 7 to 9 foot natural channel, 800 yards wide at the entrance, and narrowing to 76 yards near the river mouth. Through this channel a "cut" has been made, 150 feet wide and 12 feet deep, in a straight line S. W. f W. from the outer end of the Central Vermont wharves to the upper end of Parish's lumber wharf, and theuce along the ends of the wharves, to the harbor, in the mouth of the river. Abridge, crossing the river 435 yards above the inner buoy, is the terminus of the harbor. Bottom of harbor and channel, soft; shotds, stony or rocky. The current of Oswegatchie rivar is about 1 mile per hour. OGDENSBUBGH LIGHT-STATION.—A fixed whJte licht, 4th order, visible 12^^ miles. Gray, square, limestone tower, 40 feet high, with dwelling attached, lantern black. On a low rooky islet, 200 feet above the channel, and 100 yards from the shore, with which it is connected by a side track of the B., W. & O. R. R, extending beyond the station to the IS-ioot curve, from whence its cars are ferried across the river. Flats extend beyond the light-house at this point nearly half way aonss the St. Lawrence, and vessels bound up or down should keep oyer toward the Canadian shore. The dredged channel into Ogdensburgh harbor passes the light-house islet, on its lower side, at a distance of 67 yards. Ogdensburgh Shoal, Outer Buoy, No. 1.— Black spar buoy, in 80 feet of water, lower side of entrance to channel, and marks th« upper end and outer edge of the shoal on that side. The buoy stands in [211 J 22 BT. LAWBBNOE SIVEB. deep water, 40 yards from the curved corner of the shoal. Ogdensburgh light-house, S. i E., 600 yards. West Entrancei No. 2.— Red spar buoy, in 12 feet of water, marks the upper side oi the entrance, and the outer point of the shoal on that side. Ogdensburgh light-house, S. | E., 470 yards. North end of steam elevator, E. f N. Light-house Buoy, No. 4.— Red spar buoy in 12 feet of water, in the channel, close to the steep, west bank, and nearly opposite the light-house. A straight course may be made from this buoy to the lower corner of the R., W. & O. R. R. wharf, on the west side of the river. Ogdensburgh light-house, northeast corner of tower, S. W. by W. East Bank buoy, E. f N., 200 feet. East Bank Buoy, No. 3.— Black spar buoy, in ^ 2 feet of water, on the east side, just inside the light-house buoy. Ogdensburgh light- house, S. W. by W. f W. Lower corner of R.- W. & O. R. R. wharf, 8. by E. f E. Inner Buoy, No. 6. — Black spar buoy in 13 feet of water, east side of channel at the inner end. Stands 25 yards c^ the 10-foot point of the shoal. Passing it, the wharves on either side of the harbor may be steered for. From this buoy the shoal trends E. by S. f S., 90 yards, (half-way to shore,) to the entrance to the channel along the north front of the city. Ogdensburgh light-house, W. N. W., 2V0 yards. Lower corner of R., W. & O. R. R. wharf, S. f E., 140 yards. Channel South of BrocHs Group, standing up the St. Lawrence River. This channel is buoyed for 12 feet draught of water. Sailing Directions. — Good anchorage in from 3 to 7 fathoms, soft bottom throughout the channel, the best abreast or just above the Lower buoy, and on the edge of the bight of the south shore opposite the Upper buoy ; except at these points, the bottom, in three fathoms or less, is generally rocky. Approaching from below, pass (on about a S. W. \ 8. course) south of Macuair's islands, and the island near the American shore, 1^- miles above, giving the latter a berth of at least 100 yards, (the opposite shore is bold,) and steer for the Lower buoy of this channel, thence for Middle buoy, Foul-Ground buoy, and Upper buoy in turn. From Upper buoy steer for Mid-Channel Reef buoy. liOwer Buoy. — Red spar buoy, 25 feet long in 16 feet of water, on north side of entrance to channel. Stands in soft bottom, and marks the southeast point of a 9-foot shoal 400 yards long. The ranges from this buoy to the North Shoal buoy and to the end of the Brockville wharf clear the south and east edges respectively of this shoal. Shoal water extends from the south shore nearly half-way, or to within 300 yards of this buoy. Steer for the Middle buoy, passing the North Shoal buoy to the southward ; the point of the south shoro opposite the latter buoy should be given a berth of at least 100 yards. It is cleared by the range between the Lower and Middle buoys, (S. W by W. | W., \\ miles). East end of lower island, north side of channel, W. N. W. \ W., 1^ mile. South end of island, \ mile below channel, N. E. by E. iNorth Shoal buoy, W. by S. \ S., \ mile. ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 28 tensburgb of water, 3 shoal on 'th end of of water, )08ite the the lower the river. W. East of water, rgh light- El. wharf, ater, east bot point rbor may 90 yards, irth front . Lower e vSV. fathoms, ove the [opposite horns or ut a S. ear the east 100 of this buoy in |f water, ' marks [es from >okville Shoal im 300 Ih Shoal |e latter [ by the W., i| North North Shoal* — Red spar buoy in 16 feet of water, on north side of channel. Stands about midway between the lower group of islands and the south shore, and marks the end of a shoal making out from the group. Ranges from the buoy to the ends of this group mark the upper and lower sides of the shoal. Between this shoal and the foul ground north of the middle buoy, there is good water up to the islands, north side of the channel. A range from this buoy to the end of the Brook- • ville wharf guides through a "north" entrance to this channel, | mile wide. End of Brockville wharf, N. E, by N., 1| miles. Middle buoy, S. W. i W., 1 mile. M *ldle Buoy. — Black spar buoy in 18 feet of water. On south side of channel, pass the buoy close-to, channel 126 yards wide. The lower edge of foul ground lying between the channel and the islands to the northward, opposite and above this buoy is cleared by a range, from the buoy to the lower end of the middle group of islands. Lower end of middle group of islands, N. f E., ^ mile. South end of upper island of channel, S. W. by W. i- W. Foul-Ground Buoy. — Red spar buoy in 13 feet of water. North side of channel, abreast the upper island and nearly midway between the latter and the south shore, marks the outer point of the foul ground lying between channel and islands. The outer points of the American shore, below, in range, mark the position of a 9-foot spot, opposite this buoy, and a little south of mid-channel. Lov/er end of upper island of channel, N. by W. ^ W., 333 yards. Upper buoy, S. V7. j- W., 780 yards. Upper Buoy. — Red spar buoy in 1 6 feet of water. Marks the outer (southeast) point of a small 9|-foot shoal, north side of channel at its head. Steer for the Oak Point Shoals buoy, passing south of the Cole's Ferry Shoal and Mid-channel Reef buoys. Cole's Ferry light- house (Canadian), W. | S. Oak Point Shoal buoy, S. W. ^ W., 3 miles. Main, or West Channel^ standing up the St. Lawrence River. The river is buoyed for 12 feet draught of water. Sailing Directions. — The bottom of the St. Lawrence river is either soft or rocky, and very irregular, varying in depth, in mid-channel and within short distances, from 7 to 30 fathoms. Good anchorage may be had at many points in the bights or bays along the shore and among the islands. Unless otherwise stated, the "b'^als marked by buoys are rocky. The current is from 1 to 5 iuiles per hour (except at certain points specially mentioned), depending upon the width of the river. Both the current and depth of water vary with the winds on Lake Ontario, being increased by south' v^esterly and decreased by northeasterly winds. Passing the Ogdensburg Shoal buoy, the course to Macnair's islands is 8. W. f W"., lOf miles. No dangers in this reach. Either shore may be approached within 300 yards ; average width of river rather more than a mile. Pass north of Macnair's islands, and steer S. W. \ W., 2 miles, for the entrance to the channel north of Brock's group ; a reef, partly bare, lies on the south side of the channel, nearly in mid- river, opposite Brockville, Canada. The channel north of the ^roup is •K I h 24 6T. LAWRENCE BIVEB. 8 miles long, 150 to 300 yards wide, bold on both sides, with a 3 to 4- mile current. The only danger is a rock, 1 feet under water, lying 600 yards below the head of the group, and one-third way across from the north side of channel. Foul ground extends from the nead of the group (south of the range to the Cole's Ferry Shoal buoy) more than half way to that buoy. Cole's Ferry Shoal. — Black spar buoy in ll^ feet of water. South side of main channel, and marks the upper and outer (northwest) edge of a 5-foot shoal, 200 yards across, lying in mid-river. The range (E. f N.) between this and the upper buoy of the channel south of Brook's group clears the lower edge of this reef and the upper end of the foul ground at the head of Brock's group, furnishing a guide through to the head of the soulh channel. Steer for the channel between the Bay State and Oak Point iShoals buoys, passing the Mid-channel Beef buoy on either side. No dangers along the north side of this stretch except a small reef, just covered, one-half mile above the Cole's Ferry light-house and 300 yards off shore; also a 7-foot spot between that reef and the light-house. Cole's Ferry light-house (Canadian), W. f 8., three-fourths mile. Mid-channel Reef buoy, S. W. ^ W., 1^ miles. Mid-cbannel Reef. — Red and black horizontal striped spar buoy in 11^ feet of water. Stands at the lower side and near the northwest end of a narrow O^foot reef, 60 yards long, lying athwart the channel, nearly in mid-river; can be passed on either side. Cole's Ferry light- house (Canadian), N. i E., three-fourths mile. Cross-over Island light- house, 8. W. f S., 2^ miles. Oak Point Shoal* — Black spar buoy in 14 feet of water. South side of channel, three-quarters mile above Oak Point, and marks the outer edge and lower end of a small 10^- foot shoal, 400 yards off Whale's Back shoal. The outer edge of a reef, just under water, 600 yards be- low this buoy, is marked by this and the Bay State Shoal buoy in range and the range between this and the Whale's Back Shoal buoy (S. by W. ^ W., 1,100 yards) clears a 7-foot ledge lying about midway between the two. Cross-over Island light-house, S. W. f S., 1 mile. Bay State Shoal buoy, S. W. ^ W., one third mile. Bay State Shoal. — Red spar buoy in 12 feet of water, marks the outer (southeast) edge of a small 5-foot shoal, one-half mile below Cross- over island, on the north side of channel. No dangers between this buoy and Cross-over island, or west of it to the group of islands near the Canadian shore, except a 5-foot spot 200 yards off the lower island of that group. Cross-over island light-bouse, S. S. W. f W. Upper end of outer island on Whale's Back shoal, E. ^ S., 700 yards. Whale's Back Shoal. — Black spar buoy in 11^ feet of water. South side of channel, and marks the outer edge of a small 8-foot shoal, lying 250 yards off the upper end of Whale's Back shoal. Some rocks, t'ust under water, lie 200 yards off shore, three-fourths mile above this »uoy (marked by this buoy in range with the Oak Point Shoal buoy). Except at that point, the south shore, up to the Superior Shoal buoy, may be approached to within 100 yards. Cross-over Island light-house, W. S. W. f W., 700 yards. Outer rock of group near south shores one-half mile above, S. ^ W. Chippewa point, S. S. W. ^ W. CROSS-OVER ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.~A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 12^ miles. Iron circular tower, brown I 8 to 4- ying 600 from the ihe groap half way >f water. )rtihweBt) 'he range f Brock's the foul gh to the Bay State buoy on except a ^ht-house and the e-fourths par buoy torthwest channel, •ry light- ad light- '. Sonth arks the Whale'M ^ards be- in range 3. by W; ween the ay State arks the w Cross- his buoy tear the of that end of water. >t shoal, e rooks, ove this buoy). buoy, •use, W". 9ne-balf A fixed brown ST. LAWKENCE RIVEB. 25 color, lantern black, 114 feet eastward of dwelling, light 35 feet above sea level, 6^ miles below Sister Islands light, on Cross-over island, we-^t side of channel, which is here but one-half mile wida. Reefs extend from the upper end of island, between south and east, to a distance of 150 yards; passing these, the range between the light-house and Oneida Shoal buoy marks the northern limit of channel. The range between this and Cole's Ferry light (S. S. W. f W.) leads up from the latter light to Cross-over island, and the range between Cole's Ferry light and Chip- pewa point (8. S. W. ^ W.) leads from abreast Cross-over, and up the "reach" above it, until the Sister Islands light is opened to the south- ward of Round island, about the width of that island, when the latter light may be steered for (8. W. f S.). The Cross-over and Cole's Ferry lights in range mark mid-channel abreast of Chippewa point. Oneida Shoal. — Red spar buoy in 9^ feet of water. Stands 40 feet from lower end and outer edge of a reef, just covered on the north side of channel, 1^ miles above Cross-over island. A course S. W. ^ S. leads from mid-channel, abreast this buoy, up to the Sister Islands light- house, 5k miles above. The channel (southeast) side of Round island is bold. A 12-foot spot, marked by buoy, lies 300 yards from and opposite its upper end. Cross-over Island light-house, N. N. £. ^ E., 1^ miles. Superior Shoal buoy, S. S. W. i W., 1 mile. Pridgeon Shoal. — Red and black horizontal stripes, 25-foot spar buoy in 16^ feet of water. Marks a shoal spot in the channel, about 300 yards from he south shore and 1 mile below Chippewa point. The reef marked by this buoy is about 100 yards long, in a direction from S. W. by S. to N. E. by K, with a width of from 16 to 20 yards. Least water found, near lower end of shoal, 16^ feet. Cross-over Island light-house, N. I E. Lower end of Shoemaker's island, W. by N. f N., about 1 mile. Superior Shoal. — Black spar buoy in 11^ feet of water. Stands at the outer edge and near the lower end of a loc^ narrow ledge, on the south side of channel, 150 yards off Chippewa pomt. The reef extends S. 8. W. from the buoy to 100 yards above Chippewa point; least water on it, 3 feet, close to the buoy. Reefs make out from the head of Chippewa point to abreast the upper end of Round Top island. In the reach be- tween Round island and the Sisters, the islands on either side of chan- nel may be approached within 100 yards, and the only unmarked dangers are a reef, a quarter mile long, at the head of >Jedar islands, and another extending 350 yards into the channel from the lower end of Oak island. Upper end of Chippewa point, S. by E. f E., 220 yards. Scow Island Shoal buoy, S. W. | 8., 2f miles. Bound Island Shoal. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 14 feet of water. Marks the middle of the lower side of a small 12-foot shoal between Round island and Cedar island, 300 yards from Round island. It stands almost in the direct course of vessels up to Sister islands and may be passed on either side. The channel side of Round island is bold. Low r end of Round island, N. f W. Lower end of Cedar island, E. Scow Island Shoal buoy, S. W. f S., li miles. Tent Island Shoal. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 13 feet of water. Marks the middle of a small 12-foot shoal in mid- ohannel, about 700 yards from Tent island. The range between Sister island and the middle of Round island passes about 600 feet to westward of this shoal, and the range between Pilot island and Chippewa point 26 ST. LAWfiEMOE KIVKK. directly over it. Lower end of Cedar island, N. E. ^ E. Lower end of Tent island, N. W. ^ N. Scow Island Shoal. — Black spar baoy in 12 feet of water. Marks the northwest edge of a 6-feet shoal, 80 yards long, abreast Scow island, and about midway between the islands on either side of channel. Half-way between this buoy and Scow island is a small 10-foot shoal. Sister Islands light-house, S. W. f W., 1^ miles. Pilot Shoal buoy, S. W. f W., 1{ miles. Pilot Shoa^. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 11^ feet of water. Ifiarks the north end of a narrow 10-foot ledge, 26 yards in length (in a N. N. E. and S, 8. W. direction), lying in the channel 500 yards below the Sister islands. Pass on either side. The Sister and and Lone Brother islands in range lead north of this shoal. Pilot island, north side of channel, a quarter mile below, may be passed close-to, and a straight course made thence to the Empire Shoal buoy. Sister Islands light-house, S. W. i S. Sister Islands buoy, S. W. f W. Empire Stioal. — Red spar buoy in 11^ feet of water. Marks the outer edge and upper end of an 8-foot shoal, 90 yards long, on the north side of channel, just below the Sister Islands light-house. Sister Islands light-housf , S. by W., 360 yards. Sister Islands buoy, S. by W. J W., 280 yards. Sister Islands.— Black spar buoy in 12 feet of water. Stands opposite the lower end of Sister islands, and marks the outer edge of the shoal north side of those islands. The range between this buoy and Scow island clears this shoal below the buoy, and the buoy in range with east side of Pilot island clears the upper end of shoal, and also some foul ground lying between the Sister and Lone Brother islands, as well as a narrow reef cxtcnuing 300 yards from the head of the latter island. From this buoy a south ;est course leads up to the Sunken Rock light- house, 6 miles above. Sister Islands light-house, 8. by E. •} E., 100 yards. Scow island, E. N. E. f E., If miles. SISTER ISLANDS LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible I2f miles. Square gray tower risinc ^'rom lime- stone dwelling, light 40 feet above ground. South side of .iianncl, on the lowerof the Sister islands, three small islands connected ' v causewavs. A good channel, 600 yards wide, to the southward, betwf ' these islands and Third Brother island and south of Lone Brother islan ' Passing Pilot island (north side of channel, one-half mile below) c. je-to, steer mid- way between this light-house and the low rocky point of the Grenadier Island shore, opposite, until abreast the light-house, when steer for Sunken Rock light-house (S. W.); after passing Lone Brother island, the range between the two lights may be entered. Cross-over Island light- house, closed behind Pilot island, furnishes another guide through the narrow channel, north of the Sister islands. A small 10-foot shoal lies in the channel, 600 yards below this light-house, just south of the range between this and Cross-over Island light-house. Lower end of Half-way island, E. | S., seven-eighths mile. Sunken Rock light-house, 6 miles. Ironsides Shoal. — Black spar buoy in 11^ feet of water. Marks the N. W. side of a 6-foot shoal 60 yards across, lying opposite the upper end of the Ironsides island south side of channel. West end of Lone Brother island, N. E. f N., f mile. , ^ , . , ST. LAWRENCE RIVER. 27 Marks SUNKEN KOCK LIGHT-ST ATION — A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 11^ miles. Circular iron tower, brown, lantern black, light 28 feet above sea level. A wooden wharf and boat house at base of tower, on Sunken rock, St. Lawrence river, south side of main chan- nel, one-half mile below Alexandria bay. When abreast the upper end of Hart island, bring the Sister Islands light in range with or open a little to the northward of this light, which course leads past Alexandria bay and up to the first island above on the south side of the channel. The latter island should be passed close to, and avoid Pullman's shoal, lying nearly in mid -river opposite. Rock Island light, 7 miles. Sunken Rock. — Black spar buoy in 12 feet of water. South side of main channel, and marks the outer (west) edge of a reef, just under water, and 100 yards in length, lying one-quarter mile above the light- house. The channel here is 200 yards in width, and the island opposite is bold. Sunken Rock light-house, N. E. f E. Lower point of Alex- andria bay, S. E., 350 yards. Frontenac Shoal. — Red spar buoy in 12 feet of water. Marks the outer edge of a shoal north side of channel, opposite Alexandria bay. The islands along the north side of channel above are bold. Sunken Rock light-house, N. E. by E. f E., one-half mile. Pullman Shoal buoy, S. W. ^ S., one-half mile. Squaw Island. — Black spar buoy in 12 feet of water. Marks the outer point of a reef at the foot of Squaw island, south side of chan- nel off the upper end of Alexandria bay; the head of the island is bold. The range from the buoy to, the "Thousand Island House" wharf clears the lower edge of the reef. Frontenac Shoal buoy, N. f W., 400 yards. Pullman Shoal. — Red spar buoy in 11} feet of water. Marks the outer edge of a 5~foot shoal, 40 yards long, on the north side of channel, one- third mile above Alexandria bay; a narrow channel north of this shoal. From this point to the Rock Island light-house, 5f miles above, the channel is from 200 to 300 yards wide, and current 2 to 3 miles per hour; both sides of the reach are bold, except in the deep bights. Sunken Rock light-house, N. E. f E., 1 mile. Niagara Shoal. — Black spar buoy in 12 feet of water. Marks the lower end and outer edge of a 6-foot shoal, 200 feet long, on the south side of channel, three-fourths mile below ]Kock Island light-house. Rock Island light-house, S. W. by W. ^ W., J mile. Granite State Shoal. — Red spar buoy in 12 feet of water. Marks the lower end and outer edge of a reef three-fourths mile long, on the north side of channel, at the head of the "Narrows." Rock Island light-house, S. by W. f W. 350 yards. ^ ROCK ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 8th order, visible 12i miles. Circuliir iron tower, painted brown, lantern black, light 39^ feet above sea level. Light is obscured by keeper's dwelling in passing for about 75 yards above and below. A white lan- tern light is shown from veranda of the keeper's dwelling, toward Thousand Island Park dock, during the hotel season. On Rock island, St. Lawrence river, south side of channel, at the head of the "Niirrows." The group of which this island is one, may be passed below the light- house within 60 yards. Keep the north shore well aboard until passed Niagara Shoal buoy, and then steer directly for the light (about 8. W.) 28 ST. LAWBENOE BIVEB. until close up with it (good water to within 50 yards of the shore, and channel here but 200 yards wide), when stee' S. W. by W. f W. foi North Oolborne island. These directions clear the long reef on north side of channel, at the head of the "Narrows," as well as the reef at the upper end of Rock island. Above North Golborne island, this light, closed behind that island, leads south of Chapman's shoal, and up past the Calumet islands. Tibbett's Point light, 23 miles. Rock Island Reef. — Black spar buoy in li feet of water. Stands at the outer edge and close to the upper end of the reef at the the head of Rock island. After passing Rock Island Reef buoy, steer directly for North Colborne island, S. W. by W. ^ W., passing it close- to, and, as soon as abreast of it, steer for bluff just above Clayton until abreast of Calumet island ; this will clear Chapman's shoal, a reef partly bare, lying in mid-channel, 600 yards west of North Colborne island. From the Calumet islands steer W. S. W. f W., 6^ miles, past Linda island (lying near the south shore), thence W. ^ S., 5^ miles, along the north side of Carleton island. In this stretch the channel is from three- fourths to 1^ miles wide, and free from dangers; good water to within 200 yards of either shore. Rock Island light-house, E. N. E. ^ E., 200 yards. Hinckley's Point Spit. — Red spar buoy in U feet of water, west side of channel, opposite the head of Carleton island, and nearly in mid-river. Stands at the outer edge and 450 yards from the lower end of a spit, extending 2^ miles below Hihckley's point. Long island. Eelow the buoy the shoal trends N. f W. to the end, on which is 9 feet of water. The range from this buoy to Tibbett's point clears the edge of the spit above the buoy. Good water carried across this spit into Button bay with the head of Carleton island bearing about east. Shoals make out from Mud island (west side of channel, 1^ miles below) one- fourth way across to Carleton island. The west side of Carleton island is bold. Point of tr«es at south end of Carleton island, E. f S., 1,670 yards. Hinckley's point, S. W. i S. Tibbett's point, S. S. W. | W., 5 miles. Feather-Bed Shoal. — Black, 3d class can buoy in 17 feet of water. Marks the edge of Feather-bed shoal, east siae of channel, between Carleton island and Cape Vincent, and stands 540 yards W. S. W. of a rocky part of the shoal, just covered. The range between this buoy and the eastern ruined chimney on Carleton island' (N. E. ^ N.) clears the shoal below the buoy, and the range between buoy and " ele- vator " at lower end of Cape Vincent (S. by W. ^ W.) clears it above. One-third mile above this buoy the shoal trends S. S. E. to the shore. A course S. S. W. i W., 4 miles, leads in mid-channel, past the west side of Carleton island, between this shoal and the spit opposite, and up to Cape Vincent; course thence to the lake S. W. by W. i W., 4 miles. Above Cape Vincent there are no dangers; good water to within 200 vards of either shore. Hinckley's Point Spit buoy, N. by W. i W., 1 mile. TIBBETT'S POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 15 miles. Gray, round tower 67 feet above sea level, lantern black, dv elling to northward, on Tibhett's point, south side of head of St. Lawrence river, base of old tower,, on extremity of point. Reefs extend 200 yards from the point. Pigeon Island light- Douse (Canadian), W. | B., miles. Sackett's Harbor light-house, 20 miles. Galloo Island lighthouse, S. S. W. ^ W., 15 miles. Charity ■hoal, S. W. by W. ^ W., about 7i miles. LAKE ONTASIt^. 29 Channel South of Carleton Island, Entering from Below, This channel lies between Carleton island and Feather-bed shoaL The buoys stand in sandy bottom, and mark the edge of the shoal at the narrowest part of the channel, near the head of the island. Above and below the buoys the shoal trends away from the range between them, which thus furnishes a guide for approaching from either direc- tion. The channel decreases in width from two-thirds mile at the entrance to 270 yards at a point mid-way between the buoys; it is 21 miles long, being a mile shorter than by the north side of island. Shoal water extends to a distance of 400 yards from the lower end of island. Lower Buoy. — Black spar in 16 feet of water. South side of channel, If miles above the foot of Carleton island. Below this buoy the Carleton Island shore should not be approached nearer than 250 yards; the buoys in range guide near the south side of the channel. Good water to within 70 yards of the point of the north shore, nidway between this and the upper buoy. A straight course may be steered between the buoys. Tower of elevator at Cape Vincent., S. W. \ S. Upper buoy, W. \ N., 640 yards. Upper Buoy. — Black spar in 18^^ feet of water. South side of channel, opposite the upper end of bay at head of Carleton island ; good water part way into that bay, and the head of island above is very bold. This buoy, in range with the foot of Carleton island, clears the edge of shoal above buoy. When the range between the Feather-bed Shoal booy and the eastern ruined chimney on Carleton island is reached, the main channel is entered. Hinckley's point, S. W. by W. f W. Feather- bed Shoal buoy, S. W. f W., 1 mile. • "i LAKE ONTARIO. Light Houses^ Buoys and Harbors, along the East and South Shores of Lake Ontario, from the St. Lawrence River to Wetland Canal, > Northeast gales lower the water at the east end of the lake about a foot, and those from the southwest raise it nearly twice as much. From Stony point, 2 miles south of Tibbett's point, a reef makes out j^ of a mile, and is just cleared by the range (S. by W. ^ W., 4^ miles) from the latter point to the west side of Grenadier island. Shoals extend ^ mile from the southwest end of Grenadier island and Point Peninsula, the latter 7^ miles S. E. {■ S. of Grenadier island. Charity Shoal. — Red 2d-olass can buoy in 18 feet of water, on the eastern side and 800 yards from the southern end of a narrow rooky ■hoal, three-fourths of a mile long (in a northeast and southwest direc- tion) and 360 yards wide ; the shoalest water, 6 feet, is north of the I I M ' I 80 LAKE ONTARIO. buoy ; N. E. by E. 2f miles, is the Allen Otty shoal, a narrow reef, 700 yards long, with 15 to 18 feet of water on it. A line drawn from the middle of Charity shoal to Hinckley's point crosses the west side of the Allen Otty shoal. It lies 400 yards north of the range between this buoy and Tibbett's Point light-house, and should be avoided in rough weather. Pigeon Island light-house, (Canadian), N. W. ^ W., 3i miles. Tibbett's Point light-house, N. E. by E. i E., 7^ miles. Galloo Island light-house, S. -J E. lOf miles. SACKETT'S HARBOR LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 5th order, visible 13^ miles. Square, red brick tower, attached to dwelling, lantern black, light 49 feet above sea level, on Horse island, south side of entrance to Black River bay ; s^oal water to a distance of 800 yards on the southwest and 200 yards op he north and east sides of island ; a narrow spit, visible at low water, between the island and main- land. The shore between Horse island and Sackett's harbor is bold ; entering the latter harbor, the Ship-house point may be rounded close-to, and the eastern wharves of the tor n steered for. A narrow sand-bar extends from the Ship-house point two-thirds way to t' e southern wharves. Point Peninsula, W. N. W. ^ W., 7 miles. Sackv it's harbor, E. N. E. J E., IJ miles. Tibbett's Point light, 20 miles. Stony Point light, 11 miles. Chauniont Bay. — The entrance to this excellent harbor is between Point Peninsula and Pillar point ; it is 16 miles in a southeast- erly direction from Tibbett's point, and 4^ miles W. N. W. from Sackett's Harbor light. There is 4 to 6 fathoms of water in the bay, with mud bottom ; the entrance is f mile wide, with bold shores. To enter the bay, steer in about N. E. by N., and come to on the N. W. side of Cherry island, or to the eastward in GuflSn bay. Black River Bay. — This bay extends in a N. E. direction, the entrance is between Horse island and Bull Rock point ; the bay is 5^ miles in length, and about 1 mile in width, the depth of water from 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. ShOal water extends from the head of the bay 1^ miles. Sackett's harbor is on the south side of this bay. Henderson Bay is between Horse island and Six Town point ; Gull island and Snake island, two small islands lying in the middle of the entrance, are connected with shoal water, and there are shoals off the ends of these islands extending from one-fourth to half a mile. In the bay the water is from 5 to 7 fathoms deep, with mud bottom. Galloo Island Shoal. — Black 2d-class nun buoy in 18 feet of water, on the west side and 100 yards from the southern end of a rocky shoal, 1^ miles northwest of the south point of Galloo island. The shoal ij 620 yards long and 300 yards wide, least water, 6 feet, near the north> east end. Pass to the westward ; good channel also between the shoal and island. Galloo Island light-house, 8. E. |^ E., 1^^ miles. North end of Galloo island, E. N. E. i E., 3:^ miles. Oswego, S. by W. ^ W., 30 miles. GAIiLOO ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 14J miles. Conical gray tower, connected by covered way with dwelling, lantern black, light 62 feet above sea level. On the southwest end of Galloo island. The straight sides of the island are bold, but at the ends reefs make out nearly one-half mile. A reef extends 500 yards from south end of Little Galloo island, between this JlAKE ONTARIO. »1 and Stony island ; good channels between these islands. A shoal, N.W., and distant 1^ miles from the light, is marked by a black caa buoy. Stony Point light-house, S. E. by E. ^ E., 8 miles. Oswego light, S. by W. i W., 30 miles. Oaif Island Spit. — Second-class nun buoy, black, in 16 feet of water. Marks the extremity of a narrow rocky spit, extend- ing 1^ -"riles southwest from Calf island; not less than 10 feet of water on the spit for three-quarters of a mile inside the buoy; shoal water between Calf and Stony islands, also to a distance of one-third mile from south end of the latter island. Galloo Island light-house, N. W. ^ W., 8^ miles. East side of Stony island, E. N. E. f E. STONY POINT LIGHT-STATION— A fixed white light, varied by white flashes at intervals of 2 minutes; 5th order, visible 13 miles. Square gray «uwer attached to dwelling, lantern black, light 46 feet above sea level, on Stony point, east shore of lake; reefs make out one-quarter mile from the point. A reef, with 4 feet of water on it, lies three-quarters of a mile off shore, 4^ miles to the southward and east- ward. Galloo Island lighthouse, N. W. by W. ^ W., 8 miles. Oswego, S. S. W. f W.,28 miles. A buoy marking the end of a spit extending 1^ miles S. W. from Calf island bears N. W. by W. f W., 4| miles. Oswego Beacon Light. — A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. Octagonal brown iron tower, dome of lantern black, light 39 feet above sea level. On crib in angle of west breakwater, Oswego harbor, mouth of Oswego river. In the harbor west of this beacon, behind the new breakwater, there are 3 fathoms of water, shoaling to 2 fathoms two-thirds way to the shore at the east and west ends, and one-quarter way to shore in the middle; hprd bottom. The openhig between the east end of the v/est breakwater and the north end of the light-house pier is 350 feet. In approaching this harbor from eastward or westwai'd, with a free wind, care should be taken not to fa!l to lee- ward of the range between the beacon and main lights. Fog-signal is a bell attached to north face of beacon, struck by machinery, single blows at intervals of 12 seconds. Fair Haven light, 13 miles. NoTB. — The east breakwater has been entirely removed and there are now 21 feet of water in the position it occupied. There has been two spurs built extending in a northerly direction from the west breakwater. Depth of water abreast of beacon 21 feet, there are 10 feet abreast of the mam light, and from thence to abreast of the North Western elevator 14 feet can be safely carried. The best water is in mid-channel. The Life Saving Station is on the east side of the entrance to the harbor. OSWEGO LIGHT-STATiON.— A fixed white light, 8d order, visible 15^ miles. Gray octagonal tower, and oil room attached, lantern black. Near the inner end of pior west side of entrance to r'ver harbor, 1,250 feet from the beacon; the oi'tranoe i& 100 yards wide. The end of this pier, formerly occupied by the beacon, will be kept painted white to distinguish it at night. Standing up thu river, the widest channel and best water is east of the middlo-grouod piers. A rooky 6-foot ledge extends 100 yards ii'om the lower end of the middle-ground pier at the draw-bridge. During northerly gales a heavy swell sets through the entrance, rendering berths in the lower harbor insecure. Direction of piers, N. N. W. i W. » 1 89 LAKE ONTARIO. I' m OSWEGO. FAIR KAVEN lilGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 1 1^ miles. Pyramidal tower, brown below and white above, square in plan, 27 feet high; elevated walk along pier to shore. Dwelling on bluff west of harbor, drab color. On outer end of west pier,entranoe to Little Sodus bay, width between piers, 235 feet; direction of piers, north. The piers have been extended to the 12-foot curve in extreme low water, and the channel between them dredged to a depth of 12 feet low water. The d/edged channel has never been carried beyond the outer ends of the piers, and a shoal nearly 1,000 feet in width, carry- ing 12 to 14 feet at low water intervenes between deep water in the lake and the channel between the piers. The point of land west of the light- house may be passed within one-fourth mile in 12 feet of water. Little Sodus bay is 2 miles long (in a southerly direction) ; average width one- half mile, 4 to 6 fathoms deep, clay bottom ; bold shores, except in the bights, and no dangers except a shoal, one-quarter mih; long, and marked by rushes growing in its centre, lying near the west bhore, one-half mile inside the entrance, a narrov channel between shoal and shore. This light, opened brightly, leads na^it the point of land a mile to the westward in 2 fathoms of water ; farther inshore the naked light shows dimljr. Fog- signal is a bell striking a double blow every 20 seconds. Nine-mile point, N. E. \ E., 6 miles. Outer point of shore to the westward, W. f S., 1 mile. Big Sodus light, 16 miles. Fair Haven Ranpre Light. — A fixed white light, visible 9 miles. A lantern shown from a white mast 14^ feet above sea level, near the inner end of the west pier, serves as a guide within the bay and as a range to enter between the piers from inside the bay. Big Sodus Beacon-light. — (Outer.) A fixed white light, 6th ord. , visible llf miles. Pyramidal tower, brown below and white above, square in plan, 27 feet high; elevated walk along pier to shore. On outer end of west pier, entrance to Big Sodus bay; width between piers, 460 feet; dir^^otion of piers, N. ^ E. A channel about 100 feet in width is being dredged to a depth of 16 feet. A 7-foot spot lies one- third mile off shore, 2^ miles to the eastward. Point of shore a mile west of Fair Haven light-house, E. N. E. J E., 13 miles. Outer point of ■here to the westward, W. N. W. f W., 6f miles. Big Sodus Beacon-light.— (Inner.) A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 10^ miles. Octagonal tower, 18 feet high, brown below li LAKE ONTARIO. 33 curve m and white above. At elbow of west pier entering the bay, and 450 yards from the outer beacon. Big Sodus bay extends 6 miles in a southeasterly direction; width (west of the islands), 1 mile, narrowing to one-half mile near the head; 3^ to 7 fathoms deep; soft bottom; 12 feet of water may be carried to within one or two hundred yards of the shore, except between the east shore and the islands. The range between the beacon and the middle of Islay island (S. E. f S.) clears a shoal making out southwest from the elbow of the east pier and guides up the middle of the channel (400 yards wide) between Charles point and Sand point; the end of the latter is very bold. Eight feet of water can be carried through the channel east of Islay and Arran islands. A small 6-foot shoal, marked by reeds, lies 300 yards off the point of the east shore, a mile north of Glasgow. This light serves only as a guide within the bay, and as a range to enter between the piers. Sand point, S. by E. f E., one-half mile. North end of Arran island, 8. E. ^ E., 1^ miles. BIG SODUS LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied by white flashes, at intervals of 2 minutes, 4th order, visible 16 miles. Square gray tower 45 feet high, with dwelling attached, lantern black, light 68 feet above sea level. At Sodus Point, on the lake bluff three-fifths mile west of entrance to Big Sodus bay, Genesee light-house, 32 miles to the westward. Pultneyville) at the month of Salmon creek, is lOf miles to the westward of the piers at Big Sodus; and 21 miles to the eastward of the piers at the mouth of Genesee river. It has no light-house. The harbor works consist of a pier running easterly from the west shore, and thence northerly into the lake, with an east pier parallel to and about 200 feet from the northerly arm of the west pier. Length of west pier from the shore arm, 558 feet. Length of east pier, 572 feet; the west pier extends about 300 feet further into the lake than the east pier. Depth at low water, 6 feet. GENESEE LIGHT-STATION. — A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. Square pyramidal tower, brown below and white above, 27 feet high; elevated walk along the pier to the shore ; light 31 feet above sea level. About 20 feet from the outer end of west pier entrance to Charlotte harbor, mouth of Genesee river; width between piers, 450 feet; 14 feet of water carried through into the river; best water ^ way from west pier. Passing *he hotel on west beach, vessels drawing more than 12 feet of water should keep nearest the east pier; sandy bottom. Six to feet of water, stony bottom, alongside the outer half of both piers; further in, alongside the old piling, showing at surface of water, there is from 11 to 13 feet. The fog-signal is a bell, struck by machinery at intervals of 30 seconds. Five miles west of Braddock's point, a spit, with 9 feet of water near the end, makes out two-thirds mile from the shore; and three-fourths mile east of Devil's Nose, a 10-foot spot lies nearly one-half mile off shore. Direction of piers, N. E. ^ N. Outer point of shore to the eastward, E. ^ N., 13 miles. Braddock's point, N. W. f W., 7 miles. Genesee Rang^e Ligrht. (For entering Charlotte harbor.) Three fixed lights, two red and one white, shown vertically with white light in the middle, lens lanterns suspended from a white mast at the shore end of elevated walk on the west pier. Lights 60 feet above lake 34 LAKE ONTARIO. level, and form a range with the light on the outer end of the pier on a line with the direction of the piers. The Life Saving Station is at the east side of the entrance to the harbor. Braddock Point. Light-bouse to be built. OAK ORCHARD 1.IGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 11^ miles. Pyramidal tower, brown below and white above. Square in plan, 27 feet high ; an elevated walk along pier to shore. On outer end of west pier, entrance to Oak Orchard harbor; width between piers, 175 feet ; channel 100 feet wide and 12 feet deep is being dredged next to east pier. An eleven-foot spot lies one-half mile off shore, 1^ miles to the eastward, bearing E. N. E. \ E. from the light- house. Direction of piers, N. f E. Outer point of shore to the east- ward, E. ^ S., If miles. Outer point of shore to the westward, W. | N., 9 miles. Thirty-mile Point light-house, W. \ N., 15 miles. THIRTY-MILE POINT lilGHT-STATION.— A flashing white light, 3d order, visible 15^ miles; interval between flashes 90 seconds. Dark gray tower, square in plan, 64 feet high, rising from the north front of dwelling; watch-roon , black. Lantern black, light 78 feet above sea level. On a slight projection of the lake coast, 30 miles eas'o of the mouth of Niagara river. The building stands close to tie water, with thick woods near by on both sides. A white out-house OL the east side. A shoal, a mile in length, lies one-half mile off shore, 2f miles (the west end) east of this light-house; least water on shoal, 8 feet; narrow channel inside. Outer point of shore to the eastward, E. \ S., 6 miles. Outer point of shore to the westward, W. If miles. Olcott light-house, W. f S., 12 miles. OLCOTT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 11^ miles. Pyramidal tower, brown below and white above; square in plan, 27 feet high; an elevated walk along pier to shore. On outer end of west pier, entrance to Olcott harbor, mouth of Eighteen- mile creek; width between piers, 176 feet. Work in progress to obtain a channel 11 feet deep. Direction of piers, N. ^ W. Outer point of shore to the eastward, E. by N., 4^ miles. Outer point of shore to the .vest ward, W. by S., 6 miles. Fort Niagara Shoal buoy, W. by S., 18^ miles. Wilson's Harbor, at the mouth of Twelve-mile creek, is 12| miles E. by N. f N. from Fort Niagara, and W. by S.^S., 6 miles from Ol- cott. It has no light-house. The harbor consists of two parallel piers of navigable width extending to the 8-foot curve in the lake; direction of piers, N. ^ E., depth at low water, 9 feet. The best water is near the west pier. Niagara River Below the Falls. Two and three-fourth miles off shore, just beyond the national bound- ary, and bearing N. by W. ^ W. from Fort; Niagara light-house, is the middle of a reef with 13 feet of water on it, extending two-thirds mile in an east and west direction S. W. f S., 1^ miles from the middle of this reef, and N. W. \ N. from Fort Niagara light-house, is a small 11- foot shoal. The vidtb of the Niagara between its mouth and Lewiston, LAKE ONTARIO. 35 N. Y., 6 miles above, is about 600 yards; depth, 5 to 12 fathoms; muddy or rocky ' ottom; banks bold and high, and no dangers. At Lewiston, which is half-way to the Falls, and at the head of navigation, the current is about 4 miles per hour, decreasing to 3 at the mouth of the river, and to one-fourth mile at a distance of 2 miles off shore. The strength of the river current and depth of water in mouth of river and west end of lake, generally, are materially affected by winds blowing up or down the lake; the former decrease the current and raise the water, and the latter produce the contrary effect. The difference in water-level is some- times as much as three feet each way. Bell Buoy. — A bell buoy (Canadian) painted red, in 20 feet of water. Off the west side of the mouth of Niagara river. The buoy is of the "Brown patent" pattern, and is rung automatically by the action of tlte waves. In smooth water the bell does not sound. 1 his buoy replaces the wooden spar buoy heretofore placed on the bar that extends from the mouth of the river. Vessels entering the Niagara river can run close up to the bell buoy, leaving it to starboard. There is a 13- foot shoal one-third mile northeastward of the buoy on the port side of the entrance. From the^uoy Fort Niagara light-house i ars S. E. by S. ^ S., 2.6 miles. Forr Mississauga bears S. by E., and Four Mile point, S. W. i S., and a course 2f miles S. S. E. ^ E. will lead up to the steamboat wharf at Niagara on the lake. Note. — In consequence of the establishment of this bell buoy, the fog bell rung by machinery, on the north rampart of Fort Mississauga at the mouth of the river, has been discontinued. Fort Niagara Shoal. — Black spar buoy in 14 feet of water marks the northern and western point of a rocky shoal, east side of entrance to Niagara river, and stands two-thirds mile from the shore and a quarter mile inside the 18-foot curve of the bottom. The water shoals gradually inside the buoy to a depth of 6 feet close to the shore. Abreast the outer face of Fort Niagara, a spur of the reef projects a little beyond the range between the buoy and the outer corner of the Fort Niagara wharf. Fort Niagara wharf, S. S. E. ^ E., three-quarters mile. Outer point of shore to the westward, W. by 8., 3 miles. Fk:iRT NIAGARA lilGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 16f miles. Gray octagonal tower 49 feet high, with oil room attached, light 78 feet above sea level, on the high east bank of the river, one-fourth mile from its mouth. Only the upper half of the tower is visible from the lake. Port Dalhousie, entrance to Welland canal, 11 miles to the westward. To Enter Niagara River.— -Bring the light to bear S. E. | E., one mile distant, when steer S. E. by S., keeping a little outside the line of the wharves under the Fort, and when past the wharves, keep up the middle of the river. Note. — Steering S. f E., heading on Fort Niagara light, leads to the eastward of the reefs off the mouth of Niagara river. Port Dalhousie (Canadian light).— Revolving white li^ht, visible 13 miles. White circular wooden tower, light 53 feet above high water. On the east pier, 339 feet from outer end, at the eastern entrance to Welland canal. Shows from E. to W. by S. Interval of revolution, one minute. Port Dalhousie (South light).— A fixed white light. White, 36 LAKB ONTABIO. square, wooden tower. On end of east pier, 315 feet S. ^ W. from main light. The piers are 200 feet apart, about 2,000 feet in length, direction iC i E. Depth of water 14 feet at low water. The north side of the outer reef off the mouth of Niagara river, N. E. by E. ^ E., 11 miles. Burlington Eay light, W. by N, f N., 27 miles. Gibraltar light, N. | W., 28 miles. One lamp shows N. ^ E., one N. W. and one S. W., or up the harbor. NoTB. — There are rangco for ascertaining compass errors at this port. Particulars can be obtained at canal office. i Compass Courses and Distances on the South Shore of Lake Ontario. Cape Vincent to Niagara and Port Dalhousie.— When abreast of Cape Vincent and ^ a mile from the shore, steer S. W. by W. \ W., 28 miles to a point, 4 miles S. \ W. of False Ducks light, passing \ mile north of Charity shoal ; when steer W. by S. ^ S., 121 miles to a point, 4 miles N. \ W. from Fort Niagara light, or 131 miles to a point, 4 miles N. f E. of Port Dalhousie. Oape Vincent -to Charlotte. — When at a point 4 miles S. f W. of False Ducks J'ght, as in the course from Cape Vincent to Niagara, Bteer S. W. f W., 66^ miles, to a point 3 miles N. E. from Genesee light. Cape Vincent to Big Sodus. — When abreast of Cape Vin- cent and i a mile from shore, steer S. W. by W. i W., 4 miles, until Tibbett's Point light bears E. f S., 1 J miles distant, then S. W. | S., 62 miles, until in range of the two beacons and 2 miles N. ^ E. from the outer beacon. Cape Vincent to Gibraltar Point.— When at a point 4 miles S. f W. of False Ducks light, as in the course from Cape Vincent to Niagara, steer W. by 8. 19^ miles to a point 8 miles S. f W. of Point Peter light, thence W. ^ S. 113 miles to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. See Toronto range lights. Cape Vincent to Kingston. — When abreast of Capo Vincent and ^ a mile from shore, steer S. W. by W. ^ W.O^ miles, until Bear point bears N. f E., 1 n^ile distant, thence W. f N. 4\ miles to a point 1^ miles N. E. by E. of Pigeon Island light, and in line with the light and Long point on Wolfe island, thence N. by W. f W. 6^ miles to a point f mile W. f N. from Simcoe Island light, when steer N. E. f N. 1^ miles to a point 1 mile N. ^ E. from Simcoe Island light, and in range with it and Pigeon Island light, when steer N. ^ E. 2^ miles, keeping Pigeon Island and Simcoe Island lights in range, until Snake Island light bears S. E. f S. 1^ miles distant, when steer E. by N. 4 miles, keeping within i of a mile of the north shore until abreast of Kingston. Cape Vincent to Oswego. — When at a point W. f N., H miles from Tibbett's Point light, as in the course from Cape Vincent to Big Sodus, steer S. S. W. | W. 16 miles to a point 8| miles W. ^ N. of Galloo Island light, when steer S. | W., 28^ miles to a point 1 mile N. | Bl of OswBgo beacon-light. Kingston to Niagara River and Port Dalhousie.— When abreast of Kingston and ^ mile from shore, steer W. by S., 4 miles LAKK ONTARIO. 37 until Snake Island light bears S. E. f S., 1^ miles distant, when steer S. i W. on a range of Simcoe and Pigeon Island lights for 2^ miles until within 1 mile ot Siracoe Island light, when steer S. .W. I S., 22^ miles to a point, 4 miles S. -| W. of False Ducks light, when steer W. by S. ^ S., 121 miles to a point, 4 miles N. 4 W. from Fort Niagara, or 131 miles to a point 4 miles N. f E. of Port Dalhousie light. Note. — When running on the course S. ^ W. on a range of Simcoe and Pigeon Island lights, the course leads very close to the west side of a 15-foot shoal If miles N. | E. from Simcoe Island light. Kingston to Oswego. — When l mile N. ^ E. from Simcoe Island light, and in range with it and PigeoTi Island light, as in the course from Kingston to Niagara river, steer S. W. f S., 1^ miles to a point f mile W. f N. of Simcoe Island light, thence S. f W., 46^ miles to a point 1 mile N. f E. of Oswego beacon light. Sackett's Harbor to Charlotte. — When i a mile north of Sackett's Harbor light, steer W. S. W. 9 miles to a point 3 miles N. f E. of Stony Point light, when steer W. S. W. f S. 75^ miles to a point 3 miles N. E. from Genesee light. Sackett's Harbor to Big Sodus. — When at a point 3 miles N. f E. of Stony Point light as in the course from Sackett's harbor to Charlotte, steer S. W. i W., 52 miles, until in range of the two beacon lights at Big Sodus, and 2 miles N. ^ E., from the onter beacon. Sackett's Harbor to Oswego. — When f a mile north of Sackett's Harbor light, steer W. S. W. 9 miles to a point 3 miles N. f E. of Stony Point light, when steer S, S. W. ^ W., 30 miles to a point 1 mile N. f E. of Oswego beacon light. Sackett's Harbor to Kingston. — When ^ mile north of Sackett's Harbor light, steer W. f N. 7 miles, passing f mile south of Point Peninsular until the west side of the point bears N. f E., then steer N. W. ^ W., 15 miles to a point ,1^ miles N. E. by E. of Pigeon Island light and in line with the light and Long point, on Wolfe island, thence N. by W. f W., 5^ miles to a point f mile W. f N. of Simcoe Island light, then N. E. f N., 1^ miles to a point 1 mile N. -J E. of Sim- coe Island light, and in range with it and Pigeon Island light ; thence N. ^ E., 2^ miles, keeping Pigeon Island and Simcoe Island lights in range until Snake Island light bears S. E. f S., H miles distant, when steer E. by N. 4 miles, until abreast of Kingston, keeping a ^ of a mile from the north shore. Sackett's Harbor to Point Peter.— When ^ mile north of Sackett's Harbor light steer W. S. W. 12^ miles to a point 3 miles west of Stony Point light, thence W. f N. 41 miles to a pomt 3 miles S. f W. of Point Peter light. Sackett's Harbor to Points on the north shore east of Toronto. See Courses and Distances on the north shore from Long Point, or Point Peter. Sackett's Harbor to Gibraltar Point.— When at a point 3 miles west of Stony Point light as in the course from Sackett's Harbor to Point Peter, steer due west 152 miles to a point 1 mile south of Gi- braltar light. This course should lead about 4 miles south of Point Peter light. Sackett's Harbor to Burlington Bay.— When at a point 38 LAKE ONTARIO. 8 miles west of Stony Point light as in the course from Sackett's Harbor to Point Peter, steer W. ^ 9. 175^ miles to the piers. OswesTO to Niagara River and Port Dalhousie.— When 1 mile N. by W. of Oswego light, steer W. ^ N. 99 miles, until Thirty- mile Point light bears 8. I W., 6^ miles distant, when steer W. by S. I S., 32 miles to a point 4 miles N. | W. from Fort Niagara light, or 42 miles to a point 4 miles N. f E. of Port Dalhousie. Little Sodus Bay to Sackett's Harbor.— When i^ miles N. f E. of Fair Haven light, steer N. E. f N., 41 miles to a point 3 miles N. f E. o^tony Point light, when steer E. N. E., 9 miles to a pointy a mile north UKackett's Harbor light. Little Sodus Bay to Cape Vincent.— When i^ miles K | E., of Fair Haven light, steer N. N. E., 37 miles to a point 3^ miles W. f N. from Galloo Island light, thence N. N. E. f E., 16 miles until Tib- bett's Point light bears E. f 8., 1^ miles distant, thence N. E.by E. ^ E., 4 miles until abreast of Cape Vincent. Little Sodus Bay to Kingston.— When H miles N. f E. of Fair Haven light, steer ^ . f E. 40 miles until False Ducks light bears W. f N. 4^ miles distant, when steer N. E. by N. 15 miles to a point f mile W. f N. from Simcoe Island light, when steer N. E. f N., 1^ miles to a point 1 mile N. ^ E. from Simcoe Island light, and in range with it and Pigeon Island light, when steer N. ^ E., 2^ miles, keeping Pigeon Island and Simcoe Island lights in range, until Snake Island light bears 8. E. f 8. 1^ miles distant, when steer E. by N. 4 miles, keeping within ^ of a mile of the north shore until abreast of Kingston. (See note under the course from Kingston to Niagara river.) Little Sodus to Gibraltar Point.— When li miles N. f E. of Fair Haven light, steer W. by N. ^ N. 136 miles to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. Little Sodus Bay to Niagara River and Port Dal- housie. — When 1^ miles N. f E. of Fair Haven light, steer W. f N. for 89^ miles to a point 2 miles N. | E. of Thirty-Mile Point light, thence W. f S., 30 miles to a point 4 miles N. f W. of Fort Niagara light, when steer W. by S. :^ S. 10 miles, or until Port Dalhousie light bears S. f W,, 4 miles distant. ' Little Sodus to Charlotte.— When l mile N. f E. of Pair Haven light, steer W. 1° S. 45 miles to a point 1 mile N. E. of Genesee light. Big Sodus to Sackett's Harbor.— When 2 miles N. | E. from the outer beacon, and in range with the two beacons at Big Sodus, steer N. E. f E. 52 miles to a point 3 miles N. f E.from Stony Point light when steer E. N. E., 9 miles to a point ^ a mile north of Sackett.'g Harbor light. Big Sodus to Kingston.— When 2 miles N. |^ E. from the outer beacon and in range of the two beacons at Big Sodus, steer N. N. E. I E., 6 If miles to a point } of a mile W. f N. of Simcoe Island light, when see course from Little Sodus bay to Kingston. Big Sodus to Niagara River and Port Dalhousie.^ When 2 miles N. ^ E. from the outer beacon, and in range of the two beacons, steer W. by N. ^ N., 62 miles to a point 2 miles N. f E. of Oak Orchard, thence W. f N., 15 miles to a point 2 miles N. f E. of Thirty- . -■-f ' LAKE ONTAEIO. 39 fl Harbor —When 1 Thirty- ^ by S. I bt, or 42 miles N. miles N. . i a mile lies N. I miles W. ntil Tib- ■ E. -J E., . f E. of ;ht bears t point i li miles e with it Pigeon ht bears » within te under N.f E. ; 1 mile b Dal- W. I N. 3t light, N'iagara ie light of Pair Genesee !^. iE. Sodus, y Point ackett's Dm the N.N. d light, sie.— ihe two of Oak Thirty- . mile Point light, whence see the course from Little Sodus bay to Niagara river and Port Dalhonsie. Big Bodu^ to Gibraltar Point.— When two miles N. | E. from the outer beacon and in range of the two beacons, steer W. by N. f N., 123 miles to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. Big Sodus to Cape Vincent. — When 2 miles N. ^ E. from the outer beacon, and in range of the two beacons, steer N. E. ^ N. 62 miiCS to a point 1^ miles \7. f N. of Tibbett's Point light, thence N. E. by E. ^ E. 4 miles until abreast of Cape Vincent. Charlotte to Kingston.— When 3 miles N. E. i A from Genesee light, steer N. E. I E., 56^ miles to a point 4 miles S. ^ YvTfrom False Ducks light, when steer N. E. f N., 22^ miles to a point 1 mile N. ^ E., from Simcoe Island light and in range with it and Pigeon Island light, when see course from Little Sodus bay to Kingston. Charlotte to Oswego. — When 3 miles N. E. i N., from Gene- see light, steer E. f N. 55 miles to a point 1 mile N. by W. of Oswego beacon-light. Charlotte to Niagara River and Port Dalhousie. — When 2 miles N. ^ E., from Genesee light, steer N. W. ^ W., 10 miles or until the point 3 miles west of Braddock's point bears S. ^ W., 2 miles distant, when follow along the shore W. by N., 21^ miles or until Oak Orchard light bears S. f W., 2 miles distant, thence W. f N., 15 miles or until Thirty-mile Point light bears S. f W., 2 miles distant, when see course from Little Sodus bay to Niagara river and Port Dalhousie. Charlotte to Gibraltar Point.-r-When 2 miles N. ^ E., from Genesee light, steer N. W. ^ W., 10 miles or until the point 3 miles west of Braddock's point bears S. ^ W., 2 miles distant, when steer W. by N. f N., 83 miles to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. Charlotte to Whitby. — When 2 miles N. ^ E. of Genesee light, steer N. W. ^ W. 10 miles or until the point 3 miles west ol Braddock's point bears S. ^ W., 2 miles distant^ then N. W. by W. 65 miles to a point 1 mile south of Whitby light. Charlotte to Burlington Bay. — When Thirty-mile Point light bears S. | W., 2 miles distant as in the course from Charlotte to Niagara, steer W. 66^ miles to the piers at Burlington Bay. Oak Orchard to Cape Vincent. — When 2 miles N. | E. of Oak Orchard light, steer E. N. E.^E.,11^ miles to a point 4 miles S. f W., of False Ducks light, when steer N. E. by E. ^ E., 28 miles to abreast of Cape Vincent and ^ mile from shore. Passing ^ mile N. W. of Charity shoal. Oak Orchard to Niagara Biver and Port Dal- housie. — When 2 miles N. | E. of Oak Orchard light, steer W. f N., 15 miles to a point 2 miles N. ^ E. from Thirty-mile Point light, whence see the course from Little Sodus bay to Niagara river and Port Dal- housie. Oak Orchard to Kingston.— When 2 miles N. | E. of Oak Orchard light, steer E. by N. f N. 77^ miles to a point 4 miles S. f W. of False Ducks light, when see course from Port Dalhousie to Kingston. Oak Orchard to Gibraltar Point.— When 2 miles N. | E. of Oak Orchard light, steer W. by N. ^ N. 61^- miles to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. r 40 LAKB ONTARIO. Thirty-mile Point to Oswego.— When 3 miles N. | E. of Thirty-mile Point light, steer E. i 8. 99 miles, to a point 1 mile N. by W. of Oswego beacon-light. Thirty-mile Point to Niagara and Port Dalhousie.— When 2 miles N. | E. of Thirty-mile Point light, steer W. f S. 30 miles to a point 4 miles N. f W. of Fort Niagara light, when steer W. S. W., ^ S. 10 miles or until Port Dalhousie light bears S. f W. 2 miles distant; this course leads close to the reefs off Niagara river. Port Dalliousie to Kingston. — When 4 miles N. f E. of Port Dalhousie light, steer E. by N. ^ N., 131 miles to a point 4 miles 8. ^ W. of False Ducks light, when steer N. E. f- N. 22^ miles, to a point 1 mile N. ^ E. of Simcoe Island light, and in range with it and Pigeon Island light; thence N. ^ E. 2^ miles, keeping Pigeon Island and Simcoe Island lights in range until Snake Island light bears S. E. f 8., 1^ miles distant, when steer E. by N., 4 miles until abreast of Kingston, keeping i^ of a mile from the north shore. (See note under the course from Kingston to Niagara river.) Port Dalhousie to Cape Vincent.— When 4 miles S. | W. of False Ducks light, as in the course from Port Dalhousie to Kingston, steer N. E. by E. ^ E., 28 miles, to abreast of Cape Vincent, and ^ mile from shore, passing ^ mile north of Charity shoai. Port Dalhousie to Oswego.- When 4 miles N. f E. of Port Dalhousie light, steer K. by N. f N. 29 miles, to a point 4^ miles N. f E. of Olcott light, when steer E. i S. Ill miles, to a pv/int 1 mile N. by W. of Oswego beacon-light. Port Dalhousie to Burlington Bay.— When i mile N. ^ E. of I'ort Dalhousie light, steer W. by N. ^ N. 27 miles to Burlington Bay light. Port Dalhousie to Gibraltar Point.— When i mile N. f E. of Port Dalhousie light, steer N, by W., 27 miles, to a point 1 mile southwest of Gibraltar Point light. Port Dalhousie to Whitby.— When l mile N. f E. of Port Dalhousie light, steer N. N. E. f E., 44^ miles, to a point 1 mile south of Whitby Harbor light. Port Dalhousie to Port Hope.— When i mile N. f E. of Port Dalhousie light, steer N. E. ^ E., 69 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Port Hope light. Port Dalhousie to Prestme Isle.— When 2 miles N. | E. of Port Dalhousie light, steer E. N. E. ^ N., 94 miles, to a point 2 miler S. ^ W. from Presque Isle light; this course leads 1 mile south of th« 10 foot spot, 6 miles S. W. by W. ^ W. from Presque Isle light. LAKE ONTARIO. 41 ST. I E. of lile N, by [)usie. — , 30 miles ¥. S. W., s distant; . f E. of 4 miles S. o a point id Pigeon id Simcoe 1^ miles , keeping Lirse from s S. I W. Kingston, id ^ mile . of Port is N. f E. N. by W. mile N. f irlington aile N. | It 1 mile i. of Port south of f E. of lie south . f E. of 2 miler h of th« ight. Compass Bearings and Distances from Lights on the South Shore to Lights on the North Shore. Stony Point to Point Peter W. i N. 43 Miles. Stony Point to Gibraltar Point W. 155^ Stony Point to Burlington Bay W. J 8. 178^ Oswego to False Ducks N. by W. i W. 36 Oswego to Point Peter N. W. iN. 42 Oswego to Port Hope N. W. by W. f W. 93 Oswego to Gibraltar Point W, i N. 145 Oswego to Whitby W. by N. | N. 123i Charlotte to Point Peter N. E. by N. 45i Charlotte to Presque Isle N. i E. 49 Charlotte to Port Hope N. N. W. f W. 66^ Big Sodus Beacon to Point Peter N. f W. 40 Big Sodus Beacon to Port Hope N. W. | W. 78^ Big Sodus Beacon to Whitby N. W. by W. i W. 105 Oak Orchard to Point Peter. N. E. by E. | E. 61 Oak Orchard to Port Hope N. 38i Oak Orchard to Whitby N. W. 48 Oak Orchard to Gibraltar Point W. N. W. i W 62^ Thirty-mile Point to Gibraltar Point. . . .N. W. by W. | W. 48 Thirty-mile Point to Burlington Bay W. 66i Thirty-mile Point to Point Peter E. N. E. 73 J Thirty-mile Point to Port Hope N. by E. i E. 39i Thirty-mile Point to Presque Isle N. E. i E. 58 Olcott io Gibraltar Point N. W. by W. i W. 88 Olcott to Port Hope N. E. by N. 46^ Fort Niagara to Whitby . .N. by E. i E. 40 Fort Niagara to Port Hope N.E. 6U Fort Niagara to Presque Isle N. E. by E. i E. 85 J Fort Niagara to Point Peter E. N. E. | E. 103 Fort Niagara to Gibraltar Point N. W. by N. i N. 30 N. B. — A good opportunity is afforded masters of vessels to test the working of their compasses, while on their course north of Simcoe Island light, or by dropping upon the range of the lights of Pigeon and Simcoe islands, about two miles to the south of Pigeon island and sailing upon the range of the two lights. The true range of the two lights is N. 3® W. The magnetic variation on shore in that vicinity is about 8° W. When sailing upon this range the course, as indicated by the needle, should either be N. 6*" E. or S. 6** W., which is practically N. \ E. and S. iW. Magnetic Declinations in degrees and tenths, corrected to the year 1890: Kingston 8.0 W. Oswego 8.0 W. False Ducks 7.8 W. Big Oodus 7.2 W. Charlotte 8.9 W. Thirty-mile Point 5.8 W. Niagara 4.8 W. Toronto 4.6 W. Burlington Bay 4.8 W. 42 LAKE ONTARIO. I Sailing Distances on the St. Lawrence River, Lake Ontario^ and Wetland Canal. Canadian Light Houses, Buoys a7id Harbors along North Shore of Lake Ontario, from Brock- ville to the Wetland Canal. the COLE SHOAL LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 6 miles. White, square wood tower, 37 feet high. On pier, 6 miles west of Brookville, three-fourths mile from the north shore of the river 8t. Lawrence. GRENADIER ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, square wood tower, 37 feet high, light 65 feet above high-water mark. On southwest point of island, north side of channel, 2 miles below RooV.port. LINDOE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white lighv, visible 7 miles. White, square wo)d tower, '20 feet high, light 40 feet above high- water mark. On northwest point of island, south side of channel, 5 miles west of Rockport. GANANOQUE NARROWS LIGHT-STATION. — A fixed white light, visible 7 miles. White, square wood tower, 37 feet high. On northeast end of Little Stave island, south side of channel, 6 miles l)olow Gananoque. JACKSTRAW SHOAL LIGHT-STATION. — A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, square wood tower, 29 feet high. On north side of channel, 2 miles below Qananoque. On a pier in river. ♦ . fej ehl w| O^ 641 of LAKE ONTARIO. 43 i 1173 )163 ilfil 1120 8« 72 60 44 28 126 9S 74 68 53 69 I Beacon. — A small pier, surmounted by a red drum on a mast, 700 feet southeast, one-half east from the light, marks the south edge of the channel. SPECTACLE SHOAL LIGHT-STATION. — A fixed white light, visible 9 miles. White, square wood tower 26 feet high. On north side of channel, 1^ miles west of Gananoque. On a pier in river. RED HORSE ROCK LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 9 miles. White, square wood tower. On a pier at head of an island, southeast side of channel, 1 mile above Spectacle shoal. BURNT ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, square wood tower, 26 feet high, li^ht 64 feet above high-water mark. On southeast part of island, north side of channel, one-half mile above Red Horse Rock. WOLFE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 6 miles. White, square wood tower. On Quebec, or east point of island. BROWN'S OR KNAPP'S POINT LIGHT-STA- TION. — A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, square wood tower, 20 feet high. On north side of Wolfe island, 4 miles below Kingston. KINGSTON LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visi- ble 17 miles. Wooden tower, on stone building, city clock. Light 96 feet from the base. Kingston has one of the best harbors on Lake Ontario. There are three channels by which it can be entered from the lake. The north channel is generally preferred. To enter by this chan- nel, when three-fourths mile W. i N. from Simcoe Island light, sUer N. E. f N., 1^ miles to a point 1 mile N. ^ E. from Simcoo Island light, and in range with it and Pigeon Island light, when steer N. ^ E., keeping the lights in range 2 J miles, until Snake Island light bears S. E. f S., 1^ miles distant, when steer E. by N. 4 miles, to abreast of Kingston and one fourth of a mile from shore. Good anchorage off the shipyard. The depth of water in the harbor and at the landing pisrs and wharves varies from 12 to 16 feet. The rocky bed of the river at the entrance is being deepened to 15 feet. SNAKE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, visible 6 miles. Square tower, 35 feet high, stone dwelling attached. On a pier on bar about 550 yards S. E. ^ E. from Snake island, and 4 miles from Kingston. There is a dangerous shoal with only 4 feet of water on it, 2^ miles W. by S. ^ S. from Snake Island light. Siiiicoe Island light S. S. W. ^ W., 2^ miles from Snake Island light. Shoal water connects Snake island and Snake Island liglit. SIMCOE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.- A fixed white light, visible III miles. White, circular stone tower, 40 feet high, light 45 feet above high-water mark. On southwest point of Simcoo island. There is a shoal, least water 4 feet, N, N. W, ^ W. 2^ miles from this light. A fog bell, struck by machinery, sounds 4 times each minute, in thick or foggy weather. False Ducks light S. W. ^ W,, I8f miles. Pi,t,'eon Island light, S, f W., 5!^ niiles. PIGEON ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white light, visible 13 miles, period of revolution, 70 seconds. White tower, 44 LAKE ONTARIO. n 41 feet high, light 46 feet above high water. On Pigeon island, S. W. I W., 4 miles from Longpoint. Charity Shoal buoy, S. E. ^ E., 3^ miles. False Ducks light, S. W. by W. | W., 14^ miles. Galloo Island light, S. by E. I E., 13| miles. Tibbett's Point light, E. ^ N., 9 i miles. FALSE DUCKS LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3d order, visible 16 miles. White tower, 62 feet high, light 68 feet above high water. On the east point of False Ducks island. Pleasant Point light. N. i W. 9 miles. Stony Point light, E. S. E. i S., 26 miles. West point of the main Duck, E. by S. i S., 8 miles. A shoal with 12^ feet of water over it, lies S. W. ^ W. 3^ miles. SOUTH BAY POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, visible 11 miles. White, square wood tower, with dwelling at- tached, light 36 feet above high water. On Point Traverse. CENTRE BROTHER ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White, square, wood tower, kitchen atcached, red iron lantern. On the northeast point of Centre Brother island, at the east entrance to the north channel, between Amherst island and the north shore of Lake Ontario. About 7^ miles to the westward of Kingston. POINT PLEASANT LIGHT-STATION.-A fixed white light, visible 10^ miles. Octagonal tower 52 feet high. West point of entrance to Bay of Quinte. Pigeon Island light E. by S., 14 miles. South Bay Point light, S. by W. f W., 9 miles. DESERONTO LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible II miles. White, square wood tower. On the roof of the freight shei^ of the Bay of Quinte Railway near the outer end of Company's wharf. Lit by gas. Will guide to Deseronto from Belleville, Pioton, and Napanee. TELEGRAPH ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White, square wood tower, on dwelling, li^ht 46 feet above high-water mark. On north side of Bay of Quinte, 7 miles from Belleville. BELLEVILLE LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 11 miles. White, square wood tower, on octagonal pier. On southeast edge of shoal, at entrance of Harbor, 450 feet west from ( nd of Grand Junction Railway wharf. POINT PETER, OR LONG POINT LIGHT-STATION. — Flashing white light, interval of flash 35 seconds, visible 16^ miles. White, circular stone tower, 60 feet high, light 62 feet above sea level on Long point. Steam fog-horn, 16 feet above water, gives blasts of 9 seconds, with silent intervals of 28 seconds. The fog alarm building is of wood, white, with brown roof, stands close in front of tower. A spit extends from this point nearly south 1^ mile. Ssilmon Point light N. W. by W. i W., 4 miles. Galloo Island li^'ht, E. i S., 36 miles. SALMON, OR WICKED POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed rod light, visible 12^ miloL. White, square tower on dwelling, light 40 feet above sea lovo' On point 4 miles to westward of Long point. Scotch Bonnet, W. by N. ^ N., 13^ miles. A spit extends W. S. W. 2 J miles from the point. SCOTCH BONNET, OR EGG ISLAND LIGHT-STA- TION. — A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White stone tower, light LAKK ONTilBIO. Ua 64 feet above sea level. On small island 1 mile southwest of Nicholson's island. Cobourg, W. by N. 32^ miles. Presque Isle light, N. W. | W., 10 miles. Presque Isle Main lil^bt. — A fixed white light, visible 16i miles. White, octagonal stone tower, 63 feet high, light 67 feet above sea level. On East point 24^ miles loo the eastward of Cobourg. There is a shoal spot with 3 feet of water over it, E. t S., nearly 2 miles f'oar the main light, and another S. W.-by W. i W. 5J miles with 10 feet of water over it. Mnrrajr Canal and approaches. Including aids to naTlgatfon. The Murray canal is a straight cut (tangent) 6^ statute miles long between extremi- ties of piers, 80 feet wide on the bottom, and 12^ feet deep below the ordinary low water level of Lake Ontario, or the zero of the Toronto gauge, joining the head of the Bay of Quinte with Presqu'ile Bay in Lake Ontario. It has no locks but is crossed by 3 highway bridges and 1 railroad bridge. At each end of the canal crib- work piers have been built out on both sides into the sliallow water, and beyond them a dredged channel 200 feet wide has been continued until water of the same depth as that in the canal is reached. The dredged cut at the east end extends 2,800 feet beyond the piers, and is for its whole length in the axis of the canal, viz.: E. by N. f N. ; at the west end the dredging follows the axis of the canal W. by 8. -f 8. 6,520 feet; it is then deflected 10° to the southward and runs straight on the bearing of 8. W. by W. t W. a distance of 8,820 feet, where deep water in Presqu'ile bay is reached. From this poi"t a bearing of 8. E. i 8. and distance of 4,150 feet lead to the entrance of the dredgtvi channel from Presqu'ile bay into Lake Ontario. This channel bears 8. E. by E. i E., is 9,200 feet long and leads past Calf Pasture shoal 'and 8alt Point lights, the former being left 560 feet and the latter 300 feet distant on the cfcarboard hand going out. After passing 8alt point the channel gradually widens to 1,000 feet until deep water in Lake Ontario is reached. The canal was opened for traffic on April 14, 1890, and completed in August, 1890. Its approaches have been marked by a system of buoys and lighted beacons, as follows: Buoys. 1. Approaching the canal from the eastward, or Bay of Quint6 side, a red spar buoy 16 leet long has been moored in 10 feet water on the east end of a shoal which extends from Indian island, in the Bay of Quinte. From this buoy the centre pier of the swing of Trenton bridge bears N. W. by N. distant 11,040 feet, the single tall pine tree on Indian island W. by 8., distant 6,000 feet, and the east entrance of the canal 8. W. by W. i W., distant 11,360 feet. This buoy is only about 1.800 feet from the Prince Edward County shore, but the best channel is to the south of it. 2. A similar buoy has been moored in 13 feet water near the east end, and on the north side of the dredged channel leading from deep water of the Bay of Quints to the eastern entrance of the canal. This buoy is distant 1,640 feet from the end of the cribwork at the east end of the canal. The middle of the dredged channel is 100 feet south of the buoy. 8. In Presqu'ile bay 8 red spar buoys, 16 feet long, moored in 18 feet water on the south edge of the dredged channel which is parallel with the axis of the canal, and respectively 2,260. 4,420 and 6,500 feet distant from the west end of the canal cribwork. The last described of these buoys (No. 20) is placed at the angle between that part of the dredged cut which bears W. by 8. f 8. and the part which bears 8. W. by W. i W., and from it Brighton range light No. 8 is distant W. * 8. 700 feet. 4. A red spar buoy, No. 18, in 13 feeo on the south side of the channel bearing 8. W. by W. J W., and midway between Nos. 20 and 16. 5. A red spar buoy. No. 16, in 13 feet at the west extremity and on the south side of the last named dredged channel. From this buoy range light No. 1 bears 8. W. by W. i W., distant 1,400 feet. 6. A red spar buoy. No. 14, in 13 feet water on the north side and at the west extreme of the dredged channel boarinu' 8. E. by E. i E., whicli leads from Presqu'ile bay to Lake Ontario. From this last imnied buoy outwards the sides of the dredged cut are marked by six black and six red spar l)uoy8. vJanal Lights. — There an; 6 lights, maintained by the canal authorities on the pici'heads and bridges as follows; 1, A fixed red light visihlo 4 miles from all points of approach by water, shown from a lenticular lantern, elevated 19 feet above the water, standing on a square V^ v/: ,/ Ub LAK£ O^TAKIO. W pyramidal open frame 30 feet from the end of the nort?i pier at the east entrance of the canal. The frame is 12 feet high above the pier and is painted brown, 2. A light visible 6 miles up and down the canal is shown from a lenticular lan- tern, elevated 85 feet above the water, and placed over the swing pier of the Carrying Place highway bridge, which is 4,725 feet up the canal from the last described light. The lantern is so arranged that when the swing is open for vessels a white light is shown over the southern edge of th^i swing piei, and when closed a red light is shown directly over the middle of the pier. 3. A similar light to the last described, but only 20 feef above the water, on the swing pier of the Central Ontario Railway bridge, which is 1,500 feet westerly from the Carrying Place bridge. 4. A light similar in every respect to No. 2 on the Smithfleld bridge, which crosses the canal near the middle of its length or 6,600 feet westerly from the railway bridge 5. A similar light on Lovatt's bridge, which crosses the canal 6,490 feet from the western extremity of the western piers or 7,700 feet from the last named. 8. A fixed red light, visible 4 miles from all points of approach by water is shown from a lenticular lantern elevated 14 feet above the water, standing within a square pyramidal open frame 30 feet from the outer end of the north pier at the west entrance of the canal. The frame is 12 feet high above the pier and is painted brown. Brighton Range Etights. — A range light which will be known as Brighton Range Light, No. 3, established by the government of Canada. The tower is a square wooden building painted white, and 30 feet high from its base to the vane on the lantern. It stands upon an octagonal cribwork pier sunk in 15 feet water in tlie ' axis of the canal and on the north side of the channel which bears S. W. by W. f W. It is distant 7,200 feet from the end of the canal piers and 3,920 feet from Brighton wharf. The light is fixed while, elevated 29 feet above the water, aad visible 3 miles down the canal and in the direction of No, 1 range light. In one with No. 2 light it leads up from the canal through the centre of the channel and is to be left 100 feet on the starboard hand in passing up. After being passed if brought directly astern with No. 1 directly ahead it will guide through the remainder of the dredged chan> nel. A range light which will be known as the Brighton Range Light No. 2, estab- lished under similar circumstances, stands 5,360 ftet W. by 8. f S. from No. 3 or 1.440 feet from Brighton wharf. The light is fixed red, elevated 45 feet above the water, and should be visible 6 miles down the canal in alignment with No. 3. or from W. by 8. 1 8. and through the dredged channel, through fcialt Point and Calf Pasture shoals in alignment with No. 1, or N. W. by W. i W. The tower is a square wooden building, painted white, 47 feet high, and stands on a square cribwork pier sunk Presqu'ile bay in 7 feet water. A range light, which will be known as Brighton Range Light, No. 1, stands 1.420 feet 8. E. by E. i F from No. 2, and 1,100 feet from Brighton wharf. The light is fixed white, elevated 28 feet above the water, and should be visible 6 miles in align- ment with No. 2, and also toward No. 3 light. The tower is a square wooden build- ing, painted white, with iron lantern red, is 30 feet high, and stands on an octagonal cribwork pier sunk in Presqu'ile bay in 14 feet water. Calf Pasture Shoal Light.— (Discontinued.) Salt Point Back Kange Light. — (Discontinued.) Sailing Directions.— Vessels approaching the canal from the eastward should keep the Prince Edward shore close on board after passing the Nigger Island buoys, until the Indian Island buoy is passed, when they can bear up b. W. by W. i W. towards the canal entrance until the centre line of the canal is reached. By day the centres of the swings of the bridges, by night the lights on the same (white if swings are open, red if closed), in one will indicate with suflicient accuracy the middle of the dredged channel and of the canal, and are to be kept in alignment. Each bridge is passed to the south of the swing, which is somewhat to the northward of the axis. In leaving the canal going westward, the same marks In rear wiV give the middle of the first portion of the dredged channel, while No. 3 and No. 3 Brighton light in one in front sliow tlio siinie alignn ent. The middle of this channel is only 100 feet distant from llie throe red buoys marking its south edge. A conspicuous point of rushes at No. 22 buoy runs out into deep water and sliould be passed close to instead of being given a wide berth as is usual. This course, W. by 8. | 8., ii LAKE ONTARIO. 45 kept unlfl No. 3 light is only 200 feet ahead, when the vessel should hear up S. W. by W. 5 W., for No. 1 Brighton li^ht. As soon aa huoy No. 16 is passed she should bear up 8. E. i S. until lights Nos. 1 and 2 are brought in one bearing N. W. by W. i W. astern. This alignment leads out through the middle of the dredged channel through Calf Pasture and Salt Point shoals, and as soon as Presqu'ile main light W. bears the vessel is in Lake Ontario clear of all shoals. The bearings are magnetic. The variation of the magnet for 1891 is about 7* westwardly, Weller's Bay, Bear Light.— A fixed white light. White, square, open frame- work, wood tower 37 feet high. Near the west end of Quinte's Carrying Place. The rear light tower at Weller's Bay has been moved 31 feet west- wardly so as to bring the two lights in line with the extremity of the Spit off Bald Head. In this position they show the best water over Weller's Bar, which lies about 3,300 feet outside of Bald Head Spit. Vessels entering should bring the lights in range bearing N. E. by E., and should find 10 feet water on the bar on this line. Inside the bar they will have to open the lights to the westward to clear the spit, which is marked by a white- washed tripod 16 feet high. Good water will be found on the line of range inside the spit until in line with Pine Point. Weller's Bay, Front Kange Light. — A fixed red light. White square wood tov/er 27 feet high, 520 feet S. W. by W. from rear light. Cohourg East Pier. — A fixed white light. White, square wood tower, visible 8 miles. On east pier. This is a corporation light and not under the Marine Department. Lighted with gas. Cohourg, East Pierhead Light.— A fixed white light, on a mast. On the east pierhead, S. by W. ^ W., 380 feet outside of the Cor- poration light. *' Cohourg, West Pierhead Light.— A fixed red light. Shown from a lantern on a mast 20 feet above the pier. Oswego light, E. S. E. f S., 88^ miles. Port Dalhousie light, S. W. | W., 74 miles. Gibraltar Point light, W. by S. f S.; 66 miles. Harbor piers 130 feet apart, direc- tion of piers south. PETER ROCK, OR GULL ROCK LIGHT-STATION — A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. Octagonal stone tower 48 feet high. On a rock off the point, about 3 miles W. by S. from Cobourg light, and about 2^ miles east of Port Hope light. Port Hope Pierhead Light.— A fixed red and white light. On pierhead east side shows a red liglit to the south and a white light to the east and west. Long Point light, PI by S. 55 miles. Burlington Bay light, 8. W. by W. f W., 87i miles. The shore line, 10 miles to the westward, bears W. by 8. J 8. The direction of harbor piers south. The breakwater, 300 feet in length, is completed; depth of water in the new harbor, 11 feet, and in the old harbor 9A feet. The 12 inches. 'ho elevation in the water fluctuates from 6 to _ Newcastle Pierliead Light.— A fixed white light visibii! lo miles. Small wooden tower rising Iroin the roof of storehouse. On the outer end of the easterly pier. The harbor is located about 6 miles to the eastward of Port Darlington, at the Point marked on the Admiralty charts " Bond Head," and now known as Newcastle harbor. It was 46 I^AKK ONTARIO. n originally a marsh through which ran a stream. The entrance is pro- tected by two breakwater piers. Darlington Pierhead Liffht.— A fixed white light. On a stone house on the east pier, 20 miles to the westward of Port Hope and 15 to the eastward of Whitby. Point Peter, or Long Point light, E. i S., 74 miles. Port Dalhousie light, S. W. i S., 54| miles. The harbor piers are 160 feet apart; direction of piers south. Oshawa Pierliead Ligllt.— A fixed white light on pierhead. Thare is only one pier, six miles to the eastward of Whitby. Wllitby Pierhead Light* — A fixed white light. On a square, wood tower on the west pier. Gibraltar Point light, S.W. by W. f W., 28 miles. Long Point light, E. f S., 87^ miles. The harbor piers are 250 *eet fpart; direction of piers S. by E. The west pier is 646 feet in ' me t . anchor, or run to the wharves. Depth of water between the piers, ;• feet. Frenchman's Bay, or Pickering Pierhead Light.— A fixed green light, visible 10 miles. White octagonal wood tower 47 feet high on the east pierhead. Direction of piers about S. by E. ^ E. The east pier is 685 feet in length and the west pier 835 feet. Pickering is about 20 miles to the north, and east of Gibraltar point GIBRALTAR POINT LIGHT-STATION.— Revolving white light, interval of revolution 45 seconds, visible 16 miles. White, hexagonal stone tower, 62 feet high, keeper's dwelling near, light 66 feet above sea level. Fog whistle building of wood, white, with brown roof. On the southwest side of Gibraltar point If miles south of Tor- onto. During thick and foggy weather a fog horn, operated by com- pressed air, sounds blasts of 7 seconds' duration, with intervals of 90 seconds; established 1886. Fog signal house 1150 feet S. W. by S. from the light-house. Burlington Bay light, S. W. k W., 28^ miles. Long Point light, E. f K, 113 miles. Presque Isle light, E. by N. 90 miles. Toronto Range Lights, Front Light.— A fixed white light, visible 9 miles, white, hexagonal wood tower, 23 feet high. On west end of Queen's wharf; 37 feet from extreme end, visible over an arc of 180''. Fog bell rung by hand attached to tower. Baclc Range Light. — A fixed red light, visible 8 miles, red octagonal wood tower, 35 feet high. On an extension shoreward of the wharf, 200 feet N. E. by N. ^ N., from front light, visible over an arc of 180«>. The two lights in range lead clear of the point of the bar. A storm signal apparatus, established in 1874, is located close to the front range light tower. The following described buoys are placed oflP Gibraltar point to mark the bank to the south and southwest or the light-house point: One iron can buoy painted red, with black ring, and black ball on the end, the point light-house bears from it N. W. by N. f N. A bell buoy (red), the light bears N. N. W. i W. Another red can buoy, the light bears N. f W. Another red can buoy, the light bears N. by E. r i LAKE ONTABIO. 47 ice 18 pro- ■; cht. On a 1 Port Hope 1 *oint li&:nt, 1 liles. The 1 pierhead. 7- i n a 80 u are, 1 by W. f 1 arbor piers 1 pier is 646 '; larbor run » the west* of water .ight.— A tower 41 3. by E. i 835 feet. dtar point -Revolving P s. White, r, light 66 irith brown ith of Tor- d by com- I rvals of 90 >; W. by S. 28^ miles. ;. by N. 90 :ed white high. On le over an miles, red ird of the • an arc of )ar. 3se to the It to mark ind black f. IN. I Nl Another red can buoy (with white ring around it and white ball on the end), the light bears N. E. ^ E. • A red spar buoy stands on the northwest point of the bank, N. W. ^ N. from the can buoy, with white ring and white ball on the end. The lighthouse bears E. N. E., and the cupola on the Central Prison N. W. by N. f N. Tho can buoys are placed in eight fathoms of water and the spar buoy in 17 feet, vessels should not pass inside of them, as the bank rises very abruptly. 48 LAKE ONTARIO. 1 I An additional spar bnoy painted red has been placed on the north- west point of the island in 17 feet of water. West Channel. — A red spar buoy, No. 16, placed in 13 feet of water, at the entrance of the west channel, on the southwest point of the bar. A black spar buoy. No. 1, on the north side and western extremity of the channel. Between these two buoys is the dredged channel, about fourteen feet deep forming the western entrance to the harbor. The range of lights leads in between them, N. E. by N. ^ N. There are six red spar buoys in 9 feet of water on the face of the bank to the eastward of No. 16, defining the southern limit of the dredged channel, which is about 300 feet wide. The northern limit of the chan- nel is defined by the wharves. £ast Channel* — The buoys it the east channel are placed thus, namely: Two black spar buoys on the west or port side coming into the bay, and two red spar buoys on the east or starboard side. There are 6 feet of water mid-channel between the buoys. Landmarks on com- ing into the East Channel are, the cupola of the St. Lawrence Hall, in range with steeple of the Methodist Church (with four spires on the top) on Church street. The course by compass coming in is N. W. by N. A spar buoy is placed on the boiler, or to the south of the Gap. Vessels should not go to the N. W. of it. Port Credit Pierhead Light. — A fixed white light, visible 11 miles. White, square wood tower, 36 feet high. At the outer end of north breakwater pier, visible from all points of approach. Gibraltar Point light E. by N. i N., 10 miles. Port Dalhousie light S. E. by S. f S., 28 miles. Oakville Pierhead Light.— A fixed white light, visible ii miles. White wood towei', 39 feet above lake level. On a crib 6^ feet above the level of the east pier. The center of the tower is 31 feet from the southern extremity of the pier, and 14 feet from the inner or western edge, and about 330 feet outside the shore line. Port Dalhousie light S. E. i E., 26 miles. Burlington Bay light S. W. | S., 11 miles. Gibraltar light N. E. i E., 17 miles. BURLINGTON BAY LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 15 miles. White stone building, light VO feet above sea level. On the shore near the middle of the south pier. Burlington Bay Pierhead Light. — A fixed white light, vis- ible 10 miles. White, wood tower, light 30 feet above sea level. Near the outer end of son^h pier. Gibraltar Point light, N. E. J E., 28^ miles. Port Dalhousie light, E. by S. f S., 27 miles. Burlington Bay is at the west end of Lake Ontario ; it is formed by a narrow neck of land 6^ miles in length, connecting the north and south shores of the lake. A channel has been cut through this neck 1^ miles from the north shore, connecting the deep water in the lake with the deep water in the bay The sides of the channel are protected by two piers nearly parallel. The south pier is 2,850 feet long and the north pier 2,430 feet in length. Width between the piers, at the lake ends, 110 feet, narrowing to 116 feet at the shore lines. Direction of piers, N. E. i| E. The least water is midway between the two lights, average depth 12 feet, with 17 feet at the entrance from the lake. To enter the harbor from the lake, bring the lights to bear LAKE ONTARIO. 49 bove sea southwest when they should be in range, and run for them, approaching the pier, open the lights a little to port, and run in. On a aark night, keep the south pier close on board, to avoid the end of the north pier, which is 420 feet inside the end of the south pier; this precaution is also necessary because the south pier, when opposite the end of the north Sier, diverges a little to the northward. Burlington Bay is one of the est harbors on the lake ; there are from 6 to 10 fathoms of water over mud and clay bottom. There is a rush-bed, with from 4 to 6 feet of water on it, 8. W. by S. from the piers, about 600 feet from the shore, and 300 feet east of the H. & N. W. elevator, marked with a black barrel buoy on the northwest end in 8 feet of water. Another rush-bed off the foot of James street, Hamilton, extends about 900 feet into the bay, which is marked with a black spar buoy in 9 feet of water on the north- west end of it, bears S. W. by W. ^ W. from the piers. Vessels bound to the city wharves, or the G. T. R. R. wharves, will pass this buoy to port. Course from the pier to the city S. W. by W. f W., 4^ miles. PORT DALHOUSIl. LIGHT - STATION.— Revolving white light, visible 13 miles. White circular wooden tower, light 53 feet above high water. On the east pier, 339 feet from the outer end, at the eastern entrance to Welland canal, shows from E. to W. by S. Interval of revolution, 1 minute. Note. — The Welland canal (new) is 28 miles in length, with 28 locks, the locks are 270 feet long and 45 feet wide and capable of locking a vessel 250 feet long and 44 feet beam, the depth of water is from 12| to 14 feet. Port Dalhousie (South light).— A fixed white light. White, square wood tower. On end of east pier, 315 feet S. ^ W. from main light. The piers are 200 feet apart, about 2,000 feet in length, direci tion N. :^ E. Depth of water 14 feet at low water. The north side of the outer reef off the mouth of Niagara river, N. E. by E. ^ E., 11 miles. Burlington Bay light, W. by N. f N., 27 miles. Gibraltar light, N. f W., 28 miles. One lamp shows N. J E., one N. W., and one S. W., or up the harbor. N. B. — There are ranges for ascertaining compass errors at this port. Particulars can be obtained at the canal ofUce. Niagara Fog Bell. — On the north rampart of Fort Mississagoa has been discontinued. A bell buoy has been placed on the reef off the mouth of the Niagara river. See page 35. Compass Courses and Distances on the North Shore of Lake Ontario. Kingston to Long Point or Point Peter.— When abreast of Kingston and one-fourth mile from shore, steer W. by S., 4 miles, until Snake Island light bears S. E. f S., \\ miles distant, when steer S. \ W., on a range of Simcoe and Pigeon Island lights 2^ miles, up+il within 1 mile of Simcoe Island light, when steer S. W. f S., 22^ miles, to a point 4 miles S. f W. of False Ducks light, when steer W. by S., 19^ miles to a point 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light. NoTB. — When running on the course S. ^ W. on a range of Simcoe 50 LAKB ONTARIO. and Pigeon Island lights, the course leads very close to the west side of a 16-foot shoal If miles N. I E. from Simcoe Island light. Lon^ Point to Presque Isle.— When 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light, steer W. N. W. i N., 18 miles, to a point 1 mile S. ^ W. From the Scotch Bonnet light, when steer N. W. ^ N. heading on Presque Isle light for 9 miles, or to within 1^ miles of it, when steer about north until in range of the Harbor light and Salt Point light. Long Point to Port Hope.— When 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light, steer W. by N. ^ N., 65 miles, to a point' 1 mile south of Port Hope light. This course leads close to the south side of a reef with 18 feet of water over it, 4 miles S. ^ W. from the Scotch Bonnet light. Long Point to Wllitby.— When 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light, steer W. f N., 87^ miles, to a point 1 mile south of Whitby. Long Point to Gibraltar Point.— When 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light, steer W. i S., 113 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. Long Point to Burlington Bay.— When 3 miles S. | W. of Long Point light, steer W. ^ S., 136 miles, to within 1 mile of the beacon sKt Burlington Bay. Lon^ Point to Niagara River.— When 3 miles S. ^ W. of Long Point light, steer W. by S. f S., 102^ miles, to a point 1 mile N. W, J W. from Fort Niagara; see course from Gibraltar to Fort Niagara. Long Point to Cape Vincent.— When 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light, steer E. by N. 1 9^ miles, to a point 4 miles S. f W. Qf False r-ucks light, when steer N. E. by E. ^ E. 28 miles to abreast of Cape Vincent, and ^ a mile from shore. Passing ^ mile north of Charity shoal. Compass Bearings and Distances from Point Peter light to lights on the south shore: v To Stony Point E. Oswego S, 8 43 miles. 3.iS 42 " Charlotle •* BIj? Sodus 8. i E. " Oak Orchard 8. W. by W. f *• Thirty-mile Point W. 8. W •• Fort Niagara W. 8. W. | W. S.W. byS 45J ~ ~ 40 61 73i 103 Presque Isle to Gibraltar Point.— When 3 miles S. ^ W. from Presque Isle light, steer W. i S., 89 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. Presque Isle to Port Dalhousie.— When 2 miles S. ^ W. from Presque Isle light, steer W. S. W. ^ S., 94 miles, to a point 2 miles N. f E. of Port Dalhousie light. Presque Isle to Charlotte. — When 1 mile S. E. from main light, steer S. ^ W., 47^ miles, to a point 1 mile N. E. ^ N. from Gfenesee light. Presque Isle to Oswego. — When 1 mile S. E. from main light, steer S. E. | S., 9^ miles, to a point 1 mile S. ^ W. from the Scotch Bon- net light, thence S. E. f E., 67 miles, to a point 1 mile N. by W. of Os- wego beacon-light. .■.'lit. J. LAKE ONTARIO. 61 Presque Isle to Big Sodus.— When 2 miles S. i W. from main light, steer S. E. by S. i S., 57i miles, to a point 1 mile N. | E. from the piers and in line with the range lights. Cobourg to Gibraltar Point.— When l mile south of Co- bourg lights, steer W. by S. f S., 66 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. Cobourg to Long Point.— When l mile south of Cobourg lights, steer E. by S. f S., 50^ miles, to a point 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light. This course leads across the south end of the 3 fathom shoals south of the Scotch Bonnet light. In rough weather it would be well to keep a little farther to the southward. Cobourg to Oswego. — When l mile south of Cobourg lights, steer E. S. E. i S., 88 miles, to a point 1 mile N. by W. from Oswego beacon light. Port Hope to Port Dalhousie.— When i mile south of Port Hope light, steer S. W. i W., 69 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Port Dalhousie light. Port Hope to Whitby.— When 1 mile south of Port Hope light, steer W. by S. i S., 10 miles, thence W. i S., 24 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Whitby light. Port Hope to Gibraltar Point.— When i mile south of Port Hope light, steer W. by S. | S., 10 miles, thence W. by S. | S., 61 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light. Port Hope to Burlington Bay.— When l mile south of Port Hope light, steer W. S. W. ^ S., 87 miles, to the piers. Whitby to Gibraltar Point.— When l mile south of Whitby light, steer W. S. W. | S., 28 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Gibraltar Point light Whitby to Fort Niagara.— When l mile south of Whitby light, steer S. by W. f W., 38^ miles, to a point 1 mile N. W. i W. from Fort Niagara light. Whitby to Charlotte.— When l mile south of Whitby light, steer S. E. by E, ^ E., 66 miles, or until the point 3 miles west of Braddock's point bears S. ^ W. 2 miles distant, thence S. E. ^ E. 10 miles, or until Genesee light bears S. ^ W., 2 miles distant. Whitby to Little Sodus.— When l mile south of Whitby light, steer E. by S. i S., 1 15^ miles, to a point 1^ miles N. f E. of Fair Haven light. Gibr«altar Point to Long Point, and Kingston.— When one mile south of Gibraltar Point light, steer E. ^ N., 113 miles, to a point 3 miles S. f W. of Long Point light, thence E. by N., 19^ miles, to a point 4 miles S. f W. of False Ducks light, when steer N. E. f N., 22 J miles, to a point 1 mile N. ^ E. of Siracoe Island light, and in range with it and Pigeon Island light ; thence N. ^ E. 2^ miles, kf^ping Pigeon Island and Simcoe Island lights in range until Snake Is^ d light bears S. E. f S., 1 J miles distant, when steer E. by N., 4 miles, ; .til abreast of Kingston, keeping ^ of a mile from the north shore. Note. — When running on the course N. J E. on a range of Simcoe and Pigeon Island lights, the course leads very close to the west side of a 16-foot shoal which lies N. f E., 1^ miles from Simcoe Island light. 52 NIAGASA BIVER. Gibraltar Point to Fort Niagara.— When i mile south of Gibraltar Point light, steer S. li. f S. 26 miles, to a poii. , N. f W. Sf miles from Fort Niagara light, then steer S, f W. with Fr . t Mississagua a little to starboard for 3 miles, or until Fort Niagara light bears 8. E. by S. distant 1 mile, when steer about S. E. by S.\ 8., keeping a little outside the range of the wharves under the Fort^ntil past the wharves, when keep up the middle of the river, 6 miles to Lewiston ; no dangers in the river. Gibraltar Point to Burlington Bay. — When i mile west of Gibraltar Point light, steer S. W. i W., 28 miles, to the pier head light. Burlington Bay to Oswego. — When ^ mile east of the beacon iiglro, steer E. i N., 65 miles, to a point 2 miles N. f E. of Thirty- mile Point light, thence E. ^ S., 99^ miles, to a point 1 mile N. by W. from Oswego beacon light. Burlington Bay to Niagara River.— When i mile east of the beacon light, steer E. i S., 35 miles, to a point N. f W., 3f miles from Fort Niagara light, when see course from Gibialtar Point to Fort Niagara. NIAGARA RIVER. Jl Light-Houses and Buoys Standing up the River above the Falls. Sailing Directions. — There is no good anchorage in this river, owing to the strong current and the character of the bottom, which is rocky throughout. Southwest gales in Lake Erie raise the water at the head of the river from 3 to 5 feet, and increase the current; further down, the effect is not so great; northeast winds produce a contrary affect. The Rapids begin a mile above the Falls and just below Chip- pewa, Canada. On the American side, foul ground commences three- fourths mile below Grand island, and extends more than half-way across the river. The channel west of Grand island, up to the head of Straw- berry island, is known as the "Chippewa" channel; it is 10 miles long, 660 to 1,150 yards in width (only 450 at Navy island), and 2 to 6 fathoms deep. Tonawanda Channel. — This channel lies on the south and east sides of Grand island, and the east of Frog and Strawberry islands; length, 8 miles from foot of Tonawanda island to head of Strawberry island; width, 350 to 1,000 yards. It is not safe to attempt to take more than 12 feet draught between Tonawanda and Grand islands; best water on the Grand island side, above Tonawanda to Strawberry island, 3 to 5 fathoms; 14 feet of water east of Strawberry island. The east - shore of channel is bold throughout, also the west niiore, until up with the Mink Island Shoal buoy; current, 3 to 6 miles per hour, depending on width of channel. Sailing Directions. — From channel cast of Tonawanda island, round Buoy No. 1, close aboard, or pass around Iron-works Shoal buoy, NIAGARA RIVER. 53 as may be most oonvenient; then, standing up the channel, pass the red buoys in order, leaving them to the starboard, and giving them a fair berth. After passing Nice's Shoal buoy, No. 4, keep in mid-channel, favoring, if anything, the Grand Island shore, until up with the foot of Frog island, when take the eastern shore and pass the buoys in order. From Strawberry Island buoy, No. 10, steer for the draw-pier of the In- ternational Railroad bridge. From this bridge up, see directions for main channel. Iron-works Shoal. — Spar buoy, red and black horizontal stripes, in 12 feet of water. On a small shoal, southeast corner of Iron- works wharf, E. f S. Tonawanda Spit. — Black spar buoy in 11 feet of water, on north point of spit making out from Tonawanda island. Southwest cor- ner of Iron-works wharf, N. N. E. Jl^ E. West Bank. — Red spar buoy in 13 feet of water, on west bank of channel between Grand island and Tonawanda island. Cupola of iron-works, N. E. f E. !East Bank. — Black spar buoy in 13 feet of water, on east bank of channel between Grand island and Tonawanda island. Cupola of iron-works, N. by E. j[ E. Nice's Slioal. — Red spar buoy in 13 feet of water, on west bank of channel between Grand island and Tonawanda island, above Tona- wanda island. Northeast corner of Capstan-house on Grand island, N. |W. Mink Island Shoal. — Red, 3d-class can buoy in 13 feet of water, west side of channel, and marks the outer edge of a rocky spit, extending out from Strawberry island, just below Mink island. Draw- pier of International bridge, S. f E. Elbow. — Red spar buoy in 12 feet of water, marks the elbow of the shoal at the head of Strawberry island, and stands about midway between the island and the main land. A straight course may be made between this and the Strawberry Island Shoal buoy, bearing S. by W. ^ W. Mink Island Shoal buoy, N. by W. i W. Strawberry Island Shoal. — Red, 2d-cla88 nun buoy in 13 feet of water, on the west side and at the head of Tonawanda channel^ it stands 360 yards from the American, and 770 yards from the Canadian shore, and marks the end of a rocky shoal extending one-third mile from the upper end of Strawberry island. Draw-pier of international bridge, S. i E. Grand Island Channel. Sailing Directions. — This channel lies between Grand island, on the west, and Frog and Strawberry islands, on the east; it is a mile long, '259 yards in width, and 12 foot of water may be carried tlirough. Shoal water extends from Grand island nearly half-way across to the op- posite side; Frog island and the islet above are bold. A spit makes out 100 yards into the chnnnol from the lower end of Strawberry island. The channel east of Strawberry island should be taken in preference to this, except by those thoroughly acquainted with the locality. The navigation of this channel should not oe attempted except by those well 64 NIAGARA. EIVBB. acquainted with it, as the bottom is irregular, solid rock, and the current very strong. Grand Island Shoal. — Red, 2d-class nun buoy in 13 feet of water. West side of channel, near its head, and marks the eastern edge of a shoal extending 500 yards southeast from the head of Grand island. It stands close to the end of the shoal. Hell's Half- Acre buoy, S. E. Hell's Half- Acre. — Black, 2d-class nun buoy in 13 feet of water. On the east side of channel, at its head, and marks the outer edge of a small reef, with 4 feet of water on it, extending to westward from Straw- berry island, near its middle. Twelve feet water can be carried between these buoys. Draw-pier of International bridge, S. S. E. f E. Main Channel Above Strawberry Island. Sailing^ Directions. — The reach, known as the "Narrows," be- ginning at the lower end of Squaw island, is 2 miles long, one-third mile wide, and from 3 to 6 fathoms deep; good water to within 150 yards of either side; current 5 miles per hour, increasing to 7 at the head; at the latter point, a little east of mid-channel, is the Buffalo water-works crib, which may be passed on either side, good water close to tbj Black Rock Harbor pier for one-third n.ile above and below the crib. Black Rock harbor is a canal, 3^ miles long and 100 to 800 feet wide, formed along the river front of Buffalo by Squaw island and a pier extending from its upper end. This canal is used by light-draught vessels bound up, to avoid the strong current of the Narrows; 7 feet of water may be carried through; a lock near the lower end. No danger. International Bridge. — This bridge spans the river nea* ,he middle of Squaw island. The drav is nearest the east shore, c is lighted at night by a stationary red fight on each end of the draw \ lers, low down on the free end of each protection pier, and on each side of the pivot, pier where it is crossed by the axis of the bridge. Three square lanterns, each 16 feet above the top of the draw span, mark its ends and middle, and show reJ up and down stream when the draw is closed; but when the draw is open, the lantern^ show three green lights in line up and down stream, with the stationary, low red lights marking the width of the openings. The signal to open the dr^^v. (a continuous whistle of at least 30 seconds' duration) should bo made on entering tlie river. Pass through the draw on west side of swing-pier. If, for any reason, the draw cannot be opened, a red flag is hoisted on the *' swing." Buffalo Water-works Inlet Pier is on the east side of the channel, at tlie head of the " Narrows" of the Niagara river, and 1^ miles below the Horseshoe Reef light-house; is marked at night l»y a red light 22 feet above i,he waier. Nliiynrn River Kunge Boacoii (fV*oiit).— A fixed white light, fl)\own from II wliitc mast W* feet lii^li, sdrmounU'd l)y circuliir gridiron day-mari{, with HlatH |)iii!it(Ml nlti rimlt'ly black and wliito. On tlie outer hank of the Erie canal, HOO feet K. by H. from the IJulfalo Waler-works Inlc't j»ier, and is i{!{ feet above the water- level of the ( lUial l\IUKiti'n Klvor Rniive BeiUMin (rc)iir).~A llxed white Pgiit, shown from a trianjiuiar Hkeletou pyramid painted brown, earryiiiK' near the top, on tlie Hide fac- ing the elmnnel, an elliptieal gridiron day-mark 8 feel by Vi feet, with slats painted alternately black and white. Light i()!3 feet above lake level. In Niagara street,, City of Jiullalo, UTG feet from the front light. Horseshoe Hoef light 8. .S. W., 8 NIAGARA KIVER. 55 be oarrent 3 feet of 3tern edge ind island. , S. E. t of water, edge of a om Straw- d between rows," be- -third mile yards of ad; at the v^orks crib, lack Rock Hack Rock med along ig from its und up, to be carried jr nea' lie )re, E is raw ^ lers, ich side of Three mark its le draw is "een lights marking ontinu(»U8 ring the ', for any *' swing." (JO of the I", and 1|- iglit l>y a nht, sliown mark, with (•anal, HOO 1 the water- hown from i(> Hide fac- atH ])iiin1cd twwK slrcot,, S. W., 8 miles. The above lights are 'iocomotive heiid-lights. This range is designed for crossing Lime-kiln reef, and intersects the cliannel on the east side of the water works crib about 1,000 feet above the crib. Heavy tows, after passing the lower buoy, will probably have to keep well up on this range in order to make the turn without being carried too close to the crib by the strong current. Bird Island Reef. — Black spar buoy in 14 feet of water. On tho east side of channel, and marks the western point of a reef making out from the corner of Black Rock Harbor pier, near its upper end; 4 to 9 feet of water between the buoy and pier; 17 feet in the channel be- tween this and the red buoy opposite. The range between this and the Emerald Channel buoy (S. f W.) clears the west side of reef. Horseshoe Reef light-house, S. by W. f W. Buffalo light-house, S. E. ^ S., \\ miles. liiine Kiln Reefi — Red 2d-cla8s nun buoy in 14 feet of water. Stands about 700 yards from the Canadian shore, nearly opposite to the Bird Island Reef buoy, and marks the eastern point of a reef with 8 to 10 feet of water on it; current, 4 miles per hour. The range from this buoy to the west shore at the head of the " Narrows " marks the west side of the channel between. Bird Island Reef buoy, E. by S. Middle Reef. — Black spar buoy in 13 feet of water. Marks the west point of Middle reef. Above the buoy the reef trends S. ^ E , 250 yards, and then makes in towards the light-house. Channel at this point one-third mile wide ; shoal water makes out from the Canadian shore opposite, rather more than a third way across. Current, If miles per hour. Horseshqe Reef light-houoe, S. E. \ S., 350 yards. HORSESHOE REEF LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied by white flashes at intervals of 90 seconds, 4th order, visible 12| miles. White square one-story beacon, elevated 10 feet above a masonry pier; pier protected on south and west sides by a crib-work ice- breaker. Light 43 feet above water. Dome of lantern black. On Mid- dle reef, at the entrance (from Lake Erie) to Niagara river. This reef separates the main or Canadian channel from the Emerald channel, and lies one third way from the Canadian to the American shore; the light- house stands 250 yards from the south end of the reef. The range between this light-house .and Point Abino, 10 miles to the westward, clears shoals west of the entrance to river. Buffalo light-house, E. by S,, 1^ miles. Buffalo Breakwater light-house, E. S E. \ E, seven-eighths mile. Point Abino (Canada), W. S. W. \ W. Waverly SIiobI.— Hod and black horizontal stripes, 2nd class can biioy, in 18 feet of water, near tho northeast cud of shoal, stony l)ottom. Tliis shoal extends about 700 fe((t in a N. E. and S. W. direction, and about 100 feet wide; 'cast water 12 feet, abo\it S. W. from the buoy 400 feet distant. Horseshoe Ucef liniit liouse N. E., If miles. IJullalo ligiil-house, E. N. E. fE., 2J miles. Windmill point (Can- ada), \V. J N., 8i miles. Emerald Channel. Sailing DirectlonH. — This channel is used by vessels bound to and from Buffalo and Niagara river, and lies between Middle reef on the west, and Bird island and llorsesluxi reefs on the north and east sides, respectively. The range between the l.iine-kiln Keef buoy and '.he Breakwater light-hous (S. E. by 8.) guicies between Bird island and Middle reefs, in mid-channel and best wa'er (14 feet), and leads up to and t»a8t the' Horseshoe Reef buoy ri»t' north end of Horseshoe reef bears fi. 700 yards from tho Emorald Channel but)y. This channel should only ' >l 56 LAKE BRIE. '■.Hi niMA 3i'*on.'j across be attempted by light-draaglit vessels, as the on- it. Eli.'i<3raM Channel. — Red ad-class car Imoy in 1 feei, cf water. South Gido of entrance to channel, and marks tlip .'/jrtl cud of Middle reef. The north side of entrance to channel is on the range, and mid- way (300 yards) between this and the Bird Island Reef buoy. Current, 1^ miles per hour. Horseshoe Reef light-house, S. by W. f W., 1,000 yards. Horseshoe Reef. — Black spar buoy in 17 feet of water, east side of head of channel, and marks the southwest point of Horseshoe reef, lying between Middle reef and t'le American shore; the west ride of the reef trends N. by W. from this buoy. Current, 1 mile per hour. Buf- falo Breakwater light-house, S. E. 600 yards. Buffalo light-house, E. S. E. ^ E., three-fourths mile. LAKE ERIE. Light-Houses, Buoys, and Harbors, on the Standing to the Westward. ^o?ith Shore, Bufialo. — Southwest gales raise the water in Buffalo harbor from 3 to 6 feet, and gales from the opposite direction lower it as much. The new breakwater is parallel with and two-thirds mile from the shore south of the harbor piers; length of breakwater (to date), 6,350 feet; direction, S. S. E. ^ E.; entrance by either end; good .^uchorage behind it, in 3 to 6 fathoms; clay and sand bottom. At and near (to the south- ward) the south pier of harbor, shoal water extends beyond the pier-head; further south there is 12 feet of water to within 250 yards of the shore. North of the river harbor is F •; ' asin, behind a stone breakwater, 700 yards long; best After by scui.li entrance (100 yards wide) between breakwater and north pier at rav,c>ta of river; narrow, dredgod channel, 12 feet deep, along the wliarvos inside basin, shoal near the breakwater; the shore to the northward may be followed up to the entrance to Black Rock harbor, 1,000 yards distant. BUFFALO. LAKE ERIE. 57 oxyj across I c{ water, of Middle , and mid- Current, W., 1,000 r, east side eshoe reef, ide of the jur. Biif- ouse, E. S. '7 Shore, bor from 3 loh. The the shore 350 feet; fe behind -he south- )ier-head; he shore. Eter, 700 between channel, ak water; to Black BUFFALO BREAKWATER LIGHT STATION. -A fixed red ligl>% 4th order^ -visibi*' 12^- milea. W'nite, squate «)ii< fttcry beacoT', 9 feet abt ve the crib on which it is built. Light, 37 feet 3A)0Vv) water. On eouth side of entrance to harbor, behind the north fid of new breakwater; the latter may be passed close-to. In thick ''•r weather, a bell, rung by machinery, is struck three blows in. qn" cession, at intervals of 30 seconds. North end of Erie Basin brar K. E. \ E., two-thirds mile. Buffalo light-house, E. \ S., one-ha' Dunkirk light-house, S. W. \ S., 36 miles. k SU"- A at';r.j BUFFALO LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3d order, visible 14f miles. Gray octagon?! tower, 51 feet high, lantern black. On south pier of entrance to harbor, 125 yards from the outer end. The south pier projects 350 yards beyond the north; width be- tween piers, 200 feet; 16 feet of water in mid-cliannel; 13 to 14 feet alongside north pier, and 8 feet alongside south pier; soft bottom. To enter the harbor, pass 100 yards north of the breakwater light, and steer for Buffalo light, which courst. will be in range with the south pier. In September, 1889, 16^ feet could be carried in at low water. The Life Saving Station is on the south side of the entrance to the harbor. Channel into Dunkirk Harbor. Sailing Directions. — Making this harbor from the eastward, !r for the entrance, between the Dunkirk beacon and the Diiy-Beacoii steer buoy, with the latter well open to the southward of the pier of f' ;mer — that is, nothing in-shore of a S. W. f S. course. Entering from the westward, the Day-Beacon buoy and south end of easv breakwater in range leads past Pomt Gratiot in good water; between liie Po'^t and the west pier of harbor the water shoals graduf^lly to ti.'i s>. ro. A chan- nel, excavated in rocky bottom to a depth of 12 feet (h .t tencf ncy to fill at inner end, only 11 feet there at present) and IV feet in width, leads from between the beacon and Day-Beacon l)uoy in .i' iro<*t line (E 8. E), for the entrance to the Eric Railway Company's dot k, >^n*Vl good water is reached, about midway betw<' i the breakv.^ut(>r aiiu the city docks. Anchorage in 12 feet, off the d oks, with northevu li'iit nearly two-thirds way to the line of the breakwater, eastern limit, a little beyt>nd the East dock to the eastward, the water shoals gradually to the shore. East part of anchorage, hard bottom; middle and west part, boft bottom. In the docks, 11 to 12 feet of water at entrance, shoaling toward the head; soft botto.n near entrance, simdy bottom inside, During north- erly gales a heavy swell sets into the harbor, pawt the east end of break- water, rendering berths in the docks insecure; 9 feet of w.itor may be carried into this harbor oust of the breakwater, with the elevaior on the Erie Railway west dock bearing S. S. W. Winds up the lake lower, and winds down the lake raise the water in the harbor. DUNKIRK LIGIIT-STATTON.— A fixed white lii^'ht, 8d order, varied by white iiaslies at intt^rvals of 90 seconds, visible 16^ miles, A reddish-gray, square tower, 52 feet high, with dwelling con- nected by covered way; white dwellivig near by, to the eastward. Lantern black. On Point Gratiot, a bh'ff TtO yards west of entrance to 58 LAKE ERIE. harbor. BuildingF. | .utly hidden by trees. Erie light, 8. W. by W. ^ W., 42f mileB. Presque Isle Beacon light-house, S. W. by W. ^ W., 44 miles. Dunkirk Beacon-light. — A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 12^' miles. Octagonal brown tower; light, 38 feet above water; elevated walk along pier to shore. Lantern black. On a square, masonry pier, which rises 10 feet above the water, at the outer end of west pior of harbor; south side of entrance to channel. A sunken crib, about 25 feet wide, lies in the channel alongside the beacon pier. The pier extends N. E. by E. i E., 1,100 feet from W. shore of harbor. The dredged channel into the harbor enters between this beacon and a black spar buoy, which marks the site formerly occupied by day-beacon, 100 yards E. N. E. of this, and leads E. S. E. past theS. W. end of the new breakwater, until good water is reached, about half way up to the city docks. Inside the breakwater the dredged channel is marked by two red buoys on the south side close to bank. This light is shown whenever the weather is such that it can be reached. Dunkirk light-house, W. by N., 740 yards. Day-Beacon Buoy. — Black spar buoy in 17 feet of water. North side of entrance to channel. May be rounded on the west side within 60 yards. Marks the point formerly occupied by Dunkirk day-beacon, portions of which still show above water. Dunkirk beacon, W. S. W., 300 feet. South end of breakwater, E. S. E., 600 feet. Outer Buoy. — Red spar buoy in 14 feet of water. In the channel close to the south side, and marks the outer end of a ledge of rocks, just covered, extending along the south bank of channel nearly to the Inner buoy. A straight course may be steered between this and the inner buoy, 400 yards beyond. Soutu end of breakwater, E. ^ N., 310 feet. Dunkirk beacon, W. N. W. | W., 400 feet. Breakwater. — A crib-work bveakwater, in process of construction across the front of the harbor. It extends from the north side of channel, in an E. N, E direction, about 400 yards (to date). The end resting on channel mriy »e passed close-to. The ruins of an old breakwater, a few feet under wa,'oer, lie about 60 yards outside of the present breakwater, along its entire length, nnd between its south end and the Day-beacon buoy Inside the breakwater, there is 6 to 8 feet of water close-to, deep- ening gradually to the anchorage. Inner Buoy. — Red spar buoy in 10^ feet of water. South side of ex< ava^ed channel, at the inner end. Be'.ween this buoy and the entr^roe to west dock there is not less than 10^ feet of water, shoaling gradual' V <'-o the south shore. Dunkirk water-works crib, S. S. W. ^ W., 480 yo'rds. Ou.' :^r corner of west dock, S. E., 260 yards. Channel into Eric, Presque Isle Bay, Sailing DirecilouH. — The 16-foot curve of the bottom passes through the station of the Outer buoy, black, and follows the trend of the shore on both sides of the harbor entrance, passing the Erie light- house at a distance of one-third mile, and Presque Isle point at a distance of 300 yards; inside this curve the water shoals gradually to the shore. Width between piers, 360 feet, sandy bottom. Both piers riprapped LAKE EBIE. 69 inside. Strong currents are produced between these piers when the water level outside is changed by winds blowing up or down the lake. The buoys on the banks of this channel are placed a few feet back from the edge, and a straight course may be steervid between them, on either side. Last season the north pier was extended, and the beacon moved out to within 30 feet of the outer end. Vessels not drawing more than 6 feet or water may stand across the flats on the south side of channel, keeping north of the range between the inner end of north pier and west side of the elevators in Erie. The general depth of water in Presque Isle bay is from 3 to 5 fathoms, mud, clay, or sand bottom, chiefly mud in deep water, and sand on the shoals; three fathoms of water can be carried to within 500 yards of the north and south shores of the bay, except opposite the railroad wharf at west end of city, where a shoal makes out from the north shore, one-third way across the bay, its extremity bearing W. S. W. f W., nearly a mile, from the Inner buoy (north). The Outer buoy, red, may be approached from the east- ward on any course between S. S. W. and S. W. by W. ^ W. The range to carry through between tho piers W. S. W. is formed by the beacon- light on east end of north pier (red) and the wh te range-light on west end of same pier. From the west end of north pier a straight channel 200 feet wide and with not less than 16 feet of w.'.ter leads to the deep water of the inner bay. Continue on the course which leads between piers until the range beacon on west end of pier is bi'ought on with the beacon near southwest corner of keeper's dwelling; take this range until Inner Black buoy, No. 7, is passed. From this point steer for docks. BRIE. ERIE LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3d order, visi- ble 19 miles. Light gray conical tower, 60 feet high, with oil-room attached, lantern black. Detached dwelling. On the high bluff of the lake shore, to the eastward and just outside I'resque Isle bay; buildings eartly hidden by trees. End of north pier of entrance to bay, N. W. ^ r., 1 mile. Light 128 feet above lake level, '^he apparatus is arranged to illuminate 180 degrees of the horizon, between the bearings E. N. E. f E. by northward to W. S. W. f W., but the light is obscured through the greater part of the arc between N. W. by W. ^ W. and W. i N. by woods on Presque Isle. " 1 I i 60 LAKE ERIE. Outer Buoy. — Black spar buoy in 16 feet of water. Marks the south side of entrance to channel. It stands in sandy bottom, on the prolongation of the south pier, and 250 yards outside the end of north pier. Not less than 13 feet of water, on either side of harbor entrance, between this buoy and end of north pier. Presqne Isle point, N. N. W. ^ W., three-fourths mile. Erie light-house, S. E. | S., seven-eighths mile. Outer Buoy. — Red 3d-class can buoy in 18 J feet of water. On the prolongation of inner face of north pier, and marks the northern side of entrance to channel. Heavy draught vessels should not attempt to pass to the northward of this buoy. Presque Isle Beacon W. S. VV. 450 yards. Presque Isle Beacon Lig^ht. — A fixed red light, 4th order,vi8i- ble 12:^ miles. White pyramidal tower, with brown trimmings, 30 feet high. Dwelling brown, on the peninsula, back of pier, with small white out-houses in rear of it. Lantern and gallery black. On east end of north pier. Brown life-saving station and two white sheds stand behind pier west of dwelling. A bell is struck by machinery, at intervals of 20 seconds, in thick or foggy weather, by fog-signal in base of beacon. The Life Saving Station is on the north side of the entrance to the harbor. Erie Range Beacon No. 1. — White octagonal lantern on a skel- eton base, near west end of north pier. Erie Range Beacon No. !3.— White mast beacon with oval black day-mark. Fixed white lights, -visible 8^ miles. No. 1, on west end of north pier; No. 2, near southwest corner of keeper's dwelling. Presque Isle beacon forms a range with No, 1 for approaching and passing between the piers. The range between No. 1 and No. 2 guides through the newly-dredged channel into harbor. Lights 900 feet apart, bearing from each other, S. W. by W. and N. E. by E. North Bank. — Red spar buoy in 10^ feet of water. On the north bank o'' dredijed channel. South Bank (outer). — Black spar buoy in lOj feet of water. At the outer angle of the south bank of dredged channel 100 yards inside the north bank buoy. Middle.— Red spar buoy in 13^ feet of water. Stands on the north bank close to channel. South Bank (inner). — Black spar buoy in 10^^ feet of water. On the south bank of channel. Inner Buoy (north). — Red, 2d-cla88, nun buoy in 16 feet of water. Stands on tlie north bank at the inner end of the dredged channel. Inner Buoy (south). — Black spar buoy in 16 feet of water. Stands on the inner end of dredged channel, south side, 185 yards from the South Bank buoy (inner). Passing this buoy, steer for the city docks (11 to 14 feet of water alongside) or find anchorage in the bay. A straight course may be made from this buoy to the " Anchor line " wharf in Erie. Inner end of north pier, N. E. f E. Center of Public dock, S. ^ W., 1,000 yards. LAKE EBIB. 61 3rn on a skel- !)n the north md8 on the t of water. Standing Westward along the South Shore of Lake Erie. FRESQUE ISLE LIGHT-STATION— A flashing red and white light, at intervals of 10 seconds, 4th order, visible 14 miles. Red square tower, 45 feet high, with dwelling attached. Lantern blr ':, light 57 feet above sea level. On north shore of peninsula, 400 feet from the lake, three-fifths mile west of the most northern projection of peninsula, and 3 miles, by water, west of entrance to Presque Isle bay, Pennsylvania. Dwelling partly .hidden by trees. Conneaut light-house, S. W. by W. \ W., 20 miles. Long point, N. \ E., 26f miles. Rondeau point, W. \ N., 93 miles. CONNEAUT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible llf miles. Brown below and white above, pyramidal tower, 27 feet high, square in plan. On bluff west side of mouth of river, near keeper's dwelling. Remnants of the old piers still remain, but the harbor is entirely closed, and the light is only useful as a coast light. Ashtabula light-house, W. S. W. f W., 13^ miles. Pel^e Spit light W. \ S., 101 miles. Marblehead light W. by S. 115 miles. Long Point light N. E. ^ N., 48 miles. A§HTABULA ILIGIIT-STATIOW. — A fixed white light, varied by white flashes, at intervals of 2 minutes, 5th order, visible llj miles. Brown below and white above, pyramidal tower, 27 feet high, square in plan. An elevated walk along pier to shore. Dwelling, cream-color, on the west side of mouth of river. Near the outer end of west pier, entrance to Ashtabula harbor, Ohio; width between piers, 160 feet. Work is progress to excavate a channel through the outer bar to a depth of 18 feet and full width. The channel between the piers is being dredged to a depth of 17 feet. The east pier in front of the canal leading to the railroad com- pany's slips is being removed. As now constructed the west pier extends about 150 feet beyond the east pier. The project is to remove the east pier, and re-locate the same 45 feet to the eastward of its present position. Direction of piers north. Outer point of shore to the wejtward, W. S. W. | W., 11 miles. Fairport light-house, 27 miles to the westward. Rondeau light-house W. N. W. \ N., 63 miles. Marble- head light-house. W. by S. i S., 112 miles. Long Point light-house N. E. \ N., 58 miles. A§htabula Range L.tg[llt.— Three fixed lights shown from lens lanterns, two red tind one wliite, arranged vertically, with tlie white light in the middle, sus- pended from a triangular skeleton iron pyramid 60 feet high, painted brown. On the inner end of the west pier. Forms a range with the main pierliead light, which must be left on the .starboard hand on entering. FAIRPORT L.IOHT-STATIOW.— A fixed white light, 3d order, visible 17^ miles. Gray conical tower 60 feet high, connected with dwelling by covered way. Lantern black, liglit 100 feet above sea-level. On the bluff east side of mouth of Grand iliver, at Fairport. Cleveland light-house, 28i miles to the westward. Fairport Beacon Light.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 12 miles- Brown below and white al)ove. pyramidal wooden tower 27 feet Jiigli, square in plan. An elevated walk along pier to sliore. On crib at outer end of oast pier, entrance to Fairport harbor, mouth of Grand River. The Life Saving Station is on the west side of the entrance to the harbor. Outer point of shore to the eastward, E. N. E. Outer Boint of shore to the westward, S. W. by W. i W . 3i miles. Rondeau light-house 1. W. i N., 48 miles. Port Burwell light-house N. N. E., 65 miles. Fairport Range Ugiit.— Three fixed lights, shown from lens lanterns, two red and one white, arranged vertically, with the white light in the middh;, suspended from a triangular skeleton iron pyramid 60 feet high, painted brown. On the inner end of the east pier, forming a range with the beacon light on the outer end of the east pier which must be left on the port hand on entering. Tlie iinrbor vir^irliN consist of two parallel piers connecting the deep water in Lake Erie with the deep water in Grand River. Width between piers 62 LAKE ERIE. 200 feet, direction of piers N. f W. Depth of water, last summer there was 15^ feet over the bar and 16 feet between the piers. Dredging was in progress to give 16 feet over the bar. The west pier extends 40 feet further into the lake than the east pier. CliEVELiAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3i order, visible 20^ miles. Red octagonal tower 84 feet high, connected with dwelling by covered way; structure of brick, with stone finish and foundation. Lantern black, light 154 feet above lake level. At Cleve- land, Ohio, on the hill east side of harbor. The upper half of the tower only is visible above the surrounding buildings. Black River light- bouse, 25 miles to the westward. CLEVELAND. , Cleveland Breakwater (West Arm). — A crib breakwater starts from the lake shore at a point about 700 feet west of the extremity of the old bed of Cuyahoga river, running into the lake nearly due north a distance of 3,130 feet, thence to the eastward about parallel with the lake shore 4,000 feet, its eastern extremity being nearly in the prolonga- tion of the west pier. Vessels entering with westerly winds should keep well to windward, as a strong set makes along the breakwater with westerly winds. Sail vessels should keep a good press of canvas until inside the entrance, as a strong current (with the wind oflE the lake) sets out of the entrance. ' Cleveland Breakwater (East Arm). — The East Arm of the breakwater commences 500 feet from the east end of the West Arm, and will extend in the same direction about E. N. E., 900 feet, thence east about 3,600 feet, terminating in over 20 feet of water, so that vessels may enter safely from the eastward. There is now completed LAKE ERIE. 68 mmer there edging was jnda 40 feet ite light, 3i 1, connected le finish and At Cleve- jf the tower River light- ^LTL b breakwater [the extremity irly due north lallel with the 1 the prolonga- is should keep (akwater with canvas until the lake) sets [East Arm of le West Arm, \o feet, thence i^ater, so that [ow completed ;j,080 feet of the East Arm, with a spur of 118 feet long similar ir all respects to the one on the West Arm. The spurs have a riprap- ping of stone on both sides and angles nearly to the surface, and extending to the entrance. A Red Light is exhibited from a lantern on a pole 20 feet high and 15 feet from the west end of the East breakwater. Unfinished work at the east end is not marked by light or day signal. Depth of Tracer.— There is from 15 ft. 8 in. to 17 feet in mid- channel and from 13 to 14 feet alongside the piers. Westerly winds lower the water from 6 to 12 inches. 27ie Life- Saving Station is on the west side of entrance to the harbor. Cleveland Breakwater liiglit.— A flashing red and white light, at intervals of 10 seconds, 4tb order, visible 12 miles. Brown octagonal iron tower, surmounted by a black lantern and railing. The focal plane is 27 feet above the base of the tower and 36 feet above the lake level. On crib 24 feet south of the east end of the West breakwater. During thick and foggy weather there will be sounded at this station a 10-inch steam whistle giving a blast of 3 seconds fol- lowed by a silent interval of 27 seconds. Distress Signal. — In case of shipwreck there will be displayed from the fog- signal house adjoining the tower a red light at night and a white flag in the day time, for the information of the Life Saving crew. Water-works crib, W. i N., li miles. Rondeau light-house N. by W., 53 miles. Cleveland Beacon-light (East). — A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 12^ miles. Square pyramidal wood tower, brown below and white above, 30 feet high, light 37 feet above water. An elevated walk along the pier to the shore. Beyond the arc of illumination, to the eastward, the lights show dimly, and warn vessels that they are too far inshore. On outer end of east pier, entrance to Cleveland har- bor, Ohio. Width between piers, 200 feet; direction of piers N. N. W. f W. Outer point of shore to the eastward, N. E. f E., 18 miles. Cleveland Beacon-light (West). — A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 13:^ miles. Pyramidal wooden tower 40 feet high, brown below and white above, square in plan. Elevated walk along pier to shore. On the outer end of west pier. Outer point of shore to the westward, W. \ N., 15^ miles. Signals to open the Bridges. — Lake Shore Bridge, 1 long, and 2 short whistles; River Bed Bridge, 1 long, 1 short, 1 long, 1 short whis- tle; Main St. Bridge, 2 long whistles; Viaduct Bridge, 3 long whistles; Valley R. R. Bridge, 4 long whistles; All bridges above the Viaduct, 4 long whistles. White light over center of R. R. bridges when closed. Red when open. City Bridges red light when open. BLACK RIVER LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. Pyramidal wooden beacon 40 feet high, brown below; white above, squar? -n plan. Elevated walk along pier to shore. On the outer end of west pier, entrance to Black River harbor. The harbor works consist of two parallel piers 200 feet apart, direction northwest, connecting the mouth of Black River with the deep water in Lake Erie. Last summer the east pier was extended 102 feet, and the channel dredged to a depth of 16 feet to the ore docks. Vermillion light house, W. S. W. | W., 11 miles. Outer point of shore to the eastward, E. N. E. \ E., 2^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I 1.25 I^IM 125 lis ^^ ^^* Ui Ui |22 Photographic Sciences Corporation 33 WIST MAIN STRUT WnSTIR.N.Y. MSM (716) •73-4303 ^^% 5.*\-^>,^^ z 64 LAKE ERIE. i^' miles. LonePoint light-house, N. E. by E. i E., 182 miles. Aliddle of South Passage, N. W. by W. i W., to abreast of Marblehead light, 19i miles. Black River Range Llfflit.— Three fixed lights shown from lens lanterns, two red and one white, arranged vertically, with the white light in the middle, sus- pended from a triangular skeleton iron pyramid 60 feet high, painted brown. On the inshore end of the west pier, forming a range with the pierhead light, which must be left on the starboard hand on entering. VERMILIilON LIOHT-STATIOnr.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible llf miles. Brown octagonal tower 27 feet high. Elevated walk along pi }r to shore. Lantern black. Near outer end of west pier, entrance to Vermillion harbor, Ohio. Width between piers, 125 feet; 10 feet of water can be carried through, in mid-chan* nel, into the mouth of the river; sand and rock bottom; direction of piers, N. i W. Huron light-house^^ W. 1^ 8^, 9f miles. Pel6e Spit light- house, N. by W. i W., 82 rs. E. , miles. Fairport, E. 60i miles. fllJRON LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. Brown iron skeleton tower 80 feet high; lantern black. Elevated walk along i)ier to shore. On crib at outer end of west pier, entrance to Huron harbor, Ohio. The harbor improvements consist of two parallel piers running out into the lake in a northeast direction, 140 feet apart. Last summer the west pier was extended 120 feet, and the channel dredged to a full depth of 16 feet throughout, and the fuU width of 140 feet. Cedar point light, 9f miles. Outside buoy of Sandusky bay, N. W., 9i miles. Vermillion light-house, E. by N., 9f miles. Marblehead light-house, N. W.iN.,12i miles. •i Main Channel cf Sandusky Bay, Sailings Directions. — This channel consistB of an outer dredged channel across the bar at the entrance to the bay, a natural channel between the Sand Point and Oedar Point shoals, and an inner dredged channel, in three straight reaches, lying north and west of Horseshoe shoal, and leading up to the city of Sandusky. Channel 4 miles long, bottom and banks sandy, (until up with the inner reach, where both are soft), and 16 feet of water carried through. The outer ^wo reaches of the aredged channel in the bay are 200 feet in width, and the inner bank curved at the elbows ; the Inner reach, and also the dredged channel across the bar at the entrance to the bay, will, when completed, be the same width. The spr.r buoys on the banks of the dredged part of chan- nel stand within a few feet of the edge. The dredged channel terminates 100 ^ards from the city wharves ; 10 to 12 feet of water beyond and alongside the wharves ; 12 feet of water (unless unusually low water) on both sides of the Inner reach (until past the Inner buoy) to a distance of one mile on the east side and one-third of a mile on the west ; best anchorage on east side, behit d Horseshoe shoal; the Inner Elbow buoy, in range with the south end of Johnson's island, marks the northern limit of anchorage. The outer edges of the Sa.id Point and Cedar Point shoals trend N. W. \ W. and S. by E., respuocively, from the outside buoy, until within a third of a mile of the snore ; 6 feet of water can be carried across the outer end of Sand Point shoal, east of the range between Marblehead light-house and Cedar Point beacon, and across the Cedar Point shoal to within a third of a mile of the shore. When up with Cedar point, vessels drawing not more than 6 feet may take the oast channel, shortening the distance to the city three- I^KE BBIE. 65 ?aartera of a mile ; from the entrance, between Cedar Point and the *oint of Horseshoe shoal buoy, stand along the west side of Cedar Point 100 to 200 yards from the shore, until it trends sharply to the eastward, half a mile below the light-house, then steer S. S. W. for the eastern wharves of the oity. This course leads across the south arm of Horse- shoe shoal in not less than 6 feet of water. Note. — The dredging of a straight channel from Cedar point to the B. & O. R. R. docks to a depth of 13 feet is in progress. The proposed final depth for the straight channel is 17 feet. The Outer Bar buoy may be approached from the eastward on any course between N. W. and S. £. by E. It is just to northward of the Cedar Point range. From it steer S. W. ^ W., on the range past Bar buoy, No. 4, to South Shoal buoy, No. 1, then haul to westward to pass Cedar Point buoy, No. 3, to northward, take up the West Sandusky Bay range and follow it to Curve-of-Bank buoy, No. 11. The west side of this curve is marked by buoys Nos. 11, 13, and 16, when the North Sandusky Bay range is reached and followed until Inner Elbow buoy, No. 20, is reached from which the West beacon of Sandusky Bay ranges bear N. by W. ^ W. The range between this beacon and City Hall clock tower (illuminated) leads mid-channel to its end. Outside Buoy. — Red, 2d-class can buoy in 13 feet of water. At north side of entrance to dredge channel acroes the bar. Channel, 150 feet wide ; best water on the range. Cedar Point Range beacon, S. W., 1 mile. • Marblehead light-house, N. W. by N., 3 miles. Bar buoy, S. W.. one-quarter iiii'c Cedar Point Banire Beacon-light. — A fixed red li^ht, 6th order, visible 11 miles. White, shed-roofed frame building, with long panelled front to traverse the light at pleasure. Hight of light above water, 26 feet. On crib at outer side of Cedar point, 200 yards south of channel, and Hamc distance northeast of Cedar l*oint light-house. The lantern window of the beacon (between parallel black stripes from crib to eaves), in range with the tower of the light-house (S. W.), guides across the bar. This light should not be approached nearer than one- third mile on the range, nor passed entering the bay nearer than 200 yards. CEDAR POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 12^ miles. White dwelling, surmounted by a low tower; light, 21 feet from the ground, on Cedar point, south side of channel, which passes the point at a distance 75 yards. Frame buoy- house, with jetty wharf, on inner shore of the point, near the light-house. Marblehead light, 4 miles N. by W. i W. Sandusky Bay Ranges, North Beacon-liflrht.— Brown cylinder, 30 feet high, 20 inches in diameter, with octagonal watch-room at base; crib in 10 feet of water. Main Beacon-light. — White, sauare, one-story building, ele- vated 11 feet above its crib, lighted with gas; light exhibited from southeast corner of building; crib in 12 feet of water. Cedar Point light-house, £. \ N. City Hall dock, S. | E. 6« LAKE ERIE. '■ West Beacon-liflrl^t. — Brown cylinder, 30 feet hieh, 20 inches in diameter, with octagonal watoh-room at base; crib in 12 feet of water. Connected with Main Beacon-light by a pile bridee. The Sandusky Bay ranges are fixed with white lights on cribs, the Main beacon at the elbow on the outer (N. W.) bank, and touching the channel and the North and West beacons 1,000 feot to the northward and westward, respectfully, of the Main beacon. The West beacon, in range with the south side of Main beacon (E. by N. ^ N.) guides through the west reach, in mid-channel, to Cedar point, 1^ miles distant. The North beacon, in range with the east side of Main beacon (S. ^ W.) guides through the south reach, in mid-channel, to the inner elbow, one- half mile distant. The range between the West beacon and the City Hall clock (S. by E.) leads through the inner reach, in mid-channel. Standing Westward through Kellers and Bass Islands. Kelley's Island. — Along the east and southeast sides of the island, shoal water extends ^ to f of a mile from shore, with smooth flat- rock bottom. The bay on the south side of the island affords excellent protection from north, northeast and easterly gales. To make a lee, coming from the eastward, haul around the south point of the island, giving it a berth of not less than ^ a mile, and come to off the docks in 8^ fathoms; good holding ground. There is a submarine telegraph cable laid between the island and Marblehead, the shore end on tne island is a little to the east of the most easterly dock, where a large sign is put up. The shore end on Marblehead is at the light-house. Vessels should not come to on that range. Kelley's Island Reef* — Black, 2d-class nun buoy in 16 feet cf water, marks the east end of a reef northeast of Kelley's island. The reef extends W. by S. \ S., 1;^ miles from the buoy, and is 600 yards across its widest part. The west end is 1,500 yards northeast from the bold northeast point of Eelley's island. Least water on reef, 6 feet. Deep water 60 yards east of the buoy; 16 feet of water can be carried between this buoy and Oull Island Shoal buoy. Marblehead light-house, S. S. W. i W., 8 miles. Gull Island Shoal buoy, N. W., 2f miles. Oull Island Shoal* — Black, 2d-clas8 can buoy in 16 feet of water, stands in rocky bottom on northeast point of Gull Island shoal. The water shoals gradually inside the buoy until rocks show above water 1,600 yards S. W. i S. of buoy. Middle Island light-house (Canadian), N. i W., 1 mile. North end of Ballast island, W. \ N., 6i miles. Bal- last Island Channel buoy, W. \ N. Ballast Island Channel (outer)*— Black spar buoy in 16 feet of water, stands in rooky bottom at the south side of eastern entrance to a channel, with 14 or 16 feet of water, to the southward, and within 220 yard~i of Ballast island. Least width of channel, 130 yards opposite Ballast island. The south side of channel extends 660 yards W. N. W. from the buoy, and its western end is passed when the range between the southeast point of Ballast island and the east side of Gibraltar island is reaohed. Th« north side of Ballast island may be passed close-to. East end of Ballast island, N. f W., 800 yards. South end of Middle Bass inland, W. i S. LA£E ERIE. 67 Ballast Island Channel (inner) .—Black spar buoy in 16 feet of water, stands on the south side at inner end of channel. South end of Middle Bass island, W. f S. East end of South Bass island, S. i W. Outer buoy, 8. S. E., 700 yards. Entering Put-tn-Bay, South Bass Island, from the West- ward. Peach Orchard Point. — Bed spar buoy in 13 feet of water, marks the elbow of a rooky shoal extending 375 yards northeast from Peach Orchard point (west side of bay), and thence 170 yards in towards Oibraltar island ; western edge of shoal lies 140 yards outside the point. Northeast point of Gibraltar island, S. S. E. \ E., 500 yards. West side of South Bass island, S. W. by W. f W. Pass the buoy to the north- ward (deep water close-to), and steer to round the bold northeast end of Oibraltar island. Good anchorage and secure harbor inside. Standing Westward Along the South Shore of Lake Erie^ Between Sandusky and Maumee Bays. MABBLEHEAD LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed whit« liffht, 4th order, visible 14^ miles. White conical tower, 55 feet high, with detached dwelling. Lantern black. On the northeast end of Marblehead, and south side of eustern entrance to channel between the Kelley's and Bass islands and the mainland. The Ltfe Saving Station is near the Quarry docks to the westward of the light. The shore is low and rocky, with deep water 800 yards aistant. Good water to within 400 yards of itelley's island, opposite. Four and three-<]^uarter miles to the westward, and just south of the range between this ligbt-kouse and Mouse island, is a rocky 4-foot shoal; a channel, 500 yards wide betweeu the shoal and shore. The range between Marblehead light and Green Island light (N. W. ^ W., 11 miles^ guides between Starve Island reef, on the north side of channel, and Scott's Point shoal and Mouse Island reef on the south. Range between it and east end of Kel ley's island leads directly over middle of Kelley's Island reef. North end of Mouse island, N. W. by W. 4 W., 7^ miles. Scott's Point Shoal buoy, N. W. i W., 6j} miles. Rondeau light-house N. E. ^ N., 63^ miles. Fairpori light-house E. by N., 76 miles. Scott's Point Shoal. — Black, 2d-class can buoy in Id feet of water. Marks the northeast point of a rocky shoal on the south side of the channel south of the Kelley and Bass islands. The shoal stretches towards and half-way to Mouse island, and is 400 yards wide; least water in it 12 feet near the buoy, a channel 1,000 yards wide, between the shoal and Mouse island ; the latter and the headland southwest of it are bold. North side of Mouse island W. S. W. i W., li miles. Green Island light-house, N. W. i W., 4i miles. Mouse Island Reef buoy, N. W. by W. t W., li miles. Starves Island Beef.—Red, 2d-olMS nun buoy :a 14 feet of water, on ,ei'. Marks the southwest point of a reef, 400 feet in diameter^ lying the north side of channel, very near the track of vessels bound 68 LAKE ERIE. i ' through ; ezaotly on range of Green Island light-house, and southwest Soint of South Bass island. When Green island can be seen clear of outh Bass island, vessels are clear of the shoal to southward ; least water on reef, 11 feet. Two-thirds way from this reef to Starve island, is a rocky patch, with 11 feet of water on it. A reef extends from South Bass island to Starve island, leaving a narrow channel between. Twelve feet of water within 30 feet of buoy to the southward and east- ward. Scott's Point Shoal buoy, S. E. f S., 2,000 yards. Starve island, N. by W., 1 mile. East end of Mouse island, 8 . S. W. ^ W., If miles. Bold south end of South Bass island, N. W. f W., If miles. Mouse Island Reef. — Black, 8d-class can buoy in 16 feet of water. Marks the north side of a small reef, 1 mile north of Mouse island ; least water on reef, 12 feet. Shoalest water S. "W. by W. from buoy, about 160 yards. Green Island light-house, N. W. f N., 3 miles. Moore's Point, S. S. W. i W. 2f miles. Starve Island Reef buoy, E. N. E. ^ E., seven-eighths mile. Niagara Reef buoy, N. W. by W. ^ W., 8 miles. GREEN ISLAND lilGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, varied by red flashes at intervals of one minute, visible 14 miles. Gray, square tower, 43 feet high, attached to dwelling, lan- tern black. On the west end of Green Island, Lake Erie; a rocky, wooded island, 15 acres in extent, one mile west of South Bass island ; shores bold ; shut in by woods from N. E. by E. i E. by E'd to 8. E. by E. West Sister Island light-house, N. W. by W. f W., 14 miles. This liglit, ojoen S. of South Bass island, just clears Starve Island reef on S. side. The range between this and West Sister Island light (N. W. by W. f W., 14 miles) passes about 1 mile N. of Niagara reef. Kept open on W. end of Rattleiiinake island, clears Hen and Chickens one-half mile. Niagfara Reef. — Black, 2d-class can buoy in 14 feet of waTer. Marks the north side of a snail reef, with 7 feet of water on it and deep close-to, lying 1{- miles south of the range between Green Island and West Sister Island light-houses. There is much foul ground between this reef and the south shore, and strangers should not attempt the passage on that side. Shoalest spot, southwest from buoy, 200 yards. North end of West Sister island, N. W. f W., 8| miles. Greeu Island light-house, E. S. E. ■} E., 6i miles. WEST SISTER ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 13^ miles. White, conical tower, 44 feet ' high, connected to dwelling by covered way; light 61 feet above lake level. On the southwest end of West Sister island. Lake Erie ; area of island, about 100 acres. A reef extends one-third mile from the south- east side of the island; bold, rocky shore on other sides. A redlistht shown from the station in place of the usual white light, is to be under* stood as a distress signal. On N. E. side of island, the light is obscured by trees through an arc of about 1^ points. Passing the island one-half mile to the southward, the conrse to Turtle Island Shoal buoy is W. f N., 14i miles. Green Island lisht-house, S. E. by E. i E., 14 miles. Turtle Island light, W. i N., uj miles. Port Ollnton. — Light discontinued and buoys removed. LAKE ERIE. Maumee Bay, Main or West Channel of Maumee Bay.— This channel is dredged from the Turtle Island Shoal buoy, in six straight reaches (following the deepest water) across the bay, to within three-fourths of a mile of the mouth of the Maumee river, where a deep natural channel, about 200 yards wide, is reached, leading up the river to the city of Toledo. The dredged channel is 200 feet in width, widened at the elbows to from 300 to 400 feet, and the inner bank rounded; bottom, mud or day throughoat, and 15 to 17 feet of water can be carried through; the elbows are marked by buoys, which stand in the channel close to the outer bank, and exactly at the angle ; the spar bnoys on the banks are placed a few feet back from the channel ; a straight course may be steered from buoy to buoy on either side. The five inner " reaches " of the dredged channel of the bay, and the natural channel beyond, into the mouth of the river as far as Grass point, are marked by range lights, two to each range; the first three in entering (after passing Turtle island and Bend-of-Channel buoy. No. 11), viz.: South and Long reaches and the Outer reach are marked by xohite lights, and the Middle and Inner reaches by red lights. Ranges intersect each other. Care must be taken not *o mistake the " middle " for the " outer " range, the prolongation of the former being crossed by vessels entering before the outer range is reached. The bottom of tne bay is mud, clay, or sand throughout, except some gravel bottom along the west shore, near the mouth of the river. Northeast gales raise the water of the bay 3 to 4 feet above the ordinary level, and southwest gales lower it as much. Turtle Island Shoal buoy (the outer bar) may be approached from the eastward on any course between N. W. and S. S. W. Pass the buoy on either side close-to and steer S. W. for No. 2 Outside Elbow buoy. Two spar buoys at equal intervals between these buoys mark the east bank of dredged channel. Passing Outside Elbow buoy, No. 2, to eastward, you take up the South Reach range, passing close to Turtle Island buoy. No. 9, thence S. through this reach to the Main beacon and Long Reach Turning buoy, No. 10, taking up Long Reach range, thence S. W. by W. through this reach to No. 21, Outer Range Elbow buoy, thence W. ^ N., to No. 26, Middle Range Elbow buoy. This reach is marked by the range beacons on S' ore also. From Middle Range Elbow buoy steer W. S. W. to No. 28, Inner Range Elbow buoy (Range-beacons on shore mark this channel), thence S. S. W. \ W., on Inner Range to No. 37, End-of-Range buoy. From this point steer to pass close to Ironville wharf, thence to draw of Wheeling and Lake Erie Railroad bridge and passing Middle Ground buoy. No. 32, steer for draw to Pennsylvania Railroad bridge and to docks. Note. — Dredging is in progreat for a straight channel 11 feet deep from the mouth of the Maumee river to the lake. Turtle Island Shoal.-— Black, 2d-class can buoy in 16 feet of water. Stands in soft bottom, at the east side of entrance to dredged channel. The 12-foot point of Turtle Island shoal bears S. by E. ^ E., 1,000 yards from tnis buoy, and is further marked by the range from the light-house to North Cape point. Fifteen feet of water near this reach of channel, on the west side, and not less than 14 half-way to the west shore of lake. Turtle Island light-house, S. S. W. f W., if 70 LAKE ERIE. I miles. East end of woods on C* "^ar point, S. S. E. ^ E., 4 miles. Raisin Point buoy, N. N. E.,Vf miles. Outside Elbow, No. 2.— Red spar baoy in 16 feet of water. Marks the first elbow of the channel; pass it to the eastward. Betweer this buoy and the Twelve-foot Curve buoys there is 18 to 14 feet of water on the west side of channel, shoaling to 12 feet at. a distance of one-third mile from the channel; also the same water on the east side of the channel, when 200 yards inside of Turtle island. Turtle Island light-house, S. S. E. f E., 726 yards. North Cape point, S. W. i 8., 2 miles. TURTLE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 13^ miles. Yellow, square tower, 44 feet high, attached to dwelling, black lantern. On Turtle island, a small, low island at the entrance to the bay, east side of channel and 150 yards from it. The light-house stands near the north end of the island. This light, bearing S. Dy E., is obscured by the chimney of the dwelling. The chan- nel in, passes the light at a distance of 200 yards. North end of Turtle Island shoal, N. E. ^ E., 1^ miles. East end of woods on Cedar point, S. E., 3^ miles. Detroit River light-house (Bar point), N. E. | N., 21| miles. South and Long Reach Range Lights, Main Beacon-light. — Light exhibited from a platform on extreme north corner of buoy shed on crib. Keeper's dwelling to the right, painted white. Turtl«^ island, N. \ £. Cedar point, E. S. E. East Beacon-light. — Brown iron tube, with octagonal lantern. South Beacon-light.— Br own iron tube, with octagonal lantern. The South and Long Reach i?ange lights are fixed white lights on cribs, the main beacon exactly at the elbow of the South and Long reaches, and the east and south berx)ons, 1,000 feco to the southward and eastward, respectively, of the main beacon. The south and main beacons in range guide from Buoy No. 11 to the latter beacon, and the east and main besoons in range guide to the outer range. Turning Buoy No. lO. — Red spar buoy in 11 feet of water. On the west nank, exactly at the turning point, and opposite the main beacon. Outer Reach Range, Outer Range Elbow No. 21.— Black, 2d-olas8 nun buoy in 13^^ feet of water. Marks the elbow of chacinel, entering the Outer Range reach, nearly 1 mile in length. Pass it to the northward. The Outer Range beacons, in line, serve, together with the buoys, to guide in this reach. Outer Range beacons, W. f N., 2^ miles. North Cape point, N. by E. t^ E., \\ mileu. Outer Range Beacon-light (front) .—Square tower, 18 feet high, red above and white below. Outer Range Beacon-light (rear).— Scjunre tower, 24 ftei high, painted white. Detached brown dwelling behind. LAKE KRIE. 71 Raisin f water. Between feet of tanoe of i side of e Island i8., 2 The outer range lights are fixed white lights, visible 9f and 11 miles. On the west shore of the bay, 1^ miles north of the mouth of the river. Distance between beacons, 830 feet. Middle Range Reach. Middle Range Elbow No 26.— Red spar buoy in 12^ feet of water. This buoy marks the elbow of channel entering the Middle range reach, 1,100 yards in length. Pass to southward of the buoi . The Outer and Middle Beacon ranges intersect in this elbow; the latter rsnge, together with the buoys, guides up the reach. Outer range beacon, W. k N., 1^ miles. West end of Nagg's ' iland, N. ^ E. Middle Range Beacon-light (front).— Square wooden tower, 12 feet high, red above and white below. Middle Range Beacon-light (rear).— A white, shed- roofed, frame building, with long panelled front, to traverse the light at pleasure; a black stripe, from ground to eaves, on each side of lantern- window; height of light, 21 feet. The Middle range beacon lights are fixed red lights, visible 9} and 11 miles. On the west shore of the bay, two-thirds of a mile north of the month of the river. Distance between beacons, 1,260 feet. Inner Range Reach. Inner Reach Elbow No. 28.— Red, Sd-class can buoy, in 14 feet of water. Marks the elbow of channel entering the Inner range reach. If miles in length. Pass the buoy to the eastward. The Middle and Inner beacon ranges intersect in this elbow; the latter range, to- g ether with the buoys, guides up the reach. From 200 yards above this uoy to the end of dredged channel, 12 to 13 feet of water is found on the west side and within 100 yards of the channel. Front beacon. Outer range, N. W. by W. Inner range beacons, S. S. W. ^ W., 2f miles. Inner Range Beacon-light (£ront).-rSqttare tower, 12 feet high, red above, white below. Inner Range Beacon-light (rear).— A white, shed-roofed building, with long panelled frdnt, to traverse the light at pleasure; a black LvTipe, from ground to eaves, on each side of lantern window; hight of light, 21 feet. The Inner Range beacon-lights are fixed red lights, visible 10 and Hi miles. On the east bank of the Maumee river, 1^ miles above its mouth. Distance between beacons, 730 feet. Middle Ground. — Red spar buoy in 14 feet of water; the last buoy stands in clay bottom, at the upper end and outer edge of the Middle ground; pass it to the eastward. Along this stretch, flats with only 6 feet of water in places make out from the east bank, one-half to two-thirds way across the river. Draw-pier of Pennsylvania Railroad bridge, S. W. f W., seven-eighths mile. Draw-pier of Wheeling and Lake Brie :Railroad bridge, N. E. k £. 72 LAKE EUIE. Straight Channel in Maumee Bay, The inner end of the Straight Cut is completed, and with the Long reach forms a straight channel from Grassy point to the Maumee Bay ranges, about 4f miles in length. It enters the Long reach at its intersection with the Outer Range reach, which was marked at the elbow with black can buoy No. 21. This buoy has been moved to the south side of the Straight cut, but still marks the turning point of the old channel. From thence to Qrassy point the new cut is marked with 8 buoys, 4 on each side, and numbered from 1 to 8. Bound in the first buoy is No. 2 red, and the last one, marking the turn into the main river, is No. 7 black. Buoy No. 7, new cut, has been moved out nearly opposite to No. 8. Standing North along the West Shore of Lake Erie, and into the Detroit River. Note. — Southwest gales lower the water at this end of the lake from 2 to 3 feet, and northeast gales raise it about as much. Raisin Point. — Black, 2d-class nun buoy in 15 feet of water. Marks the end of a shoal extending 1^ miles from Raisin point; hard sand bottom. Monroe light-house, N. N. W. f W., \\ miles. Stony point, N. E. by N. \ N., 5 miles. MONROE LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. White, square low tower on white dwelling, lantern black. On crib at outer end of north pier of entrance to the ship canal leading into the River Raisin, Michigan, 1^ miles above its mouth. The crib is partially enclosed for the protection of the buildings. The 12- foot curve of the bottom lies about one-fourth mile outside the pierhead; best water is found by standing in in line with the straight (inner) sec- tion of, the north pier (W. N. W. \ W). On this course 10 feet of water may be carried in. Width between piers', 200 feet at outer end, 100 feet iln^ide. S2,ndy bottom between and outside the piers; north pier projects 140 feet beyond the south. A straight course may be made from the Raisin point buoy to the point outside for entering this harb^^r. Stony point to the northward may be passed within one-fourth mile. Stony point, N. E. \ E., 4^ miles. Detroit River light-house N. E. f E., 12| miles. Point Mouill^* — Black, 2d-cla8s can buoy in 14 feet of water. Marks the end of a shoal extending 1^ miles southeast from Point Mouill6; hard sand bottom. Stony point, S. W. \ W., 6 miles. Gibral- tar light-house, N. \ W., 7 J miles. DETROIT RIVER LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white for one minute, followed by six consecutive white flashes, at intervals of 10 LAKE £BI£. 78 seconds; 4th order, visible 14 miles. Brown, iron, circular tower, lan> tern black. Focal plane 56 feet above the level of the lake. On a masonry pier 1 1 feet above water and in 23 feet water. There is also on the pier a fog-signal house, of corrugated iron, the same color as the tower. During thick and foggy weather there will be sounded at this station a 10-inch steam fog- whistle, giving a blast of 5 seconds' duration, followed by an interval of 25 seconds. Entering Detroit river, keep on the line joining Detroit River light and Bois Blanc light until within 1^ miles of it, when steer N. by £. f E. until abreast of the light, when keep in the middle of the river. A straight channel into the river is buoyed by the Canadian Government. Bois Blanc light, N. by E., 64- miles. Monroe light, S. W. i W., 12^ miles. West Sister light, S. i E., 18i miles. North side of Middle Sister, S. E. | S., 12f miles. Compass Courses and Distances on the South Shore of Lake Erie. Note. — Courses and bearings corrected Distances in statute miles. for magnetic variation. Buffalo to Long Point, Felee Spit, and Detroit River liigl t. — When at the north end of breakwater, steer W. by 8. f S., 63f miles, to a point 2 miles south of Long Point light, thence W. by S. f S., 134 miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light. When steer W. by N. \ N., Z^\ miles, to a point ^ mile N. by E. from Detroit River light, and in range with it and Bois Blanc light, passing 1 mile north of Colchester Reef I'^ht, and i mile south of Bar Point red buoy, which marks the positioi formerly occupied by the lightship. For further directions see sailinsr '''rections for Detroit river. Buffalo to " ? Point, Pelee Spit, and Toledo.—When 1^ miles south of j. e. Spit light, as in the previous course, steer W. by N. J N., 2f miles, thence W. by S. i S., with the Spit light directly astern, passing close to the middle ground, 29^ miles, to a point 1 mile north of West Sister Island light, passing \ mile south of East Sister island; thence W. \ N., 13f miles, to a point If miles N. E. by N. \ N. from Turtle Island light. Whence see directions for entering Maumee Bay. Buffalo to Dunkirk. — When at the north end of breakwater, steer 8. W. \ W., 34| miles, to a point 1 mile northwest of beacon-light. Buffalo to Erie. — When at the north end of breakwater steer S. W. f W., 76^ miles, to a point 1^ miles northeast from Presque Isle beacon-light. Buffalo to Ashtabula. — When at the north end of breakwater, steer S. W. by W. \ W., 117 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Ashtabula light. Buffalo to Fairport. — When at the north end of breakwater, steer S. W. by W. \ W,, 143 miles, to a point 2 J miles north of Fair- port beacon-light. Buffalo to Cleveland.— As in the course to a point 2^ miles north of Fairport, thence S. W. \ W., 29 miles, to a point 1 mile north of breakwater light. •u LAKE BBIB. Buffalo to Black River.— When at the north end of break- water, steer S. W. by W. ^ W., 198^ miles, to a point 1 mile north of light. Buffalo to Sandusky. — When at the north end of breakvrater, tteer W. S. W. ^ S., 216 miles, to the red can buoy, 1 mile N. E. of Cedar Point Range beacon, whence see sailing directions for entering Sandusky bay. Buffalo to South Passage. — When at the north end of break- water, steer W. S. W., 216 miles, to a point 1| miles north of Marble- head light, whence see course from Sandusky to Green island. The course from Buffalo to South passage leads 3^ miles south of Long Point light. Buffalo to Middle Passage. — When at the north end of break- water, steer W. by S. f 8., 210 miles, to a point ^ mile south of Middle Island light. Passing 2^ miles south of Long Point light. NoTB. — ^The magnetic variation at Buffalo is 4°.2 W.; at Middle island there is no variation. The mean variation on this course is 2° .1 W., or practically i of a point of the compass, which is applied to the right hand. The True or Chart course is W. S. W. Buffalo to Port Golbome. — When at the north end of break- water, steer W. by S. | S., lOi miles, to a point 1 mile south of Point Abino, then W. by N. ^ N., 8^ miles, to a point 1 mile S. by W. from Main light. Buffalo to Port DoTer.— When at the water, steer W. by S. f S. 10^ miles, to a point 1 north end of break- mile south of Point a point 1 mile S. by E. from the light at ^bino, then W. 56 miles, to Port Dover. Dunkirk to Erie.— When l mile N. W. by N. from beacon-light, steer S. W. by W. f W., 43 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. E. from Presque Isle beacon-light. Dunkirk to Fairport and Cleveland.— When i mile N. W. by N. from beacon-light, steer W. S. W. ^ S., 110 milts to a point 2^ miles north of Fairport beacon, thence S. W. i W., 29 miles, to a point 1 mile north of breakwater light. Dunkirk to South Passage.— When i mile N. W. by N. from beacon-light, steer W. S. W. f W., 184^ miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Marblehead light. Dunkirk to Pelee Spit.— Wh^en i mile N. W. bv N. from beacon-light, steer W. by S. ^ S., 168^ miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light. Brie to Fairport and Cleveland. — When i^ miles northeast from Presque Isle beacon-light, steer N. W. | W., 3 miles, then W. S. W., 66^ miles, to a point 2^ miles north of Fairport beacon-light, thence S. W. ^ W., 29 miles, to a point 1 mile north of breakwater light. Brie to South Passage. — When 1| miles northeast from Presque Isle beacon-light, steer N. W. } W., 3 miles, then steer W. by S. ^ S., 141 miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Marblehead light, whence see course from Sandusky to Green island. Erie to Middle Passage. — When 1^ miles northeast from Presque Isle beacon-light, steer nT W. f W., 3 miles, thence W. by S. ^ LAKE EBIB. Tft 8., 137 miles, to a point ^ mile south of Middle Island light. See course from Middle Passage to Bar Point, etc. Erie to Point Pelee.— When l^ miles north jast from Presque Isle beacon-light, steer N. W. I W., 8 miles, thence W. 1 S., 126 miles, to d point 1^ miles south of the Spit light. See course from Buffalo to Long Point, etc. Erie to Port Stanley. — When l^ miles northeast from Presque Isle beacon-light, steer N. W. by W. i W., 68 miles, to a point il mile south of Port Stanley light. Erie to Rondeau. — When l^ miles northeast from Presque Isle beacon-light, steei- N. W. f W., 3 miles, thence W. ^ N. a little norther- ly, 94 miles, to a point 2 miles south of main light. Ashtabula to Fairport and Cleveland.— When 2 miles N. W. of Ashtabula light, steer W. by S. t S., 26 miles, to a point 2^ miles north of Fairport beacon-light, thence S. W. ^ W., 29 miles to a point 1 mile north of breakwater Tight. Ashtabula to South Passage.— When 2 miles N. W. of Ashtabula light, steer W. by S. i S., 101 miles to a point 1^ miles north of Marblehead light. Whence see courses from Sandusky to Green island, and Green Island light to Bar point, etc. Ashtabula to Pelee Spit. — When l mile north of Ashtabula light, steer W. ^ S., 88 miles to a point 1^ miles south of Spit light. Ashtabula to Port Stanley. — When l mile north of Ashta- bula light, steer N. by W. f W., 54 miles, to a point i mile south of Port Stanley light. Ashtabula to Buffalo. — When l mile north of Ashtabula light, steer N. E. by E. ^ E., 117 miles, to the north end of the breakwater. Ashtabula to Rondeau.— When l mile north of Ashtabula light, steer W. N. W., 62^ miles to a point 1 mile south of main light. Ashtabula to Long Point. — When l mile north of Ashtabula light, steer N. E. 56 miles to a point 2 miles south of Long Point light. Fairport to Cleveland. — When l^ miles northwest from Fair- port beacon-light, steer S. W. ^ W., 27^ miles, to a point 1 mile north of breakwater light. Fairport to Black River. — When U miles northwest from Fairport beacon-light, steer W. S. W., 50 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Black River light. Fairport to South Passage. — When i^ miles northwest from Fairport beacon-light, steer W. i S., 74^ miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Marblehead light. See course from Sandusky to Green Island, etc. Fairport to Pelee Spit. — When 1| miles northwest from Faii port beacon-light, steer W. f N., 62^ miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light. Fairport to Port Stanley.— When l miie north from Fairport beacon-light, steer N. ^ £., 60^^ miles, to a point i mile south of Fort Stanley light. Fairport to Rondeau.— When l mile north from Fairport beacon-light, Bteer N. W., 46 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Rondeau main lieht. ■7' I 76 LAKE EBIB. Fairport to Buffalo. — When 2} miles north of Fairport beacon- light, steer N. £. by E. i E., 143 miles, to the north end of Baffalo breakwater. OleTeland to Black Biyer, Yennllion, and Huron.— When 1^ miles N. W. by W. from Cleveland Breakwater light, steer W. f N , 14 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Avon point, thence W. by 8. f S., 9^ miles, to a point 1 mile north of Black River light; or same course 19^ miles to a point 1 mile north of Vermilion light, or W. by S. ^ 8., 28| miles, or until Huron light bears S. W. 1 mile distant. Cleveland to Sandusky. — When l^ miles N. W. by W. from the breakwater light, steer W. f N., 14 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Avon point, thence W. ^ 8., 35 miles, to Outer buoy, 1 mile northeast from Cedar Point Range beacon. Cleveland to South Passage.— When i^ miles N. W. by W. from the breakwater light, steer W. ^ N., 51 miles, to a point 1} miles north of Marblebead light. This course leads close to Avon point. See course from Sandusky to Green island and Detroit river. Cleveland to Middle Passage.— When at the breakwater light, steer W. by N. ^ N., 51 miles, to & point i mile south of Middle Island light. See course from Middle passage to Bar point. Cleveland to Pel^e Spit and Detroit River Light.— When at the breakwater light, steer N. W. by W. f W., 47 miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light, thence W. by N. f N., 34^ miles, to a point ^ mile N. by £. from Detroit River light, and in range with it and Bois Blano light, passing 1 mile north of Colchester Reef light, and ^ mile south of Bar Point red buoy. Cleveland to Port Stanley. — When at the breakwater light, steer N. by E. f E., 82 miles, to a point ^ mile south of Port Stanley light. Cleveland to Port Colborne. — When l mile north of break- water light, steer N. E. ^ E., 29 miles, to a point 2^ miles north of Fair- port beacon-light; thence N. E. by E., 127 miles, or until Port Colborne main light bears N. by E., 1 mile distant. Cleveland to Buffalo* — When l mile north of breakwater light, steer N. E. ^ E., 29 miles, to a point 2| miles north of Fairport beacon- light; thence N. £. by E. ^ E., 143 miles, to the north end of Buffalo breakwater. Cleve^fiind to Rondeau. — When l mile north of breakwater light, steer !N. by W. 51 miles to a point 1 mile south of Rondeau main light. Black River to South Passage.— When l mile north of pier- head light, steer W. by N., 27^ miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Marblehead light-house, whence see course from Sandusky to Green Island light, and Detroit river. Black River to Middle Passage.— When i mile north of pierhead light, steer N. W. by W. f W., 28^ miles, to a point | milo south of Middle Island light, passing ^ mile north of Gull Island Shoal buoy. Whence see course from Middle Passage to Detroit River light. Black River to P^lee Spit. — When l mile north of pierhead light, steer N. W. by N., 30 miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light. LAKE BRIB!. 77 Termilion to South Pa8sa|fe.— When 1 mile noith of pier- head light, steer W. N. W. ^ N., 19^ miles, to a point 1^ mile' north of. Marblehead light-house. Whence see course f fodi. ^an^usky-to "^fSen Island light. Vermilion to Avon Point. — When l mile north of pierhead light, s r E. by N. f N., 19^ miles, or until the point bears south dis- tant 1 mile. Huron to South Passage. — When l mile north of pierhead light-house, steer N. W. f N., 12f miles, to a point 1^ miles noith of Marblehead light-hopse. Huron to Point Avon. — When 1 mile northeast of pierhead light-house, steer E. by N. ^ N., 28^ miles, or until the point bears south 1 mile distant. Sandusky to Green Island and Detroit River Light. — When 1^ miles northeast of Cedar Point light and in range of beacon, steer N. W. by N. ^ N., 4^ miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Marble- head light; thence N. W. by W., for 9^ miles, to a point 1 mile south of Green Island light. Then N. W. by N. ^ N., 80 miles, to a point 1 mile N. by E. from Detroit River light. « Sandusky to Buffalo. — When l^ miles northeast of Cedar Point light and in range of beacon, steer N. £. by E. f E., 216 miles to the nortn end of breakwater. Green Island to Detroit River Light.— When i mile south of light, steer N. W. by N. ^ N., 80 miles, to a point 1 mile N. by E. from Detroit River light, and in range with it and Bois Blanc light, Eassing ^ mile west of Middle Sister island, and about f of a mile east of Detroit River light. Green Island to Entrance to Maumee Bay.— When i mile south of Green Island li^ht, steer N. W. by W., for 15 miles to a point 1 mile north of West Sister Island light, then steer W. ^ N., 18f miles, to Turtle Island Shoal buoy, or until Turtle Island light bears S. W. by S. i S., If miles. To pass south of West Sister island, when 1 mile south of Oreen Island light, steer N. W. by W., for 6^ miles, to a point 1 mile north of Niagara Reef buoy and in line with Green island and West Sister lights, when steer W. by N. -f N., 2 If miles, to north side of Turtle Island Shoal buoy. Green Island to Monroe. — When i mile south of light, steer N. W. f W., 29 miles, to a point I mile east of Monroe light. Entrance to Maumee Bay to Pel^e Spit.— When if miles N. E. by N. ^ N. from Turile Island light, west side of black can buoy, steer E. 4* S., 13f miles, to a point 1 mile north of West Sister Island light, thence E. by N. ^ N. for 29^ miles, ranging on Pel6e Spit light, and to within 2f miles of it, when steei E. by S. f S., for 2f miles to a point 1^ miles south of Spit light. This course leads close to the north end of Middle ground. Entrance to Maumee Bay to Detroit River Light.— When If miles N. E. by N. ^ N. from Turtle Island light, steer N. E. i N. 19 miles to a point 1 mile S. by W. of Detroit River Tight and in range with it and Bois Blanc Island light. I 7« LAlKB bbik. Entrance to Maumee Bay to Marblehead and Buf- falo. — Round Turtle Island Shoal buoy, and steer E. by S. f S. 21f miles to a point 1 mile north of Niagara Reef buoy, and in range of West Sister island and Green Island lights, when steer S. E. by E., 16 miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Marblehead light, passing between the buoys on Mouse Island reef and Starve Island reef. When steer £. N. E., 216 miles, to the north end of Buffalo breakwater. Middle Passasre to Bar Point, Detroit River light.— When ^ mile south of Middle Island light steer W. f miles, or until the west end of Middle Island bears N., wnen steer N. W. by W. 19 miles, until the east side of Middle Sister bears N. 1^ miles, passing f mile north of North Bass island, when steer N. W. by N. f N., 14f miles, to a point 1 mile N. by E. from Detroit River light, and in range with Bois Blanc light. Middle Passage to the Entrance of Maumee Bay.— When ^ mile south ot Middle Island light, steer W. f mile or until the west end of Middle island bears north, when steer N. W. by W. 7f miles, or until the middle of North Bass island bears south distant one mile, when steer W. I N. 28^ miles to Turtle Island Shoal buoy, or until Turtle Island light bears S. W. by S. ^ S. 1^ miles. This course passes I^ miles north of West Sister Island light. Middle Passage to Put-in-Bay.— When ^ mile south of Middle Island light steer W. ^ N., 5^ miles, to a point \ mile north of Ballast island, thence S. W. 2^ miles to the dock in Put-in-Bay. Marblehead to Detroit River Light, passing be- tween Middle Bass and South Bass Islands.— When i^ miles north of Marblehead light, steer N. W. by N. ^ N., 3^ miles, to a point ^ mile west of the west point of Kelley's island, then steer N. by W. f W., 6^ miles, to a point ^ mile east of Ballast island, haul around the island until its west side bears south ^ mile distant, then steer S. W., heading on Gibraltar Island, If miles, when steer west with the north point of South Bass island directly astern 4 miles, then steer N. W. by N. ^ N., 27 J miles, to a point 1 mile N. by E. from Detroit River light and in range with Bois Blanc light. Passing ^ mile west of Middle Sis- ter island. Put-in-Bay to Detroit River Light, passing be- tween Snalce and Middle Bass Islands.- -when i mile east of Gibraltar island steer N, W. by N., 29^ miles, to a point N. by E. 1 mile from Detroit River light, and in range with Bois Blanc Island light. This course leads north of Middle island ^ of a mile. Put-in-Bay to Entrance to Maumee Bay.— When close to the east side of Gibraltar island, steer N. N. W. ^ W., ^ mile to clear Peach Orchard buoy, when steer W. by N. f N., 29^ miles, to a point If miles N. E. by N. ^ N. from Turtle Island light, passing 1 mile south of West Sister island light. Detroit River Light to Pelee Spit.— When i mile N. by B. from Detroit River light and in range with Boin Blanc light, steer E. by S. f S., passing ^ mile south of Bar Point red buoy, and 1 mile north of Colchester Reef light house, 844^ miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light. Detroit River Light to Monroe. — When ^ mile south of LAKE EBIE. T» Detroit Biver light, steer S. W. ^ W., 11^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Monroe ligbt, passing close to Stony point. Monroe to Pelee Spit. — When l mile east of Monroe light, steer E. | S., 41^ miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light Magnetic Declinations in degrees and tenths, corrected to the year 1890: Buffalo 4*.8W. PortColborne 4° .6 W. Long Point 3" .8 W. Erie 3" .6 W. Pairport 2' . 3 W. Cleveland r . 8 W. Black River 1°.0W. Cedar Point 0° .5 W. Pel6e Island 0° .8 W, Kelley'fl Island 0' .6 W. Toledo 0°.0 KIngaville 0* .8 W. Bois Blanc Island 0" .6 W. Canadian Light- Houses, Buoys, and Harbors on the North Shore of Lake Erie Standing to the Westward, PORT COLBORNE lilGHT-STATION.— Main light. A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. Open, wood, frame tower, light 70 feet above lake level. On west pierhead, at the Lake Erie entrance to Welland canal. Port Colbome Range ILight.— A fixeu red light. White, square, wood tower, light 38 feet above lake level. On the E. side of entrance, on crib, 2030 feet N. by E. ^ E., from main light. The two lights, in range, give deepest water to entrance of canal clear of Sugar Loaf reef. In entering main light must be passed to port, back one on starboard side. Fog horn sounds blasts of 1 1 seconds every 1^ minutes. Port Colborne Beacon. — A vertically striped red and white beacon, surmounted by a globe, stands on the outermost crib of east pier, not lighted. To enter the harbor, bring the lights in range, heading about N. by E. \ E., and when near the end of the west pier port so as to clear it, and follow it into the basin; 16 feet can be carried in. Sugar Loaf hill, \\ miles west of Port Colborne, is a good mark for vessels bound down the lake. A reef extends from the east side of the entrance, in a southerly direction, an 11-foot spot near its outer end bears S. by E. \ E. from the main light 1,000 yards distant; from 12^ to 14 feet can be carried through the Welland canal. MOHAWK ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white light, showing 3 bright flashes with intervals of 30 seconds be- tween their points of greatest brilliancy, followed by an eclipse of 76 seconds, or making a complete revolution in 2^ minutes, visible 15 miles. White, circular, stone tower, 00 feet high, light 64 feet above lake level. On an island 1 mile southwest of main land, and 3^ miles S. E. by B. from the entrance to Pore Maitland, and 14 miles west of the entrance to 80 LAKU EKIU. the WeDand canal. Good protection from S. W. and W. gales can be had by anchoring under the lee of a reef which extends in a southeast direction about 2^ miles from the light, come to in about 3^- fathoms with the light bearing west. Shoal water extends to the westward of Point Selkirk, which is 2^ miles east of the light. PORT MAITLAND lilGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 13 miles. White, open frame, wood tower, light 51 feet above lake level. On west pier at the entrance to Grand river. Grand River, or Port Maitland, is a good harbor and easy to make, the piers are 1,60U feet in length. To enter the harbor run straight in, keeping the west pier well on board; depth of water at the entrance, 11 to 12 feet. To come to anchor, run above the entitince to canal, which is on the east side of the river. PORT DOVER lilGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light., visible 8 miles. White, hexagonal, wood tower, 20 feet high. On the west pier. The piers are 1,020 feet in length, with from 11 to 12 feet at the entrance. Long Point light bears S. by E. ^ E., 18^ miles. L.ONG POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white lijht, interval of revolution 1 minute, visible 15 miles. Octagonal wood tower, light 65 feet above lake level. On the east extremity of Long poi/it. Fog Signal.— A steam fog horn is to be established at the east end of Long point, and the contract for the necessary buildings has been let. Port Colborne light N. E. by E. f E., 47 miles. Dunkirk light E. | S., 36 miles. ' Presque Isle light S. |- W., 26f miles. Long poi 3t affords good protection and shelter from aU southerly and westerly gales. To make a lee, haul around the low sandy point, giving the light a berth of seven-sighths Of a mile and come to between the point and Big Bluff in from 4 to 6 fathoms, good anchorage. Shoal water extends from Bluff point, which is 3 miles to the westward of the light, to the northward and westward, 2f miles. WEST END OF LONG POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving red light, interval of revolution 1 minute, visible 12 miles. White, square, wood tower, dwelling attached. On the east side of new channel. Visible from all points seaward. When lifeboat is required the light will be obscured towards Port Rowan. Port Burwell, or Big Otter Creek.- A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. Octagonal wood tower, 333 yards in-shore. The west pier extends into the lake 850 feet, and the east pier 670 feet; width Detween piers, 170 feet; depth of water at entrance, 10 to 11 feet. The light is on the hill east side, the focal plane is 96 feet above lake level. Presque Isle light, S. E., 49 miles. Fairport light S. S. W., 65 miles. Rondeau point S. W. by W. i W., 60 miles. Port Bruce, or Catfish Creek. — A fixed white light. On a pole. The west pier is 750 feet in length, and the east pier 700 feet. Port Bruce is 10 miles west of Port Burwell and about the same distance east of Port Stanley. PORT STANLEY LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light. White, square, wood tower. On west pier, vi.'hle from all points sea- ward. The west pier is 1,870 feet in length, and the east pier 1,150 feet. Depth of water at entrance, 11 to 14 feet. Rondeau- point, S. W. f W., 43 miles. Ashtabula light S. by E. i E., 56 miles. m -M ;| ■l-.t LAKE BSIB. 81 RONDEAU LIGHT-STATION (Main liight).— A revolv- ing light showing alternate red and white flashes every 1^ minutes, vis- ible 16 miles. Octagonal wooden tower, white, on a steel-faoed cylind- rical base, built up from the pier and painted brown. Focal plane of light 70 feet above the lake level. On the eastern breakwater 780 feet K by E. i E. from the front range light. Rondeau Harbor (Front Iilgbt).— A fixed white light visible 18 miles, over a small arc on each side of the range. White, square, wooden, open framework tower. On a cribwork block upon the outer end of the east breakwater pier. The Sosition formerly occupied by the main light. The two lights in range N. by E. i I. lead up to the outer end of the east pier, and the light must be left on the star- board hand on entering. Rondeau Harbor is on the south side of Point aux Pins, W. | 8., 98 miles from Long point. It is a natural basin, enclosed by Point aux Pins, with a cut through the neck, or sand bank; the sides of the cut are protected by two parallel piers 788 feet in length, and 250 feet apart, direction north and south. Depth of water at the entrance, 18 to 21 feet. Pel6e Spit light 8. W. | W., 40 miles. Cleveland light 8 by E.. 53 miles. Fairport light 8. E. i 8., 48 miles. The east side of Point aux Pins affords a good shelter from westerly gales, good anchorage in 6 to 7 fathoms, clay bottom, vessels frequently come to west of the harbor for shelter in north- east galea. PEL^E SPIT LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white light, visible 15 miles. White, octagonal, wood tower, 61 feet high, light 76 t(jeX above lake level. On a crib 2^ miles south of the point. Fog horn operated by compressed air has been established at this station. The horn projects horizontally from the S. E. face of the pier, and is 20 feet above lake level. It sounds blasts of 7 seconds' duration, with intervals of 45 seconds. Pel6e Island light bears W. S. W. 7f miles. Colchester Reef light W. by N., 20^ miles. The west ^de of Point Pel6e affords excellent shelter from all northeast and easterly gales, and the east side from northwest or westou; gales. To make a lee on the west side, coming from the eastward, run past the light, give it a berth of ^ to ^ a mile, and haul up N. by W. for from 3 to 5 miles, when come-to in about 6 fathoms, clay bottom. There are shoal spots from 1^ to If miles B. to E. S. E. from the light; least water 13 feet. The north end of the mid- dle ground bears W. by S. f S., 4^ miles, and the south end 8. W. by W. i W., 4f miles, and a range between Pel6e Spit and Pel^e Island lights, passes a little north of the middle of the shoal. Shoals near Point Pel^e Lig^ht.— The Deputy Minister of Marine of Canada has issued the following Notice to Mariners, dated October 25, 1888: *' Notice is hereby given that a spot with only 13 feet of water is reported on the shoals lying about 1^ miles to the eastward of Point PelSe light-house, which shoals are shown on the American chart of the lake. Also that the wrecked schooner * Walter H. Oades ' lies about 400 feet southwest of the 13-foot only 6 feet of water over her." spot, in 21 'feet of water, with PELEE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White, circular, stone tower, 40 feet high, light 46 feet above lake level. On the northeast point of Pel6e island. The north end of Middle ground bears N. E. by E. f E., 3^ miles, and the south end K. J N. 8 miles. Colchester Reef light N. W. by W. ^ W., 14| miles. South side of East Sister island W. | 8., 1 If miles. A reef extends from the light 1 mile, in a northeast direction. There is good anchorage on the west side of the island, and protection from easterly gales. Th« r 82 LAKE ERIE. east side of Pel6e island shoald not be approached nearer than If miles. Ghickenolee reef is 2f miles from southeas' point of island. MIDDLE ISIiAND LIGHT-STilTION.— A fixed red light, visible 12 miles. White, square, wood tower, 49 feet high; light 70 feet - above sea level. This light is between Pel6e aij J Kelley's island, and marks the channel between thera. Gull Island Bhoal buoy S. ^ E., 1 mile; the best channel is between this buoy and the light. There is a shoal, least water 10 feet, £. N. E. ^ N., f mile. To pass north of Mid- dle island, brin^ the light to bear E., end run for it on that course to within f of a mile, when steer W. N. W. i N , 8 miles, to a point f mile north of North Bass island. LEAMINGTON LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 1!J miles. White, square, wood tower ^ light 48 feet above lake level. On shore near the pier. Pel6e Spit light S. S. E. i E., 12 miles. Colchester Reef light W. S. W. -J S., 16 miles. KING8VILLE LIGHT-STATION (Front Light).— A fixed red light, lantern on a pole, 27 feet above the level of the lake. On the outer end of the east breakwater pier. Back Light. — A fixed white light, visible 12 miles, light 55 feet above lake level. Square, white wooden tower, lantern red. On the bank of the lake at the head of the east pier 1,060 feet N. by W. from Front light. The two lights in range lead up to the entrance. The front light to be left on the right hand or starboard side in entering. KJngSVille is situated 6f miles west of Leamington, and 10 miles to the eastward of Litt;«'s point. The Aarbor works consist of two piers. The east pier is 880 feet in length and extends south; the west pier diverges so as to inclose a basin in the form of the letter V. Pel6e Spit light S. E. i E., 16i miles. Colchester Reef light S. W. I W. 10^ miles. COLCHESTER BEEF LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3d order, visible 14 miles, illuminates the entire horizon. Circular Btone pier 20 feet above the lake, surmounted by a hexagonal wood tower painted white. The vane of the lantern is 60 feet above the pier. The structure stands near the southeastern edge of the reef, in 18 feet of water, with 19 feet of water within 1,000 feet of it on every side. The lightship is removed. Visible all around the horizon. A fog bell struck by machinery, is placed in a belfry on south side of tower, 55 feet above the lake level, and in thick and foggy weather will sound one stroke everv 15 seconds. Middle Sister S. Vv., 8| miles. Dock at Little's point, N. W. by N., 4 miles. Bar Point Lightship. — Removed, the position is marked by a large, red, spar buoy in 18 feet of water, N. E. by E. ^ E. 1 mile from the Detroit River light, 100 yards south of the west end of reef. Bois Blano light N., 5^ miles. Vessels passing inside should give the buoy a berth of ^ a mile, and heavy draught vessels should pass to the south- ward. To Enter Detroit River, north of the red spar buo^, where the lightship was formerly moored. — When 1 k miles south of Little's point steer W N. W. to a point three-quarters of a mile northeast from buoy, thence steer N. W. by N. heading on Celeron island, until in ranee with Detroit river and Boia Blano lights, when steer for Bois Blano light, nntil within li miles of it, thence N. by E. | £. into the river. Only li^icbt draught vessels shonM attempt this passagp. LAKE ERIK. km than If miles. and 10 miles Compass Courses and Distances on the North Shore of Lake Erie. Port Colborne to Dunkirk.— When l mile S. by W. \ from byN. main light, steer S. by W. f W., 25 miles, to a point 1 mile from beacon-light. Port Colborne to Erie.— When l mile S. by W. from main light, steer IS. W. i S., 63 miles, to a point 1^ miles northeast from Presque Isle beacon-light. Port Colborne to Ashtabula.— When i mile S. bv W. from main light, steer S. W. \ W., 102 miles to a point 1 mile north of Ashta- bula light. Port Colborne to Falrport and Cleveland.— When i mile S. by W. from main light, steer S. W. by W. 127 miles, to a point 2^ miles north of Fairport beacon-light, when steer S. W. \ W., 29 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Cleveland breakwater light. Port Colborne to Longr Point.— When l mile S. by W. from main light, steer S. W. by W. i W., 47 miles, to a point 2 miles south of light. Port Colborne to bandusky.— When 2 miles south of Long Point light, as in the course from Port Colborne, steer S. W. by W. 1 W., 152 miles, to a point 1^ miles northeast of Cedar Point light, and in range with beacon. Port Colborne to South Passage, and Toledo.— When 2 miles south of Long Point light, as in the oourae from Port Colborne, steer S. W. by W. \ W., 15 1^ miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Marble- head light, when steer N.«W. by W., 16 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Niagara Reef buoy, and in line with Green island and West Sister Island lights, when steer W. by N. | N. 21f miles, to a point If miles N. E. by N. \ N. from Turtle Island light. Port Colborne to Middle Passage, Detroit and Toledo. —When 2 miles south of Long Point light as in the course from Port Colborne, steer W. 8. W., 146^ miles, to a point \ mile south of Middle Island light; thence W. \ mile, or until the west end of Middle island bears north, when steer N. W. by W., 19 miles, until the east side of Middle Sister bears N. 1^ miles, passing } mile north of North Bass island, when steer N. W. by N. f N., 14f miles, to a point 1 mile N. by K from Detroit River li^ht and in range with Bois Blanc light. Or when \ mile south of Middle Island light, steer west \ mile, or until the west end of Middle island bears north, when steer N. W. by W. 7f miles, or until the middle of North Bass island bears south dis- tant one mile, when steer W. f N. 28^ miles to Turtle Island Shoal buoy or until Turtle Island light bears S. W. by S ^ S. If miles passing 1^ miles north of West Si%ter Island light. Port Colborne to Detroit River Light. — When 2 milet south of Long Point light, as in the course from Port Colborne, steer W. by S. f S., 134 miles, to a point 1^ miles south of the Spit light, when steer W. by N. f N., 84| miles, to a point \ mile N. by K. from Detroit River light, and in range with it and Bois Blanc light, pasBing 1 mile north of Colchester Reel light, and \ mile south of Bar Point red buoy. The position formerly occupied by the Bar Point light^ship. Port Colborne to Port Maitland. —When i mile ft by W. from main light, steer S. W. by W. f W., 8 miles, then steer W. | N., » 84 LAKE SRIE. I miles, to a point 3. W. f W., 8 mileR from Mohawk light; thenoe N. by W. 2 miles, or until in range of west pier. Entering keep the west pier well on board and follow it up into the river. Port Colborne to Port Dover.— When i mile S. by W. from the main light, steer S. W. by W. f W., 8 miles; thenoe west 41 miles, to a point 1 mile S. by E. from the light. Port Maitland to Port Dover.— When i mile south of light, steer 8. W. by. W. for 7 miles, then steer W. ^ N., 26 miles, to a point 1 mile S. by E. from the light. Port Maitland to Lbngr Point. —When i mile south of light, steer S. W. ^ W., 33 miles, to a point 2 miles south of light. Port Dover to Liong Point. — When l mile south of pier, steer S. S. £. i £., 16 miles, to a point 1^ miles east of Loug Point light. Longf Point to Buffalo. — When 2 miles so^iih of Long Point light, steer E. by N. f N. 63f miles, to the nortli end of the Buffalo breakwater. ' JjOng Point to Erie. — When two miles south of Long Point light, steer S. ^ W., 24 miles, to a point 1^ miles northeast of Presque Isle beacon-light. Long Point to Fairport and Cleveland. —When 2 miles south oflight, steer 8. W. f W., 80 miles, to a point 2^ miles north of Fairport beacon-light; thence S. W. ^ W., 29 miles, to a point 1 mile nortn of Cleveland breakwater light. Long Point to South Passage.— See course from Port Col- borne to Toledo. Long Point to Middle Passage. -See course from Port Col- borne to Middle Passage. Long Point to Pel6e Spit. — When 2 miles south of light, steer wTby S. f S., 134 miles, to s, point 1^ miles south of spit light. Long Point to Rondeau. — When 2 miles south of lij^-ht, steer W. f S., 98 miles, to a point 2 miles south of main light. Long Point to Port Bur well. — When 2 miles south of light, steer W. ^ N., 28^ miles, to a point 1^ miles south of Clear creek; thence W. N. W. f N., 11^ miles, to a point 1^ miles south of piers. Long Point to Port Str nloy. — When 2 miles south of light, steer W. f N., 28^ miles, to a po.nt 1^ miles south of Clear creek; thenoe W. by N. ^ N., 31^ miles, s;o a point 1 mile south of light. Port Burwell to Port Stanley. — When i mile south of the piers, steer W. ^ N., 20| miles, to a point 1 mile south of light; this course leads very close to Port Bruce. Port Stanley to Rondeau and Pelee Spit.— When i mile south of light, steer S. W. 1 W., 45 miles, to a point 3 miles S. E. | S. from main light; thence S. W. f W. 41 miles, to a point 1^ miles south of Pel6e Spit light. Rondeau to Pelee Spit. — When l mile south of light, steer S, W. f W., 40 miles, to a point 1^ miles south of Spit light. Pelee Spit to Detroit River Light. — See course from Port Colborne to Detroit River light. Pel^e Spit to Erie.— When l^ miles south of the Spit light, steer £. I N. 126 miles, to a point 2 miles N, by E. ^ E. from Presque Isle light; thence S. E. f E., 3 miles, or until Presque Isle beacon-light bears S. W. U mile. Pel^e Spit to Long Point, and Buffalo.— When H miles south of the Spit light, steer E. by N. f N., 134 miles, to a point Ijf •y LAXB BBIS. 85 r-M miles south of Long Point light; thenoe E. by N. f N., 63| miles, to the north end of Buffalo breakwater. Pel^e Spit to Dunkirk.— When l* miles south of the Spit light, steer KhjN.i N., 168^ miles, to a point \ mile N. W. by N. from Dunkirk beacon-light. Pelee Spit to Ashtabula.— When li miles south of the Spit light, steer E. i N., 88 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Ashtabula light. Pelee Spit to Fairport. — When 1| miles south of the Spit light, steer E. f 8., 62^ miles, to a point 1^ miles northwest from Fairport beacon-light. Pel6e Spit to Cleveland.— When l^ miles south of the Spit light, steer S. E. by E. f E., 47 miles, to the Cleveland breakwater light. Pell)e Spit to Black River.— When l^ miles south of the Spit ligat, s'ieer S. E. by S., 30 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Black River light. Pelee Spit to Entrance of Maumee Bay.— When U miles south of the Spit light, steer W. by N. f K, 2f miles, thence W. by S. i S., with the Spit light directly astern, passing close to the Middle ground, 29i miles to a point 1 mile north of West Sister light, passing | mile south of East Sister Island; thence W. ^ N., 13j miles, to a point If miles N. E. by TH. ^ N. from Turtle Island light. Whence see directions for entering Maumee bay. Buoys of the Dominion Government at the Entrance to De- troit River. Bed Barrel Buoy. — In 16 feet of water. Marks the south side of a small shoal near the shore, to the southeastward of Bar point. De- troit River light bears W. 8. W. \ S., 3^ miles. liigfht Ship Buoy. — A 30-foot red spar buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks the position formerly occupied by the Bar Point light-ship. De- troit River light bears W. by S. \ S., \ mile. Bed Spar Buoy. — In 16 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot on eas^. side of channel, between the Detroit River and Bois Blanc lights. Detroit River light bears S. by W. \ W., 1^ miles. Black Spar Buoy. — ^In 19 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot on the west side of channel. Detroit River light bears S. by E., \\ miles. Bed Spar Buoy. — In le feet of water. Marks a shoal spot on the east side of channel. Detroit River light S. by W. f W., Ij miles. Black Spar Buoy. — In 14 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot on the west side of channel. Detroit River light S. f E., \\ miles. Black Spar Buoy.— In 16 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot with 13^ feet of water over it, on the west side of the channel. From this buoy the light-house at Gibraltar is just closed with southwest side of Celeron island. Thb Light-ship is moored at this buoy. Detroit River light, 8. i W., 2| miles. Light-ship.— Gray, with white bulwarks. "Bar Point Light- ship " in black letters on the bulwarks. Two lights are shown vertically from lens lanterns, hoisted in a frame amidships, red over white. Moored 86 DBTBOIT BTVSB. 111 '1' in 16 feet of water on eastern edge of shoals, on the west side of channel between Detroit River and Bois Blano lights. Red Spar Buoy. — ^In 18 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot on the east side of channel nearly opposite the black baoy and light-ship. Detroit River light S. by W., nearly Sf miles. Red Barrel Buoy. — In 20 feet of water on the east side of channel. This was the lower buoy off Bar point moved farther out into the ohannc' . Blano light N. f E., 2f miles. Bar point N. E. by E., i mile. Red Barrel Buoy. — In 14 feet of water on the east side of chan- nel. Bois Blanc light N., f mile. Black Barrel Buoy. — In 14 feet of water, on the west side of channel. Marks the lower end of spit off the foot of Bois Blano island. The light bears N. by E. nearly, f mile. Red Barrel Buoy. — Marks the channel bank on east side of channel opposite the lower end of spit off the foot of Bois Blanc island. The light bears N. f W. nearly, f mile. Red and Black Striped Spar Buoy. — Marks a shoal spot in the middle of the channel with only 14^ feet of water over it. There is a good channel 500 feet wide on either side of the buoy. Black Barrel Buoy. — In 14 feet of water, on west side of channel. Marks the edge of the spit off the foot of Bois Blanc island, about midway between its lower end and the light. The light bears N. I E., i mile. Standing up Detroit River Main Channel above Bois Blanc Island Light. Black Spar Buoy. — In 16 feet of water, on the west side of channel. Marks an elbow in the channel bank nearly abreast the light. Black Spar Buoy. — In 12 feet of water, on west side of chan- nel. Marks a shoal spot with deep water inside of it, ^ mile above the S. E. point of Bois Blanc island. This shoal is nearly one-third the dis- tance across the river, called the Boston shoal. Red Spar Buoy. — In 14 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot on the east side of channel with deep water inside of it, a little above the last- described buoy, called the Spokane shoal. Amherstburgr Rang^e liights.— Two red lights shown from lens lanterns to guide into the river. Front tower white, open frame, 50 feet high, and 80 feet from the water edge, 2,300 feet north of Fraser*8 dock. Rear tower red, open frame structure, 80 feet high, N. by K ^ E., 475 feet from Front light; both towers are slatted on uie side facing the range. Black Spar Buoy. — In is feet of water on the west side of channel, 400 feet east of the head of Bois Blanc inland, called Mil- waukee shoal. Red Spar Buoy* — ^In 14 feet of water, on the east side of chan- nel. Marks the point of the shoal off Fort Maiden. Black Barrel Buoy.— In 14 feet of water on west tide of tmnuxi Kivjcs. 87 ) side of channel channel Marks the channel bank ^ mile above the head of Bois Blane island. Black Barrel Buoy. — In U feet of water, on west side of channel. Marks the channel bank opposite the Lime Kiln crossing, ^ mile above the head of Bois Blanc island. Bed Barrel Buoy. — In 18 feet of water, on the east side of channel. Marks a rock ^ mile above the Texas dock. Mt side of chan- je Bois Blanc Standing up the Channel east of Fighting Island. Foot of Fig^htine Island. — Black spar buoy, in le feet of water, on the west side of channel. Marks the lower end of the spit off the foot of Fighting island. South point of island bears N. f W., \ mile. Bed Spar Buoy. — In 16 feet of water, on the east side of chan- nel. Marks the channel bank opposite the end of the spit off the foot of Fighting Island. Black Spar Buoy. — ^In 16 feet of water, on the west side of channel. Marks the channel bank about half-way from the end of the spit, to the south point of Fighting island. Bed Spar Buoy. — In 16 feet of water, on the east side of channel. Marks the channel bank opposite the black buoy. Head of Fightings Island. — Black spar buoy in 18 feet of water, on west side of channel. Marks the upper end of spit off the head of Fighting island. N. £. point of island bears S. S. E. f mile. Bed Spar Buoy. — In 16 feet of water, on the east side of chan- nel. Marks a large flat, and turn in the channel on the opposite side of the river, from the head of Fighting island and a little above it. N. E. point of Fighting island bears S. by W. ^ W. i mile. Sailing Distances on Lake Erie, etc., from Buffalo to Fort Gratiot. side of ohan- west cide ^f BuCEalo Fort Colbome Dunkirk Long Point . Brie AidiUbul*. PortSUnley Fatrport Rondeau Cleveland BlaokBiver Pel«eBpit SanduMty Bar Point Monroe Toledo Detroit. Fkiln Grossing cut to the foot of Fighting island. Front light fixed white, shown from an open frame tower, painted white, 50 feet high, opposite the lower end of the Lime-kiln Crossing cut. Bear light fixed red, shown from an open frame tower, 80 feet high, painted red. On the east side of the street, about S. by E. f E., 646 feet from front tower. The light is 108 feet above water. The towers are slatted on the side facing the range to make them conspicuous day marks. 90 DKTROIT RIVRR. I ill! GiroMe Isle Flats.— Black spar buoy in 14 feet of water. Stands in sandy bottom, at the elbow of the flats, west side of channel, 2^ miles above Lirae-kim crossing. Width of channel in this stretch, i to i mile. Mamajuda light-house, N. i W.. »J miles. IBallard Reef Light. — A lixed red light shown from a amall red aeow, moored just inside the above described buoy. This light is maintained by vessel owners. Fighting Island. — A red spar buov in 9i feet of water stands on the east side of channel, and marks the outer edge of the bank, at lower end of Fighting island; soft bottom; deep water close-to. The edge of the bank, for a quarter mile above and below the buoy, is nearly straight, trending about N. by W. and S. by E., then curves to the eastward. Mamajuda light-house, N. i W., 1\ miles. Grosse Isle Range Lights.— Two fixed white, lens lantern lights, shown from brown, triangular, skeleton iron pyramidal towers, front tower 71 feet, and rear tower 103 feet high. The upper 25 feet of each tower is covered with white slats, and the lights are exhibited 14 feet below the tops of the structures. Front light on crib at the nbrth end of Grosse Isle. Mamajuda light-house, N. E. by N. Rear light on crib 1,493 feet N. by W. i W. from the Front light. The range leads from the center of the Lime-kiln crossing cut, and clears a small patch of bowlders a little above the cut. The range line is 150 feet to the westward of the Fort Maiden range lights, and intersects the range of Grassy Island and Mamajuda Island lights 1^ miles below Mamajuda light. mAMA JIJDA LIOIIT-§TATIO]V.-A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12 miles. White dwelling with low, square tower on top; pile foundation. Light 82 feet above foundation. Station connected with fishing-station, on north side, by a short footbridge. On Mamajuda shoal, west side of channel; 200 feet from chan- nel, and 700 yards from the lower end of shoal. Good water within 60 feet of the small pile wharf abreast the light-house. Between this point and the upper Fighting Island buoy, the channel is one-quarter mile wide. Grassy Island light-house, N. % E., 2i miles. East Bank. — Red spar buoy in IH feet of water. East side of channel, about midway between the two light-houses, and marks the outer point of the Fighting Island bank. It stands in soft bottom with deep water close-to. In the bight of the channel opposite, the range between the two light-houses serves as a channel-guide for a distance of two-thirds of a mile above and below this buoy. Gr.assy Island light-house. N. i W., IJ miles. GRASSY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied by white flashes at intervals of one minute, 6th order, visi- ble llf miles. Cream-colored dwelling, with tower, 29 feet high attached; stone foundation. On Grassy Island shoal, west side of channel. Stands at the elbow of the shoal, seven-eighths mile from upper end of shoal, and 600 feet from channel. Seven miles below Detroit. Mamajuda light-house, S. I W., 2^ miles. Grassy Island. — Black spar buoy in 14 feet of water. Marks the elbow of the Grassy Island shoal. It stands abreast the light-house, in sandy bottom. The light-house range mav be entered 600 yards above this buoy, and leads past the upper Fighting Island buoy, a little to the westward of mid-channel. The range between this buoy and Mud Island Shoal buoy just clears the head of Grassy Island shoal. Grassy Island light-house (upper side of new structure), W. ^ S. 500 feet. Fightings Island. — Red spar buoy in iHfeet of water. Marks the elbow of the flats at the upper end of Fighting island. It stands in soft bottom, with deep water close-to. This buoy, in range with Grassy Island light-house, just clears the flat between the buoy and the head of Fighting island. Grassy Island light-house (new structure), S. by W. ^ W., 1,600 yards. Mud Island Shoal. — Black spar buoy in 10 feet of water. Stands in sandy bottom at the southeast point of Mud Island shoal, and marks the west side of main channel, and north side of eastern entrance OKTBOIT BIYKB. 91 to a channel between Mud Island and Grassy Island shoals. Grassy Island light-house, S. |^ E. 1 mile. Sandwich Point. — A red barrel buoy in 14 feet of water. Marks the position of the piles driven in the river to protect the feeding pipe at the Government Fish Hatchery at Sandwich. The buoy is about 125 feet from shore, opposite the hatchery. The piles are in 11 feet of water, and inside the channel bank. The Detroit Biver, between Fighting island and Belle Isle, is free from obstructions. Belle Isle divides the river into two channels. The main channel is on the Canadian side. A shoal extends from the lower end of Belle Isle about seven-eighths of a mile, and is marked with a spar buoy. The main channel is free from obstructions until the east end of Belle Isle is reached, which can be passed close-to, then starboard and get on the line of the Windmill Point range lights, heading about N. E. for If miles, or to within about one-third mile of the shore. This course leads between the shoals extending from the head of Belle Isle an<'/ the foot of Isle aux Pdches, the ends of which are marked by spar buoys. Then haul up the river, keeping the north shore best on board, and when abreast of Windmill Point light and about one-third the dis- tance across the river, steer E. N. E., heading between Grosse Pointe beacon and the black spar buoy 2f miles, passing about 500 feet to the northward of the beacon, steer about N. E. f E. If miles, passing mid- way between the light-ship and black spar buoy; when haul up N. E. for the entrance to the St. Clair Flats canal 13^ miles. In the American Channel, between Belle Isle and the main- land an iron bridge spans the river from the Boulevard to a point on the island about 1,000 feet from its southwest point, the draw is near the main shore. Tbo signal to open the draw is three blasts of the whistle. The passage ways are 125 feet wide on each side of the pivot pier. Above the bridge there is a shoal — Scott's Middle Ground — extending in a northeast and southwest direction If miles, which is marked on its northern and western sides by three led spar buoys, and vessels should not attempt to pass between the shoal and Belle Isle. In using the Am- erican channel, leave ihe buoy on the southwest end of Belle Isle on the starboard hand; keeping nearer to the north shore, pass through the draw of the bridge, and to the northward of the buoys on Scott's Middle ground, and when the middle buoy, which is opposite the Hamtramck Bouse, and near the middle of the shoal, is reached, steer for Windmill Point light, with a large elm tree directly over the stern until up to the north point of Belle Isle, when steer E. ^ S., with the north point of Isle aux P6ches open on the starboard bow, until the range of Windmill Poiut and Belle Isle lights are reached. Belle Isle. — Rod and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 13 feet of water. Marks the L»nd of the shoal off the foot of Belle Isle. There are 3 fathoms of water close to the buoy. Walker's mill (Canada), S. S. E. 800 yards. BELLE ISLE LIGHT-STA'J ION.— A iixed red light, 4th order, visible 12f miles. Red, square tower, 36| feet high, with dwell- ing attached, both of red brick. On the southeast point, head of Belle Lsle, Detroit river. Marks the head of Belle Isle, and the channel be- tween it and the foot of Isle aux P6che8. Windmill Point light, N. E. i E. 2 miles. 92 LAKE ST. OLAIB. ISelle Itle. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 14 feet of water. Marks the extreme easterly point of the shoal off the head of Belle Isle, and the dividing point of the channels on each side of the Island. Windmill point light, N. E. by E. li miles. Isle aux Peclies. — Red spar buoy, in 11 feet of water, marks the extreme point of the shoal off the west end of Isle aux Peches. The flye-fathom channel be- tween the islands is about 350 yards wide. Windmill Point light, N. £. l-fr miles. WIND1IIIL.L. POINT RANOE LIGHTS.— Two fixed red lights. The front light is a lens lantern, and the rear light a 6th order lens; they are 487 feet apart, on a line nearly S. W. The structures are square, pyramidal, wooden skele- tons, upper part enclosed, lanterns black. The front tower is red, and the rear tower is white. The front tower is 34 feet and the rear tower 49 feet above the lake level. The lights are a guide between Belle Isle and Isle aux Peches. The range passes about 600 feet southeasterly of Belle Isle light. WUVnUIILL. POINT L.IGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied every fifteen seconds by a red flash, 4th order, visible 14 miles. White, brick tower, 51 feet high, connected by covered way with red brick dwelling. On the north side of the Detroit river entrance to Lake St. Clair. OroHse Pointe Beacon. — Two lights shown vertically, red over white, from lens lanterns, suspended from a mast about 34 feet above lake level. Pile cluster 13 feet in diameter, 11 feet high, surmounted by a white wooden house 8 feet square and 10 feet high, above which rises a mast, and day-mark 8 feet square, both painted white. On the S. E. side of the head of the Detroit river, in 15 feet of water, and in the position formerly occupied by the lower light-ship and since by a red spar buoy. Vessels should pass to the northward, and between it and the black spar buoy. In connection with the Grosse Pointe light-ship this beacon forms a range to cross the Grosse Pointe flats. Head of Detroit River.— Black spar buoy, in 16i feet of water, at the head of the Eiver Bed, on the north side of channel, and where the Grosse Pointe flats commence. Windmill Point light, W. by 8. f 8., 2^ miles. Grosse Pointe church, N. i W., Ij miles. LAKE ST. CLAIR. Light-Houses and Buoys on both Shores of Lake St. Clair. Grosse Point Light-ship. — A fixed white light, 25 feet above level of the lake, shown from a lantern hoisted on a mast, surmounted with a black cage. The light-ship is red, with name painted on each aide, and has 1 mast. During thick and foggy weather a bell will be rung by hand. Windmill Point light, W. 8. W. \ 8., 8| milcB. Milk River point, N. \ W., 6^ miles. Passing down through the St. Clair Flats Ship canal, S. W. i S., when \ mile pa3t the lower light, steer S. W. 12^ miles, to the north side of light-ship about S50 feet, then steer well up for the red buoy, leave it to port about 350 feet, when steer for the middle of Belle Isle. Gross© Point©.— Black spar buoy in 16 feet of water. Marks the edge of a 16-foot patch 700 feet N. W. of light-ship. There is from \*l to 18 feet midway between this buoy and light-ship. Tliam©s River (Canadian) Main Light.— Fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White, circular, stone tower, light 34 feet above lake level. At mouth of river, south shore. Thames Kiv©r Range Light.— Fixed white light, visible o miles. Square, wood tower, red, 16 feet high, 460 yards N. W. \ N. from main light. These lights in range lead over the bar. ¥k n4 bj oi BC LAKE ST. OLAIB. 93 Windmill Point to Month of the Thames BlTer.— When i mile south of light, steer E. by N., 3^ miles ; thence E. f S., 20^ miles, to a point If miles N. W. ^ N. from main light, and in range with the beacon. Heavy draught vessels should pass on the north side of the light-ship, then E. f S., 20 miles, to a point If miles N. W. ^ N. from main light, as above. Windmill Point to Clinton River. — When f of a mile east of the light, steer N. E. ^ N., 2 miles, to abreast of Glub-House dock, then N. N. E. ^ E., 14^ miles, to a point Ik miles east of Point Huron, and note that a range line from the upper canal light and the St. Clair Flats beacon-light crosses the south end of the spit to the south and eastward of Point Huron in 6 feet of water; thence N. ^ W., 2 miles, to a point f of a mile east of the old light-house, when follow the buoys in, passing south of and close to a crib, north of the dredged channel. Windmill Point to New Baltimore.— When l^ miles east of Point Huron, as in the course to Clinton river, steer N. by E., 8 miles, to the dock at New Baltimore. Mouth of the Thames River to St. Clair Flats Ship Canal. — When l^ miles N. W. ^ N. from main light, and in range of the two lights, steer N. W. i N., 16 miles, to a point 1 mile south of light on the lower end of west pier, when haul up gradually uutil the lights are in range. Mouth of Thames River to Mouth of Clinton River.— When Ij miles N. W. ^ N., from the main light, and in range of the two lights, steer N. W., 21 miles, heading on Point Huron, to within 1^ miles of it, when steer N.. 3^ miles, to a point f miles east of the old light- house; when see course from Windmill point to Clinton river. a^e 5V. Clair, St. Clair Flats, Old Cut. To Enter the St. Clair River through the old cut.— From the light-ship, steer N. E. f N., 12|- miles, or until in range of the lights, and If miles from the beacon, when haul up on the range, bearing N. E. by E., which course will lead through the center of the channel, the north- west side of entrance to which is marked by black buoy No. 1. Keep the light and beacon in range, following tl.a buoys until near the beacon, when haul gradually to E. 8. E., bringing the stern of the vessel on the beacon, and steering a little to the southward of the upper canal-light, or keeping the light a little open on the port bow. When midway between the two black buoys, Nos. 3 and 5, haul gradually to the northward for the middle of south channel of St. Clair river. The old cut and channel through the St. Clair flats, from Lake St. Clair to abreast the upper light of the ship-canal, is about 2^ miles in length, and from 50 to 60 yards wide in its narrowest part ; it is now used only by small craft under sail and tugs towing rafts. St. Clair Flats Beacon-light.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 1 1 miles. Yellow brick tower, 23 feet high. On a crib, 1,000 feet S. W. by W. from main light. This beacon, with the main light, forms the range for the old out. St. Clair Flats Canal lower liaht. 8. by E. i E., If miles. ** ' ST. CLAIR FLATS LIGHT-STATION.-A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. Yellow brick tower, 37 feet high, con- .94 ST. OLAIB BITEB. i nected with dwelling by a covered way. On a pier foundation. At the head of the old cut thi'ough the St. Clair flats. Guide to and through this cut. St. Glair Flats Canal upper light, E. S. E. i E., 1^ miles. .5V. C/az'r Flats Ship CanaL To Enter the St. Clair River through the ship canal, steer N. E. 13^ miles, from the Grosse Pointe light ship, which course will lead to the lower entrance of the canal, and after passing through the oanal, take the mid-channel. Steamers in passing through the canal will slow down to a speed of four miles per hour. The Canal through the St. Clair flats is 7,300 feet in length, and 300 feet in width. On either side of the canal is a dike, which consists of timber cribs resting upon piles, and filled with material dredged from the canal. Willow trees have been set out, and the banks are covered with grass. A double row of sheet piles has been driven and the chan- nel dredged the entire width to a depth of 18 feet; the entrance to the oanal at each end has been deepened. Direction of the canal, N. E. iN. ST. CLAIB FLATS CANAL LOWER LIGHT-STA- TION. — A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. Red brick tower, 40 feet high, rising from corner of dwelling. Marks the lower end of the west pier of the ship-canal through the St. Clciir flats. ST. CLAIR FLATS CANAL UPPER LIGHT-STA- TION. — A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. Red brick tower, 40 feet high, rising from corner of dwelling. Marks the upper end of the west pier of the ship-canal through the St. Clair flats. *"'(« / ST. CLAIR RIVER. Light-Houses and Buoys Standing up the St. Clair River. ■ .m The St. Clair River from the upper end of the ship canal to Fort Gratiot light-house, is 39^ miles in length. After leaving the canal follow the mid-channel until abreast of the Star Island House, when take up the range of Lights Nos. 1 and 2, which guide through the lower reach, and leads up to the foot of the Southeast bend; when get on the back range of Lights Nos. 2 and 3, which leads up through the South east bend, when haul to the eastward passing Lights Nos. 4, 6, and 6, which mark the north side of the channel, and when up to the Canadian Club House, take up the range of Lights Nos. & and 9, which leads up to the foot of Herson's island, and past the flat ofP the west side of Squirrel island; then get on the back range of Lights Nos. 7 and 8, which leads up to Laoroix's dock (Fish's); then take up the range of Lights ^^v :*\ii,- - 's^i,;, ST. GLAIR RIVER. 0& undation. At the e to and through E., 1^ miles. 18 ship canal, steer which course will .ssing through the ugh the canal will set in length, and ke, which consisto irial dredged from banks are covered ven and the chan- le entrance to the the canal, N. £. LIGHT-STA- Red brick tower, the lower end of ats. LTGHT-STA- Red brick tower, the upper end of Its. C/air River. he ship canal to leaving the canal louse, when take rough the lower when get on the rough the South Nos. 4, 6, and 6, to the Canadian which leads up he west side of 7 and 8, which range of Lights Nos. 10 and 11, which leads up to the south-east side of Russell's island, the range of Lights Nos. 11 and 12 leads clear of the shoal at the head of the island, and about 100 feet to the '3astward of Russell Island buoy. The last two Lights, 11 and 12, are not for a range to run on, but more to indicate a line that should be crossed above the shoal by vessels bound down, before hauling down by Russell's island. There are shoals at the head and foot of Woodtick island, marked at the ends by buoys, and there is a channel-way on either side of the island, but the one on the American side is the most frequently used. After passing the upper Woodtick Island buoy, keep in mid-channel until near St. Clair city, when haul to either shore to avoid the St. Clair middle ground, the ends of which are marked by buoys. When above the upper buoy follow mid- channel until within a mile of Stag island, and then the channel on either side of it may be taken, but the Canadian is generally preferred. Avoid the shoals extending from the head and foot of the island, the ends of which are marked by buoys, and when above the upper buoy take the mid-channel until a mile below the Port Huron and Lake Michigan Rail- road depot, when haul to the Canadian shore to avoid the shoal ground off Port Huron, until abreast the Great Western depot at Sarnia; then steer N. W. by N. ^ N. 1 mile, after which take mid-channel until abreast of Fort Gratiot light-house. NoTB. — The saoal ground oflf Port Huron, forip"'] by the Black river, which was dredged to a depth of 16 feet, is makih^ again; deep draught vessels should be careful to avoid it. Lights on the St. Clair River between the Si. Clair Flat^ Canal and tf\j upper end of Russell's Island. No. 1. A fixed white light suspended, about 12 feet above the water- level, from a cluster of piles on the west shore in the first bend above St. Clair Flats canal, and about 2^ miles from St. Clair Flats Canal Upper li^ht. This light forms a range with No. 2 for about 1^ miles, in line with the west gable of Star Island Hotel, to guide through the lower reach. No. 2. A fixed red light suspended, about 25 fe^t above the water- level, from a tripod erected in the marsh about 900 feet back of Light No. 1, and 1,000 feet back of Light No. 3, and forms a ranga with each. No. 3. A fixed white light suspended, about 12 feet above the water- level, from a cluster of piles near the west bank, and forms, with Light No. 2, a range for about 1^ miles, to guide between the lower bend and Southeast bend. The range terminates near Light No. 4. No. 4. A fixed red and white light suspended, about 12 feet above the water-level, from a cluster of piles near the west shore. The light will show wAtVddown the range made by Lights Nos. 2 and 8, and change to red at about the point where the range should be left by vessels ascending and taken up by vessels descending the river. No. 6. A fixed red light suspended, about 12 feet above the water- level, from a cluster of piles on the west bank. A guide in running Southeast bend. No. 6. A fixed red and white light. The light will show white up the stream and change to red at about the point where the Herson's Island 96 ST. CLAIR BIVBB. range (Nob. 8 and 0) should be left by vessels descending and taken np by vessels ascending the river. No. 1. A fixed red light shown, about 20 feet above the water-level, from a tripod erected in the marsh near the lower end of Herson*s island. Forms a range with No. 8 for about 1 mile to guide between that point and Fish's dock. No. 8. A fixed white light suspended, about 12 feet above the water- level, from a qluster of piles near the shore in the water below Herson's island. This light forms a range with Nos. 7 and 9, being about 1,050 feet distant from the former, and 1,200 feet from the latter. No. 9. A fixed red light shown, about 26 feet above water-level, from a tripod standing at the edge of the timber near the lower end of Herson's island. Forms a range with No. 8 for about 1^ miles between Herson's island and Southeast bend. The range terminates above No. 6, in the vicinity of the end of the Canadian Club wharf on the east shore. No. 10., A fixed white light suspended, about 12 feet above the water- level, from a tripod in the marsh near the lower end of RusselPs island. Forms a range with No. 11 for about 2^ miles between Russell's island and Fish's dock. No. 11. A fixed white and red light shown, about 25 feet above the water-level, from a mast supported by a cluster of piles in the water abreast the point of woods on Russell's island. Forming ranges with Nos. 10 and 12, distant about 1,800 feet from the former and 1,500 feet from the latter. The light will show white down stream toward Fish's dock, and red up stream toward Baby's Point on the Canadian shore. No. 12. A fixed red light shown, about 12 feet above water level, from a tripod on the shore near the upper end of Rfissell's island. Forms a range with No. 11 for about 1^ miles, to guide clear of the shoals at the upper end of the island. The range passes about 100 feet to the eastward of the black and red buoy, and to keep well clear of the shoal vessels should cross the range above the buoy. Buoys on the St, Clair River above the CanaL Squirrel Island. — Red spar buoy in 12 feet of water. Marks edge of the flat off the west side of Squirrel island, in the south channel of the St. Clair river, and is 6 miles above the St. Clair Flats Canal upper light. Head of Bassett'a channel, S. by W. ^ W., 1 mile. Squirrel Shoal.—- Red spar buoy in 18 feet of water. On the western edge of the northern end of a shoal near mid channel, abreast of the centre of Squirrel island, on which as little as 13 feet has been found. Fisher's dock, N. E. f N., 1,30Q yards. Russell Island. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 16 feet of water. Marks the dividing point of the north and south channels of the St. Clair river, and is on the northeast point of the shoal at the head of Russell island. Woodtlck Island. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 11 feet of water, Marks the extreme point of the shoal extending to the southward of Woodtiek island. There is a channel-way on eithei side of the island; the American, being the straightest and widest, is thf one most frequently used. ^.i A :! 'J- MM Dding and taken up LAKE HURON. 97 *3,i- Woodtick Island.— Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 16 feet of water. On the shoal extending to the northward of Woodtick island. The shoal extends further to the northward, but with 16 and 18 feet of water on it. St. Clair Middle Grtniund.— Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 17 feet of water. Marks the south end of the middle ground off St. Clair citjr. The shoal is about 2,000 yards in length, extending in a N. N. E. and 8. 8. W. direction, and is 230 yards wide. It divides the river into two channels, the Canadian being the widest and most frequently used. The lowest depth of water ou the shoal la 8 feet. !lt. Clair Middle Ground. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 16 feet of water. On the north end of the middle ground. Shoal water extends some distance to the northward of it, but not less than 17 feet of water will be found. Stag Island. — Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 11 feet of water. Marks the end of the shoal extending to the southward of Stag island, on either side of which there is a channel way. the Canadian being the one most freouently used. Stag Island.— Red and black horizontal stripes, spar buoy in 16 leet of water. On the shoal extending to the northward of Stag island. The shoal extends a short distance to the northward of the buoy, but with not less than 17 feet of water on it. Corunna Range Lights (Canadian).— Two fixed white lights, shown from white, square, wooden, skeleton towers, 40 feet high. The sides facing the range are slatted to make day-marks. Front Light is near the old wharf at the foot of Fane street in the village of Corunna. The focal plane is 50 feet above the water level. Rear Light 668 feet S. 13° E. from the front one, elevated 68 feet above the water. The two lights in range indicate the best water in the Canadian channel, and lead between the shoals off the head of Stag island on the west, and the shoal off the mouth of Talford's creek on the east side. Fort Gratiot Range Lights.— Two fixed red lights, shown from masts, surmounted by small triangles for day -marks, in the rear of the lower freight shed of the Grand Trunk R. R. on the American side. The range guides into the river on a bearing of 8. 8. W. i W. nearly. These lights are now maintained by the U. 8. Light House Est. LAKE HURON. Light Houses, Buoys, and Harbors on the American Shor€^ FORT GRATIOT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light varied by a white flash at intervals of two minutes, 3d order, visible, 16 miles. White tower, 76 feet high, red briok dwelling detached. On the west side of the St. Clair river at the southern extreme of Lake Huron, and marks the west side of the entrance from tlie lake into the river. During thick or foggy weather, there is sounded a steam whistle, giving every minute a blast of 8 seconds' duration, followed by an interval of 52 seconds. The fog-signal in duplicate. Buoys on the Flat above Fort Gratiot. Gorsloa Shoal.— Red and black horizontal striped spar bnoy in 16 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot of hard gravel 1^ miles N. E. by N. from Fort Gratiot light, and in line with west side of the dock at Point Edwards and the middle of Botsford's large elevator. Northwest 98 LAKX HUB02T. Shoal buoy bears N. by W. 700 yards. Harlem Shoal buoy E. by N. i If. 435 yards. Harlem Shoal* — Red and black horizontal stripes spar buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot N. E. i N. 2,451 yards from Fort Gratiot light. Northwest Shoal buoy, N. W. ^ N. 800 yards. Corsica Shoal buoy, W. by S. ^ S. 435 yards. The east side of the passenger depot at Point Edwards, and east side of the most easterly elevator in line. Northwest Shoal. — Bed and black horizontal stripes spar buoy in 16 feet of water. Marks a shoal spot of gravel of about 100 feet diameter inside the 18-foot curve, N. N. E. ^ E. 2,700 yards from Fort Gratiot light. Corsica Shoal buoy S, by E. 700 yards. Harlem Shoal buoy 800 yards S. E. ^ S. The chimney of the G. T. Repair shop is open to the east of lighthouse about 1 diameter of the lantern. Range Lights to Guide into St. Clair River. Point Edwards Range. — Two fixed lights, lens lanterns, white over red, shown from high, open frame-work towers, which are conspic- uous day marks. On F'oint Edwards, about \ mile east of the entranen to St. Ciair river. The range leads 450 feet to the westward of the Northwest shoal, which is the most westerly of the shoal spots. Heavy draught vessels entering the river should run for Fort Gratiot light, bearing about S. S. W., and when within about 2^ miles and in 4 fathoms of water, haul in for the upper end of Huronia Beach until the range on Point Edwards is taken up, then haul down on the range about S. f E. until the Fort Gratiot range is taken, when steer for the entrance on the range about S. S. W. \ W. The Point Edwards range lights are main- tained by American vessel owners. To enter St. Clair Biver from Lake Huron, inde- gendent of the Ranges. — Bring the light a little on the starboard bow eading S. W. by S. \ S. and run in on that course, keeping a lookout for the spit extending 133 yards east of the light-house and the spit off Point Edwards, on the opposite side. The lights at the Grand Trunk R. R. wharves mark the channel on each side. When past the rapids keep the American side on board, until near the docks at Port Huron, when heavy draught vessels should oross over towards the Canadian shore to avoid the middle ground off the mouth of Black River. In coming to anchor small sailing vessels should come to well over in Sarnia bay in order to leave the channel clear for long tows; large sail vessels should run down about \ mile below the Sarnia elevator and haul over to the American side, and come to off the Port Huron and Michigan R. R. dock, below the middle ground. PORT SANILAC LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 16^ miles. Octagonal brick tower, whitewashed, 62 feet high, connecting to brick dwelling. A coast-light. In the village ^** t ■Hi LAKE HURON. 99 buoy E. by N. i of Port Sanilac, 30^ miles N. i W. from Fort Gratiot ligbt. Above Port Sanilac the coast is rocky, and should not be approached within half a mile. The Coast south of Sand Beach, as far as Blue Ledge, is rock, with rocky spits, and shoal spots extending from ^ to f of a mile from shore. Sand Beach Harbor of Refuge.— This harbor is an artificial one, formed by breakwaters, situated on the west shore of Lake Huron, 59 miles to the northward of Fort Gratiot light-house. The breakwater commences near the shore, three-quarters of a mile above the dock at Sand Beach, and extends out in an E. by S. } S. direction, 700 yards, to deep water; then in a S. E. ^ S. direction, three-quarters of a mile; then south 100 yards to the northern side of eastern entrance, which is 200 yards wide. In the breakwater extending out from the shore there is an opening 100 yards wide, at a distance of 100 yards from the angle, to allow ves- ■els to enter the harbor from the northward. The southern breakwater extends in a north and south direction, from the southern side of the eastern entrance, for a distance of 1,900 feet. The two principal lights are shown from the north side of the eastern entrance and the east side of the northern entrance, respectively; and, in addition to these, red lights are shown from iron tripods on the south side of the eastern entrance and west side of northern entrance. The main light at the eastern entrance is shown from a circular iron tower, painted brown; the lantern painted black. The main light at the northern entrance is shown from an open frame-work tower, painted white. To enter the harbor from the southward and eastward, bring the main light (flashing red and white alternately every 5 seconds) to bear anywhere to the westward of N. N. W. ^ W. When bearing N. W. ^ N., it should range with the fixed white light at the north entrance. On reaching the entrance, pass close to the main light, leaving it on the star- board hand, and haul at once to the northward, to make fast to the snub- bing-posts on the breakwater. To enter the harbor from the northward, bring the main light at that entra.ice (fixed white) to bear nothing to the southward of S. W. ^ S., and head for the light On reaching the entrance, leave the main light close aboard on the port hand, and haul at once to the eastward, to make fast to the snubbing-posts on the breakwater. Vessels desiring to anchor will find good anchorage in from 4 to 4^ fathoms of water inside of and close to the breakwater. The best anchorage is north of the outer end of Jenk's dock, outsido the range of the buoys. Small vessels will find good anchorage about S. S. E. from 6 to 8 hundred feet from outer end of the dock in 17 feet of water. Jenk's Dock is nearly opposite the eastern entrance, and bears from it W. by N., about 1,000 yards. A light on the dock shows red from the east, and white from the north and south; there are 16 feet of water for one boat's length at the outer end. Goal is kept on the dock for sale. The obstructions off the end of the dock, as appears on the chart of the Lake Survey, have all been removed. Life Saving station at the inner end of dock. Buoys in Position.— Black spar buoy in 12 feet of water, aoath 100 •I f LAKE HUBON. side of eastern entrance, bears S. W. | W., about 600 yards from main light. Another Black Spar Bvioy.—In 12 feet of water, 8. by E. f £., about 750 yards from the end of Jenk's dock. Three Spar Buoys. — In 14 feet of water, placed at about equal distances, and nearly in line with the outer end of Jenk's dock and the west side of northern entrance. Two Spar Buoys. — In 14 feet of water, outside the northern entrance, to be left on the starboard side on entering. Sailings Vessels making the harbor for refuge, from the north- ward, when there is not too much sea, will find it most convenient to enter at the north entrance, particularly when the wind is northwest; light vessels would be safe to enter on a bearing of S. W. by S. s^^ VL^bxzzjna unooaL ^^- -^a Sail vessels making the harbor by the eastern entrance, with north- erly winds, should carry a good press of canvas, keeping well to wind- ward, and directly they pass the main light, haul up by the wind and stand over for the anchorage to the northward of Jenk's dock, and if necessary beat up to it Vessels frequentlv enter at the eastern entrance without sufficient canvas, and the sheets off, when they fall off to the lee- ward and are compelled to let go their anchors on the rocky bottom in shoal water; in such cases they have to employ a tug, at considerable expense, to tow them to the anchorage. A custodian, or harbor-master, has been appointed by the govern- ment. All vessels are required to take such berths as he may direct. The general rule is given that " all steam craft will, when practicable, make fast to the snubbing-posts in the breakwater. Sailing craft will so locate themselves that they will not lie in the way of other vessels enter- ing the harbor, or in any way interfere with the work of construction or repairs that may be in progress at the time." LAKE HURON. 101 SAND BEACH LIGHT-STATION.— Main light flashing red and white, alternating at intervals of 6 seconds, and will illuminate the entire horizon, visible ISf miles. The focal plane is 44| feet above the base of the tower, and 54^ feet above the level of the lake. Brown, iron, circular tower; lantern black; standing on a rectangular crib on the north side of the main entrance. There is also on the crib a fog-signal house of corrugated iron, painted the same color as the tower. Durirg thick and foggy weather there will be sounded at this station a 10-inch steam fog-whistle, giving a blast of 6 seconds' duration, followed by an interval of 25 seconds. The South Side of the Main Entrance is marked by a red light, illuminating *he entire horizon, exhibited from a lantern at the top of an iron skeleton tripod, 21^ feet above the level of the lake. Point Clark light-house (Canadian), E. N. E. i E., 47^ miles. Goderich light- house (Canadian), E. f S., 47^ miles. Fort Gratiot light-house, S. i E., 69 miles. Northern Entrance. — The east side of the northern entrance is marked by a fixed white light of the 6th order, illuminating the entire horizon, exhibited from an open frame- work tower painted white; focal plane 42 feet above the level of the lake; visible 12f miles. The West Side of the Northern Entrance is marked by a red light, illuminating the entire horizon, exhibited from a lantern at the top of an iron skeleton tripod, 27^ feet above the level of the lake. Pointe aux Barques Reef. — Black, ist-class bell buoy in 6^ fathoms of water. Marks the reef extending off the shore to the east- ward of Pointe aux Barques light. Vessels should not pass inside of the buoy. There is a 12-foot patch about 1 mile S. by E. f E. Pointe aux Barques light W. i N. 2.4 miles. Stafford's elevator S. by E. f E., 6^ miles. POINTE AUX BARQUES lilGHT-STATION.— A flash- ing white light, 3d order, visible 16^ miles; the interval between flashes is 10 seconds. White, circular tower, 79 feet high, light 89 feet above lake level. On the Michigan shore of Lake Huron, 75 miles to the north- ward of Fort Gratiot light, and marks the turning-point into Saginaw bay. Between Sand Beach and Pointe aux Barques lights, shoal water extends out from the land from 1 to 2 miles, and vessels should be care- ful in approaching the land in this locality. The soundings oflf the point are even and gradual, and the frequent use of the lead in thick or foggy weather is of great importance. Life Saving station a little sorth of light house. PORT AUSTIN LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light for 1 minute, followed by 5 consecutive red flashes, with an interval of 12 seconds between flashes, visible 16 miles. White, open frame-work tower, 67 feet high, on a crib, light 80 feet above sea level. On reef off Old Pointe aux Barques, south side of entrance to Saginaw bay, about 1^ miles from the main land and 500 feet from the end of the reef. Vessels in passing the light should leave it one-half of a mile to the southward. There is no passage-way between it and the main land. A first-class steam-siren (in duplicate), sounded in thick and foggy weather, giving blasts of 7 seconds at intervals of SO seconds. There are ledges and de- tached rocky spots between Pointe aux Barques and Port Austin lights, 102 LAKE HURON. 11 rendering the coast dangerous within 1^ miles. There is a flat off Port Austin wharf, which extends one-half a mile to the northwest Shoal ground off Flat Rook point extends one-half a mile out, and continues out this distance along the coast to the westward as far as Portage river. To run into Port Austin, hring the dock at the mouth of Bird creek to bear south and run in on the course, keeping a lookout for a rocky spot to the northwest of the end of the dock. Life Saving Station, 1 mile northwest of Grind Stone City. Wild Fowl Bay. — To enter the bay from the east. When 1^ miles north of Port Austin light, steer W. S. W. 23 miles, until Oak point bears east, and Sand point due south, when haul up west 4i miles, until the light-house on Charity island is in range with the west end of Little Charity island, then steer due south, till Sand point bears east, when steer E. S. E. into the bay. The channel south of Charity island was buoyed by the Government a few years ago, but as it was intricate and seldom used, there being less than 10 feet of water, the buoys were re- moved. Charity Island. — Black, 2d-class can buoy, in 17 feet of water. Marks the northwest point of the shoal off Charity island. Charity Island light-house, S. E. by E. i E., 2^ miles. West end of Little Charity is- land, S. f E., 3f miles. Vessels bound into Saginaw bay, from the south- ward of Pointe aux Barques, will pass at least one-half of a mile to the northward of Port Austin light, then steer W. i S., for 26 miles, which will lead to the northward of the buoy, being careful on approaching it to keep it well open on the port bow, to avoid the shoal ground extend- ing li miles to the northward of Charity island light. The passage-way to the southward of th6 island should not be attempted by strangers. After passing the buoy, steer S. W. by S. for the Saginaw river, leaving the Gravelly Point buoy on the starboard hand. CHARITY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. White, brick tower, 39 feet high, con- nected by a covered way with frame dwelling. On the northwest point of Charity island, Saginaw bay. Main channel is to the westward of the light. Stranger^ f>hould not attempt to pass to the eastward of the light. Tawas light N., 16 /mles. Point aux Gres, W. by S. ^ S., 12^ miles. There are shoals extending If miles to the northward and the same distance to the eastward of the li^ht-Iiouse. A flat extends for 1 mile to the west- ward of the Big Charity, and there is a rocky spot 1^ miles southeast of the Little Charity. Gravelly Point. — Red, Ist-olass nun buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks the extreme point of the shoal extending in a south-easterly direq- tion from Gravelly point, Saginaw bay. Vessels should not attempt to pass between the point and buoy. Gravelly point N. W. by W., 2^ miles. Charity Island light-house E. f N., 4| miles. A good lee can be made under the point, and protection from all northerly gales. Come to in 4 fathoms with the point bearing N. E. Saginaw River, The Mouth of Saginaw River is obstructed by a bar, through which a channel has been dredged to the 13-foot curve of the bay on the range lights, extending in a N. ^ £. and S. ^ W. direction, about 1^ mm LAKE HURON. 108 miles. The depth of water at the mouth of the river is increased from 7 to 15 inches with north and northeast winds, and decreased from 2 to 8 inches with south and southwest winds. At the ordinary sta^e of water, 14 feet, can be carried in to the river. To enter the river from Saginaw bay, bring the lights in range when 2i miles from the front light, and steer in on the range S. i W., passing between the can and spar buoys at the entrance to the cut, which are about 2 miles from the front light. Keep on the range, following the buoys, until within f of a mile from the front light and buoys Nos. 11 and 12 have been passed, when change course to S. ^ E. (nothing to the eastward until abreast beacon- light); then follow mid-channel until near Bangor, when haul to the north shore to avoid the shoal ground on the south shore, opposite to Lord's mill, after which there is no obstruction until the first drawbridge is reached. The signal to open the draw is four blasts of the whistle. The bridges at Bay City are lighted at night according to the system adopted by the Light-house Board, viz.: a stationary red light on each end of the draw-piers, low down on the free end of each protection-pier, and on each side of the pivot-pier where it is crossed by the axis of the bridge. Three square lanterns, each 15 feet above the top of the draw- span, mark its ends and middle, and show red up and down stream when the draw is closed, but when the draw is open the lanterns show three green lights in line up and down stream, with stationary low red lights, marking the width of the openings. Entrance Buoy. — Red, 2d class, nun buoy, in 18 feet of water. Marks the east side of the entrance into the cut. Front range light S. ^ W., 2^ miles. Entrance Buoy. — Black spar buoy, in 13 feet of water. Marks the west side of the entrance into the cut. There is good anchorage northeast 2^ miles from these buoys in 3^ fathoms. Saginaw River Range Lights. — Front light, fixed red, 6th order, visible 12:^ miles. Rear light, fixed red, 4th order, visible 14^ miles. Front tower, open framework, 30 feet high, painted red, on a crib. Rear tower on northeast corner of dwelling, 53 feet high, built of Milwaukee brick. On the Miest side of the entrance into Saginaw river, and when in range, guide vessels through the cut in the bar at the mouth of the river. Lights 2,310 feet apart. N. J E, and S. I W. TAWAS, OR OTTAWA POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light for 25 seconds, followed by an eclipse of five seconds, between N. W. by E'd to S. W., 4th order, visible 15 miles. White tower 61^ feet high, connected by a covered way with red dwelling, both brick. On the southwest end of Ottawa Point, easterly side of Tawas bay. A sand flat extends nearly a mile to the southward and westward from the light. A Red Sector covers this flat, between the bearings of S. W. hj W'd to N. "W., the light will show as fixed red for 25 seconds, followed by an eclipse of 5 sec- onds. The northwesterly edge of the Sand flat is very abrupt, dropping from 6 to 24 feet in a vessel's length. Port Austin light-house, S. E. by E. | E., 26^ miles. TJie Life-baving Station is i mile N. E. of the light-house. Ottawa Point. — Red, 2d class nun buoy, in 33 feet of water. Placed oflf the extreme southwest point of the shoal extending to the southward and westward of Ottawa point. Tawas (Ottawa point) light- r^ih t I 104 LAKE HURON. m % \ house, N. E. J E., 1| miles. Mill at Tawas city, N. W. by W. ^ W., 3 miles. Ottawa Shoal Buoy.- -A red 26-foot spar buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks the extreme northwest point of the shoal. Entering pass the buoy, and haul up N. N. E. for about ^ mile and come to with the light bearing about S. S. E., in 4 fathoms water. Tawas light E. S. E. \ S., i mile. Ottawa Point buoy S. by W., 1 ^ miles. Tawas Harbor. — To anchor in Tawas harbor, vessels from the northward will bring the buoy and mill at Tawas city in range, bearing N. W. by W. i W., then haul up for Tawas city, passing to the south- ward of the buoy. When the buoy has been passed ^ of a mile haul up to the north for little more than a mile to abreast the red spar buoy, light bearing E. S. E. \ S., when steer N. N. E. ; see Ottawa Shoal buoy. Care must be taken not to approach too close to the shoal ground, which extends nearly a mile to the northwestward of Ottawa point. To enter the Harbor from the southward, steer north from abreast of Charity Island buoy, and when the Ottawa Point buoy bears S. E. by E. i E., distant 1^ miles, change the course toN. E., and anchor in 4^ or 5 fathoms of water, clay bottom, with the light bearing from S. E. to S. S. E. To enter Taw^as Bay at night from the northward. — When 3 miles east of Point Sable, in 9 fathoms, steer S. W. f W., IC miles, until Ottawa Point light bears N. W., 1 mile distant, and in 6 to 7 fathoms of water, then steer W. ^ S., If miles, or until the light bears N. E., 1^ miles, keeping a sharp lookout for the end of the spit, which is very abrupt, dropping off suddenly from 1 to 4 fathoms, then haul up N. W. by W., for 1^ miles, until the light bears E. by N., when steer N. E. into the bay, and come to in 3| fathoms, with the light bearing about southeast. Note. — Observe that when the bearing of N. E is crossed the red sector will be entered, that is the fixed part of the light will be red, instead of white, the line is just outside the buoy. NoTB. — The light is not where it is indicated on the chart. It is near the end of the low sandy point, about f of. a mile S. W. by S. from the old light-house site. Au Sable Pierhead Beacon-light.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 11^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 27 feet high. On a small crib outside of the north pier at the mouth of the Au Sable river, Michigan. A guide into the river. The harbor works consist of two parallel piers 100 feet apart, extending in an easterly direction; the south pier has a pile revetment extension 700 feet in length. Depth of water, at the present time 9 feet, can be carried across the bar and up to the Swing bridge. The channel across the bar is 120 feet wide. It is expected that this channel will soon fill up again. Vessels load at pile piers. There is good anchorage off the piers in 4^ to 6 fathoms. NoTB. — A Sand spit sits oflF the shore south of the mouth of the Au Sable river in a northeast direction. Heavy draught vessels should not cross the spit until the light bears west; on this bearing the end of the spit is about 1^ mile from the light. Point Sable, si miles south of the Au Sable river, affords shelter LAKE HURON. 105 W. by W. i W., 3 affords shelter from north winds. To make a lee, haul around the point, giving it a berth of f of a mile, and steer in west 1 mile, come-to in 3^ fathoms. Harrisville is 3^ miles south of Sturgeon point. It has a harbor of limited capacity, protected by piers. STURGEON POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3^ order, visible 16 miles. White tower, 65 feet high, connected with dwelling by covered way. A coast-light on the west shore of Lake Huron, on the most easterly point between Saginaw and Thunder bays. Thunder Bay Island light-house, N. by E., 23^ miles. Porl Austin light- house, S. by £. i E., 46^ miles. Life Saving station close to the light- house. The Shore* — There are rocky shoals and spits, from Au Sable river to Sturgeon point. A 10-foot spot, 1 mile from shore, 7 miles north of Au Sable river. A spit off Sturgeon point extends 1 mile E. N. E. Rocky spots extending 1^ miles east of Black river. Foul ground around Black River island, extending E. N. E., f of a mile, and from thence to the main shore. Black River. — Vessels wishing to enter Black River should not approach the shore nearer than 2 miles until the buildings at the mouth of the river bear W. S. W., then steer for the most southerly wharf. The bottom is rocky and uneven, shoaling to 12 feet of water at about 600 yards from the mouth of the river. Note. — The buoys off Black River have been removed. Thunder Bay. — Foul ground around South point and islands. The shore is shoal from thence to Devil river; 6-foot spot three-quarters of a mile northward of Sulphur island; 11-foot shoal 1^ miles northeast of Partridge point. Flat in bay west of Whitefish point; 12 foot spot 1 mile southeast of North point, marked by a red can buoy. Foul ground and rocky lumps between Sugar island and the main land. Spits extending southeast of Sugar island. The shores of Thunder bay are generally good holding ground. Excellent anchorage is found along the north shore, and protection from all winds, except southeasters. Protec- tion from south and south-southeast winds can be found between Devil river and Scarecrow island. THUNDER BAY RIVER LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 13^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 44^ feet high. On a crib, 57 feet east of and in a line with Gilchrist's wharf, on the northern side of the entrance into Thunder Bay river. Serves as a guide into the river and bay. The piers at the mouth of Thunder Bay river extends S. E. i E. Width of dredged channel, 150 feet. Depth of water, 13 feet. The channel is straight in. A red light is shown from the draw of the bridge. Entering keep the light on the bridge open to the southward of the main light. The fog signal at ThutidtT Bay river, or Alpena, is a bell struck by machinery, gives a single blow every 10 seconds. Devil River. — When abreast of South point and distance 6 miles due west, steer W. N. W. ^ N., 6^ miles, or until Soaroerow island bears due south and 1 mile distant, then haul up W. ^ N., 4 miles, until abreast of houses at Devil river. To make Thunder Bay River.— When abreast of South point and 6 miles distant due west, steer N. W. ^ N., 16 miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of light. To make an anchorage between Thunder bay and Suflfar island, steer in north midway between the two islands. The 106 LAKK HURON. H 'ill?. chart shows 14 feet, but at the present stage of water 10 to 11 feet is all that can be found. Come-to off the fish houses on Sugar island. Enter- ing, keep a sharp lookout for the spit extending southeast from Sugar island, and spit off the west side of Thunder Bay island, northwest from the Life Saving station. To make Thunder Bay River from the North.— When one-half a mile southeast from the south point of Thunder Bay island, steer W. S. W. ^ 8., 4 miles, passing south of the can buoy on the spit off North point, when haul up W. N. W., 8 miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of the light. To make Devil River from the North.— When one-half mile southeast from the south point of Thunder Bay island, steer S. W. by W. i W., 13 miles. Come-to off the houses in 3 fathoms. North Point* — Red, 2d-class can buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks the extreme end of the shoal extending in a southeasterly direc- tion from North point in Thunder bay. Vessels should not attempt to pass to the northward of the buoy. East end of North point, N. by W. I W., li miles. Thunder Bay Island light-house, N. E. by E., 3 7-16 miles. Thunder Bay River light, N. W. by W. | W., 9^ miles. THUNDER BAY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A flashing white light, 4th order, interval between flash 00 seconds, visible 14^ miles. Yellow tower, rubble-stone base, brick above, 66 feet high, connected by covered way with dwelling of Milwaukee brick. On the east shore of Thunder Bay island, and about 400 yards from its south- east end. Vessels should not attempt to pass between the island and the main-land. During thick or foggy weather there is sounded a steam- whistle, giving a blast of 8 seconds, followed by an interval of 10 sec onds; then a blast of 2 seconds followed by an interval of 40 seconds, alternating in this way every minute. Sturgeon Point light-house, S. t)y W., 23^ miles. Detour light-house, N. N. W. ^ W., 73^ miles. A spit extends southeast one-quarter mile from southeast point of island. To make a lee under Sugar Island, haul around Thunder Bay island, giving it a berth of one-halt mile, when steer W. by N., ll miles, until the middle of Sugar island bears north. Come-to in 6 or 6 fathoms, with Thunder Bay Island light bearing about E. by N. The Life Saving station is on the S. W. side of the island, and a watch-house on the S. E. point. Middle Island. — Bed, 2d-clasB nun buoy in 21 feet of water. Placed outside the shoal off the southeast point of Middle island. To anchor between the island and the main-land, vessels from the north- ward will pass outside the buoy one-half mile, and when it is in range with the southeast point of the island, haul up to W. S. W. f W., and when the west point of the island bears N. by W., haul up for it, anchor- ing in 4 or 4} fathoms of water, about one-half mile from the island, which forms a lee for northeast winds. To make a lee in southeast gales, haul around the north side of the island and come-to on the northwest side, be careful not to stand in too far. Southeast point of Middle island, W. N. W. ^ W., seven-eighths of a mile. Thunder Bay Island light- house, 8. S. E. i E., 11^ miles. The Life Saving station is on the N. W. point of the island, and watch-house on the S. E. point. False Presque Isle is 9 miles southeast of Presque Isle light; it has good anchorage and shelter from all winds, except those from E. \:> ,1 ijg LAKE HURON. 107 iOto 11 feet is all ar island. Enter- heast from Sugar i, northwest from the North.— t of Thunder Bay le can buoy on the to a point 1 mile — When one-half land, steer S. W. loms. i feet of water, itheasterly direc- l not attempt to point, N. by W. E. by E., 3 7-16 >i miles. rATION.— A • seconds, visible ve, 66 feet high, I brick. On the from its south- le island and the Junded a steam- terval of 10 sec of 40 seconds, »ht-hou8e, S. by \ miles. A spit t of island. To y island, giving miles, until the fathoms, with he Life Saving use on the S. E. feet of water, le island. To i-om the north- n it is in range W. I W., and for it, anchor- cm the island, outheast gales, the northwest Middle island, Island light- 9 on the N. W. ^ue Isle light; those from E. V" to S. E. To make the anchorage, steer in northwest, rup well up in the bay, keeping on the north side. Come-to in 3^ fathoms. Presque Isle Harbor Range-Lights.— Two, 6th order, fixed white lights, visible 6 and 8 miles. Front tower painted white, 16 feet high. Rear light on white frame dwelling, 25 fe^n' high. Lights 1,000 feet apart, bearing E. i S. and W. ^ N. On the west shore of Presque Isle harbor. To enter the harbor, bring the lights in range W. ^ N., with the old light-house on the north point bearing W. by N., 1^ miles distant. Run m on the range. A bar extends from the north to the south points of the harbor. When crossing this bar on the range there are at the present time not more than 13^ feet of water; when over it the water deepens suddenly to 20 feet ; the old light-house should bear a little abaft the beam, when haul up S. S. W. for the wood dock, or come- to abreast of it in 3^ fathoms; soft bottom. There is a rocky shoal, least water 8 feet, 1,000 yards E. f S. from the old tower; running in on the range the course leads close to the south side of it. The M'ood dock is in a very dilapidated condition, and at present is not safe to lie to. PRESQUE ISLE LIGHT-STATION.-A fixed white light, 8d order, visible 18f miles. White tower, 100 feet high, connected by a covered way with dwelling. About 500 yards from the northern end of Presque Isle. Detour light-house, N. N. W. ^ W., 47 miles. Spectacle Beef light-house, N. W. ^ W., 42^ miles. In the bay west of Presque Isle the bottom is rocky. The fog-signal is a 10-inch steam whistle giving blasts of 6 seconds, with silent interval of 26 seconds. The fog-signal Jhouse is on the beach 1,240 feet N. by W. from the light-house. The Shore from Thunder Bay island to the Straits of Mackinac. Shoal I mile S. E. of Middle island, marked with buoy. Flats ^ mile from S. W. point and ^ mile from N. W. point of Middle island. Middle ground between Middle island and the main-land, 10 feet spot ^ mile N. W. of first point below Presque Isle harbor; 10 feet spot f mile S. E. of the old light-house at tha entrf.nce to Presque Isle harbor; 6 feet spot 1 mile S. E. from Adams point. SPECTACLE REEF LIGHT-STATION.— A flashing light, showing alternately a red and white flash. The interval between flashes is 30 seconds, 2d order, visible 16 i miles. Gray tower, 86 feet high. A square wooden crib, 12 feet above water, surrounds the tower. On the westerly edge of Spectacle reef. The reef is about seven-eighths of a mile in extent nortn and south, and one-fourth of a mile east and west. The Boundlngaare irregular near thereof, with 6 and 12 fathoms close-to. During thick or foggy weather, a steam-whistle is sounded, giving a blast of 3 seconds, then an interval of 12 seconds; then another hlast of 3 sec- i • onds, followed by an interval of 42 seconds, and so on. Bois Blanc light- house, W. by N., 14 miles. Cheboygan light-house, S. W. by W. i W., 15i- miles. Detour light-house, N. E. i^ N., 16| miles. Thirteen-foot Shoal.— Red and black horizontal stripes, 2d class call buoy in 17 foet of water. Marks a dangerous shoal between Bois Blanc and Spectacle reef. Should not be approached nearer than one-fourth of a mile. The shoal extends in an east and west direction; the buoy is near the middle of the shoal on the north side. Spectacle W-*^\ ' -" '-f ' -T.'"' ■■*tT" :| -IS 108 LAKE ttUKON. Reef light-house, E. f S., 3} miles. Bois Blanc light-house, W. N. W. i W., lOi miles. Cheboygan light-house, S. W. f W., 12^ miles. Martin's Reef. — Black, Ist-class can buoy in 18 feet of water. Placed off the southeasterly end of Martin's reef, on which the steamer "Garden City" was lost. Vessels should pass to the southward of the buoy. Between Martin's reef and the main-land there are several reef!) extending in a northwesterly direction with channel-ways between them which should not be attempted by strangers. Spectacle Reef light- house, S. ^ E., 9f miles. Detour light-house, E. N. E. f E., 11^ miles. Beaver-tail point N. by W. f W., 3|- miles. Bois Blanc light-house, S. W. by W. I W., 15 miles. Scammon's Harbor. — The entrance to this harbor is 11^ miles N. E. by N. from Bois Blanc light, and N. W, by N. f N., 16 miles from Spectacle Reef light It is between Boot island on the east and Isle William on the west. Off the southeast end of Isle William there is a small rocky islet, from which a spit extends three-eighths of a mile in a southeasterly direction, with large boulders on it, and there is a rocky flat on the northeast side of this islet. When inside there is plenty of room, and protection from all winds. The water is deep in the entrance, but strangers should be very cautious in making it. To enter the harbor, bring the passage to bear N. W. by N., and run in on that bearing. Keep the starboard side best on board, about one-third the distance across the channel, and when a little past the west point of Boot island, haul to the north to clear a spit off a little point on the opposite side of the channel, and when into the bay, haul to the northwest and come-to in 7 fathoms, mud and clay bottom. DETOUR LIGHT-STATION.— See Straits of St. Marie. Scammon's Cove. — Red, Sd-olass nun buoy in 21 feet of water on the outer end or south point of Scammon's Cove reef. Point Smith, 8. E. by E. ^ E., 1^ miles. East side of entrance to Scammon's cove, N. W. by N. i N.J If miles. Spectacle reef, W. S. W., 27 miles. There is a saw-mill at Scammon's cove, and considerable trade in oedar posts, ties, etc. From 10 to 11 feet can be carried into the harbor; a tug 18 generally in readiness to tow vessels in and out of the harbor. Compass Courses and Distances on the American side of Lake Huron, Fort Gratiot to the Straits of Mackinac— When i mile N. E. by N. from Fort Gratiot light, steer N. f W., 58^ miles, to a point 1^ miles east of main light at Sand Beach, thence N. by W. \ W., 87^ miles, to a point 2 miles east of Tiiunder Bay Island light, thence N.N. W. \ W., 26^ miles, to a point 6 miles E. N. E. from Presque Isle light, tlience to the south channel N. W. by W. f W., 47 miles, or until Spectacle Reef light bears N. £. 8 miles and the east point of Bois Blanc island N. W. \ !Krthe same distance, when steer due west 8 miles to a point three-quarters of a mile north of Cheboygan light. To pass through the north channel when 6 miles E. N. E. from Presque Isle light, steer N W. by W. \ W., 68 miles, to a point one-half mile north of Bois Blanc light, thence W. \ N., 9i miles to Mackinac. Fort Gratiot to Detour Passage.— When 5 miles E. N. E. '/>le^ y LAKK HURON. 109 house, W. N. \V. 12^ miles. 18 feet of water. Hrhich the steamer southward of the i are several reefs ays between them 3tacle Reef light- ;. f E., Hi miles, mo light-house, S. larbor is 11^ miles N., 15 miles from the east and Isle ifVilliam there is a ths of a mile in a 1 there is a rocky there is plenty of ep in the entrance, enter the harbor, 1 on that bearing, bird the distance int of Boot island, te opposite side of est and come-to in I of St. Marie. 1 21 feet of water eef. Point Smith, Scammon's oove, , 27 miles. Biderable trade in d into the harbor; t of the harbor. lerican side oj ftC. — When 1 mile }^ miles, to a point by W. \ W., m\ It, thence N.N. W. B Isle light, thenoe til Spectacle Reef no island N. W. \ )int three-quarters the north channel W. by W. i W.. ight, thence VV. \ 6 miles E. N. E. t J: from Presque Isle light, as in the course from Fort Gratiot to Mackinac, •teer N. N. W. f W.., 45 miles, ranging on Detour light, to within two miles of it and in range with Frying Pan island and Pipe Island lights, when haul up on this range heading N. i W. nearly. See directions for entering Straits of St. Mary. Fort Gratiot to Sagrinaw River.— When i mile N. E. by N. from Fort Gratiot iight, steer N. f W., 58^ miles, to a point 1^ miles east of main light at Sand Beach, thence N. N. W. i W., 15 miles, to a point 3 miles E. N. E. from Point aux Barques light, not approaching the shore nearer than If miles, then N. W. by W., 9 miles, until Port Austin light bears W. S. W., 6 miles, thence W. i S., 80 miles, to a point 3 milea ^northwest of Charity Island light and half a mile north of the buoy, hence 8. W. by S., 33 miles, to the outer buoys at the north entrance to e cut In daylight when abreast of Sand Beach follow the coast ound, not approaching it nearer than If miles, until Port Austin light ars W. S. W., 5 miles distant, when proceed as above. Fort Gratiot to Thunder Bay River. — When i^ miles east f main light at Sand Beach, as in the course from Fort Gratiot to Sagi- naw river, steer N. N. W. i W., 93 miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of |he light. Dark nightd or in a fog this course should be watched, as it leads close to Scarecrow island. The soundings are gradual. Fort Gratiot to Lexington. — When i mile N. E. by N. from Fort Gratiot light, steer N. by W ^ W., 18 miles, to a half mile east of pier. Fort Gratiot to Fort Sanilac— When l mile N. E. by N. from Fort Gratiot light steer N. ^ W.., 29^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of the dock. ^ Fort Gratiot to Forestville.— When l mile N. E. by N. from Fort Gratiot light, steer N. ^ W., 46 miles, to a point one mile east of the dock. Fort Gratiot to Port Hope.— When l^ miles east of Sand Beach main light as in the course from Fort Gratiot to Saginaw river, ■teer N. N. W. ^ W., 7f miles, to a point I mile east of Stafford's dock. Fort Gratiot to Point aux Barques.— See course from Fort Gratiot to Saginaw river. Fort Gratiot to Port Austin.— When 3 miles E. N. E. from Point aux Barques light as in the course from Fort Gratiot to Saginaw river, ateer W. N. W., 10 miles, to a point 2 miles north of Burnt Cabin point, thence W. i S., 3f miles, passing ^ mile north of Port Austin light and ^ mile vast it, when haul in due south, keeping a lookout for the rocky spot N. W. of the end of the dock. Sand Beach to Goderich.— From main entrance steer E. by 6., 46 miles, to 1 mile west of front range light. Sand Beach to Entrance to Georgian Bay.— From main entrance steer N. N. E. ^ E., Ill miles, to a point 3 miles W. i N. of Cove Island light. Sand Beach to Southampton. — From main entrance steer N. E.f E., 76 miles, to a point 2 miles northwest of Chantry Island light. Point aux Barques to Saginaw River, Pas«ing South of Charity Island.— When S miles E. N. E. from Point aux BarquoH '■■ i: T? 110 LAKE HURON. light, Steer N. W. by W. J \V., 11^ miles, thence W. S. W., 26 miles, gassing 1^ miles N. of Port Austin light, until Oak point bears east and and point due south, when haul up west for 4f miles until the light on Charity island is in range with the west side of Little Charity island, then steer S. W. ^ S., 27^ miles, to the outer buoys at the entrance to the out into Saginaw river. Buoys in channel south of Charity island re- moved. Point aux Barques to Tawas.— When 3 miles E. N. E. of Point aux Barques, steer N. W. by W., 9 miles, until Port Austin light bears W. S. W., 6 miles, thence W. by N, f N., 30^ miles, to a. point 1^ miles southwest of Tawas light. For directions to enter the harbor, see Tawas Light Station. Point aux Barques to Au Sable.— When 3 miles E. N. E. of Point aux Barques light, steer N. W. ^ W., 38 miles, to a point 1 mile east of light. A sand bar makes out from the south side of the entrance to Sable river, from which a spit entends in a northeast direction about 1^ miles. This shoal seems to be extending rapidly, probably from the present low stage of water. Heavy draft vessels bound to Au Sable should not cross the spit, until the light-house at Au Sable bears west, the end of the spit is a little more than one mile from the harbor piers. Point aux Barques to Harrisville.— When 3 miles E. N. £. of Point aux Barques light, steer N. W. by N. f N., 50^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Harrisville. ' Saginaw to Point aux Ores.— From the buoys at the north entrar^je to the cut, steer N„ N. E. ^ E., 22f miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of point. • Saginaw Biver to Point Sable and Tliunder Bay Island. — From the buoys at north entrance to the cut, steer N. E. by N., 62 miles, until Sable point bears N. W. 4 miles distant, thence N. | E., 52 miles, to a point 2 miles east of Thunder Bay Island light. See course from Fort Gi . clot to Mackinac and St. Mark's river. Saginaw River to Georgian Bay.— From the buoys at the north entrance to the cut, steer N. E. by N., 33 miles, until Charity Is- land light bears southeast 3 miles, thence northeast 120 miles, to a point 3 miles W. f N. of Cove Island light. Saginaw River to Goderich. — When 3 miles northwest from Charity Island light, steer E. ^ N., 30 miles, until Port Austin light bears W. S. W., 6 miles, and Point aux Barques S. E. i^ S., 7f miles, when steer E. S. E. ^ S., 63 miles, to a point 1 mile west of front range light. Saginaw River to Wild Fowl Bay.— From the buoys at the north entrance to cut, steer N. E. f E. 25f lailes, ranging on Sard point until within 2 miles of it, when haul in E. S. E., passing thr je- quarters of a mile to the northward of North island. Saginaw River to Tawas Bay.— From the buoys at the north entrance to the out, steer N. B. by N., 83 miles, until Charity Is- land light bears southeast 3 miles, when steer north 12f miles, into the . middle of the bay. ■" Tawas Bay to Sable Point and Thunder Bay River.- When 1^ miles southwest of Ottawa Point light, and a little south of tliol LAKE HURON. Ill S. W., 25 miles, jint bears east and until the light on ,le Charity island, the entrance to the Charity island re- miles E. N. E. of Port Austin light oiles, to ft point H nter the harbor, see len 3 miles E. N. E. miles, to a point 1 he entrance to Sable jtion about 1^ miles, rom the present low ible should not cross t, the end of the spit -When 3 miles E. N. \ N., 50i miles, to a ie buoys at the north ; 18, to a point 1 mile . i Thunder Bay le cut, steer N. E. by 8 distant, thence N. | ay Island light. See V's river. p'rom the buoys at the fles, until Charity Is- ^ 120 miles, to a point .1 3 miles northwest Intil Port Austin light [s S. E. i S., 7i miles, west of front range |-From the buoys at liles, ranging on Sard ^^ I S. E., passing thr je- > Id. am the buoys at the liles, until Charity Is- rth 12f miles, into the iderBayRlver.- id a little south of tin- buoy, steer E. i N., If miles, until the light bears N. W., 1 mil«, thence N. £. f E., 10 miles, to a point 3 miles east of Sable point, thence N. | E., 30 miles, to a point 5 miles northeast of Sturgeon Point light, thence N. N. W". I W., 23 miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of Thunder Bay River light. This course leads close to Scarecrow island, and should be watched carefully. Tawas Bay to Au Sable. — When i mile southeast of light, as in the course to Thunder Bay island, steer northeast 8^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Sable point, then N. f E., 5^ miles, to 1^ mile east of An Sable light; this course leads close to Sable point and close to the sand spit off Au Sable river. Tawas Bay to Port Austin. — When 1} miles southwest of light, steer S. E. by E. f £., 27 miles, to the dock at Port Austin. Au Sable to Sturgeon Point and Thunder Bay River. — When 2 miles east of light, steer N. i E., 21^ miles, to a point 2 miles east of Sturgeon Point light, thence N. i W.,8^ miles, to a point 2 miles east of Black Biver island, thence N. N. W. f W., 18 miles, to 1 mile southeast of light. Au Sable to '^'hunder Bay Island.— When 2 miles east of light, steer N. | E., 44 miles, to apoint 2 miles east of Thunder Bay Island light. When see courses from Fort Gratiot to Straits of Mackinac, and Detour. Au Sable to Goderich. — Wl^en 2 miles east of light, steer S. E. by E. ^ £., 90^ miles, to a point 1 mile west of front range light. Au Sable to Cove Island. — When 2 miles east of light, steer . E. ^ E., 97 miles, to a point W. f N., 3 miles from Cove Island light. Thunder Bay Biver to Thunder Bay Island.— When i lie S. E. of the light, steer E. S. E., 8^ miles, passing ^ mile south of ^the red can buoy on the end of shoal off North point, thence E. N. E. ^ ~ '., 3f miles, to a point ^ mile southeast from the south point of Thunder Bay i>land. Thunder Bay Biver to Saginaw.— When 1 mile S. E. of the ight, steer S. E. ^8., 15 miles, to apoint 5 miles east of the South point; ihence S. ^ W., 41^ miles, to a point 4 miles S. E. of Sable point; thence ). W. by S., 62 miles, to the buoys at the mouth of Saginaw river, and in range of the two lights. Thunder Bay River to Fort Gratiot.— When i mile 8. E. f the light, steer S. E., by S. ^ S., 10 miles, to 1 mile N. E. of Scare- w island; thence S. E. by S. ^ S., for 83 miles, to a point 1^ miles east main light at Sand Beach ; thence S. f E., 58^ miles, to a point 1 mile !K. E. by N. from Fort Gratiot light-house. Thunder Bay River to Goderich.— When i mile S. E. of e light, steer "^ E. f S., 124 miles, to a point 1 mile west of front nge light. Thunder Bay River to Southampton.— When i mile S. E. et the light, steer E. S. E., 8 miles, pr ising south of North Point buoy; Whence E. S. E., 96 miles, to a point 2^ miles northwest of Chantry Island '^ght. Thunder Bay Island to Georgian Bay,— When 2 miles east ^f light, steer E. by N. i N., 69 miles, to a point 3 miles W. f N. of Cove sland light. I a !• ill ii? J.t 112 LAKE HURON. Thunder Bay Island to Southampton.— YThen 2 miles east of light, steer E. S. £. k S., 91^ luiles, to a point 2^ miles northwest of Chantry Island light. Thunder Bay Island to Point Clark.— When 2 miles east of light, steer southeast, Qg^ miles, to Point Clark light. Thunder Bay Island to False Presque Isle.— When 2 miles east of the light, steer N. N. W. ^ W., 18^ miles, to a point 2 miles east of False Presque Isle point, passing li miles east of Middle Island buoy. Thunder Bay Island Liight to the Lig^ht on the Great Ducks.— N. by E. f E., 42^ miles. False Presque Isle to Presque Isle. — When 2 miles east of False Presque Isle point, steer N. W. ^ N., 8 miles, to a point 2 miles east of Presque Isle light. Presque Isle Light to Duck Island Light.— N. E.by E., 82 miles. Presque Isle Light to Manitoulin Light.— On the east ■ide of the Straits of Mississagua, N. by £. f E., 39 miles. Detour to Mackinac. — When l mile east of light, and in range of Frying Pan island, and Pipe Island lights, steer W. by S. ^ S., 26| miles, to a point 2 miles north of Bois Blanc light; thence west ^i^ miles^ to the middle of Mackinac harbor. This course leads ^ mile south of Ist-class black can buoy, on Martin's or Garden City reef. In foggy weather or dark nights it would be advisable to keep a sharp lookout. Detour to SpectacleKeef Light.— When i mile east of light and in range of Frying Pan island, and Pipe Island lights, steer S. W., 18 miles, to a point 1 mile west of light. Detour to Cheboygan. — When l mile east of light, and in range of Frying Pan island, and Pipe Island lights, steer, S. W. f W., heading on Cheboygan light for 80 miles, or to within 2 miles of it; thence W. by S., 3 miles, to a point 1^ miles from Cheboygan River pierhead light, and in line iitrith the range lights. This course leads to the westward and very close to Thirteen-foot shoal, 8i miles, W. f N. from Spectacle Reef light; heavy draught vessels should keep more to the eastward until abreast of Spectacle reef, and then haul up for Cheboygan light. Spectacle Reef to Cheboygan.— With the light directly astern, steer W. S. W., a little southerly, until in range with the Cheboy- gan range lights, and main light S. E. by E. i E., 1^ miles, when haul up for St. Helena light, N. W. by W. i W., with Cheboygan light over the stern. Cheboygan to Georgian Bay. — When three-quarters of a mile north of Cheboygan light, steer east 8 miles; thence E. by S. i 8., 124 miles, to a point three-quarters of a mile north of Cove Island light. Mackinac to Georgian Bay.— From the middle of the har- bor, steer E. f S., 9^ miles, to a point one-half mile north of Bois Blanc light, then E. S. E., 16 miles, to a point two miles south of Spectacle Reef light, when steer E. by S. f S., 119 miles, to a point three-quarters of a mile north of Cove Island light. ■.«■ :V'4*; LAKE HURON. 113 V7hen 2 miles east lies northwest of l^hen 2 miles east t. Isle. — When 2 to a point 2 miles of Middle Island Light on the lien 2 miles east of point 2 miles east ht.— N. E.by E., ;ht. — On the east iles. light, and in range ^ by S. i a, 261 nee west Q^ miles^ is I mile south of 1 reef. In foggy \ sharp lookout. 1 mile east of light ghts, steer S. W., light, and in range W. % W., heading of it; thence W. ^er pierhead light, the westward and )ra Spectacle Reef he eastward until ^an light. the light directly with the Cheboy- iles, when haul up jan light over the iree-quarters of a nee E. by S. i S., Cove Island light. iddle of the har- th of Bois Blanc 3uth of Spectacle int three-quarters •><' Magnetic Declinations in degrees and tenths, corrected to the year 1890. • Lakeport 3 W. Lexington 2 W. Sanilac a. 1 W. White Rock 3.2 W. Port Austin 2.0 W. Mouth of Saginaw River 0.8 W. Point aux Ores 0.5 W. Tawas Point. 0.8 W. Harrisville 1.3 W. Alpena LOW. North Point of Thunder Bay 1.3 W. Middle Island 1.3 W. Hammond's Bay 0.3 W. Cheboygan 0.1 E. Detour L. H 1.3 W. Drummond's Island, east side 3 .0 W. Duck Island Light-house .. 3.0 W. Cove Island 5.3 W. Chantry Island 4.5 W. Light Houses and Harbors on the Canadian Shore of Lake Huron. GODEBICH LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 21 miles. White, square, stone tower, with dwelling attached. On high bank south of entrance to harbor; light 150 feet above lake level. Front Range L^ht. — A fixed red light, visible 5 miles. White square, open-frame tower. On north pier; light 45 feet above lake level. Back Range Light* — A fixed green light, visible 6 miles. White, square, wood tower. On north pier; 1,209 feet E. by S. from front light. These lights in range lead to head of north pier. A Steam Fog Whistle in oonnection vith the water works dar- ing thick weather will give blasts of 10 seconds, with intervals of 60 seconds between them. The water-works buildin^i: is oir the beach S. E. by E., 1,200 feet from the outer end of the north pier. It is of red brick, with unpainted roof, with high brick chimney. It is partially hidden from the lake by an old wooden storehouse. The 8-inch whistle rises from the roof, and is 30 feet above the level of the lake. Goderich is a harbor of refuge. — It is an enclosed basin, with a channel cut through the beach, connecting it with the deep water in Lake Huron. The sides of the channel are protected with piers ex- tending into the lake about W ^ K. The north pier is 1,320 feet in length, and the south pier, 1,520 feet; width between piers 200 feet. Depth of water. — There are 15 feet at the entrance, which depth can be carried through the piers and into the basin, except around the island where there are only 12 feet. There is an artificial bank, between the harbor and the River Maitland; the river discharges into the lake through the north beach and not through the harbor. There are high clay banks (100 feet) on each side of the harbor. Good anchorage ofT 114 LAKE HUBON. the piera, clay bottom. To enter the Harbor, )niag the ]>ier lights, red and green, in range E. by S., and ran for them; approaching the north pier port and ran straight in between the piers, K. i| S., ana into the basin. Point aux Barques. W. N. W., 68 miles. Cape Ipper- wash, S. S. W. f W., 39i miles. There is a Life SaTiiig Station at Goderioh. '^'VfR M4ITLANO ff llWT a Nouu ^ " GODKUICH. Bayfield is 12 miles south of Goderioh. It has a harbor composed >f two piers and basin. TLa north pier is 820 feet and the south pier 975 feet long. Width betw Ben piers 200 feet at entrance. Depth of water, 10 to 12 feet at entrance. No light. POINT CLARK LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white light, 2d order, intervals between revolutions half a minute, visible 15 LAKE HUBON. 115 r, firing the i»ier iiem; spproaohing piers, £. i| S., and ilea. Cape Ipper- f*». a harbor compoBed and the south pier itrance. Depth of revolving white minute, visible 15 miles. White, circular stone tower, 87 feet high. A coast-light on Point Clark, 23 miles north of Goderioh. A reef extends west from the point, which} together with a detached shoal, requires that it should be given a berth of two miles; the shore from Point Clark to Chantry island M rocky 'and dangerous, and should not be approached by strangers nearer than 1^ miles. Three miles south of Point Clark a reef extends ioQt If miles. Pointe aux Barques light bears W. i S., 62 miles. Point Douglas N. N. E. i E., 19 miles. Kincardine Front Lieht. — A fixed red light, visible 8 miles in the direction of the range. White, square, wood tower, 37 feet above sea level. On north p'er, 1,185 feet W. by N. f N. from main light. Kincardine Back Rang^e and Main Lieht.— Alternate white and red flash every 20 seconds; visible 14 miles. Fawn color, octa- gonal wood tower, dwelling attached, on high stone foundation. In town, on hillside. The range leads somewhat to the northward of the i liead of the north pier, visible from all points seaward. Point Douglas, g3K. by E. i E., 10 miles. Thunder Bay Island light, N. W. i W., 97 '{miles. Inverhuron is 9 miles north of Kiiicardine. It has one pier 460 feet in length with 14 feet at the outer end. It has no light. PORT ELGIN LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, lantern on a pole from corner of a shed. On the outer end of Govern- ment wharf. Port Elgin is 4 miles from Chantry island, and 24 milei m Kincardine. CHANTRY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.—A fixed white ight, visible 15 miles. White, circular, stone tower, 86 feet high, 2d er, coast-light. About 2^ miles to the westward of Saugeen. Southampton Harbor Ranee Llgrhts, Front Lieht.— fixed red light to the north, white in the harbor, visible 7 miles. White, |uare tower. On the east end of west breakwater, 933 yards from antry Island light, N. E. by £. Back Light. — A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, nare wood tower, light 34 feet above lake level. On shore south of ding pier 2,100 yards S. f E. from the front light. These lights in nge lead to the opening in breakwater at north end of harbor. Chantry Island is a small rocky island about half a mile long: If lies W. S. W. from the mouth of Saugeen river. The Harhor con- iSts of a breakwater 1,600 feet long, extending in an easterly direction m the old breakwater at tb<) northern end of the island. A break- kter 2,0 lO feet long, on a curved line from the main-land to within 400 t of the end of the breakwater, extending from Chantry island. A ding pier has been built in the inner harbor, where a quantity of ulder stone has been removed from a shoal adjoining the anchorage und. The breakwaters are built of crib work, filled with stone. The th of water in channel, reported about 14 feet, is not sufficient to make vigation safe for heavy draught vessels. Saugeen Light. — A fixed green light, visible 7 miles. Lantern mast, with brown shed at base, on a crib or breakwater. On the rth side of mouth of river. To guide fishing boats into Saugeen ver. Chief's point bears N. by E. ^ E., 13 miles. Cape Hurd, N. by "^ f W., 53 miles. I ■ I I I It I ■■} )i! 116 LAKE HURON. LYAL ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white light, visible 12 miles; interval between revolutions, 15 seconds. White, ■qnare wood tower, 57 feet high, attached to keeper's dwelling. On the west side of Lyal island. The light, besides being a general lake coast light, will serve as a guide into the harbor of Stokes bay, but as there are shoals in the entrance it must not be attempted without local know- ledge. Chantry Island light, S. i W., 32 miles. ISLE OF COVES LIGHT-STATION. — See lights in Georgian bay. MICHAEL'S POINT LIGHT-STATION— A fixed white light, visible 13 miles. White, square wood tower, light 40 feet above Is^e level. On Michael's point, south side of Michael's bay. A reef ex- tends from the point about W. by S. ^ S., 2^ miles from the light. Gove Island light, S. E. i S., 24 milei. Michael's bay is on the south side of Manitouiin island. GREAT DUCK ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A re- volving red and white light, one red and two white flashes every two min- utes. Greatest brilliancy every 40 seconds. Visible 15 miles. White, square wood tower, with dwelling attached, light 64 feet above lake level. On southwest point of island. The fog-horn, operated by steam during thick and foggy weather, will give blasts of 8 seconds' duration, with intervals of 35 seconds. The fog signal is 150 feet southeasterly from the light- house, built of wood, painted white, with brown roof. A reef extends If miles in a southerly direction from the southeast point of the island, and a reef extends 1^ miles in the same direction from the south point of Outer Duck island, lying east of the south end of the Great Duck. There is a good channel south of Western and Inner Duck. Spectacle Reef light, W. by N., 68 miles. Detour light, N. W. by W. i W., 62 miles. Presque Isle light, S. W. by W., 32 miles. MISSISSAGUA STRAITS LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 13 miles. White, square wood tower, light 46 feet above lake level. On southwest point of the west end of Great Mani- touiin island. For guiding vessels through Mississagua straits for either entrance. The fog-signal is a steam whistle, giving blasts of 8 seconds duration, with silent intervals of 2 minutes. The whistle is usually called a "wildcat" whistle; it is fitted with a 'piston which changes the tone of the blast, beginning low, rising to a screech, and again sinking to a low note at the end. Presque Isle light, S. S. W. 30 miles. mississagua Straits is between the Grand Manitouiin and Cockburn islands. Tlie passage is about 8 miles in length and 2 miles wide at the narrowest part. Depth of water from 10 to 30 fathoms. To make the passage, bring the middle of it to bear N. by E. i E., and run through on that course. Tlie Magnetic Reefs, on the west side of the entrance from Lake Huron, extend around the southeast coast of Cockburn island S^ miles from the shore and are very dangerous. On the east side of the entrance reefs extend from the south- west point of Manitouiin island in a south and southwest direction for 1 mile. False Detour Channel is between Drummond and Cockburn islands. It is about 7 miles in length and a little over a mile wide at the southern entrance. Run through the passage from Lake Huron, heading N. E. by N. Keep the west side of the entrance best on board. On the east side of the entrance from the south there is a small island with shoal water to the west of it. LA.KE nURON. 117 A revolving white 6 seconds. White, I dwelling. On the general lake coast (8 bay, but as there rithout local know- J, — See lights in iN. — A fixed white light 40 feet above I's bay. A reef ex- )m the light. Cove on the south side of PATION.— A re- ishes every two min- aiiles. White, square )ove lake level. On r steam during thick ation, with intervals erly from the light- of. A reef extends point of the island, rom the south point )f the Great Duck, r Duck. Spectacle W. by W. i W., 62 ATION.— A fixed tower, light 46 feet end of Great Mani- ;ua straits for either blasts of 8 seconds whistle is usually 3ton which changes screech, and again light, S. S. W. 30 and Cockburn islands, at the narrowest part. i^e, bring tlie middle of auce from Lake Huron, es from the shore and extend from the south- ction for 1 mile. Cockburn islands. It the southern entrance, by N. Keep the west itranoe from the soutli > ' iC^ompass Courses and Distances on the Canadian Side of Lake Huron, Port Gratiot to Cape Ipperwash. — When 1 mile N. E. by . from the light, steer N. E. by £., 24 miles, ranging on the point. Fort Gratiot to Bayfield.— When i mile N. E. by N. from e light, steer northeast, 52 miles, to a point 1 mile west of the piers. Fort Gratiot to Goderlch.— When i mile N. E. by N. from e light, steer N. E. f N., 61^ miles, to a point 1 mile west of front range light. Fort Gratiot to Point Clark.— When l mile N. E. by N. > from the light, steer N. N. E. ^ E., 79^ miles, to a point 2 miles west of ligbt. Fort Gratiot to Kincardine.— When 2 miles W. of Point Clark, steer N. N. E. :^ E. 4 miles, then K E. ^ E. 6 miles, to a point 1 ''mile west from front light. Fort Gratiot to Sonthampton.— When 2 miFes W. of Point Clark, steer N. N. E. \ E., 17 miles, to a point 3 miles west of Inverha- .ron, thence N. E. f N., 10 miles, to a point 2 miles northwest of Chantry Ibland light. Fort Gratiot to Entrance to Georgian Bay.— When i mile N. E. by N. from the light, steer N. by E. \ E., 163 miles, to a point Z miles W. f N. of Cove Island light, giving Gat point a berth of 1^ miles. Fort Gratiot to Great Duck Island Light.— When i mile iSr. E. by N. from the light, steer N. ^ W., 182^ miles, to the light. Bayfield to Goderich. — When 1^ miles west of Bayfield, steei ttorth, 12 miles, to a poiut 1 mile west of Goderich. '< Goderich to Kincardine. — When l mile west of front range ght, steer N. ^ W., 23 miles, to a point 2 miles west of Point Clark ight, thence N. N. E. \ E., 4 miles, when steer N. £. \ E., 6 miles, to a int 1 mile west of front light on north pier. Goderich to Entrance to Georgian Bay.— When 2 miles est of Point Clark, as in the course to Kincardine, steer N. ^E., 88 iles, to a point 3 miles W. f N. from Cove Island light. Goderich to Inverhuron and Southampton.— When 2 lllilts west of Point Clark, as in the course to Kincardine, steer N. N. E. jl E., 17 miles, to a point 3 miles west of Inverhuron, thence N. E. \ N., 19 miles, to a point 2 miles northwest of Chantry Island light. Goderich to the Straits of Mackinac and St. Mary's iver. — When 1 mile west of front range light, steer N. W. by N., 140 iles, to a point 5 miles E. N. E. from Presque Isle light, thence to the _, ►nth channel N. W. by W. # W., 47 miles, or until Spectacle Reef light ' Wrs N. E. 8 m"' s and the east point of Bois Blano island N. W. f N. ||ie sanie distance, when steer due west, 8 miles, to a point three-quarters int three-quarters of a mile north of Cheboygan light, passing close to le south end of Spectacle reef, or W. ^ S., 42 miles, to a point 2 miles ^orth of Bois Blanc light. Catling Distances on Lake Huron, etc., from Fort Gratiot to Old Fort Mackinac. mr Passagre. rrt 120 GKORGIAX BAY. G'^ORGIAN BAY. Light-Houses, Buoys and Harbors. ISLE OF COVES LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white light, interval of revolutions? seconds, 2d order, visible 15 miles. White, ^ ^ circular stone tower, 86 feet high. On Gig point, the north extremity of v Cove island, entrance to Georgian bay. In thick and foggy weather a fog horn, operated by compressed air, will give blasts of 10 seconds' , duration, with intervals of 110 seconds between the blasts. Fog signal stands about 200 yards westward of light. Northeastward 200 yards from the light is a rook 2 feet high, which, as well as the remainder of Gig point, may be approached to within 100 yards. The shore from Gig to Gat point is fairly bold, and the light, kept well open of Gat point, leads to the northwestward of the shoal water extending in a southwes- terly direction 300 yards from Gat point. N. E. point of Flower Pot island, E. by 8. i S., 6 miles. S. W. point of Echo island, S. E. by E., 2f miles. Gat point, W. S. W. \ S., 1\ miles. S. side of Snake island, E. i N., 5i miles. MAIN CHANNEL, or principal entrance into Georgian bay from Lake Huron, lies between Cove and Lucas islands. Bad Neighbor Rock. — Black spar buoy, in 6^ fathoms of water, on the southern portion of the rock. This buoy is situated close to a patch of 11 feet, and bears S. by W. \ W., distant 400 yards from the north and shallowest end of the rock, which has only 3 feet on it. The buoy bears also N. N. W. -J W., distant 2i miles from Cove Island light. A vessel may pass close to the southward of the buoy, but if passing northward it should receive a berth of half a mile. The north end of ' the shoal bears N. N. W., 2j miles, from Cove Island light, and 8. \ E., nearly 2 miles, from the south point of Lucas island. This reef rises abruptly from the bottom on the east and south sides, there being 30 fathoms within 160 yards. To pass southwestward of this rock, keep Eagle point on the north side of Cove island, in rh '^e with northeast extreme of Gig point, S. E. J 8. West Sister and East Sister are two rocky patches, on each of which there is a depth of 21 feet. They bear N. W. 4 and 3^ miles respectivelv from Cove Island light. To pass between them and Bad Neighbor, keep Eagle point of Cove island m line with the north extrem- ity of Gig point, 8. E. ^ S. To pass southward of the Sisters, bring the south end of Echo island to touch Cove Island light-house, S. E. by E. Vessels of heavy draught in bad weather should use the latter range, as Echo island is more easily recognized than Eagle point, and the sea will probably be more regular. Eagfle Point, bluff and steep-to, is situated half-way between North Otter island and Cove Island light-house. In the large bight formed between Eagle point and North Otter island, sailing vessels may find shelter from southerly and westerly winds in 16 fathoms sand and mud, half a mile from shore. A sailing vessel should not anchor nearer Cove island than this distance, so that in the event of a shift of wind to the northward, she may have good room to get under way; more ospct!- m GEORGIAN BAY. 121 'bors. — A revolving white ible 16 miles. Wliite, le north extremity of .nd foggy weather a )lasts of 10 seconds* 8 blasts. Fog signal beastward 200 yards as the remainder of The shore from Gig I open of Gat point, riding in a southwes- joint of Flower Pot ► island, S. E. by E., side of Snake island, ;o Georgian bay from 6^ fathoms of water, I situated close to a ; 400 yards from the y 3 feet on it. The ra Cove Island light. buoy, but if passing The north end of d light, and 8. \ K, ind. This reef rises ides, there being 30 of this rock, keep '^e with northeast cy patches, on each W. 4 and 3^ miles een them and Bad th the north extrera- le Sisters, bring the •house, S. E. by E. the latter range, aH nt, and the sea will half-way between In the large bight sailing vessels may fathoms sand and d not anchor nearer a shift of wind to r way; more espo*!- J? lily as the water does not materially lessen its depth until within 200 rards of the shore. GREAT BARRIER.— Snake island is a narrow ridge of small mlders, elevated 5 feet above the bay, and forming the southeastern }rminu8 of an extensive rocky bank on the Georgian bay side of the Entrance known as Great Barrier. This narrow, dry ridge, called Snake Bland, is nearly 600 yards long, the southeast end being bare and white, rhile the opposite end has upon it two conspicuous bushes. Scattered stones lie northwestward of the latter a distance of 360 yards. Snake Island Bank, under the depth of 18 feet, extends west- ^rard 1 mile from this bushy end of Snake island, and from the bare •xtreme is continued 200 yards further, making the total length of the ■hoal 1^ miles, with an average width of a little over one-third of a mile. Confiance Shoal, with 19 feet of water over it, lies with itsnear- #et part distant 600 yards, W. S. W., from the west extreme of Snake Island bank. This shoal is rather more than one-third of a mile long lorthwest and southeast, and 600 yards broad. The ^all of Cabot head, range with the south extreme of Bear's Rump, E. S. E., leads south of >nfiance Shoal. The southwest end of Fitzwilliam island, in one with te northeast side of Teo island, N. W. \ N., leads across the south end " it, in 23 feet of water. White Shingle, is the name given to a collection of stones for- merly 2 or 3 feet above, but now covered by 1 foot of water. The center Mrs from Cove Island light N. E. by E. f E., distant 4 miles, and under le depth of 4 feet it is 600 yards long, N. N. W. and S. S. E. At this [stance due east from its center, is another shoal spot with 6 feet over it. le whole of White Shingle bank under the depth of 12 feet is nearly If a mile long, east and west, by one-fourth of a mile in width. A jssel may stand towards this bank, and to the whole of the Great Bar- ler from the southwestward, until the southwest extreme of Fitzwilliam ^land is in line with the northeast extreme of Yeo island bearing N. W. N. The Great Barrier may be crossed between Snake Island bank and '^hite Shingle by keeping the east side of Echo island in line with the .'■irest fall (not the extreme point) of North Otter island, S. W. \ S., with ' ^ot less than 21 feet. The west side of Echo island touching northeast tooint of Cove island (Otter island channel), S. S. W. f W., leads Detween the same two banks, with the least depth of f>\ fathoms. Til ton Reef, with depth varying from 11 to 21 feet, is one mile jjong in a northwest and southeast direction, with an average breadth of Ibalf a mile. It is the next shoal northwest of White Shingle bank, being •^parated therefrom by a narrow lane of water, with a depth of 6 "fathoms. To cross the Great Barrier over the western part of Tilton jpeef, with not less than 21 feet, keep the whole of North Otter island a 'Ittle open westward of Echo island S. \ W. The southwest extreme of Titzwiiliam island in line with the northeast end of Yeo island, N. W. \ T., loads southwest; and the south point of Bear's Rump touching Snake land bushes, S. E. \ E., leads northwest of Tilton reef. Anderson Ledge, the north westermost shoal on the Great Bar- tier, its shoalest spot of 13 feet boars E. \ S., nearly 1^ miles from the ilortheast part of Lucas island. The southwest extreme of Yeo island. Id line with the northwest end of Lucas island, W. by N. * N., leads iieast of this shoal s[)ot. In thick weather, or at night. Hie portion 122 OEOROIAN BAT. of the Great Barrier northwestward of Confiance shoal should not be approached to a less depth than 10 fathoms. LiUCas Island, lOO feet high, is situated N. by W. i W., distant a little more than 4f miles from Cove Island light-house. The west and south sides of this island are steep-to. Lucas Island Reef, with depths under 6 feet, extends in an east southeasterly direction from the northeast part of the island, 460 yards. To pass eastward of this reef, keep the east fall of Fitzwilliam island open the breadth of James island, eastward of the latter, N. by E. ^ E. The southwest extreme of Yeo island touching the south end of Lucas island, N. W. by W. ^ W., leads south of Lucas Island reef. To pass northward of it, keep the whole of Yeo island well open northwest of Lucas island. LiUCas GhanneTi. -There is a deep passage between Lucas island and Anderson ledge (the northwest end of the Great Barrier), over three- quarters of a mile wide, with depths varying from 5 to 20 fathoms. To Eass through this channel from tlie southward, keep the south end of long beach ( l^itzwilliam island) in line with the east side of James island, N. by E., until the southeast side of T o island appears on end, bearing W. by S, when a vessel may haul to ti*e northeastward, being well clear of the Great Barrier. TOBERMORY LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, visible 8 miles. White, hexagonal wood tower, light 40 feet above lake level. Red iron lantern. On the southeast extreme of Light-house point. At water's edge, west side of entrance. Tobermory Harbor is situated at the northwest extremity of Saugeen peninsula, and contains perfect shelter from all winds. Both it and the approach thereto are free from danger. The best shelter is in the southwest arm, making fast to the western shore, which is steep-to. The Southwest Arm extends from Light-house point "W. by S. i S., 900 yards, with an average width of 100 yards; 7 to 8 fathoms over mud bottom will be found all over this arm, excepting near the bot- tom, when a muddy flat extends 120 yards to the depth of 18 feet. The harbor being too narrow for vessels to lie at anchor they are compelled to make fast to the shore, for which purpose the Government has had ring-bolts sunk into the rocks. Eastern Arm. — From North point shoal water extends 70 yards southwestward, and thence to Rixton rock in Shoal bight; vessels pro- ceeding to Eastern arm should give it the necessary berth. Rixton's rock is S. E. ^ E., nearly 1^ cables from the westerly extreme of North point. It is 2 feet high. Middle Point is the name given to the land dividing the two arras, and on the eastern side of it is an indentation known as Fisherman cove. From this cove shoal wcter extends halfway across Eastern arm, but may be avoided by keeping the eastern shore on board. Bear's Rump is the name given to an island having somewhat the outline of that animal. Its northeast end is faced by a steep cliflf, 80 feet high, the summit of the island being considerably higher. The southwest side is low, and from it extends for a quarter of a mile a reef known as Bear*s Rump Slioal. — To pass south of this reef keep Cove ai I d C OEO&OIAN BAY. 123 hoal should not be ^ W. i W., distant a se. The ^eat and >, extends in an east e island, 450 yards. Fitzwilliam island ter, K by E. ^ E. outh end of Lucas nd reef. To pass northwest of Lucas ween Lucas island Carrier), over three- io 20 fathoms. To » the south end of ide of James island, rs on end, bearing 3, being well clear . fixed red light, 40 feet above lake le of Light-house west extremity of ill winds. Both it best shelter is in which is steep-to. )use point "W. by s; 7 to 8 fathoms •ting near the bot- k of 18 feet. The ey are compelled ernment has had extends 70 yards )ight; vessels pro- berth. Rixton's xtreme of North iividing the two wn as Fisherman 'OSS Eastern arm, ard. aving somewhat y a steep cliflf, 80 ly higher. The r of a mile a reef reef keep Cove [island light shut in with the north end of Flower-pot island, an espeoial- hy good mark at night. The northwest side of Doctor island, touching fthe east side of Middle island W. S. W., leads southeastward of this Ishoal; and to pass northwestward of it, keep the same part of Doctor luland in one with the southeast side of Flower-pot island, S. W. by W. liW. Flower-pot Island derives its name from two isolated rocks on |it8 east shore. The castle is a detached cliffy portion of this island, at Ithe northeast extremity, elevated 200 feet. A spit extends off the south [point of the island 200 yards, and a bar of rocks lies across the mouth fof Beachy cove, on the southeast side of Flower-pot island; the re- fmainder of the shores of the island is bold. Middle Island, small and round, lies between Flower-pot island and Tobermory harbor, and is steep-to on all sides. Echo Island, 140 feet high. If miles westward of Flower-pot island, is steep-to on all sides. Otter Islands are separated from northeast point of Cove land by Otter island channel, which has deep water, with the exception " a small rock with 10 feet on it; 100 yards westward of North Otter, d nearly 200 yards from its southwest extreme. Doctor Island, lying between the north extreme of Russell island d Tobermory harbor, has deep water close to all but its northeast side, hence a reef extends 100 yfirds. Half-Moon Island, 12 feet high, is 650 yards long, N. W. by W. and S. E. by E., and about 100 yards wide. It lies about 8 miles N. E. by N. from the Bear's Rump, and the same distance south of Lonely island. It is composed of small stones, with a few small trees in two damps. The north and east sides may be approached to 200 yards, but from the east and west points and the south side there extends out to the Bouthwestward for a distance of 2 miles, a large area of shallow water with depth under 10 fathoms, known as Half-moon bank; nearly 1 mile, 8. S. W., from the east point of the island there is a depth of 3^ fath- oms, and a third of a mile nearer, only 10 feet. The west side of Lonely island open east of Half-moon island N. ^ W. leads eastward of the shoal. Cabot Head may be easily identified by its three limestone cli£p8, known as Boulder, Middle, and West bluflfs, the last of which is 810 feet high. The eastern one derives its name from the huge moss-covered stone near the edge. Darl\ng*s Reef.— A rock with 17 feet of water over it, which 1 will be known as Darling's reef, has been discovered by Commander [Boulton, R. N. in the Goorgian bay. It lies approximately N. E. by E., distant 2^ miles from Cape Chin, and 2 miles 'nside the line joining [Cabot Head and Capo Croicer. Surprise Shoal, which lies 8 miles N. N. W. i W. from the east ; point of Cape Croker, is marked with a black spar buoy, placed near a shoal f.pot with t!ier at the entrance to harbor. Thornbury is situated at the mouth of Beaver river, which erap- ^ties into Georgian bay, 13 miles from CoUingwood. A channel 14 feet 'deep has been opened through the shoal or bar off the wharf, and the out .alongside the pier deepened for a distance of 300 feet. NOTTAWASAGA ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A (flashing white light, 2d order, interval between flashes 30 seconds, visi- Ible 15 miles. White, circular, stone tower, 85 feet high. About 2^ miles [northwest of CoUingwood. A red sector is shown in the light on Nottawasaga island, over an laro of 30 degrees, from Fisherman's point southwesterly, covering ithe whole of CoUingwood harbor and the dangerous shoals between [Nottawasaga island and the harbor. Vessels approaching CoUingwood lliarbor from the northwestward should keep the breakwater pier light UdM open northeastward of Nottawasaga Island light, to clear the Mary iWard ledges, and after passing Nottawasaga island should keep north of Ithe red sector, with the white light in sight, until the breakwater light [bears S. W., when it should be steered for on that bearing. Vessels leaving CoUingwood should steer N. E. from the breakwater [pier light until the red sector of Nottawasaga Island light changes to ttohite, when they may haul to the northwestward. Caution. — Masters of heavy draught vessels must remember, that in |addition to the continuous rocky bank connecting Nottawasaga island land the breakwater pier, for the avoidance of which this red sector has [been established, there exist two reefs with 12 and 13 feet water on ithem, the former being known as Lafferty's Home, bearing E. by S. ^ 8., il miles, and the other called George Rock, lying E. by N. f N. one- |4hird of a mile, from Nottawasaga Island light-house. Oolllngwood Breakwater Light. — A fixed red light, visi- Ible 8 miles. Framework tower, or breakwater pier. Lafferty^s Home loal bears N. N. E. f E. 1^ miles, with 12 feet of water on it. Entering [pass about 150 feet east of the breakwater, when steer for the inner light [on crib; pass it on the east side, when steer for the lights at the railway Freight depot with the inner light on crib over the stern. There is good |water at the railway docks. CoUingwood Inner light.— A fixed red light, shown from a last, with white shed at base, on crib. At the turn of dredged channel in harbor. Only required to show in the harbor. CoUingwood is situated on the southern shore of Georgian bay^ and is 90 miles from Toronto by rail. It is the terminus of the Northern and Northwestern railway. The harbor works consist of an outer break- water, 700 feet long, extending in a northeasterly direction from the west )oint of the bay ; and <^ breakwater 1,200 feet long extending in a north- 126 GEORGIAN BAY* westerly direction from the north wharf, in the direction of, and to within 600 feet of the east end of the outer breakwater. The present channel is 270 feet wide and 14^ deep at low water. There are 6 red baoys on the edge of the channel, west side, one just outside the break- water, three between the breakwater and the crib, on which the inner light is placed, and one inside the crib. And there are 6 black buoys on thb east channel bank, one outside the east breakwater and 5 inside. CHRISTIAN ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 16 miles. White, circular tower, 60 feet high. On the southeast end of island, about 2 miles from main-land. Nottawasaga light S. S. W., 18^ miles. A 10-foot spot bears S. by E. | E. If miles. This shoal is 1 mile from mainland, and nearly in range of Point Gockburn. There is good anchorage in the bay north of the light. Keep about mid channel. Depth of water 13 to 15 feet. HOPE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A revolving white light, interval of revolution 1 minute, visible 12 miles. White, square, wood tower, with dwelling attached. On northeast point of island. Gin Rock light E. by S. i S., 14^ miles. The most westerly of the Western islands N. W. ^ W., 13^ miles. The shores of the island are rocky, and should no '> be approached on the north side nearer than three-fourths of a mile. GIN ROCK LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visi ble 10 miles. White, square, wood tower. Entrance to Gloucester Bay. For guiding vessels into Penetanguishene and Midland harbors. Whiskey Island light S. S. W. f W., 3^ miles. WHISKEY ISLAND LIGHT.— A fixed white light, visible 11 miles. White, square wood tower. At entrance to Penetanguishene harbor. To point out the island and shoals adjacent. PENETANGUISHENE LIGHT-STATION. — A fixed white light, visible 8 miles. White, square wood tower. On a block built on the outer end of the shoal running north from the Reformatory point, this block is connected with the shore by a long pier, now much out of repair. It is on the south side, and must be left on the port hand in entering the harbor. LONE ROCK BELL BUOY.— A Bell Buoy painted red has been moored iu 48 feet of water 300 feet from the Lone Rock, in tiie Waubuno Channel, Georgian Bay. The buoy is of the " Brown patent " pattern, and the bell is rung automatically by the action of the waves. In very smooth weather the bell may not sound. The buoy must be kept on the starboard hand in going up the bay to the northward, as there is good water on the west side of the rock, but on the east side it is shoal. This buoy replaces the red barrel buoy. PARRY SOUND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 13 miles. White, octagonal wood tower on pier. On Red Reck. The channel up to the harbor is marked by buoys and day beacons. Cabot head W. i S., 46 miles. Owen Sound lights S. S. W. f W., 61 miles. Clark Rock, with 9 feet of water over it, lies 1^ miles IS. i K. from Red Rook light-house; there is also another rock with 14 feet over it 1 mile from the same on the same bearing. Point au Baril Range Lights.— Front or Outer light. A . 5t:!S OEOBOIAN BAY. VAQa rection of, and to Iter. The present There are 5 red outside the break- a which the inner •e 6 black buoys on ir and 5 inside. .TION.— A fixed ular tower, 60 feet !S from main-land. t bears S. by E. ^ E. rly in range of Point I of the light. Keep A revolving white s. White, square, loint of island. Gin srly of the Western and are rocky, and an three-fourths of I white light, visi- I to Gloucester Bay. i harbors. Whiskey white light, visible to Penetanguishene 'ION. — A fixed wer. On a block 1 the Reformatory g pier, now much ; on the port hand y painted red has one Rock, in the " Brown patent " )n of the waves. In loy must be kept hward, as there is » side it is shoal. sr. L fixed white light, On Red Reck. ay beacons. Cabot 4 W., 61 miles. 1^ iniies IS. ^ E. with 14 feet over r Outer light. A *4" fixijd white light, visible 10 miles, white, aquare wooden tower, 33 feet high. On the southern extremity of Point au Baril, close to the edge of the water, visible from ail points seaward. Rear or Inner Light. — A fixed red light, visible 10 miles, 80 feet above the level of the bay, visible over a small arc on each side of the line of range. Square open frame tower surmounted by an enclosed room and lantern; the frame is brown, the enclosed part white, 44 feet hiwh. On the summit of an island in the inner channel, 4,800 feet E. by S.^f S. from from light. The two lights in range lead through the channel between the shoals which lie off the point. The outer light is to be left on the port hand in entering, the inner en starboard hand. Day Beacons at Point au Baril.— Two white beacons have been erected on the shore 2 miles northwestward of Point au Baril front range light-house, on the east shore of the Georgian bay. Kept in line bearing N. E. ^ E., they will lead a vessel northwest of the shoals between the Black Bills and Point au Baril. This range will be found serviceable in daylight, to a vessel proceeding to Point au Baril harbor from the southeastward. It intersects the Hne of the Point au Baril range light-houses, at 2\ miles distant frc a the front one of the latter. Day Beacons in inside channel, between Point au Baril and Parry Sound. — Fifteen beacons (6 red and 9 white) have been erected between Twin island, Sha-wa-na-ga bay and Point an Baril, to assist in the navigation of part of the inside channel leading to Parry sound, on the east side of Georgian bay. These beacons are not placed as ranges to clear shoals, nor is it intended that a vessel should rigidly steer from one to the other, but like the larger beacons in Parry sound itself, they are for the purpose of affording to a stran- ger an indication of the route among the numerous islands off this shore. In proceeding towards Parry sound, a vessel should keep the red beacons on her starboard hand. A few directions are now given, with a description of these beacons, which may assist a stranger drawing not more than 10^ feet in getting through. The inside channel between Twin Island and Point au Baril may be divided into three parts or reaches, the southern, widest and longest, being a part of Sha-wa-na-ga bay; the northern and narrowest division may bo termed the Point au Baril reach, the remaining portion being considered the middle reach. Of the beacons, four are erected in Sha-wa-na-ga bay, viz. : a red one surmounted by a white square on the southeast point of Twin island, a similar one on the soutlieast extremity of Grave or Bald island, a white beacon and triangle on the summit of Lloyd island (situated near the latter), and another of the same character on Turning island at the junction of Sha-wa-na-ga bay with middle reach. To reach clear of the dangers between Twin and Grave islands, Turning island should be kept its breadth open of Grave island. Between the last mentioned islands, a vessel may steer from one beacon to the other. 120^ GBOROIAN BAY. In the middle reach, there aie three beacons, which includes that on Turning island ; the little rock on which the center one is placed being named Pym rock. The western white beacon is placed on Sedgewick point near the junction of the middle and Point au Baril reaches. Between Pym rock and Sedgewick point beacons a vessel should keep nearer the north shore to avoid a rock with 6 feet of water over it, lying on the south side of the channel. In the Point au Baril reach there are 9 beacons, 4 of which are red, to be kept as before stated, on the starboard hand when proceeding to Parry sound. Tiae two southernmost red beacons are upon Abbott and Passage islands, between the latter of which and Sedgewick point is the narrow channel generally used, although (as will be seen when the chart is pub- lished) the channel between the next island and Abbott island is broader and deeper. If using the narrow channel keep rather nearer Sedgwick point than Passage island, and a vessel will carry 15 feet of water and avoid a shallow rocky spur making out from Passage island. When through these narrows, the first white beacon come to marks the south point of a bight, the coast of which a vessel should follow round, in order to avoid a rock with 8 feet of water over it, abreast of and connected with an island with a pole on it. In the bottom of this bight a pair of small white beacons should be kept in line to lead east of this danger, and between the shoals 155 yards north of it, with 14 feet of water. From this to Point au Baril harbor a vessel has only to keep in the middle of the channel pointed out by the remaining beacons. When past the northern white beacon on Sidney island, the front light-house may be steered for; and if going out into Georgian bay, care must be taken to avoid the rock with 4 feet of water on it, lying in the middle of the passage north of Double island, by keeping close to its north point marked by the fishermen with a pole and red barrel. Kennedy's Bank. — A spar buoy marked with white and black horizontal bands, has been placed in 6i^ fathoms of water on Kennedy's bank, which has 9 feet of water over it. The buoy bears west and is distant 3^ miles from the highest Black Bill island. The water is good close to the northeast side of the buoy, but a vessel passing southwest should give it a berth of half a mile. Morden Rock. — A spar buoy, marked with white and black horizontal bands, has been placed in 6^ fathoms 100 yards southwest- ward of Morden rock, with 8 feet of water on it, situated 3 miles south- ward of the line of the Byng Inlet range lights, on the f^ame coast. The buoy bears S. W. by W. ^ W., and is distant 2i miles from red rock of Byng inlet. Although there is deep water all around this rock it is advisable for a vessel to pass southwestward of it and the buoy. BYNG INIiET LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White, square wood tower, 47 feet high. On Gorcaux ~ '"■tsimaiUK.- OKORylAN BAY. 127 includes that on ! is placed being id on Sedgewick ■u Baril reaches, ssel should keep f water over it, f which are red, m proceeding to 3tt and Passage nt is the narrow the chart is pub- island is broader wick point than ter and avoid a come to marks el should follow er it, abreast of beacons should n the shoals 155 ' to keep in the tons. land, the front >rgian bay, care it, lying in the ng close to its barrel. lite and black on Kennedy's lars west and is le water is good sing southwest lite and black rds southwest- 3 miles south- tne coast, ailes from red advisable for white light. On GenMux t._i' island ; to guide in to Byng Inlet. Point Wingfield S. W. i W., 48 miles. BuPtard Rocks light N. W. f W., 17| miles. Byng Inlet Range Lights. Front Light.-— A fixed red liglit,'34 feet above water, visible 8 miles over a small arc on each side of the range. Square, white, wooden tower, stands close to the channel, on its south side f mile N. E. by E. i E. from the light on Gereaux island. Rear Light. — A fixed white light, 60 feet above water, visible 18 miles over a small arc on each side of the range. E. by N. 1,620 feet from the Front light. Square, white, open frame wooden tower, the lantern and upper story are enclosed, and the side facing the range is slatted for a day mark. The two lights in range, bearing E. by N., lead in to the mouth of Byng inlet through the best water, clear of the Maganatawan ledges on the south and Burton bank on the north side. Roclc in the Approach to French River.— Staff-Com- mander Boulton, R. N., reports that a rock with 9 feet over it at mean water (8 feet at the present time), lies W. i S., half a mile from the southwest dry rock of the Bustards, in the approach to French ri^er. From the rock the main light-house appears midway between the pine tree and the small red light-house. This is doubtless the reported rook referred to in Notice to Marinenti No. 33 of 1888. BUSTARD ROCKS Range Light.— Main or back light, fixed white, visible 11 miles. White, square wood tower. On a rocky islet at entrance to French river A lO-ioot spot bears S. W. by W. ^ W., 1} miles. Front Range Light. — A fixed white light, visible 6 miles. Red, square, open-frame wood tower, 77 yards N. E. ^ E. from the last described light. After rounding the Bustard Rocks these two lights should be kept in range bearing S. W. \ W. until the two range lights in the river are brought into line, bearing N. E. by N. East fall of Cabot head 8. 8. W. k W., 49 miles. South side of the east Papoose Island W. ^ 8., 16^ miles. French River Range Light. — Front light fixed white, visible 6 miles. White, square, open-frame tower. On Lefroy island west side of mouth of river. French River Range Light.— Back light fixed red, visible 6 miles. White, square, open-frame wood tower. Near the creek,* E. side of river N. E. by N. f mile from. Lefroy Island light. LONELY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 20 miles. White, square wood tower, attached to dwelling. On the edge of cliff, 300 yards back from the north shore of the island, light 195 feet above lake level. Towards Cabot head the light is obscured by the southeastern portion of the island, when bearing northward of N. N.W. ^ W. The light is also cut off by the wentern and southern portion of the island. Lonely Island is almost circular in form; greatest diameter 1} miles. It lies in direct line between Cabot head and Cape Smyth, the east extreme of the island bearing N. by W. i W., distant 20 J miles from Cabot head, and S. by E. } E. 15 miles from Cape Smyth. A bank 128 GEORGIAN BAY. extends from the north and northeast sides of the island. There are not more than 18 feet, at 400 yards; the bight in the south shore is shoal to the line of its points. The remainder of the island can be approached to within 800 yards. Da^^son Bock. — A black spar buoy is placed in 6^ fathoms near the north extremity of Dawson rock. A vessel may pass close north- eastward of the buoy, but on all other sides it should receive a berth of not less than l^- miles. Lonely Island light bears W. S. W., 11 miles. This shoal is 1 mile in length and three-quarters of a mile in width. The least water is on the eastern side of the reef, varying from 4 feet on the southern part to 10 feet on the north extremity. Young Squaw islet, situated one-half mile noi'theast from the entrance of Squaw Island har- bor, bears N. N. W. } W., 16^ miles from the north end of the reef, and Lonrly Island light W. by S. ^ S., 11 miles from the south end. Northeast Shing^Ie is the name given to a narrow bank, the shallowest part of which, 800 yards long N. N. E. and S. S. W. is com- posed of boulders, on which there is only 2 to 6 feet of water. This northern portion bears from Lonely Island light N. E. ^ E., distant 4 miles and generally breaks. In addition to this very shallow patch, dan- gerously shoal water extends from it in a N. E. and 8. S. W. direction, half a mile and 1 mile respectively, making the total length of the shoal 1^ miles. The southern extreme, with a depth of 12 feet, bears N. E. by E., distant a little over 3 miles from the light-house. The summit of Fitzwilliam island, in line with the northwest extrem'ty of Lonely island, W. by S., leads 1 mile southward of Northeast Shingle. The southeast visible extreme of Fitzwilliam island touching the same part of Lonely island, bearing W. S. W., leads a quarter of a mile southeast of it, with 6 fathoms. The northwest side of Fitzwilliam island in line with the same side of Club island, W. by S. f S., leads northwestward of this Bhoal. In thick weather a vessel should not approach the southeast and west sides of Northeast Shingle to a less depth then 20 fathoms. On the north end and east sides she may shoal to 10 fathoms. Club Island is two miles long N. N. E. and S. S. W., with a max- imum breadth of one mile, the northwest, north and east sides are fairly steep to, but from South point. Club Island ledge extends in a general S. W. by S. direction, |- of a mile, at which distance there is a depth of 3^ fathoms. To pass eastward of this ledge, keep the point of Club island, which is north of the harbor, well open east of South point, bearing N. N. E. The east extreme of Rabbit island in line with the same side of Erie shingle, N. f W., leads west. The south end of White cliff (Manitoulin island) in line with north- east point of Fitzwilliam island, W. by N. ^ N. leads 1^ miles south of Club Island ledge. From the south point of Club island, the stony shore trends in a N. N. W. direction, nearly If miles to Back cove (a shallow indentation into which a boat may carry 6 feet of water). From this shore of Club island, shoal water extends an average dis- tance of one-third of a mile. From Back oove, the coast trends northeast- ward, and is steep-to. OLUB ISLAND HARBOR, with its entrance on the east side of the island contains excellent, although limited, anchorage in 3^ fathoms. '■« .--.J... GEORGIAN BAY. 129 id. There are not ;h shore is shoal to » be approached to n 5^ fathoms near ' pass close uorth- receive a berth of W., 11 miles. This e in width. The rom 4 feet on the )ung Squaw islet, Jquaw Island har- d of the reef, and uth end. narrow bank, the S. S. W. is com- of water. This • i E., distant 4 allow patch, dan- S. W. direction, igth of the shoal 'eet, bears N. E. The summit of of Lonely island, The southeast ! part of Lonely heast of it, with in line with the estward of this itheast and west thoms. On the tV^., with a max- sides are fairly in a general S. is a depth of 3^ of Club island, 'int, bearing N. me side of Erie V:->l^ The entrance is obstructed by two rocky ledges, known as North ihoal and South spit, between which not less than 15 feet may be rried in. North Shoal, with depth varying from 4 to 9 feet, extends 250 fords from the north shore of the entrance. South Spit, with the same depth, makes off 100 yards from the lortheast part of Fishery point (as the south entrance is called). The restern gravelly part of this point is steep-to, close to tbe dry stones, id not less than 12 feet water will be had at a radius of 230 yards ^from this gravelly point, right around to North shoal. At a greater dis- tance, the water rapidly shoals to the shores. The anchorage under Fishery point is confined to a space of about 6 acres. Day Beacons. — On Fishery point are erected two white beacons, which in line, S. W. by W. k W., lead southeast of North shoal. On the western shore of the harbor stand a couple more, which in line, W. ^ 8., lead between North shoal and South spit, with the least water of 15 feet. In approaching the harbor, therefore, the back one of the Fishery point beacons should be kept south of its fellow, until the West beacons are in line, when proceed in; turn sharp around Fishery point and anchor in the middle of the cove, with the entrance points in line. Erie Shingle is the name of a narrow bank of small stones ele- vated 7 feet above water, 300 yards in length, N. W. and S. E. The northeast side is steep-to, but shoal water extends in every other direc- tion. Westward, it makes out nearly half a mile, where there is not more than 12 feet. Rather more than that distance southward there is but 15 feet, with 5 feet 400 yards northeast of it. A detached patch, with 16 feet on it, lies S. W. by S., a little more than 1^ miles from Erie shingle. To pass westward of Erie bank, keep Church hill (James bay) open westward of Rabbit island half the breadth of the latter, N. ^ W. The south end of Owen island (Manitoulin), touchjiag the northwest side of Wall island, W. by S. f S., leads a ^ of a mile northwest of it. Lonely island light-house open north of Club island, E. ^ S., leads north. OWEN CHANNEL (North • Passage) is the name given to thfi passage into Georgian bay from Lake Huron, between Manitoulin island and Fitzwilliam island, being in the narrowest part a little over a mile wide from shore to shore. A description of the dangers will now be given. liittle Rock, with 13 feet water on it, as tbe name indicates, is a small patch lying N. by E. f E., distant 1^ miles from the southwest ex- treme of Perseverance island. A. rock, with 19 feet water, lies N. by E., nearly If miles, and another, with 21 feet, N. N. E. f E., a little more than that distance from the same island. These are the shallowest outlying spots between Perseverance island and Phoebe point. Shoal water extends from the latter to the depth of 18 feet, W. by S. f S., one-third of a mile. Channel Rock, 6 feet above the water, and sufficiently separated from the shore of Fitzwilliam island, as to render it conspicuous, is situ- ated one-third of a mile northeastward from the northwest part of 180 GEOROIAM BAY PhoBbe point. Between the latter and Ohauuel rook, shoal water extends from the shore, 300 yards. Stewart Rock, with 4 feet on it, bears N. W. ^ W., 600 yards from Channel rook. From Stewart rook the bank continues in a south- westerly direction, half a mile, with a depth of from 12 to 18 feet. Ship Bank is the name. given to an extensive piece of shoal ground, separated from Stewart rock by a narrow lane of 4 fathoms. The least water on Ship bank is 10 feet. The length of the shoal, under the depth of 1 8 feet, is rather more than half a mile east and west, by a quarter of a mile in breadth. A Patch of 4 fathoms lies N. N. W., 360 yards from the northwest angle of ship bank. ' Owen Island is 200 yards long north and south, and separated from the Manitoulin shore by a similar distance. It is the only small island on this shore of Owen channel, and therefore easily recognizable. Owen Island Bank, with depths varying from 12 to 18 feet, extends on all sides from Owen Island; the depth of 13 feet being found at half a mile due East of the south extremity, and the same depth S. by W., 400 yards. This bank renders the shore of Manitoulin island shoal for three-quarters of a mile from Owen island towards Georgian bay, and the same distance in the direction of Lake Huron. At half a mile N. E. by E. ^ E. from the south end of Owen island, is the southern edge of a rocky spit, having 7 feet of water on it, extend- ing 500 yards from the shore abreast. The coast of Manitoulin island If miles westward of Owen island takes a more northerly turn, forming Hung^erford Point. — This most southerly extreme of Manitoulin island may be known by its small white stony beaches. Scattered stones and shallow water extend from this point, and from the shore westward of it, a distance of a quarter of a mile, leaving a fairly steep shore bet- ween it and Owen island bank, for one-third of a mile. Beach Point, of Fitzwilliam island, derives its name from the fact of its being the northeasterly termination of a long stony beach, with four small sharp points of rock jutting out on it. This point is im- portant, as being the boundary between the shallow and deep waters on this side of Owen channel. . Beach Point Flat is the name given to an extensive rocky bank, with 12 to 15 feet over it, fronting the beach jusi alluded to. It com- mences at Beach point, and its north edge runs W ^ N., for half a mile. Thence, under the name of the Ridse, it joins Owen Island bank with not less than 17 leet water. The northeast side of the ridge rises abruptly from a depth of 10 fathoms. The edge of Beach point flat will be found stretching 400 yards off the southwest end of the beach whence it derives its name. Hence, it con- tinues almost straight to Channel rock, before described. DIRECTIONS FOR TAKING OWEN CHANNEL.- in approaching this channel froni the westward or northwestward, in Lake Huron, bring the north fall of Fitzwilliam island (near Rattlesnak<' harbor) in line with the eastern part of Beach point oearing E. i N. This range leads through the North Passage (as the deep water be tween Ship bank and Hungerford point is called) as far as Beach point; I* GEORGIAN BAT. 131 shoal water extendi i W., 600 yards ntinues in a south- 12 to 18 feet, ve piece of shoal ine of 4 fathoms, of the Bhoal, under ast and west, by a Tom the northwest ith, and separated is the only small isily recognizable. »m 12 to 18 feet, 1 feet being found ! same depth S. by )ulin island shoal ds Georgian bay, d of Owen island, ater on it, extend- Owen island takes imeofManitoulin Scattered stones shore westward steep shore bet- name from the ng stony beach, rhis point is im- 1 deep waters on sive rocky bank, d to. It com- for half a mile, d bank with not e rises abruptly '0 yards off the Hence, it' con- tlANNEL.- Lh westward, in ear Rattle8nak(> 3aring E. i :N. leep water be- 18 Beach point; with 1 fathoms in North passage, 6 fathoms southward of Owen Island bank, and across the ridge with not less than 17 feet. If wishing to proceed along the east cqast of Manitoulin island, as soon as the south- west end of Perseverance Island is in line with Phoebe point, bearing S. W. by S., the Ridge maybe crossed on this range, or anvwhere between this range and the original one, with not less than 17 feui of water. SOUTH PASSAGE of Owen channel divides Stewart rock from the shallow shore of Fitzwllliam island; its least breadth being 350 yards and depth 4 fathoms. To take this passage from Lake Huron, bring the right or south ex- eme of Wall island trees in line with the northwest side of Fitzwilliam [Island N. E. by E. f E. Keep this range, crossing the bank extending uthwestward from Stewart rock, with not less than 21 feet water, until he southwest end of Perseverance island is in line with Phoebe point, when keep the latter marks on to cross the ridge as before directed. In approaching the entrance to Owen channel from the southwest- ward the southwest extreme of Perseverance island should not be brought to bear southward of S. S. E. until (if wishing to take the South Passage) the marks for that channel come on. Or (if preferring the North Pas- sage) until the west side of Owen island is open the least thing south- eastward of the Manitoulin shore, bearing N. E. by E. This range should be kept, to lead westward of Ship bank, until the regular North Passage leading mark comes on. In thick weather, the west side of Fitzwilliam island should cot be approached to a less depth than 20 fathoms. Northeast Point Reef. — From Northeast point (as the extrem- ity of Fitzwilliam island is called), a shoal, with from 6 to 15 feet water over it, makes off in the same direction 600 yards. Wall Island lies, with its low, narrow south extremity, bearing N. N. E. ^ E., and is distant nearly 1 mile from Northeast point. The Wall. — From the south end of Wall island, a reef, named the Wall (on account of the steepness of its eastern side), extends S. ^ E., 1 mile. It is a very dangerous reef, having only 7 feet water near its south- ern end. A detached spot, of 3^ fathoms, lies S. E. by E. ^ E., 600 yards from Northeast point. The east fall of Cape Smith shore in line with the east extreme of Rabbit island, N. by E. f E., leads ^ mile eastward of the Wall. On the west side of Wall island are two small islets, separated from the main island by a distance of 200 yards. West Flat. — From these two islands, sunken rocks and shoal water extend nearly ^ of a mile, to pass northward of which, keep the whole of Club island open north of Wall island, E. by S. \ S. Northeast point of Fitzwilliam island, touching any part of Flower- pot island, leads west of this shoal. The north side of Wall island is 8tt'L»p-to, and the east side fairly so. RATTLESNAKE HARBOR.— The north entrance point of this excellent harbor is situated three-quarters of a mile southwestward from northeast point of Fitzwilliam island. It contains shelter from all winds in from 3 to 5 fathoms over mud. Little island is a good mark in approaching the harbor. A narrow ridge of dry stones extends from the island, E. N. E., 200 yards; from the end of these stones, shoal water continues in a northeasterly direction, 200 yards further. 132 GEORGIAN BAY. From the north entrance point of Rattlesnake harbor a spit extends in a westerly direction, 200 yards, leaving a passage between it and the shoal water from Little island, before alluded to, 400 yards in width, through the middle of which 4 fathoms may be carried in the harbor. Little Island* and the shore of Fitzwilliam island for ^ a mile westward of it, should not be approached nearer than 300 yards; thence to Beach point (previously described) the shore is steep-to. FITZWILLIAM CHANNEL is the name given to the passage between Fitzwilliam and Yeo islands, the dangers in which will now be described. YEO ISLAND is l^ miles long, by f of a mile in breadth. It has two summits, each about 100 feet high; the northeasternmost, known as Black summit, falling steeply to the bay. The northeast, east and south- east sides of Yeo island are fairly steep-to, but from the north gravelly point, 200 yards northwest of Black summit, a rocky spit with less than 6 feet water over it, makes out in a N. by E. ^ E. direction, 400 yards, under the name of Yeo Island Spit. — To pass northward of this spit, keep Cove Island light-house in sight (and at night, the light), S. by E. Indian Harbor Point is the name given to the southern extreme of Fitzwilliam or, as it is usually called, Horse island. It forms also the eastern entrance point to Indian harbor; a boat cove, much resorted to by the Manitoulin Indians, during the trawling season for trout, in t? 3 fall of the year. The point is at present well marked by a large stone cairn. Indian Harbor Reef is a dangerous rocky ledge, extending in a southwesterly direction, over three-quarters of a mile from the above- mentioned point, with depths on it varying from 4 to 18 feet. To pass southeastward of this reef, with 22 feet least water, keep the south extreme of Club island a little open southeast of Fitzwilliam island, N. E. by E. McLelan Rock, with 12 feet of water over it, is the worst obs- truction in Fitzwilliam channel. It is 300 yards long in an E. N. E. and W. S. W. direction, by 200 yards broad. The centre of the shoal bears S. S. W. i W., distant a little more than a mile from Indian harbor point. The passage, between this rock and Indian harbor reef is nearly one-third of a mile wide and 7 to 9 fathoms deep. Smith Shoal is a small rocky patch with three fathoms over it, lying south nearly 1^ miles from Indian Harbor point. A bank with 6 to fathoms joins this and McLelan rock, from which it is separated by a dibtance of half a mile. This passage however cannot be safely used by strangers of large draught, on account of there being no leading mark. The Best Passage throug^h Fitzwilliam Channel is between Smith shoal and Yeo island, by keeping the southeast fall of Lonely island in line with the northwest side of James island, N. E. by B. f E. This mark also leads northwest of Manitoba ledge, but requires olear weather to disoern Lonely island. When the north end of Flower-pot island appears northward of Yeo ^ - mil %iif GEORGIAN BAY. 138 •bor a spit extends between it and the )0 yards in width, 2d in the harbor. island for ^ a mile 300 yards; thence jp-to. iven to the passage which will now be in breadth. It has ernmost, known as ast, east and south- the north gravelly jpit with less than rection, 400 yards, 8 spit, keep Cove byE. 3 southern extreme irbor; a boat cove, le trawling season le cairn. dge, extending in e from the above- 8 feet. 8t water, keep the itzwilliam island, is the worst obs- 1 an E. N. E. and f the shoal bears ian harbor point. nearly one-third 'athoms over it, ock, from which angers of large 1 Channel is [)Utheast fall of island, N. E. by It requires olear thward of Yeo v.' - % i.^r land, steer N. E. by E., midway between the south point of Club island id the northwest extremity of Lonely island. This course shall lead between James Island reef and McCarthy point ledge. If wishing to proceed in the direction of Cape Smith, when past imes island, steer N. N. E., keeping a little to the eastward of a line fining the east sides of James and Rabbit islands. McCarthy Ledge. — The eastern edge of this danger runs from iUcCarthy point (which is on the east side and about the middle of Fitz- %illiam island) in a general S. W. by S. direction, 2 miles, where it ter- minates in a small rocky isolated patch, with 13 feet water over it. i" To pass east of this danger, keiep the east fall of Fitzwilliam island '^ear Rattlesnake harbor) in line with Pavement point N. N. E. ' , James Island, 2| miles south of McCarthy point, is 9 feet high, "^ iitid nearly 400 yards long north and south, by half that distance in ' l^adth. Its north side is fairly steep-to, but a rock^ ledge extends .^fDnthwestward from it any depth under 15 feet, for a distance of rather ,v ftlore than 1 mile. James Island Reef, as this shoal is called, has a f'.hannel between It and Yeo island spit, f mile in width, and 4 to 8 fathoms in depth; to tass through which, keep the west extreme of Lucas island locked with le east point of Yeo island S. by W. '.' BABBIT ISLAND, situated due south, ^\ miles from the • ji^trance to James bay, may be approached on its northwest, north and t' Eust sides, to 100 yards; but from the southwest low shore an extensive ank spreads out, known as Babbit Island Bank. — W. by S. f S., a little more than a third ^^f a mile from the west point of the island, there is on^y 7 to 9 feet of ^ater, while from the southeast extreme it runs off equally shoal, S. by |f\r., nearly a quarter of a mile. A patch, with 16 feet over it, is situated with its south end bear- ig S. W. ^ S., nearly a mile from the west extremity of Rabbit island. Another spot, with 3^ fathoms on it, lies 8. W. by W. f W., distant 1^ miles from the same. South point of Club island open south of Erie •hingle, S. E. f S., crosses Rabbit island bank, southwest of these shoals, with 4 fathoms. Northeast point of Fitzwilliam island in line with the ery west extreme of Wall island, S. by W., leads westward of these oals, with 4^ fathoms. Horsburgh point well open east of Rabbit and, bearing north, leads eastward of this bank. The Coast of Manitoulin Island trends from Little bluff, N. . \ N., 5^ miles, to Red Cliff bight (so called from a small, low earth liff of that color) ; and for the first 3 miles is steep-to. Thence, across ' e bight above mentioned, to the southwest part of Tamarack point, the ihore is foul. '.^^t^.ir ^ Tamarack Cove runs in north of the latter point one-third of a Jnile, but on account of there being only 6 to 7 feet water, and that over rocky bottom, it is only fit for boats. ' From the southwest part of Tamarack point, the coast is again steep- |o, for a couple of miles, as far as the south point of Shallow cove, from 'Ate north pomt of which a shoal extends in a 8. by W. direction, nearly >De-third of a mile. »4 :«?? 184 GEORGIA.N BAT. From the north point of Shallow cove the coast continues foul totbel extent of 300 yards, as far as the last of these indentations, knowD ai| North cove. Hence, to within one mile of the turn in, to James b the straight shore may be approached to 200 yards. HORSBURGH POINT (Manitoulin island) is the name givejl to the southern point of James bay, and has good water on the northeaitl side, but from the east shore, for 1^ miles southward of the turn in, tol James bay, shoal water extends a distance of 300 yards. James Bay is a wide, open indentation northward of Horsbur;^ point, with a sandy beach nearly three-quarters of a mile broad. On the. northern side of the bay is snugly situated one of the Ojibbewa Indian reserve villages, called Wekwemikongsing. The church stands upon the rising ground, nearly half a mile back from the village, and is conspicU' ous from the bay. Church Hill. — Northwestward, nearly three-quarters of a mile from the church, is a hill 300 feet high, rendered conspicuous by its steep fall to the northeastward, and long slope in the opposite direction. James bay is shallow, not more than 12 feet being found, 400 yards from the north and west shore. Clay-f^liff is the name given to a remarkable bank of white claj and gravel, 260 feet in height, which with the lower cliffs of the same character on either side of it, presents a conspicuous object to the mar- iner. From these cliffs, shoal water extends for a distance of 400 yards, and so continues 3^ miles, until one third of a mile f'^om an isolated patch of dry stones, known as the Nest. Hence to thenc -.heast extreme of Cape Smith, the shores may be approached to 200 yards. Cape Smith to Clapperton Island, including Gull Islanck and Collins Inlet. Cape Smith forms the uouth entrance point to Smith bay, at the head of which is situated the Indian village Wekweraikong. The cape is rendered conspicuous by the sudden orraination Oi tlio clay bank, The bank culminates here in a height of 370 feet, including the trees. The northeast extreme of the cape bears N. by W. ^ W., and is 17^ miles from the east point of Lonely island, and S. S. W. \ W., 12 miles, from Killarney east light-house. This part of the cape may be passed at a distance of 200 yaras in a depth of 5 fathoms. Campbell Rock, with 12 feet of water over it, lies N. E. \ E., 2^ miles from the northeast point of Cape Smith, and W. \ S., 3^ miles, from the west rook of Squaw island. For a large draught vessel in a southeast sea, this is \ formidable danger. The eastern part of C;vpe Smith bearing south, will lead 1^ miles west of Campbell rock. If pro- ceeding to Killarney, an excellent mark is afforded by keeping Ilor""- burgh point just open of Clay cliff, S. W. by S., which will lead a ves ^1 half a lie eastward of Campbell rook. A vessel will be northward of this danger when Papoose island passes northward of Young Squaw island, E. ^ N. When the same island is touching north point of Squaw island, E. by N., a vessel will be south of the danger. GEOKOIAN BAY. 135 ast continues foul to tbej indentations, known al torn in, to James bar IS. "I and) is the name eiveti water on the northea« ward of the turn in u\ yards. ' ■ rthward of Horsburel a mile broad. On it t theOjibbewalndiac church stands upon the lUage, and is conspica. ree-quarters of a mile snspicuous by its steei) posite direction. >eing found, 400 yards t)Ie bank of white clav wer cliffs of the same us object to the mar- From the northwest proug of Cape Smith the shore trends in a south- it direction, f mile, to East Red cliff, and If miles to West Red cliff. Red Cliff Flat. — Between the northeast and northwest prongs of cape, the coast is shoal about 300 yards out, and westward of this it eases, wheu N. W. ^ N., nearly t of a mile from East Red cliff, with 12 feet water over it. Gold-Hunter's Bank, with 6 feet of water on it, lies N. W. by J W., nearly 1^ miles from the northeast extremity of Cape Smith, a circular patch of small boulders, 200 yards in diameter. Cape lith points in range leads south of it, E. by 8. ^ S. The top of Badge- island, in line with the east side of Big Burnt island, N. by E. ^ E., 8 west of Gold-buDter bank. Wekw^emikongf is situated on the rising ground in the north- 1|f8t corner of Smith bay. William or Whiskey Island is on the northern side of Smith It is 800 yards long northeast and southwest, and 200 yards wide. PelkiP Bock, with 8 feet on it, is in the track of vessels entering bay froiii the north. It is ^ mile long northeast and southwest, and yards wide; its southern end bears E. ^ S., li miles, from the south int of William island. The summit of Badgely island well open east Big Burnt island, N. by E. ^ E., leads east of it. Big^ Burnt Island is the largest and easternmost of the group ,^/if islands, is 1^ miles long, and ^ mile wide, its northeast point is N. |^ distance of 400 yards. I '"^W"'' H miles from the east point of Cape Smith, aile f^ora an isolated" V j,^ Bernard Rock. — Red and black horizontally striped 8par buoy then( 'Iheast extreme yards. 'in£- Gull Islands to Smith bay, at the ^raikong. The cape >i the clay bank, '"eluding the trees, W.,and is 17^ miles W., 12 miles, from may be passed at a • it, lies N. E. 4- E., 3 W. i S., 3i mibl draught vessel in a stern part of C.vpe )bell rock. If pro- by keeping Hor'-- 1> will lead a ves •jl 11 be northward of of Young Squaw th point of Squaw ,y ,'|| placed on it lying between George and Big Burnt islands. The rock, ith 10 feet of water over it, bears S. W. \ S , distant 6 miles from Kil- rney East light The summit of Badgely island, over the end of Ko- inongwi, leads east, and over the west end of the island, leads west, and illarney East light, shut in with George island, leads north of it. The th fall of Sheguiandah hill in line with Bold point, Manitoulin island, \ N., leads 200 yards south of Bernard rock. Northwest Burnt Island is situated half a mile northwest- ward from Big Burnt island. It is next in size to the latter, being a little more than f mile long. Burnt Island Bank is a dani^erous shoal extending northward d eastward from Northwest Burnt island; the total length of the shoal ing 1^ miles in an east and west direction. The western part is the allowest, with only 1 foot of water on it and generally breaks, but the Item part, with 6 feel on it, is the most dangerous, being the turning int into the North channel of Lake Huron. To pass eastward of it, eep the Lion's Head (a sharp and conspicuous hill between Badgely land and Frazer bay) in line with the east end of High beach (on the uth shore of Badgely island), bearing N. i^ W. And to pass north- ard of it, bring Ead's bush (Little Current) to the northward of the mmit of Hey wood island, and in line with the south shore of Partridge land, W. by N. Skull Pointy on Manitoulin island bears W. f N., 1^ miles from e north point of Northwest Burnt island. BKUIiL POINT REEF extends in a direction a little east- rd of north, ^ mile; least water on it three feet; between this reef and 186 GEORGIAN BAY. Burnt Island bank there is deep water for ^ a mile. Indian Dock pok] just in sight W. S. W. leaks northwestward of this shoal. The middlj of KokanoDgwi island in line with the south point of Badgely island by N. ^ N. also leads clear on the same side. Bold Pointy with good water close-to, is f mile northwestward of| Skull point. It is the most northerly point of this peninsula. SQUAW IS1:jAND.— Its south point bears E. i S. 5| miles froml Cape Smith, the island itself is low, but its thick and fairly high tirnbetj makes it visible a considerable distance. It is an important fishing sta tion. The island is 1^ miles long, greatest breadth 1,200 yards. Toung^ Squaw islet is N. E. by E. ^ mile from the north point ot Squaw island, and is connected to it by a rocky bar, with 6 feet of water on it. Annie Rock, with three feet, lies N. W., ^ mile from Youno Squaw, and shoal water extends the same distance in the opposite direc tion. West Rock is a small bank of limestone gravel 5 feet hign, W. S W. one mile from north point of Squaw island, it is separated from tlit latter by a narrow channel with 4 to 5 fathoms, but should not be at tempted by strangers. North Spit extends in a N. f W. direction ^ mile from West Rock, at which distance there is 13 feet West Rock should not be ap proached from the westward nearer than 600 yards, while S. by W. \ W., ^ mile from West Rock, is the southern termination of the bank, with the depth of 3 fathoms, which shoals rapidly as West Rock is ap- proached. Ragged Point is situated about the middle of the west side of Squaw island, which is fringed with boulders and shoal water for a dis- tance of i mile, while off this point, a bank extends W. S. W. half a mile, with less than 3 fathoms. Soutll Point is the southerly terminat' '^f the island; shallow water extends 600 yards from it. The Bar is the name given to the shallow, rocky bank, just east of ibe enti'ance of the harbor, with depth from 6 to 12 feet. To clear the northeast side of it, Lion's Head should be kept open of Young Squaw, N. W. ^ N. To lead southeast of it, keep Clay cliff (Cape Smith shore open southeast of Squaw island, S. \V. by W. Squaw Island Harbor is on the north east side of the island, and contains shelter from south winds, as indeed from all winds, ileptli from 12 to 15 feet over mud. No vessel drawing over 8 feef, should at tempt to enter it; the larger vessels should anchor with the southeast point of entrance W. N. W., about ^ mile. Directions for Entering Squaw Island Harbor.— If from the southward, bring the Lion's Head in line with north point of Squaw island, N. W. ^ N., proceed to the southeast entrance point on this mark; round the point closely, and anchor in the middle of the har bor or run to the dock. If from the northwestward, give the ground about Annie rock a good berth; after passing Young Squaw, keep Lion'n Head open noriheast of it, until Clay cliff is seen open of south point ot Squaw island; fc^teer on this mark until the low southeast entrance point of the harbor bears N. W. by W. f W., when the latter point may be steered for. 4u .Vi\Aif. . &i£OBOIAN BAY. 137 e. Indian Bock poIbJ 8 shoaL The middlJ ot Ifadgely island A mile northwestward ofl peninsula. f E.|S. Similes froj ind fairly high timber important fishing , 1,200 yards. om the north point of I r, with 6 feet of water j * mile from Younjl n the opposite direc vel 5 feet hign, W. 3 8 separated from the It should not be at ; I i mile from West 'ck should not be ap . , while S. by W A* nation of the bank 9 West Rock is a of the west side of \ >al water for a dis b W. S. W. half a the island; shall ow ; bank, just east of eet. To clear the of Young Squaw, i Oape Smith shore) | i side of the island, 1 all winds, :^epUi r 8 feet should at- vith the southeast ,d Harbor.— If th north point of entrance point on aiddle of tJie har- give the ground qfuaw, keep LionV of south point of 't entrance point er point may be Alec Clark Rock, with 3 fathoms of water on it, is a narrow mk^ mile long, N. N. W. andS. S. E., and lies with the north extremity fearing N. E. ^ E., two-thirds of a mile from Young Squaw, and in this )8ition will be found only 13 feet. There is from 4 to 6 fathoms be- reen this rock and Young Squaw. Matheson Bock, with 3^ fathoms, lies E. i S., nearly 2 miles rem Young Squaw. Azov Ledges are very dangerous rocks, 8. W. by W. J W., nearly miles and 1^ miles respectively from South point of Squaw island, lese shoals are separated from Squaw island f mile, with 6 to 7 fath- 18, but its passage should not be attempted by strangers. The N. W. [de of Green island, touching the southeast extreme of Squaw island, I. E. ^ E., leads 200 yards S. E. of Azov ledges. The north extreme of ^ape Smith, in line with the southwest end of Wekwemikong clay bank, V. by N. i N., leads f of a mile, south of the Azov ledges. In thick reather do not shoal to less than 10 fathoms around Squaw island and fl^ts shoals. Papoose Island, lO feet high, bears W. | N., distant 3| miles t^rom Gull island. It is one-third mile long east and west, quite narrow, nd divided into two parts by a boat channel. A few huts are erected D the western and larger portion. The east, north and northwest sides f Papoose island may be approached to 200 yards, but from the south iide a dangerous rocky ledge extends ^ mile. To pass southwestward of '^! this reef, keep Broad hill in line with Killarney.East light-house, y. W. "by N. Gull Island lies E. by S. f S., 16 miles from the eastern entr. u:ik> |to the North channel of Lake Huron, and S. S. E. ^ E., 4^ miles, from ;the east side of Green island. It is 10 feet high, 350 yards long north- east and southwest, and 100 yards wide, the southern portion having on it a few stunted trees and bushes. Shoal water extends 200 yards from the southeast side, and 250 yards from the southwest side; the rest of the shores are bold. Green Island, so called on account of its trees. It is composed of limestone from 10 to 15 feet high, and over ^ mile in diameter. It bears S. E, by E. ^ E., and is distant 8f miles from Killarney East light- house, and may be said to mark the northern limit of the deep water in this locality. It is 3^ miles from the coast of Phillip Edward island, and 6^ miles from the east entrance to Collins inlet. Shoal water extends from the southwest and west sides of the island a distance of 300 to 400 yards; the remainder of the island may be approached to 200 yards. Steele Rock, with ll feet water on it, is a small spot W. ^ N., f mile from the west point of Green island, and between is a good passage of 10 or 11 fathoms. Single Rock is a solitary stone 4 feet high, E f S., f mile from Scarecrow island, and it may be approached on all sides to 60 yards. Scarecrow Island, fairly wooded, 6 feet high, lies due west nearly 2 miles from Green island, and S. E. ^ E., 7^ miles from Killar- ney East light-house. It is 200 yards in its greatest length, composed of limestone gravel. Its north side may be approached to 160 yards, but on its other sides shoal water stretches oflf under the name of Scarecrow Island Bank.— This rocky bank extends from the 138 GSOBOIAN BAT. island 400 yards in a S. E. direction, and to the S. W. half 9, mile. To pass westward of it, keep Bed rock in line with Eillarney peak N. N. W. i W., and to pass northeastward of the bank keep the gap westward of Leading-mark hill in line with Red rock N. W. ^ N. Smooth Rock, 18 feet high, N. by £. ^ mile from the north ura- velly point of Green island, the water is deep close-to on all sides. The passage is good between Green island and Smooth rock, but strangers should not attempt to pass through any of the channels between the islands north of Smooth rock. Southwest Hawk Island is the name given to sn island 38 feet high, situated N. N. W. f W., a little over three quarteis of a mile from the northwest extremity of Green island. It is the most southerly and westerly of the group of islands north of Green island. It has a few trees on its summit, and is steep-to on its west and southwest aides. Lie Haye Rock, small and just above the surface, lies N. W. ^ N. If miles from the west point of Green island. The water is bold on its south and west sides. The Triangle is three sunken rocks, with 4, 1 and 8 feet water r'^er them. The southwestern rock of the three, with 7 feet water on it, lies with the east end of Papoose island open westward of Scarecrow, the breadth of the latter, and bears from the west point of Green island N. W. by W. 3i miles. West Fox Island is the most, westerly of a group of islands 1| miles northwestward of Hawk islands. It is from 70 to 80 feet in height, fairly wooded and nearly a quarter of a mile long north and south; dry rocks lie 400 yards off its south and southwest sides. The west point of West Fox island bears N. W. by N., and is distant 3^ miles from the west point of Green island. Nicholson Rock, with 5 feet water upon it, lies half a mile southwestward from this island. The Brothers are two small rocks, 5 feet in height, f mile west- northwestward from West Fox island. They bear E. by 8. 2 miles from Bed rock. Harty Patches are the names of two small rocks, with 6 and 13 feet on them, lying half a mile westward of the Brothers. The northeast and shallower one bears E. by S. If miles from Red rock. Red Rock, a bare islet of that color E. by S. I S., 3^ miles from Killarney east light-house, and N. W. f N. 4:^ miles from Scarecrow island ; it is 1 1 feet high, and by its isolation is conspicuous. It is a good guide to the approaches of the western entrance to Collins inlet. A Rock with 10 feet over it, lies 160 yards northwestward of Red rock, and a spot with 13 feet on it, lies N. by W. ^ W., 260 yards from the same; Red rock is otherwise bold-to. Alexander Rock, with 9 feet on it, lies S. E., 1^ miles, from Red rock. Halkett Rock, with 6 feet over it, lies E. by N. f N., ^ mile from Red rock. To pass southward of all these dangers, a vessel should not pro- ceed farther eastward than to bring Red rock in line with the gap west- ward of Leading-mark hill, N. W. ^ N. This mark leads but 200 yards southwestward of Alexander rock. ^W. half ft mile. To ullarney peak N. N ep the gap westward from the north ma- te on all sides. The rock, but stran^^ers lannels between the ven to in island 38 equartenof a mile the most southerly ''and. It has a iei )uthivest sides, ace, lies N. W. ^ N (vater is bold on its and 8 feet water 7 feet water on it, I of Scarecrow, the of Green island N. roup of islands ijj 80 feet in height, thand south; dry The west point of H miles from the , lies half a mile ight, f mile west- ^y 8. 2 miles from ka, with 6 and 13 8. The northeast S., 3| miles from from Scarecrow ous. It is a good ns inlet. «^estward of Red 260 yards from • H miles, from N. I N., I mile I should not pro- th the gap west- Is but 200 yards OEOSGIAM BAT. 189 COLLINS INLGT is the name given to the water which separ- lites Philip Edward island from the main shore; it can be entered on ftither side of the inland, but the eastern entrance is an indifferent one, id has fallen into disuse. A considerable lumber business is carried on »y the Midland and North Shore Lumber Co. Vessels drawing less than 10 feet can proceed to the mill about 1 1 miles from the western entrance, rhich is 4^ miles east-northeabtward from the east e; "^ ance to Eillarney, rbere it is recommended that strangers should procu ■; a pilot. 6£ORG]B ISLAND, which may be said to ot the north entrance loint of the North channel of Lake Huron, is of a triangular shape, the length of each of the sides being about if miles, the northeast side form- ing the south shore of Killarney harbor. The southeast coast from liortheast point is bold-to. Petley Rock, with l foot of water on it, lies 150 yards from the loutb extreme of George island, and shoal water continues from it 400 yards in a W. S. W. direction. The shore here should be given a berth . of f of a mile. George Rock, the tr of which is just covered, lies N. by W. J , W., a little over f mile from ^at j cove ledge, and i of a mile from the nearest part of George islard. Sandy Cove Ledge, 2 feet high, lies 260 yards from the mouth of the cove, S. W. point of George island; from it the water falls off deep to the westward and so .thward; there is no passage between it and the shore. The west sir' "> of George island to Fish point, its N. W. ex- [' tremity, is rugged and i iged with a rocky bank extending for an aver- age distance, ^ mile from shore. Gull Roost, 11 feet high, is the highest of the granite rocks which skirt the shore. Fish Point is the northwestern extremity of George island; it is composed of two low, bare islets, 5 feet high. Ann Long Bank.— j-A depth of 1 feet will be found 600 yards in a westerly direction from Fish point; to lead west of it, keep the west lighthouse in line with the highest part of Leadingmark hill, N. E. ^ N. KILLARNEY EAST LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White, square wood tower, light 42 feet above lake level. The old reflectors have been replaced by a lens apparatus. The light shows with equal intensity in all directions, and is visible in the bay to the eastward of the station where the old light did not show. It is situated on Red Rock point (close to which there is deep water), on the north side of the eastern entrance to the harbor. One mile east of Killarney. Entrance Rocks, 6 feet high, lie 150 yards northward of the north- east point; they are 100 yards in extent northwest and southeast; not more than 8 feet can be carried between them and George island, but they are steep-to on the north side. Jackman Rock, a small lump with 8 feet least water over it» lies E. by S. 200 yards from Entrance rock. Fish point closed with the docks on the north shore W. by N. ^ N., leads north of this obstruction. Killarney Harbor is a narrow strait dividing George island from the main shore, and affords excellent shelter from all winds, least depth in the channel being 21 feet, the north shore of the harbor is in 140 OEOBOIAN BAT. I dented by throe oovcs, the eastermost of which rnns in Immediately west- ward of the east light-house. Range Lights.— To be built. Directions for Entering Killarney Harbor from the Soutlieastward. — Bring the east light-house under the highest part of Leading-mark hill bearing N. ^ E., at night keep the light on this bearing, and proceed for it thus to avoid Jackman rock, until Fish point is closed with the wharves at the village bearing W. by N. ^ N. This mark will lead northward of Jackman rock. After passing the entrance rocks, which can generally be made out on a dark night, keep the George Island shore on board to avoid a shallow stone, lying fifty yards of! a point on the north shore immediately opposite the Bayfield bluff. Le Hayes Point.- -The southwest extremity of the main-land shore, and the north point ci entrance from the westward. This point has a rock 6 feeft high, lying 40 yards, together with a small dry stone 100 yards west »»f it; the channel here being only 70 yards wide. The south shore of the harbor, between Northeast and Fish points although straight on the whole, is broken by several coves. KILLARNEY WEST, OR PARTRIDGE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, square wood tower. On the south point of an island, N. N. W. ^ W., a little more than f of a mile from the western entrance of Killarney har- bor. (Range lights are to be erected.) Directions for Entering Killarney Harbor from the Westward. — If from the North channel. Lake Huron, the most direct track is between Kokanongwi and Badgely islands; and the west light- house is to be steered for in line with the highest part of Leading-mark hill, N. E. ^ N., to lead east of Double Island ledges, and west of Ann Long bank. The vessel's head may be turned more eastward when Badgely rocks, (hereafter described) come in line with Lion's Rump, W. ^ S. Run on the latter mark until the northeast part of George island is touching, or slightly closed with Le Hayes point, E. S. E. The most water that a vessel can carry into the harbor by western entrance is 11 feet. Entering from the eastward, not less than 4 fathoms can be car- ried to the wharves. A stranger should not attempt either of the en- trances to Killarney by night. Hadgely Rocks, about lO feet above water, lie N. E. by N., half a mile from Maxwell point, the N. E. extreme of Badgely island. BADGELY ISLAND has a total length of 3f miles, greatest breadth 1^ miles; the highest part is situated f mile from its N. E. ex- treme; greatest elevation, 370 feet. Twin Islands, 30 feet high, consist of two high bare rocks, \ mile southeastward of Maxwell point, deep water on their east and south sides. The southeast side of Badgely island as far as High beacli is steep-to. Linter Rock, with 14 feet least water on it, lies S. ^ E., a little more than ^ mile from the southern Twin island, N. N. E. ^ E., a little more than that distance from the north part of Kokanongwi island. The west light-honse and Leading-mark hill range before alluded to, leads westward of this shoal also. KOKANONGWI ISLAND.— The Indian name for a small fish, ! OEOROIAM BAT. 141 in immediately west- larbor from the ader the highest part eep the light on this ■ock, until Fish point '• by N. ^ N. This ' passing the entrance ght, keep the George ng fifty yards off a ►ayfield bluflF. y of the main-land Jtward. This point i a small dry stone yards wide. The \ ish points although 4^ DGE ISLAND e 10 miles. White. 3, N. N. W. i W, I e of Killarney har- u. arbor from the ron, the most direct md the west light- rt of Leading-mark , and west of Ann >re eastward when h Lion's Rump, W. b of George island . S. E. The most Item entrance is 17 ithoms can be ear- either of the en- e N. E. by N., half ely island. J| miles, greatest rom its N. E. ex- igh bare rocks, \ eir east and south as High bead, is 8 S. i E., a little r. E. i E., a little ngwi island. The alluded to, leads ne for a small fish, ) f mile long, northeast and southwest, and 400 yards wide. It lies f lile southeastward from the center of Badgely island. Shoal water ex- ends SCO yards south and west from the southwest point, leaving its lorthwest and north sides steep-to. A large rocky Hat extends from the )utheast side one-third of a mile, almost joining the shoal water from Kokanongwi Shingle. — A bank of stones 6 feet high, bearing G. by S. f S., \ mile from the north point of Kokanongwi island. A shal- low spit extends from it in a northeast direction 200 yards and a bank rans from it S. S. W. f W., \ mile, leaving a channel 200 yards wide be- tween it and the bank from Kokanongwi island. Evans Point is the southwest projection of Badgely island, off it loal water extends 200 yards. CENTER ISLAND is the next large island westward of Badgely island, the east extremity is composed of three islets, the eastern of which, Harris island, is 200 yards in diameter, and separated from Underbill point (the west point of Badgely island), by a deep channel 300 yards wide. Center Island Bank, least water 7 feet, extends from west end of the island in a southeasterly direction f mile, this bank extends f mile from the shore and narrows the channel between it and Skull point reef to a little over ^ a mile. The southeast corner of this extensive rocky bank bears W. by S. If miles from the southwest point of Badgely island, and the southwest ext''emity of the bank bears E. by S., If miles from the western part of Partridge island. The south extreme of Kok- anongwi island open south of Badgely island, E. by N., leads south of Center island bank and Bayfield reef. Partridge, or Round Island is the western one of the three, separated from Center island by a deep but narrow channel; the summit of the island is 190 feet above water. Partridge Island Rocks are two small rocky patches having 12 feet of water on them, one S. E. by E. \ mile, the other E. by S. f S., ^ mile from the southwest point of Partridge island.^ Shoal water fringes the south shore of the island an average distance of 200 yards. HEYWOOD, OR RAT ISLAND is the next large island west of Partridge island; it is 2f miles long east and west, average width f of a mile, and 178 feet high; the water on the south shore is good to the line of points. Southeast point, the name given to that point, is steeD-to. Watts Rock, with one foot of water on it, lies \ mile east of the eastern point of Hey wood island. A spur of three fathoms makes off in a northeast direction nearly 200 yards. The summit of Badgely island in line with the north side of Partridge island, E. by N. \ N., leads south of this danger. Oxley Point is the western extremity of Heywood island, a flat with three fathoms, extends 400 yards in a northwest direction. Wharton Point is the southwest point of Heywood island, a nar- row spit makes out 160 yards, at which distance there is 8 feet of water. MANITOWANING BAT, OR HEYWOOD SOUND, the next indentation westward of Smith bay, i i fine sheet of water 11 miles long, and free from outlying dangers; at the bottom of the bay ia situated the town of Manitowaning, with a population of about 400. ' I 142 OBOR6IAN BAY. Indian Dock Point is the eastern point of entrance to Manito- waning bay. Shoal water extends from the shore on either side of tbig ! point 400 yards. Rabbit Island, a low wooded island, S. W. ^ W., 2f miles from \ Indian Dock point; shoal water between them extends ^ mile from shore. The west fall of Leading-mark hill, Killarney, seen over the eastern ^ extremity of Center island, N. E. J E., leads northwestward of all these reefs. Rabbit Island Rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies S. W. 810 yards from the west side of Rabbit island. To avoid it, keep Indian Dock point open northwestward of Rabbit island, N. E. ^ E. Phipp's Point Shoal, a rocky patch with 9 feet least water on it, lies 400 yards westward from the southern part of Phipp's point. Strangers should pass westward of it, by keeping Fanny island in Mani towaning harbor, touching Town point S. ^ W. MANITOWANING LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 14 miles. White, square wood tower, light 80 feet above lake level. In the village of Manitowaning, about 250 yards northward of the Government wharf and 50 yards from the shore. Gibraltar Cliff, a rather remarkable rocky bluff, j[ mile back from the beach at the head of the bay, and as this cliff is just in sigli; when on Phipp's point shoal, care should be taken on approaching or leaving Manitowaning, that it is well open of the eastern shore. Manitowaning^ Harbor, a good anchorage between Fanny island and the docks, in 3 to 5 fathoms, the nearer the town the better; but the whole of the bay to the east and southeast of the light is an excellent harbor, good anchorage in any depth under 10 fathoms. SHEGUIANDAH BAY is a deep indentation between Mani- towaning and Little current. liOOn Island is a low and wooded island 250 yards long and 100 yards wide, situated N. by W., If miles from Ten-mile point (the western entrance point of Manitowaning bay). From the south point a shoal extends in a S. S. W. direction 400 yards. Its other sides are fairly steep-to. LOON ISLAND REEF, with 1 feet least water on it, is a dan- geroue obstruction, lying with its northern edge E. ^ N., | mile from the north point of Loon island. The south edge of the reef bears E. by S. from the same. To pass east of Loon island reef, keep the south- east fall of Cloche bluff in line with the west point of Heywood island, N. by E. ^ E., as this mark leads close, care must be taken not t& open the bluff. To pass 200 yards westward of the reef, keep the rock (an eminence 166 feet high, ^ mile back of the village of Mani- towaning) in line or closed with Ten-mile point, S. 4 W. From the southward it should not be approached nearer than the line of the south points of King William and Loon islands in range, W. by N. To lead north of the reef, keep the foot of Sheguiandah hill in line with the south point of Strawberry island, W. by N. STRAWBERRY ISLAND is 4| miles long, in a nearly north and south direction, with greatest width If miles. Its coast line is indented by numerous deep coves; South point is the most southerly ex- tremity of the island. The depth of 16 feet will be found 850 yards 'h -i ■ .-*!■■ t of entrance to Maniu. >re on either side of thii W. i W., 2f miles from] tends ^ mile from shore, , seen over the eastern rthwestward of all these er over it, lies 8. W. 8uo > avoid it, keep Indian I, N. E. ^ E. th 9 feet least water oo part of Phipp's point, ; Fanny island in Mani- rON.— A fixed white er, light 80 feet above It 260 yards northward 3 shore. T bluff, ^ mile back from } cliff is just in sigiit iken on approaching or the eastern shore, jorage between Fanny per the town the better; least of the light is an under 10 fathoms. ntation between Mani- 250 yards long and )m Ten-mile point (the From the south point 3s. Its other sides are t water on it, is a dan- E. ^ N., ^ mile from ' of the reef bears E. d reef, keep the south- tit of Hey wood island, nust be taken not to the reef, keep the the village of Mani- S. i W. From the ban the line of the in range, W. by N. Jguiandah hill in line N. )ng, in a nearly north lies. Its coast line is he most southerly ex- 1 be found 860 yards OEOKOIAN BAT. 14S .f ivth of the point, and 15 feet at 160 yards. The shore from the South (int trends in northeast direction nearly 3 miles to East point. Beaver Island is a narrow island, 1,200 yards long, low and thickly ooded. Its eastern shore may be approached to 200 yards, but from its uth point shoal water extends in a southwest direction ^ mile, with ^epth from 15 to 18 feet over it The north end of Beaver island is oon- ihected with Strawberry by a bar with 9 feet over it. East Point is the name given to the eastern extremity of the island; there are 3 fathoms to within ^ mile of the point. To enter Shegruiandah northward of Loon Island.— lep the foot of Sheguiandah hill in line with South point of Strawberry .nd; when past King William island, do not shut in the north point of m island behind the former, until Leech Island reef is past; when ir for the wharf, or anchor at the head of the bay. Leech Island is a narrow bank of stones, thickly wooded; its ,h end bears W. by S. ^ S., 1 mile from the north end of King William iland. Leech Island Reef extends N. E., 860 y^rds, at which distance 17 feet will be found; the north points of King William and Loon islands line, E. f S., lead north of this reef. Langevin Rock, with ll feet of water on it, is N. i W., f mile om East point of Strawberry island. To clear this patch, keep the hole of Loon island open east of East point, S. ^ W. Garon Point is f mile S. E. of Strawberry Island light-house. Caron Reef. This shoal has a depth varying from 9 feet on the mer, to 1 7 feet on its outer part. To pass eastward of it, keep the east oint of Loon island open of East point of Strawberry island due south, ''he north point of Beauty island in line with Strawberry Island light, W. by W. ^ W., leads northeastward of the reef. STRAWBERRY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION— A fixed bite light, visible 11 miles. White, square wood tower, attached to welling. On the northermost point of island, which is steep-to at the Bght-house point. Garden Island. — Is a barren limestone island, 9 feet high, lying iBOO yards northward of Strawberry island light-house; it is 600 yards |bng by 250 yards wide. Garden Island Bank is a dangerous rocky flat extending from the south shore of Garden island to within 360 yards of Strawberry Is- nd light-house. There is as little as 3 feet on the southeastern part of e bank, but the northeast, north and northwest sides of Garden island e steep-to. Beauty Island is 70 or so feet high at its northern extremity, is Stuated on the north side of the eastern approach to Little Current, and plortheastward ^ mile from Gibbons point (thp south side of the eastern j^pproach). Its southeast point is fairly bold >, but from the south shore % rocky bank extends a quarter of a mile fr< - the island, to avoid which in approaching or leaving Little Current, koep the inner or southern "^fhthouse at that place in line with or closed with Shut-in point, W. by If. ^ N. This mark will serve for day or night leading over not less than yl7 feet water. ■r 144 GEORGIAN BAY. LITTI'S CURRENT, or Shaftesbury occupies an important position cs being the narrow channt through which all vessels must pass, when navigating this part of the 7 orth Channel of Lake Huron. The passage lies between the north shore of Manitoulin island on the south, and Goat island on the north, the western part having been excavated to a depth of 17 feet. The western entrance points are Magazine point (the west point of Goat island) and Spider island. Griffith's Point is 600 yards to the westward of Gibbons point, and between them a shallow bank extends 100 yards from the south shore. The remainder of the shore is fairly steep-to. It is one mile to the east- ward of the southern light-house. Twelve-Foot Rock. — This small lump is situated with the east- ern wharf in line with the southern lighthouse, and eastward of the for- mer 250 yards, with deeper water between it and the south shore. Current. — The stream through this cutting runs in either direction, very strong at times, requiring when contrary a good head of steam and careful steering. Shaftesbury or Little Current Range Lights.— Two fixed white lights, visible 6 miles. White, square wood towers, 2il and 24 feet high. To guide through the Little Current. They bear from each other N. i W. and S. f E., 460 yards apart. The southern light stands near the shore between the docks. The northern one is on the east point of Spider island. Directions. — In proceeding through Little Curjrent from the east- ward, after passing Gibbons point keep rather nearer the south shore than the Goat island shore; pass close to the docks, keeping in the line of the lights, and give the northern light a berth of 50 yards. When the buoys are in position, keep the red buoys on the starboard, and black on port hand, when proceeding in this direction. The whole of the north shore from Goat island to Flat island, a a distance of 2^ miles, is shallow for a long way out, and should be care- fully avoided, by keeping the islands on the Manitoulin shore on board. Flat Island may be considered the southwest extremity of Great Cloche island. Spider Island is low and flat; it is 250 yards in length east and west, and 70 yards wide. Shoal water extends 100 yards into the chan- nel from the west end. The northern light stands on the east point. Low Island, of the same character, lies next west of Spider islau'l, separated by a shallow passage 200 yards wide. This island is 400 yards in diameter, and its north point is steep-to. The ship channel here is about that number of yards wide. Picnic Island lies with its west extremity 1 mile northwestward from Spider Island light houHc; it is ^ mile long, by nearly 400 yards wide. The channel here is less than 400 yards wide, and the deepest water that can be carried past the northwest point is 21 feet. To avoid the shoal on the north side of the channel westward of Picnic island, a vessel should keep the north end of Low island in line with or olost'd behind the north extremity of Picnic island, E. 8. E. A Cluster of stones, ^ mile W. by 8. f S., from the northwest point GEORGIAN BAY. 145 scupies an important Q all vessels must pass 3f Lake Huron. The n island on the south, 'ing been excavated to Qt (the west point of ard of Gibbons point, I from the south shore. i one mile to the east- lituated with the east- eastward of the for- le south shore. ms in either direction, )d head of steam and ige Lights.— Two wood towers, 2ij and it. They bear from The southern light ern one is on the east urjrent from the east- irer the south shore keeping in the line of 60 yards. When starboard, and black nd to Flat island, a and should be caro- in shore on board. extremity of Great 9 in length east and rards into the ohan- the east paint. stof Spider islan. I, island is 400 yards lip channel here is iiile northwestward ' nearly 400 yards >, and the deepest 21 feet. To avoid jf Picnic island, a ine with or closed 16 northwest point I*icnic island, and from these stones a spit makes out to the northwestward, 300 jrards. NARROW ISI^AND LIGHT-STATIOHf.— A fixed white light, visible 11 miles. Square, white, wooden tower, with kitchen attached. The tower is sur- . mounted by an iron lantern, painted red. On the west end of Narrow island, in the ehannel north of Great Manitoulin island, about 3 utiles to the westward of Little Current. North side of Foster bank W. i N. 4f miles; west side of Halfway islands N. by E. i E. 3f miles. Narrow Island is i mile long east and west, and very little breadth. The aorthwest point of this island bears W. i N., U miles, from the same extremity of Picnic island, and no vessel should go to the southward of this line. Narrow Island is important as marking the south entrance point of the western approach to Little Current, and unlike flat island on the opposite side, its channel shore may be approached to 150 yards. Two Rocks, with 7 feet water on them, lie 400 yards westward of Narrow Wand, the northern one bearing due west from the northwest extremity of that liland. To lead north of this danger, the whole of Picnic island should be kept open ilorthward of Narrow island, E. by 8. i 8. ' East Rous Island is the next large island west of Great Cloche. Mink Island is the largest and eastermost of a group of islands •OQth of East Rous island. Blake Island, lO feet high, is the southermost of this group. The south side of this island may be approached to 200 yards. West Rous Island is the next large island west of East Rous island; it is shoal on all sides except the north. ', BEDFORD ISLAND is the next large island westward of the Rous islands, its greatest diameter being 3;^ miles. Straubenzee Point is the name given to the southwest extrem- ity, and from it a dangerous reef extends f mile in a southwest direction, with as little as 3 feet of water on it. Foster Bank, with seven feet least water on it, lies with its eastern and shallowest end bearing S. by £., 1^ miles, from Straubenzee point.; from this position the bank runs westward, nearly half a mile. Eleven-foot Rock, with that depth of water over it, is 400 yards westward of Foster bank. It bears 8. S. W. ^ W., 1^ miles, from Straubenzee point. James Foote Patch, with 3f fathoms on it, lies ^ mile south- ward of the last mentioned shoals. Vessels mast pass south of these shoals, by keeping the north end of Picnic island in line with, or south, of the south side of Narrow island due east. The northeast side of Elm island touching the southwest shore of Amedroz island, N. W. ^ N., leads southwest of Eleven -foot rock. The northwest fall of the spur from Mt. McBean, in line with the southwest point of Bear's Back island, N. N. W. ^ W., leads west of Eleven-foot spot. Bear's Back Island lies midway between the southern portion of Bedford and Amedroz islands. It is ^ mile long. Its east and south- east sides are steep-to, but from the west low side of the island. BcMir's Back Shoal makes out i of a mile, to the depth of 3 fathoms. The northeast extremity of Clapporton island in lino with the southwest side of Amedroz island, N. W. by W. i W., leads south of this reef. 146 GEORGIAN BAT. Elm Island) so called from a single tree of that kind, which it j still preserves, is a narrow bank of stones, 1 feet high and 200 yards distant one mile southwestward from the west extreme of Bear's Back island. EHm Island Bank, with 6 to 12 feet over it, extends 400 yards in aN. N. E. and N. W. direction from Elm island; its other sides may be approached to 200 yards. Lansdowne and Lone Rocks, with 17 feet of water on them, lie respectively S. E. by E. -J mile, and E. ^ N., f mile from Elm island. The bare, rocky summit of Wilson point (Croker island) open west of Amedroz island N. W. f N. leads southwestward '^'^ Elm Island bank. AMEDKOZ ISLAND lies eastward of Clapperton island, and the greatest diameter is three miles. Carleton Point. — This low south extremity of the island, and the shore eastward of it for f of a mile are fringed with shoal water for a distance of 300 yards. Mag^ee Point is situated |- of a mile northwestward from the last mentioned, enclosing between them a deep shallow indentation, known as Reedy bay. Magee Bank is the name of the rocky flat extending nearly ^ mile from these islets and Carleton poiut. Croker island open westward of Amedroz island N. N. W., leads west of this bank. The central and gravelly projection of Magee point should be given a berth of 200 yards. From the north part of this point, the northwest side of Amedroz island runs in a northeasterly direction to Robinson point, the most northerly projection of Amedroz island. This coast is fairly steep-to; and may be approached to 200 yards. CLAPPERTON ISLAND.— Thi^ aland is one of the longest in this parf of the North Channel of Lake 1 .ron, being 5i miles in length from the light-house to South point, and foims part of the eastern bound- ary of the open water of the North channel. South Point. — A very shoal rocky spit makes off from the end of this point, in a southerly direction 400 yards, and a bank terminating in a rock with 10 feet on it, extends ^ mile east of this point. Baker Point is 2 miles northward of South point of Clapperton island, and to within i mile of Sorth point the coast may be approached to 300 yards. Carlingf Point. — This point is situated nearly GOO yards south- westward of the islet on the south side of Logan island, and may be ap- proachud from the eastward to 250 yards. Carling^ Bay is contained between Carling and Baker points. Logan Island lies 1 mile southeastward from Gartwright point, being separated from the main island on the northwest by a barrier of sunken rocks. The north side of this island is shoal for 300 yards, and its eastern side for 150 yards, while ^ of a mile in the latter direction, is a spot with a depth of 3^ fatlioms, falling down suddenly to 20. Logan Bay is a double indentation at the back of the island of that name, and although shallow, it. fairly level. Temporary anchorage may be had in 15 to 18 feet between the outer part of Logan island and the south entrance point of the bay. S:' e of that kind, which J ; high and 200 yards Ion? extreme of Bear's Back' ' -I ' Br it, extends 400 yards i and; its other sides may i 'i^xT ^^^^ ®^ ^**6^ on i -N., f mile from Elm ker island) open west of I ^ Elm Island bank. Clapperton island, and iity of the island, and ed with shoal water for westward from the last indentation, known as 3xtending nearly ^ mile nd open westward of nk. The central and a a berth of 200 yards, ide of Amedroz island it, the most northerly steep-to; and may be is one of the longest eing 5i miles in length t of the eastern bound- ces off from the end of I bank terminating in point. h point of Clapperton 't may be approached irly GOO yards south- and, and may be ap- id Baker points, fn Gartwright point, west by a barrier of I for 300 yards, and e latter direction, is lenly to 20. tck of the island of oiuponvry anchorage yi Logan island and aEOKaiAN BAY. 147 OliAPPERTON ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed ^hite light, visible 8 miles. White, square wood tower, 36 feet high. the north point of the island. Marks the channel between Clapperton •nd Croker islands. Gore Bay light, W. S. W. |^S., 14 miles. The range leads over foul ground. From the southeastward, this light is noi visible until bearing W. ^ S. Robertson Bock, with 8 feet water over it, lies N. E. ^ E., i mile from Clapperton Island light-house, and to avoid this obstruction yessels should keep pretty close to the Clapperton Island shore, or when passing it, the south end of Amedroz island should not be opened north- ward of Cartwright point (the N. E. point of Clapperton island) bearing S. E. by E. i E, From the light-house to Cartwright point, If miles to Uie eastward, the shore line has deep water close to. Croker Island is separated from Clapperton island by a channel li miles wide. Wilson point is the southern extremity of Croker island; it is sur- mounted by a bare peaked rock 126 feet :.i height. The water is deep Olose-to. Clapperton Channel. Var. 4° West. West (Honora) Bay is 8^ miles deep, the breadth between Wabos island and Francis point on the west being 6 miles. Wabos Island. — This island lies two-thirds of a mile west of Freer point, and marks the east entrance point of West bay. It is low, narrow and wooded, ^^ oi 9> mile long in a northeast and south- west direction; its northwest coast may be approached to within 100 yards, shoal water between it and Freer point. Tamarack Point. — The southern part is 5| miles from the head of the bay; may be coasted at a distance of 160 yards. Sounding Cave.— At the south part of Tamarack point the coast turns abruptly to the eastward, forming a bay known as Sound- ing Cove, in which vessels may find good shelter from north winds in from 6 to 7 fathoms, mud bottom, keeping not less than 300 yards I from the north shore of the cove. Dutchman's Head is the name given to a steep bluff 180 feet high ^\ miles from the head of West bay, on the west side; the shore on the west side may be approached to 200 yards. The Tooth is the name given to a small sharp rock 3 feet high, two-thirds of a mile northward of the shore under Dutchman's head, and \ mile from the west shore of the bight; it should not be approached from the eastward within 150 yards; shoal water between it and the shore. Francis Point is the name given to the northeast extremity of the promontory dividing West and Mudge bays. It is the south entrance p 'nt to Clapperton channel from the eastward; the east side is tolerably steep-to, but shoal water extends off the point \ mile to the northeastwani, audi of a mile to the northward called Tach6 Island reef. 148 GE07?0IA^' BAY. McRae Patc'v v,itb .?V fathoms over ?r,c* lies N. E. -]• E, nearly one mile lror,> 'H^'-ayiCist poln', Clapperton f^haiiTi-iil sepa' ates Manitoahn island from Olar. perton island. Between Souta point of Clappei toi, island and Francis point on the east, and Courti^ey i: land and the western part of Maple point on the west, and may be navigated in clea ' weather, at daylight, by vessels drawing 12 feet of water. The north shore of the channel between South point and Courtney island will first be described. South Point is the southern e tremity of Clapperton island; it is low and narrov/; a shoal extends from it 8. ^ E. 350 yards with less than 6 feet of water on it. Mowat Island lies with its bouthern extremity W. by N. ^ N, ) 4 mile from South point. From this extremity, shoal water extends in a southwesterly direction 200 yards to a depth of 16 feet. The passui^a' between Mowat island an( Clapperton island is only fit for boats. Meredith Island is the next island northwestward of Mowat island. It is the largest of the five islands in this loca^ty ; it is separated from Clapperton island by a shal'ow boat channel full ^ rushes. From the west point of this island a rocky ridge extends in a S. T7. by S. dirtc- tion, nearly f mile, terminating in a bank of boulders with but 1 foot of water on them and called the Meredith Roclc. — Thisiock has deep water close to its soutii- west and eastern sides. The soutliwest point of Courtney island, toucli- ing the northern Spilsbury island, N. W., leads southward of Mereditli rock. The east side of Hai'bor island touching the west side of Burbidge island N. N. E. -^ E., clears the west side of the whole of The Midge. Sailing vessels may stand from the eastward towards Mere- dith rock and llie Ridge until the west side of Meredith island touches the east side of Harbor ieland ^^ f E. Surbidge Island lies nearly 400 yards westward from Meredith island, the passage between thum containing a depth of 9 feet. A bank extends v/eatward from Burbidge island 350 yards ^-ith as little as one foot o^ er in one place. CU- i» 'irton Harbor is on the south shore of Clapperton island, it is a semicircular bay in which excellent anchorage and shelter from all winds can be found. Sandfield point forms the western point of the bay and 350 yards southeastward from it lies Beverly Island. — A low, round little island of less than 150 yards in diameter, and separated from ii'andfield point by a boat channel. The eastern side of the island is fairly steep-to. A patch with two feet water on it lies W. i S. 600 yards from Beverly island. Harbor Island is the northerraost of the group. Its north and west sides are bold, but from its southeast extremity a bar extends acrons to Panet point with depth from 4 to 10 feet. The best anchorage in Clapperton harbor is un ier the northeast point of and about 200 ^ftrds from Harbor island in 5 fathoms over clay. Vank0Uj2^hliet iHiaud is the largest of the two islands -M the BouthwoHt extremity of Clapperton island. Its length 1 mile, and breadth nearly 2 mile. Between it and Clapperton island there is a passage known aa Indian channel through which 9 feet may be carried. '\w:i'^i9sm'.w<'S^-:'-; ifli",;! <:i',i;v GECKaiA-N BAi'. 149 I'ocik, lies N. E. -} v uLn island from Clap. toi, island and Francis western part of Maple I ' weather, at dayliirht li shore of the channel St be described. Clapperton island; it is 50 yards with less than mity W. by N. ^ N., I >al water extends in a 15 feet. The passa-^- ily fit for boats. ihwestward of Mowat loca'ity; it is separated full f rushes. From in a b. T7. by S. direc- lers with but 1 foot of ler close to its soutii- ourtney island, touch uthward of Meredith g the west side of side of the whole of stward towards Morc- redith island touches ;ward from Meredith of 9 feet. A bank with as little as one )f Clapperton islam!, S and shelter from all western point of the of less than 160 yards boat channel. The with two feet water oup. Its north and a bar extends across > best anchorage in nd about 200 ^yards two islands at the 1 mile, and breadth ^ isd passage known Secord Poin*-' '•=< t,i,e -lost wester;/ point ■.)'. CJajpn-t-on island, ivaq If miles r.orth of Sandlield print. Secord Bank is the name of the shallow rockj' ba>ric ^^tvetohing Southward from Socord point to within 150 yards of V-'.vorghiiet island, ■leaving a passage of 12 feet water close to the latte' . Spilsbury Islands, two in number and sicii.i li^ r^early ^ of a mile from the south shore of Vankoughnet island, an vt juinedtOi^ether by boulders. A narrow and crooked channel with . d- pth of 12 feet water exists between these small islands and Vankoughnet island. The water is fairly good on the west side of Spilsburg islaiids, 12 feet being found at 200 yards, but in a southeasterly direction extends a dangerous rocky bank known as Boulder Bank. — This shoal extends in the above direction about 1 mile with depth ranging from one to seven feet. Courtney Island forms the north entrance point to Clapperton channel from the westward, and with the exception of the northeast ,|ade it is surrounded wi+h shoal water, and joined to Vankoughnet island by a bank of dry stones, Courtney Bank. — This dangerous and extensive bank of boulders is situated at a distanv^^, '»f half a mile westward of Courtney island. It is over one-third of a mile long northeast and southwest by a quarter of » mile wide, with depth from a few inches to six feet. Griffin Bank, the least depth on which is 8 feet, lies north of the 'Courtney bank, and N. W. by W. rather more than half •» mile from the northwest extremity of Courtney island. Miall Patch, with least depth of 12 feet, is dtuaied W. by S. ^ 8. f mile from the southwest point of Courtney ibla> 1, being *?eparated from Courtney bank by about the same depth of water. Western Reef, so-called from beinj the wf isiermost of all the patches lying near the W38t entrance to Clap^js r^or^ < 'lannel, lies W. iN. about 1^ miles from the southwest, point oJ ^' irtn ;: island. Ic isabo Jt 100 yards in diameter, and has 11 feet wa : - over it. It is nearly in the track from Clapperton light-house to Gore bay. ^ good channel 3 to 9 fathoms in depth and f mile wide, separattu vt fi om the ucarest of the shoals previously described. Kange. — The Clappei on light-house . . the hollow of the hills at Fort La Cloche, N. E. by E. f E. leads 400 yards northwest of this shoal. The southwest point of Innis island, touching the north point df Darch island, N. N. W. leads ^ mile southwest ward of Western reef. North Shoal is the northermost of the three banks which Ifroit the western entrance to the Clapperton channel, is a rocky bank • over a third of a mile long in an E. by N. and W. by S. direction and 1 200 yards wide, with least depth 4 feet, its wetlern extremity bearing S. 1 W. i W. and distant about 1 mile from the soutinvest extreme of Court- fney island. Middle Biiiik, with 4 feet over it, is the most dangerous rbstruo- ^tion in the west entrance to Clapperton channel. It is 300 yurdf, loa^ ■ east and west, by 200 in v tdth and is composed of boulders. Its south side bears W. N. W. one mile from the north extremity of Maple poinf<. It is separated from North shoal by a five fathom channel 400 yards wide, but au it is not buoyed it cannot be used. .150 GEORGIAN BAY. To Pass Westward of GriflSn bank, Courtney bank, Mial! patch, North shoal and Middle bank, keep the western extremity of the next island west of Croker island in line with the N. W. end of the spur from Mt. McBean K N. E. J E. Description of the south side of Clapperton channel commencing from the westward. Maple Point is the name of the promontory which may be con sidered the south entrance point from the westward, Johnson's point ig about f of a mile in a west southwesterly direction from Maple point. Soutll Spit extends ^ mile northward of Johnson's point at which distance there is a depth of 12 feet. A dry stone lies 350 yards northeastward from Johnson's point. Between South spit and Middle bank is tlie ciiannel a quarter of a mile wide and 5 fathoms deep, and to lead between these shores keep South point of Clapperton island in line with the north fall of Manitoulin island E. by S. Little Island is a low, narrow, wooded islet 80 yards long, lying 800 yards eastward of the east shore of Maple point. Little Island Sand Bank is a large flat sand bank extending 1^ miles from the east shore of Maple point at which distance there is only 8 feet. Sutherland Shoal with 15 feet water on it lies S. by E. ^ mile from Little island. Gooseberry Island, 250 yards long north and south, low and narrow, its north end bears N. W. by W. f W., a little over a mile from Francis point, its north end should receive a berth of 200 yards. Martin Reef lies on the same bearing from Francis point, ^ mile from Got- .eberry island. It is composed of dry stones 2 feet high and should not be approaclied from the northward nearer than 300 yards. Mclnnis Bank lies N. W. by W. ^ W., l^ miles from the north point of Gooseberry island, least water on it 16 feet, and in line with Kagawong light and west side of Clapperton harbor. Tache Island is the first island westward of Francis point, ^J mile distant from it. A patch of dry and sunken rocks extend from it in a northeasterly direction about ^ mile, called the Tach^ Island reef. Directions for takings tlie Clappevton Channel from the Westward. — Before the west end of the island next west of Croker island (Benjamin island) passes to the westward of the N. W. end of the spur from Mt. McBean, bring South point of Clapperton island under the north fall of Manitoulin island, E. by S., which range will be a little open of Maple point. This mark kept on, will lead be- tween South spit and Middle bank, in not less than 4 fathoms water. As Maple point is approached, open the north fall of Manitoulin island sufficiently to the northward of South point of Clapperton island, to clear the flat which extends 100 yards from Maple pomt. After the northern part of this point is passed, the leading mark should again bo brought on exactly, and kept on until nearly abreast of the eastern ex- treme of Little Island Sand bank, which position will be indicated by northern Spilsburg island touching the southwest point of Courtney )eanng N. W. The latter niark shoul ' Meredith rock is passed, or when Meredith island touches Harbor island bean unti lould now be kept on astern OEOROIAN BAY. 151 ' Courtney bank, Miall e N. W. end of the spa! •ton channel commencing tory which may be con- ard, Johnson's point k on from Maple point. of Johnson's point at ry stone lies 350 yards 'thspit and Middle bank- is fathoms deep, and of Clapperton island in J S. et 80 yards long, lying It sand bank extend, ^hich distance there ing is it lies S. by E. ^ mile j and south, low and iittle over a mile from of 200 yards. Francis point, ^ mile ones 2 feet high and sr than 300 yards. miles from the north feet, and in line with Francis point, :J: mile ercend from it in a 11'^ Island reef. a Cliannel from island next west of j «^ard of the N. W | >oint of Clapperton . by S., which range opt on, will lead be- fathoms water. fall of Manitoulin ' Clapperton island, le point. After the irk should again bo t of the eastern ex- ill be indicated by point of Courtney he kept on asterii nd touches Harbor stand, N. f E. From the intersection of the ranges an E. ^ S. courcie rill take a vessel in the direction of Little Current, or if proceeding to "^est bay,^ she may continue with the Spilsburg island mark astern, ^which will also clear the shoals off Francis point. In proceeding to Mudge bay, a vessel may turn to the southward off the Spilsburg island mark, when Burbidge island appears its own width east of Harbor island. Taking Clapperton Channel from the Eastward.— If from Little Current a W. ^ S. course from Narrow island should carry a vessel nearly half a mile south of Foster bank (the north side of Picnic Island in line with south side of Narrow island, bearing due east leads clear of Foster bank) and nearly ^ of a mile from the shoal off south point of Clapperton island. Bring the northern Spilsbury island to touch the southwest point of Courtney island N. W., this mark kept ahead will lead between Meredith rock and Little Island Sand bank. As soon as pouth point of Clapperton island comes in line with the north fall of 3tfanitoulin island, E, by S., keep it so astern. As Maple point is ap- proached bring t.>e north fall of Manitoulin island northward of south point of Clapperton island, sufficient! 7^ to pass 200 yards from northern part of Maple point, when past it, stai board again so as to bring the lead- ing mark exactly on, which will lead out between South spit and Middle . bank. If a vessel wishes to haul to thv> northward she may do so on the Mt. McBean spur range, which kept on atioad will, as before remarked, lead west of all the shoals excepting Western reef, which it passes more than ^ mile eastward of. Entering Clapperton Harhor. — If for any reason a vessel wishes to enter the barber from the eastward, she should keep on the Spilsbury Island range, until the east side of Harbor island touches the west side of Burbidge island, bearing N. N. E. f E. From this position a N. ^ E. course will lead west of the Burbidge Island shoal. After passing the latter, the course may be changed more to the east- ward, rounding Harbor island at a distance of 200 yards, and anchoring jUnder the northeast point at about that distance therefrom. Entering Clapperton Harbor from the Westward. — When upon the leading mark — South point of Clapperton island in line with the north fall of Manitoulin island; as soon as the Spilsbury island ! range conies on, steer N. E. for the northwest point of Harbor island ; ; give it a berth of 200 yards, and anchor as before directed. A vessel may cross The Ridge with 13 feet water, by keeping the north fall of Manitoulin island its own height open north of South point of Clapper- ton island. KAGAWONG LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 11 miles. Lantern on a mast with white shed at base, 40 feet above lake level. At the foot of Mudge bay, N. shore of Manitoulin island, 75 feet back from shore, and 100 feet west from the dock. GORE BAY LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 11 miles. White, square wood tower, with dwelling attached. On the west point of entrance to Janet's cove. There is a wood dock at tlie head of the bay, west side, behind a little point, with good water, protected frouj all winds. CAPE ROBERT LIGHT-STATION. —A fixed white light, visible 12 miles. White, wood tower, square in plan, 41 feet high. m^ 152 GEORGIAN BAY. with dwelling attached. On the northern extremity of the cape, north shore of Manitouliii island. A Newly DlscOTered Rock. — A rocky bank has been die covered by Staflf Commander Boulton. It lies two miles east of the two low flat islands, which are situated 5^ miles due north of Cape Rol ert. On the bank there are \ pier, V feet high, on mtrance to St. Mary's ugh narrow channel, on, — A day beacon 3d by an iron tripod 36 of slat-work. The high above the crib. ranee to, and on the 3 feet of water, but This beacon is about ■ON.— A fixed white 34 feet high, with channel, a short dis- el, and guides from A fixed white light, ■^ high, with dwelling of channt^l, about 2 -'M Compass Courses and Distances in Georgian Bay and North Channel. NoTK. — The Courses are magnetic; Distances in statute miles. Cove Island to Colli iigwood. — When ^ mile north of Cove island light, steer for the north side of Flower Pot islanu, E. by S. | S., 6t miles, to a point \ mile north of the Castle, haul around the point to the southeastward until the Cove Island light is closed behind the N. E. point of Flower Pot island, when steer E. by S. i S., keeping the light closed as above for 2 miles, until past Bear's Rump shoal, when steer E. by S. f S., 14:^ miles, to a point 1 mile northeast of Point Wingfield, when steer S. E, \ S., 73 miles, to a point 1 mile north of CoUingwood IBreak- water light. Passing 1^ miles northeast of Surprise shoal; in thick and oggy weather, keep a little more to the eastward until past the shoal. To pass north of Bear's Rump Island. — When \ mile north of Cove Island light, steer E. b^ S. \ S., ranging on the south point of Bear's Rump island for 5^ miles, until Tobermory light is closed with the west end of Flower Pot island (and note that the fall of Cabot Head J. in line with the south extreme of Bear's Rump, E. S. E., leads south of : Confiance shoal); thence E. ^ N., 3;^ miles, to a point \ mile north of the .north point of Bear's Rump island; when steer E. S. E., 14^ miles, to 1 mile northeast of Point Wingfield. Cove Island to Owen Sound. — When i mile northeast of Point Wingfield, as in the course from Cove island to CoUingwood, steer S. E. i S., 30 miles, to a point 5 miles E. §■ S. of Cape Croker, passing 1^ miles to the northeast of Surprise shoal; thence S. \ W., 18^ miles, to a point \\ miles east of McKenzie's Wharf light; thencesteer up the mid- dle of the sound about S. S. W. ^ W., 7^ miles, for the range lights at the mouth of Sydenham river. Cove Island to French River.— When i of a mile north of Bear's Rump, as in the course to CoUingwood, steer E. N. E. \ N., 15 miles, until the east side of Cabot head bears S. | W., 12 J miles, and Half-moon island W. f N., 8^ miles; thence N. N. E. f E., 36 miles, to a point 2 miles west of Bustard Rocks light, keeping a lookout for the 10- foot spot lying about if miles S. W. by W. ^ W. from the main light. Cove Island to Byng Inlet. — When ^ of a mile north of Bear's Rump, as in the course of CoUingwood, steer N. E. by E. f E., 49 miles, to a point 4 miles west of Byng Inlet light. Tugs are generally in readi- ness to tow vessels to the mills. Cove Island to Parry Sound. — When ^ of a mile north of Bear's Rump, as in the course to CoUingwood, steer east 56 miles to a point 2 miles west of Parry Sound light. Cabot Head to Hope Island and Giant's Tomb Island. — When 1 mile northeast of Point Wingfield, steer E. S. E. i S., 61 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Hope Island light, passing 3 miles south of the Western islands; thence S. E. by E. 9^ miles, to a point 1 mile south of the south point of Giant's Tomb island. Owen Sound to CoUingwood.— When 3 miles N. by E. f E. from front range light, steer N. E. :i N. 11 miles, until Point William f 154 GEORGIAN BAV. bears southeast 2 miles; thence E. f S. 9^ miles, until Point Rich bearg southwest 2 miles; whence steer S. E. i E. 23 miles, to a point 2 miles north of CoUingwood Breakwater light. Owen Sound to Christian Island Light.— When 2 milei, northwest from Point William, as in thecourse to CoUingwood, steer east 32 miles to a point 1 mile south of light. Owen Sound to Parry Sound.— When 3 miles N. by E. | e, from front range light, steer N.N. E. | E., 67 miles, to a point 2 miles W. S. W. from Parry Sound light. Owen Sound to Byng Inlet.— When 3 miles N. by E. ^ E from the front range light, steer N. N. E. i E., 11 miles, to a point 4 miles S. E. ^ E. of Cape Commodore and in range of it and Point Wil- liam; when steer N. |- E., Q7^ miles, to a point 4 miles W. by S. from Byng Inlet light. Owen Sound to French River. — When 4 miles S. E. k E from Cape Commodore, as in the last course, steer N. -J W., 78 miloH, to a point 2 miles west of Bustard Rocks light, keeping a lookout for the 10-foot shoal 2 miles S. W. by W. ^ W. from the main light. Owen Sound to Little Current. — When 3 miles N. by E. \ E. from front range light, steer N. N. E. i E., 11 miles, to a point 4 miles S. E. ^ E. from Cape Commodore and in line with it and Point William; when steer N. I E., 12f miles, until the east point of Cape Croker bears W. f N., 5^ miles distant, thence N. N. W. f W., 65 miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Lonely Island light, passing about three-fourths of a mile from the northeast point of the island, keeping a lookout for the south end of Northeast shingle ; when steer N. by W., 16 miles, to a point Ij miles east of the north point of Cape Smith, then keep the west and high- est beach on Badgely island in line with the first hill left of the Lion's head (a sharp and conspicuous bare hill on the main land behind Barlgely island), the same course N. by W., 7^ miles, passing f mile east of Burnt island, and ^ mile east of Burnt Island bank until Ead's bush (Little Cur- rent) is seen to the northward of the summit of Heywood island and in line with the south shore of Partridge island W. by N. and the highest part of Leading-mark hill in line with Killarney West light N. E. } N., then steer W. ^ N. for the hill on Strawberry island, passing ^ mile south of Center Island bank, keeping the south point of Kokanongwi island open of Badgely island, which range leads south of it; this course should lead one-third of a mile south of Heywood island ; haul around its south- west point (Wharton point), giving it a berth of not less than 300 yards, then steer N. N, W. | W. to clear Caron reef, with Strawberry Island light on port bow and east point of Garden island ahead, when the light bears N. W. by W. } W. and in line with north point of Beauty island; haul up on that course round the light-house point, fairly close-to, and steer for Gibbons point W. ^ N. Before Beauty island is abeam see that the southern light-house at Little Current (or Miller's House) is in line with Shut-in point, on the south shore of Little Current, W. by N. ^ N. At night the light may be kept opening and shutting to make sure of the range. When see directions for proceeding through Little Current. CoUingwood to Cliristian Island. — When 2 miles north of breakwater light, steer N. by E. f E., 16^ miles, to a point 1 mile south of the light. CoUingwood to Parry Sound.— When 2 miles north of tf ■■' "*^ IS!' , until Point Rich bears niles, to a point 2 miles [iigrht.— When 2 miles Collingwood, steer east in 3 miles N. by E. | £ liles, to a point 2 miles 1 3 miles N. by E. ^ E. 11 miJes, to a point 4 :e of it and Point Wij. 4 miles W. by S. from hen 4 miles S. E. | E '. N. i W., 78 miles, to ►ing a lookout for the main light. hen 3 miles N. by E. ^ miles, to a point 4 miles it and Point William; of Cape Croker bears 65 miles, to a point 1^ three-fourths of a mile lookout for the south 16 miles, to a point If :eep the west and high- bill left of the Lion's n land behind Badgely g I mile east of Burnt Cad's bush (Little Cur- Bywood island and in y N. and the highest Vest light N. E. ^ N., passing ^ mile south Kokanongwi island it; this course should haul around its south- t less than 300 yards, h Strawberry Island head, when the light int of Beauty island; t, fairly close-to, and and is abeam see that ;r's House) is in line ;rent, W. by N, ^ N, ing to make suro of •ough Little Current. Vhen 2 miles north ?8, to a point 1 mile n 2 miles north of OEOR(^IAN BAY. 155 miles west of point 2 miles breakwater light, steer N. | W., 35 miles, to a point 2 the Western islands, thence N. ^ W., 2?.^ miles, to a iW. S. W. from Parry Scnnd light. Collingwood to Byng Inlet.— When 2 miles north of break- ater light, steer N. by W. ^ W., 85 miles, to a point 5 miles W. ^ y S. from Byng Inlet light, passing about 3 miles west of the Lime- itone islands, and 1^ miles west of a shoal 4 miles S. W. by W. of Byng Inlet light, when haul up to within 2 miles of the light, where a pilot pye tug should be taken. Collingwood to French River. — When 2 miles north of breakwater light, steer N. by W. f W., 100 miles, to a point 2 miles west of Bustard Rocks light, keeping a lookout for the 10-foot shoal about 2 miles S. W. by W. ^ W. from the main light. Collingwood to Little Current.— When 2 miles north of breakwater light, steer N. W. f N., 95 miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Lonely Island light, passing about 1 mile from the northeast point of the island, and keeping a lookout for the south end of Northeast shingle, when see course from Owen Sound to Little Current. Collingwood to Cove Island Passage.— When i mile north of breakwater light, pteer N. W. ^ N., 73 miles, to a point 1 mile northeast of Point Wingfield, passing 1^ miles east of Surprise shoal; thence W. by N. f N., ranging on the north end of Flower-pot island for 15f miles, to within ^ mile (keeping Cove Island light just closed with it fr to clear Bear's Rump shoal), when haul around to the northward; give Castle point a berth of i mile, and steer W. by N. ^ N., 6^ miles, to a point i mile north of Cove Island light. Collingwood to Killarney. — When 2 miles nortb of break- water light, steer N. W. by N. f N., 106 miles, to a point ^ mile p ist of Papoose island. (This course should lead 4 miles east of Dawson rock, which lies S, by E., 16 miles from east side of Papoose island); then steer N. W. i N., 10 miles, to a point ^ mile S. i W. of Killarney East light, and in range with it and Leading-mark hill, when see directions for enter- ing Killarney from the southeastward. French River to Killarney. — When at the Bustard Rocks range lights, steer W., 18f miles, to a point ^ mile north of Papoose island, passing north of Gull island; then N. W. ^ N., 9 miles, passing south of Scarecrow Island bank, to a point ^ mile S. -^ W. of Killarney East light, and in range with it and Leading-mark hill. To Enter Smith Bay from the North Channel,— When northward of Burnt Island bank, haul to the southeastward; keep Lion's Head (a sharp and conspicuous hill between Badgely island and Fruzer bay) in line with the east end of High beach (on the south shore of Badgely island) bearing N. ^ W. After passing Big Burnt island, which may be passed close on the east side, keep the summit of Badgely island well open east of Big Burnt island, N. by E, i E., to lead eastward of Pelkey rock, and when East Mound (a little gravelly bank 2 feet above the water, lying ^ mile eastward from the north point of William island) comes in line with the Spur, N. W. f N., steer S. W. by W. i W., up the bay. Or, if wishing to anchor under Cape Smith, edge a little to the westward, so as to bring the summit of Badgely island in line or closed with the southeast point of Big Burnt island in order to lead westward of Gold-hunters bank. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) ^/ /. .** f/. 1.0 I.I bilM |Z5 lAo 12.0 ■u IL25 i 1.4 I IIIIIM 1.6 <^ PhotographJc Sciences Corporation 33 WIST MAIN STRUT WnSTM.N.Y. MStO (716)S72-4S03 '^^^i* ^ ^4^ ^ ^ ^> 156 GEORGIAN BAT. To enter Smith Bay from the South ward,— Follow around Cape Smith about a ^ mile distant, in order to pass south of Gold hunters bank, and when abreast of the northwest point of the cape, bring the center of the village of Wekwemikong about a point on the starboard bow, in order to get the points of Cape Smith in line E. by S. i S. This ran{^e should be on astern before the west end of Bushy clump and the east end of West Red cliff are touching, but not before East Red cliff bears south. Keep the points of the cape in line until the sunimit of Badgely island is in line with the southeast point of Burnt island, when Gold-hunters bank and the outer part of Red Cliff flat will be passed. A vessel may anchor off West Red cliff on the last mentioned clearing mark as before directed, or proceed further up the bj»,y. A vessel will find less than 10 fathoms over mud anywhere inside the line joining Cape Smith and William island. To enter the bay northward of Gold-hunters bank, the Spur should not be brought to the eastward of the middle of William island, N. N. W. i W., until the summit of Badgely island is over the southeast point of Big Burnt island, when a vessel may haul towards the cape shore and anchor, or proceed up the bay. In doing the latter she will probably pass close to Doyle shoal, the least water on which is 22 feet. To enter Manitowanlne Bay from the Eastward.- Bring the west fall of Leading-mark hill Killarney over the eastern ex- treme of Center island, N. E. f E., directly astern, and proceed on that range until the northeast point of Strawberry island is open of the south- west point of Heywood island, N. W. ^ N., when steer for the Rock ^ mile westward of the village of Manitowaning S. W. by S. ^ S., 8 miles, toa point ^ mile west of Phipps point shoal (see Gibraltar cliff), keep on the above course until Fanny island, Manitowaning harbor, is in hne with Town point, S. ^ W. See Manitowaning harbor. To enter Manitowanins^ Bay from the Westward.- Passing north of Loon island reef, note that the south point of Straw- berry island, in line with foot of Sheguiandah hill, W. by N., leads north; and southeast fall of Cloche bluff in Tine with the west point of Hey wood island, N. by B. ^ E., leads 200 yards to the eastward of it. Bring the southwest point of Hey wood island over the stern and steer for the village of Manitowaning, S. | W. Killarney to Little Current. — Continue with the west light- house inline with the highest part of Leading-mark hill, N. E. | N.;^ive High beach, near the southeast extreme of Badgely island, a berth of 200 yards or more, and keep the south end of Kokanongwi well open of Badgely island to lead south of Center island bank. When the north side of Heywood island comes open of Partridge island, haul to the northward to pass a quarter of a mile westward of the latter; steer thenoe for Heywood rock, and after passing 200 yards northeast of it, bring it in line with the southwest extremity of Partridge island to clear 8hoal island spit. When the north point of Shoal island bears S. S. E., Straw- berrv Island light-houae may be steered for, N. W. by W. j W. Oii reaching the light-house, proceed as dirtcted in the course from Owen Sound to Little Current. Manitowaning to Little Current.— Leaving the village, steer for the southwest point of Heywood island, N. f E., to within i of a mile, when see course from Owen Sound to Little Current. GEORGIAN BAT. 157 From Little Current to Olapperton Island.— Give Spider island a berth of 150 yards; pass 100 yards north of Low island, from 60 to 100 yards northward of Pionio island, 200 yards north of the west extremity of Narrow island. Thence steer W. ^ S. to bring the soath side of Narrow island in line with the north side of Picnic island bearing due east (the south fall of Frazer hill will be seen also on this range). This leading-mark leads south of Eleven-foot rook and Foster bank, when Elm island touches Amedros island N. W. ^ N. steer to pass westward of the former, in which position a vessel will know herself to be when the rocky summit of Wilson point (Croker island) comes open west of Amedroz island. When steer for Cartwright point, the north- east extreme of Clapperton island. Bound the point close-to, and keep the shore close on board as far as the light-house. When abreast the bluff point ^ mile eastward of the li^ht-house, see that Amedros island is closed with Cartwright point to avoid Robertson rock. Clapperton Island to Innis Island.— When ^ mile north of Clapperton Island liffht, steer W. by S. f S., 5f miles, ranging on Blackstook point until the south point of Innis island bears north, distant 1 mile. Innis Island to Point Mildram.— When i mile south of ; Innis island, steer W. ^ N., 23 miles, to a point 1 mile north of Cape Robert light, when steer W. f S., 18 miles, to a point 1 mile north of : Mildram point, the northeasterly point of entrance to the Straits of Mis- i sissagua from the North Channel. This course should lead about 1 mile north of Crescent island. See Straits of Mi^fisRagua, Lake Huron, page 116. Innis Island to False Detour.— When i mile south of Innis island, steer W. f N., 48 miles, to a point 1^ miles north of Thorap- [son point, the north point of Cockburn island, and the northeasterly [point of entrance to the False Detour channel. See page 116. Innis Island to Sulphur Island.— When i mile south of [Innis island, steer W. :^ N., 23 miles, until Cape Robert light bears south Is miles ; then W. by K. ^ N., 38 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Sul- iphnr Island light. Clapperton Channel to Cape Robert.— When if miles iW. by N. from Maple point, and in range with South point of Clapper- [ton island, steer W. | N., 23 miles, to a point 1 mile north of C^pe |Robert light. Clapperton Channel to Gore Bay.— When if miles W. Eby N. from Maple point, as in the preceding course, steer W. by S. f S. [ranging on Janet Head for 6^ miles, until Town point bears S. i W., rhen haul up on that course about 2^ miles, keep about midway between Town point and the east shore, and when past the point haul in for the rood dock. Vessels can lie at the dock with northerly winds with ifety. 158 STRAITS OF MACKINAC. STRAITS OF MACKINAC. Light Houses, Buoys and Harbors Standing to the West- ward, Note. — The Straits of Mackinac embrace those waters commencing at the east point of Isle iBois Blanc and extending to the south point of Beaver Island. Bois Blanc Island. — A Life Saving Station has been estab- lished near the middle of the east end of the island. BOIS BLANC LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible ISf miles. Yellow tower, 38 feet high, rising from yellow dwelling. On the northeast point of the narrow neck of land extending to the northward from the easterly end of Bois Blanc island. A guide into the north channel of the Straits of Mackinac. Detour light-house, K. E. by E. I E., 26^ miles. Spectacle Reef light-house, E. by S., 14 miles. Fort Mackinac, W. N. W. f W., 9i miles. In the Bay south of the light there is good anchorage and pro- tection from all winds, except those from W. S. W. by the westward and northward to N. N. E. The shore is bold from the east point of the island to the ilght. A spit extends from the light-house point in a W. N. W. direction from one-half to five-eighths of a mile. To make ihe anchorage from the eastward: When half a mile north of the light steer west for three-fourths of a mile, thence south three-fourths of a mile, when haul up E. S. E. for about half a mile and come-to in about 6 fathoms with the light bearing N. N. E. Note. — There is a shoal spot between f and J of a mile N. W. of the light, on which at the present low stage of water there is not more than 15^ feet, heavy draft vessels should keep outside of it. Poe's Reef. — Red, 2d-olass can buoy in 17 feet of water. Placed on the southeast point of Poe's reef, 1^ miles from the southeast end of Bois Blanc island. The reef extends in an easterly and westerly direc- tion about 2,000 yards, with the least depth of water on it of 12 feet. There is a narrow channel on the north side of it, which should not be attempted by strangers. Spectacle Reef light house, E. N. E. ^ E., 12 miles. Cheboygan light-house, S. W. f S., 3^ miles. Oheboyg^an Reef. — Black, 2d-clas8 nun buoy in 16 feet of water. This buoy marks a dangerous shoal on 'vhioh there is not more than U feet of water, it is about 350 yards long in an east and west direction. Cheboygan Main light bears S. S. W. \ W., } mile. CHEBOYGAN LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 5th order, varied by white flashes every 90 seconds, visible 12^ miles. White tower, 33 feet high, rising from dwelling. On the north point of the land to the eastward of McLeod's bay, south channel of the Straits of Mackinac. A guide into the south channel. A fog signal has been established at this station, it is a 10-inch steam whistle, during thick or foggy weather it will souiid blasts of 6 seconds with intervals of 2') sec- onds. Poe's Reef buoy, N. E. f N., 3^ miles. St. Helena light, N. W. by W. ^ W., 26 miles. South point of Bois Blanc island N., 3^ miles. Cheboygan Pierhead Crib Light. —A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12 miles. Red, iron, octagonal tower, 36 feet high. Oa STRAITS OF MAOKINAO. 159 ion has been estab- 6 feet high. On >lated orib off the entrance into the Cheboygan river, Miohig^an. Ves- bIs bound into Cheboygan should pass the crib close-to on east side and iteer in on the range. Spectacle reef, N. B. by E. i E., 17| miles. Point [St. Ignace, N. W., 17^ miles. Good anchorage off the light in 3 to 4 [fathoms. McLeod'ti Bay has good anchorage and protection from all winds. [To enter it, when one-fourth of a mile N. E. by N. from Cheboygan orib [light, steer S. E. by E. 1 mile, heading a little outside the lumber docks [at Duncan City. Come to abreast the lumber docks in 3^ fathoms. Cheboygran River Ranges. — Two fixed red lights, on the west side of tbe Cheboygan river. Front light, 42 feet above the lake, in tower rising from frame dwelling; rear light 68 feet above the lake, in I open framework tower. Towers 850 feet apart, on the prolongation of the center line of the cut, and a range for passtng through it. The out [was completed in 1887; it is 200 feet wide and 15 feet deep from the 16- [foot curve in the straits up to the steamboat landing. Zela Shoal. — Red, Sd-class can buoy in 18 feet of water. On the [extreme west end of the shoal, extending 2 miles W. N. W. from Zela [point, south side of Bois Blanc island. There is no passage way between [the buoy and the island. West point of Mackinac island, N. W. f N., 7^ [miles. Cheboygan light-house, S. E. ^ E., 9j miles. Point au Sable, S. \k E., 4f miles. Major's Shoal. — Red and black horizont 1 stripes, 2d class can buoy in 19 I feet of water. On the middle of the shoal. The general direction of the shoal is N. |W. and S. £., and it is about 1,200 feet long. There is a 14-foot spot about 400 feet southeast of this buoy. East side of Mackinac island N. £. 8^ miles. West side of Mackinac island N. i £. 3^ miles. From the buoy the west side of Grosse Isle St. Martin is just open by the west side of Mackinac island, and the north point of St. [ISelena is in line with Point La Barbe. Miickinac Harbor.— Red, Sd-class can buoy in 12 feet of water. Marks the [end of the spit extending off the south point of Mackinac island; tliis spit extends in [a southeasterly direction. A spit extends in a similar direction from the east point [of the island, wliich with the bay between the two points form Mackinac harbor. [The liarborr'is safe from all winds, except from the east. Large steamers can lie at [the piers ia any weather. Vessels should not attempt to pass between the buoy and [the island, at the same time taking care to avoid the shoal to the northwest of liound ' iland. To make tlic harbor from the west, get McGulpin's Point light astern, and lie east fall of Mackinac island in range E. N. E. t N., until Bois Blanc light opens ' Round island, when haul up slowly for it, keeping a lookout for the spit off }und island, and when well past it, haul up for the piers at Mackinac on a bearing N. W. i W., with the east end of Round island a little on the port quarter. South Graham Shoal.— JRed, Ist-class automatic bell buoy in 14 feet of water. On the southeasterly edge of South Graham shoal. The Graham shoals bear N. N. E. and S. S. W., respectively, from each >ther three-fourths of a mile. Between the shoals and Point St. Ignace there is a channel which should not be attempted by strangers. The )urrents in the vicinity of the Graham shoals and the Straits of Mackinac re often strong and irregular. After fresh gales, vessels anchored in the traits often trend to windward. The least water on the South Graham 6 feet. McGulpin's Point light-house, 8. W. ^ W., 4^ miles. Point it. Ignace, N. i W., 1^ miles. Point La Barbe, W. N. W. i W., 2^ liles. North Graham Shoal.— Red, 2d-olaBs can buoy in 12 fleet of [water. Placed on the southeast point of the shoal. Least water on ■hoal, 8 feet. Rabbit's Back peak, N. by W. i W., 6f miles. North [point of Mackinac island, N. E. |- N., 4 miles. South Graham Shoal |>l>uoy, S. S. W. ^ W., 1,400 yards. Range lines A'om the north tide of 160 8TRAIT8 OF MAOKINAC. li I Isle St Helena and Point La Barbe, and from Qrosse Point and Point St. Ignaoe, intersect each other on the South Graham shoal. Point St. If^nace is theterminns, on the north side of the straits, of the Detroit, Mackinac and Marquette Railroad. To make St. Ignace from Mackinac harbor, haul around the south point of the island, and steer W. bv N. ^ N., 4^ miles, to the docks. Vessels coming from the west should range Old Point Mackinac and the west point of Mackinac island, N. £. by N., until in range with the south side of Round inland and the dock at Point St. Ignace, when haul up on the range W. N. W. i N*. There is good water at either of the docks. Carp River, in St. Martin's bay, is 12 miles norths of Point St. Ignace. There is good anchorage off the mouth of the river; vessels can lie there in any weather. To make the anchorage from the west side of Mackinac island, steer north in mid-channel between Grosse Isle St. Martin and Grosse point, and when past the point, steer N. ^ W. 3^ miles. Come-to in 8^ fathoms off the mouth of the river. A spit extends in an easterly direction from Grosse point one-half mile. To make the mouth of Carp river from the east, when half a mile north of Bois Blanc light, steer N. W. } W., 15 miles, keeping Grosse point a little open on the starboard bow, and when the middle of the channel between Grosse Isle St. Martin and Grosse point bears north, haul up on that bearing, and when past the point steer N. ^ W., 3^ miles, to abreast the mouth of the river. Shoal water extends off the south point of Grosse Isle St. Martin half a mile, and off the south point of Little St Martin's island nearly 1 mile. To run through between the islands, bring the middle of the passage to bear north and run through on that bearing. To run through between Little Isle St. Martin and Point St Martin, bring the middle of the channel to bear N. by W., and run through on that bear- ing. A detached shoal off St. Martin's point extends east and west one mUe in length. Vessels should give the point a berth of one mile. A spit extends off the east point of Grosse Isle St. Martin three-eighths of a mile in an easterly direction. * • Goose Island Shoal lies in range of Fort Mackinac and the middle of Goo^e island, and also in the range of Bois Blanc light and west side of Point St. Martin, N. N. W. f W., 6f miles, from Bois Blanc light and S. W. f W., 3^ miles from the north point of Goose island. Least water, 6 feet. Goose Island Spit extends in a 8. 8. E. direction 1 mile from south end of the island. The south end of the spit bears N., 6^ miles from Boiu Blanc light Marquette Bay has good anchorage and protection from all winds, and is easy of access. The east point of entrance is N. ^ W., 2\ miles from the north end of Goose island. To enter the bay, haul around the east point of entrance, giving it a berth of 300 yards, and come-to in 4 or 6 fathoms. There is a good channel between Goose Island and Isle Marquette. Shoal water extends from Isle Marquette in the direction of Goose island ^ mile. Old Fort Mackinac is the terminus on the south side of the straits of the Detroit, Mackinac & Marquette Railroad. There is a large railroad wharf, with deep water alongside. Good anchorage in the bay east of Old Point Mackinac, and protection from all westerly winds. To make the anchorage from the west, haul around the point and strnd into STRAtTS OF MACKINAC. 161 B8, from Bois Blanc it of Goose island. bay, until past the range of the point and St. Helena light, and come-to. Furtlier kp in the bay the water is shoal. OLD MACKIWAC POINT FOO-SI€?MAL STATION.— The signal I a 10-inch steam whistle, gives blasts of 5 seconds, altematc silent intervals of 17 nd 33 seconds. Brown corrugated iron fog-hoiise, gable facing the lake. On the north side of Old Mackinac point. McGulpin's Pomt light W. 2i miles. St. Helena ight N. W. i W. 8 miles. Cheboygan Mam light 8. E. by E. i E. Ifl* miles. LIght'house to be built. — The light will be fixed white, varied by a white ish at intervals of 10 seconds. Good anchorage on the south side of the straits between Point Sable and Old ^oint Mackinac. Excellent holding ground and protection from northeast gales can be found south yt Round island and off tlic west end of tiois Blanc island. »IcGUL.PlN»S POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white flight, 3i order, visible 17^ miles. Yellow tower, 38 feet high, rises from Iwelling. On McGulpin's point, south side of the Straits of Mackinac, fcbout 2 miles west of Old Fort Mackinac point. The light is situated on |a bluff, which is about 70 feet above the level of the lake. Old Fort lackinac point, E. f N., 2 miles. South Graham Shonl buoy, N. £. ^ £., |4i miles. St. Helena light-house, N. W. | N., 6| miles. ST. HELENA LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 3^ >rder, visible 16^ miles. White tower, 66 feet high, connected by a sovered way with red brick dwelling. On the southeast point of St Telena island. A guide to vessels making » lee under St. Helena island, id also a leading mark to vessels bound westward through the south iohannel of the Straits of Mackinac. In entering St. Helenii harbor from >e westward, when three-quarters of a mile north of Waugoshance light, steer E. by N. i N., 12 miles, to a point three-quarters of a mile S. ~C. ^ 8. from St. Helena light, and in range with it and McGulpin's Point light, when haul to the northward, keeping a lookout for the spit v;hich (tends hair a mile to the southward and eastward of the light, and marked >ya 26 foot black spar buov in 18 feet of water. Co ae-to off the dock on [the east side of the island, m from 6 to 8 fathoms. To pass tothenorth- [ward of the island, when three-quarters of a mile north of Waugoshance night, bteer E. N. E. | N., 11^ miles, to a point one-quarter of a mile [north of the island, passing about half a mile south of St. Helena Shoal |buoy, when haul to the southeastward and come-to off the dock. VeBsela ipproaching from the south channel of the straits should bring McGul- pin's Point light astern, and steer N. W. f N., which will lead to the an- shorage. Waugoshance light-house, S. W. by W. ^ W., 11| miles. St. Helena Southeast Shoal.— Black spar buoy in 18 feet >f water. On the southeast end of shoal extending 1,000 yards south- [east of St. Helena light-house. In entering St. Helena harbor from the [eastward, give the buoy a berth of 100 yards. St. Helena light-house, (N. W. I W., 1,000 yards. St. Helena Shoal. — Red and black horizontal stripes, 2d-olaB8 loan buoy. On the south Hide of the center of St. Helena shoal, which [lies If miles west of the northwest end of St. Helena island. The shoal jii about 750 yards in extent northwest and southeast, and 600 yards [northeast and southwest, with 8 feet of water on its shoalest part. The JKOundicgs are irregular; bottom roekv, with 3 to 4 fathoms close-to. ^North point of St. Helena island, E. i N., 2 miles. McGulpin's Point light-house, S. E. | E., 8| miles. Waugoshance light-house, S. W. by W., 91 miles. 162 STRAITS OF MACKINAC. Manltoa Pajrmen Shoal.— Red and black horizontal stripes, Sd-clafls nuo buoy in 18 feet of water. OflE the south point of ^>nitou Paymen shoal, the ofinttr of which is about 4 idles from the north shore. 'I'ue shoal is about three-fourths of a mile in extent northeast and southwest, aud 800 yards northwest and soiitlicnst. Least water on it, 6 feet. Waugoshance light-house, 8. i W., Hi miles. Point Epoufette. N. W. i W.. 8^ mUes. Simmons reef, 8. W. by W. i W.. 6i miles. Simmont Reef Llght-Tessel.— Moored in about 26 feet of water tn the southeastward of the reef, and shows at each masthead a group of three fixed red lens lantern lights. The focal plane of each group is 80 feet above the lake, and the lip-lits are yisible in clear weather 8i miles. The vessel has two masts, schooner rifjged, and no bowsprit. The hull is painted red. with ' 'Simmons Betf" in large white lotters on each side, and "No. 55" m white figures on the stern. The lantern masts are painted yellow, and abaft of each there is a trysail mast; two black smoke pipes, and the fog-signal are between the masts. The fog-signal is a 6-inch steam whistle, and in thick or foggy weather will sound blasts as follows: Silent n,.^ Silent m,^-^ Silent interval. "'*"• interval. "'*"• int«rval. 3 seconds. Blast 1 second. 10 seconds. 10 seconds. 1 second. 85 seconds. Simmons Reef is composed of 4 shoals extending in an easterly and westerly direc- tion li miles, and about 800 yards in a northerly and southerly direction. Least water, 3 feet. Waugoshance light-house, 8. 8. E. 1 E., 9 J miles. Hat Island (left tangent), 8. W. i 8., 8 miles. White Shoal Lfght-Vegsel.— Moored in about 26 feet of water, to the northeastward of the shoal, and shows at each masthead a group of three fixed white lens-lantern lights. The focal plane of each group is 80 feet above the lake, and the lights are visible in clear weather Hi miles. The vessel has two masts, schooner rigged, and no bowsprit. The hull is painted white, with "White Shoal" in large black letters on each side, »'nd "No. 56" in black figures on the stern. The lantern masts are painted yellow, and abaft of each there is a trysail mast. Two black smoke pipes, and the fo^-signal are between the masts. The fog-signal is a 6 inch steam whistle, and in thick or foggy weather will sound blasts as follows: Sllet't p,„^ Silent t,,^^ Silent interval. "'"*^- interval. "'*^^- interval. Blast. 1 second. 10 seconds. 1 second. 10 seconds. 3 seconds. 86 s. conds. Waugoshance light-house, 8. 8. E. f E., 4| miles. Hat island (left tangent), W. by 8. i 8., 8 miles. St. Helena light-house, E. i N , 1' Ij miles. White Shoal (southirest end).— A l8t-cla»s i ad and black horizontal stripes spar buoy in 18 feet of water. The White Shoals are composed of irregular ro^.ky reefs extending i mile in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction. Least wa'.er,*3 feet. WArGOSHANCE L.10HT-SYATI0W.- A fixed light, varied by white flashes at intervals of 90 seconds, 4th order, visible 15i miles. Tower 65 feet high, attached to dwelling, both pdnted brown, surrounded bv a souare crib. On the extreme point of the shoal extending to the northwestward of Waugoshance island, and marks the turning point from the Straits of Mackinac into I^ake Michigan, between Beaver island and the main-land. There is a passage-way to the eastward and close to the light, but it should not be used unless familiar with the locality. During thick or foggy weather there is sounded a steam whistle, giving blasts of 6 seconds at intervals of 25 seconds. St. Helena Shoal buoy, N. E. bv E., 9| miles. Manitou Paymen buoy, N. ^E., 11| miles. Simmons Reef lightship, N. N. W.J W. , 91 miles. White Shoal light-shL, N. N. W. f W. , 4fmiles. Gray's Reef light ship, W. 4i miles. Hog'9 Island Reef buoy, W. 8. W. i W. , 12f miles. Skilligallee light-house, 8. 8. W. | W., 8f miles. Waugoshance IS-Foot Shoal. — A 2d-class red and blf>ck horizontal stripes nun buoy in 17i feet of water. Marks a large boulder, on which the light- house tender "Dahlia'' found but 17i feet of water. Waugoshance light-house, 8. byE. iE., li miles. Tienna Shoal.— Red and black horizontal stripes, 2d-class can buoy, in IC feet of water. Marks the northwest point of tlie Vienna shoal, which has an extent of 800 yards from east to west, and 175 yards north to south. The large boulder was blown up last year by the U. S. Engineers, but there are still a numl)er of small ones near the center of the shoal with 16 feet of water over them. Waugoshance light, £. by N. t N. li miles. Skilligallee light, 8. by W. i W. , 7i miles. 8TBAIT8 OF MAOILINAC. 1G3 oggy weather will sound ?gy weather will sound black horizontal stripes GBAY'S RF.EF liIGflT-VESSEE..— Moored in about 26 feet of water. the eastward of the reef, and shows a group of tliree fixed white lens-lantem Ighta at thu foremast head, and three fixed red lens-lantern lights at the mainmast lead. The focal plane of each group is 30 feet above the lake, and the white light is lidsible in clear weather llj miles. The vessel has two masts, schooner rigged, and nio bowsprit. The hull is painted red up to the bulwarks. The bulwarks are painted hite, '"ith "Gray's Beef" in large black letters on each side, and " No. 57 " in black igures on the stern. The lantern masts are painted yellow, and abaft of each there I a trysail mast. Two black smoke pipes, and the fog signal are between the masts. The fog-signal is a 6-inch steam whistle, and in thick or foggy weather will sound Iblasts as follows: Riu* Silent p,--x Silent p,„,. Silent "'*^ Interval. "'"^ Interval """^ Interval. 8 seconds. 10 seconds. 1 second. 10 seconds. 1 second. 10 seconds. Gray's reef, which is comi ;osed of a series of shoals extending east and west about ^-8^ miles, and about 1^ miles north and south. Least water, 6 feet. The soundings ' between the reef and Hat island are irregular and foul. Waugoslmnce light-house, E. 4f miles. Skilligallee light-house, B. i E., 7i miles. St. Helena light-house, E. !byN. iN., 16i miles. Skilligallee Shoal.— Black, Sd-class nun buoy, in 18 feet of water. Marks ; the end of a shoai extending in a northwesterly direction from Skilligallee light-house, I and vessels should not atteiir pt to pass between the buoy and the light. Skilligallee light-house, 8. E. by E. i E., f of a mile. SHIL.£.IGAL.L1:E light-station.— a fixed white light, 4th order, visible 14 miles. White brick tower, 52 feet high, connected by a covered way with ..dwelling, all white. On Skilligallee rock (Isle aux Galets), between Beaver island l«nd the ma'n-land, and 5f miles from the latter. A guide to and from the Straits of Mackinac. During thick or foggy weather, a 10-inch steam whistle will sound blasts of 5 seconds, with alternate intervals of 10 and 40 seconds. Waugoshance light-house, N. N. E. | E., 8| miles. Gray's Reef buoy, N. by W. i W., 7i miles. Hog Island reef buoy, W. N. W. i W., 8| miles. There is a detached shoal If miles, the middle of it bearing E. N. E. i N. from Skilligallee light, with only 12 feet of water, rocky bottom. The shoal is half a mile hi length and an eighth mile wide, and extends in a northeast direction. Hog Island Reef. — Red and black horizontal stripes, 2d-class can buoy, in 18 keet of water. Off the southeast end of Hog Island reef. The greatest extent of the reef is east and west three-eighths of a mile, and north and south 220 yards. The shoalest spot, 6 feet, is on the west end of the reef, with soundings to the westward, ciose-to, of 4 and 5 fathoms. Skilligallee light-house, E. S. E. i E. , 8f miles. Wau- Soshance light-house, E. N. E. i E. , 12f miles. Gray's Reef light vessel, N. E. by I. i E., 8} miles. Beaver Island Harbor light-house, W. i N., ^ miles. BEAVER ISLAND HARBOR LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible i'.?,^ miles. White tower, 34 feet high, connected by a covered way with dwelling, all white. On the north side of the entrance into Beaver harbor. A guide into the harbor. Vessels entering must be careful to avoid the shoal on the north side of entrance. With the light-house ahead, bearing N. W. by W., distant 1 mile, open the light a little on the starboard bow, heading about W. N. W., vrhich will lead into the harbor. Pass the light- house, giving it a berth of about 200 yards,, Good anchorage can be found on a line between the inner and orter docks. Skilligallee light-house, E. 8. E. f E., 17 miles. Hog Island Reef buoy, E. f 8., 8^ miles. Life-Saving Station about 166 feet west of light-house. BEAVER ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied by white flashes at intervals of 1 minute. 4th order, visible 17^ miles. Yellow tower, 40 feet high, connected by a covered way with dwelling, all of yellow brick. On the bluff, about 60 feet high, at the south end of lieaver island. A guide through the channel, 9^ miles wide, between Beaver and North Fox islivnds. The fog-aignal is a Ist class iteam-siren. The fog-signal house is on a point 660 feet S. W by W. ^ W. from the light-houst'. In thick and foggy weather there will bo 164 LAKE MIOHIOAN. Bounded blasts of 7 seconds with intervals of 42 seconds. North point of North Fox island, S. W. by W. ^ W., llf miles. Grand Traverse light-house, S. f E., 25^^ miles. Shoal watfer extends off the south and southwest points of the island f of a mile. lilTTLE TRAVERSE LI GHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. Red brick tower, 41 feet high, at- tached to dwelling; lantern black. On the extremity of Harbor point. Marks the entrance to Little Traverse bay. Beaver Island light-house, W. N. W., 31 miles. South Fox Island light-house, W. f S., 42 miles. To enter the harbor from the westward, haul close around Harbor point, which is steep-to, and run to the docks in the head of the bay, or come- to on the north side. In the middle of the bay the water is too deep to anchor. CHARLEVOIX PIERHEAD LIGHT-STATION.-A fixed red light, 5th order, visible 9f miles. White, square, open-frame tower. On the outer end of the north pier at the entrance to the harbor of Charlevoix. The harbor improvemeilt consists of a dredged channel con- necting Pine lake with Lake Michigan, and protected on both sides by revetments and piers extending into Lake Michigan. The piers are 160 feet apart, and extend out W. N. W. ^ N. The north pier is 40 feet longer than the south pier. A bar has formed outside the end of the south pier, and reduced the depth to 10^ feet at the entrance from Lake Mich- igan. LAKE MICHIGAN. J Light-Houses y Buoys and Harbors Standing South Alon^ the East Coast of Lake Michigan and Islands. SOUTH FOX ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, varied by red flashes at intervals of 2 minutes, 4th order, visible 15 miles. Yellow tower, 39 feet high, rises from yellow dwelling. On the southern extremity of South Fox island. A guide through the chaniiel between South Fox and North Manitou islands. A shoal extends to the southward of South Fox island for the distance of 9f miles, with two spots on it with 13 and 16 feet of water, respectively, marked by buoys. Grand Traverse light-house, S. E. f E., 18^ miles. Northwest point of North Manitou island, S. S. W. ^ W., 19 miles. From the north point of the South Fox island a spit extends 1 mile in a northwest direction, and another from the south point in a southwest direction \ mile. The North Fox can be approached within half a mile except on the southwest side, where shoal water extends nearly 1 mile. The holding ground around the Foxes is very good, and they afford shelter from all winds except from the northwest and southeast. On the east side the water is deep and vessels come-to in from 15 to 22 fathoms. LAKX mOHIGAll. 165 Fox lalai 1 Shoal (inside).— Second-class nun bnoy, red and >lack horizontal stripes, in 20 feet of water. To the southward, and alose to the inner spot on the reef extending to the southward of South 7ox island, distant 4^ miles from South Fox Island light. The chart jives 13 feet as the least depth of water at this point, but rocks with [only 1 1 feet on them have been found. The bottom near the buoy is [rocky; the soundings are irregular, and deeply-laden vessels should be {careful in navigatmg in this vicinity when the weather is thick or [foggy. In clear weather the buoy may be passed on either side at a dis- tance of a quarter of a mile. South Fox island light-house, N. J E., 4 J miles. Outer Shoal buoy, S. i E., 3^ miles. Note. — Vessels bound down through this passage, to avoid this shoal should keep the highest land on North Fox island closed with the south point of South Fox island until within two miles of the point, when steer N. E. i E. for Waugoshance. Fox Island Shoal (outside].— Third-class can buoy, red and black horizontal stripes, in 20 feet of water. To the southward, and close to the outer shoal spot on the reef extending to the southward of South Fox island, distant 7f miles from South Fox Island light. The chart gives 16 feet as the least depth of water at this point, but spots have been found with only 12 feet of water on them. This locality should be avoided in thick weather, but when the buoy can be seen, it may be passed within a quarter of a mile. Inner Shoal buoy, N. i W., 3^ miles. South Fox Island light-house, N. ^ E., 7f miles. Grand and Little Traverse Bays. From Middle Villagre to the Foot of the East Arm of Grand Traverse Bay. — The cr s far as Little Traverse can be approached within half a mile. * are detached rocks and rocky spots within one-third of a mile . o shore. From Little Tra- verse to Big Rock point the coast can be approached safely within one-fourth of a mile, the shallow water being in the indentations of the shore. From Pine River point a rocky flat extends one-fourth of a raile to the west and north. Dangerous reefs extend to the north and northwest for almost a mile from Fisherman's island. From this island to the foot of the east arm of the bay are many detached rocky spots and ledges and numerous spits extending from shore, but not less than 12 feet of water will be found on any part within half a mile from the general direction of the shore, except at the foot of the bay, where 12 feet are found in spots three-fourths of a mile from shore. From the Foot of the East Arm to Traverse City.— From the foot of the bay to the village of Old Mission the coast can be approached within 1,000 feet everywhere, but half a mile south of the village a flat extends 1,600 feet into the bay. From the point opposite, and east of the village, a spit runs out in a southeasterly direction. A dangerous rocky flat extends from Old Mission point north and west for \\ miles from the shore. From Old Mission point to Tucker's point several spits extend from the shore, making navi- gation unsafe within half a mile from the coast. From Tucker's point a rocky spit runs out south for half a mile. A rocky spit extends from the south point of Hog island for more than half a mile to the south* 166 LAKE MIOHIOAN. ilii'i l! west, and a smaller one in a northeasterly direction from its northern point From Bower's harbor to Traverse City the shore can be approached within one-fourth of a mile. From Traverse City to Llgrbt-house Point.— Two milei north of the dock at Traverse City, a dangerous 9-foot spit extends half a mile from the shore. The coast from here to Lee's point is safe within half a mile. From Lee's point a spit extends to the south for three- fourths of a mile. North of Lee's point u flat runs almost half a mile from shore, half-way to Sutton's point. From this point a rocky spit extends three-eighths of a mile to the northward. The western shore of Sutton's bay is shallow within half a mile. The coast from Pishaiibe'a village to Northport is generally good, but a lookout should be kept for a rocky spit extending for almost a mile N. by E. from the northern end of New Mission point. There is shoal water for one-fourth of a mile to the north and east of Bellow's island. Two dangerous shoals with 6 and 8 feet of water on them lie between Northport point and Northport. A rocky spit runs out in a southeasterly direction for half a mile from a point three-fourths of a mile north of Northport point. From thence to Light-house point the shore can be safely approached within half a mile, but at the Light-house point a rocky spit extends almost half a mile to the northward. Petoskey is on the south side of Little Traverse bay, S. by E. | E., 3 miles, from Little Traverse light. It has a dock and considerable trade. It is the terminus of the Grand Rapids and Indiana B. R., and has become important as a summer resort. It has no light-house. GRAND TRAVERSE lilGHT- STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. Black lantern on yellow brick dwell- ing, 34 feet high. On the northwest point of Lighthouse point, at the entrance of Grand Traverse bay. A guide into the bay and to the pass- age between the main land and the Manitous. South Fox Island light- house N. W. f W., 18t miles. Northwest point of North Manitou, W. by S., 24^ miles. MISSION POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 6tb order, visible 13^ miles. Black lantern on white frame dwell- ing, 35 feet high. On the northeast point of Old Mission point, Grand Traverse bay. A guide into the east and west arms of Grand Traverse bay. Reefs extend off this point from W. to N. by E. of light-house, If miles. Dock at Northport, N. W. } N., llf miles. New Mission point, N. W. I W., 6f miles. Northport Bay is 6 miles south of Grand Traverse point. It has good anchorage and protection from all winds. To enter the harbor from the northward, haul around Northport point; give it a berth of three- eighths of a mile, when steer W. f S., 2^ miles, to the docks, keeping a lookout for two shoals nearly in range with Northport point and the docks. Sutton's Bay is on the west side of the West arm of the bay, 6 miles west of Mission Point light-house; has good anchorage and easy of access. The bay is open from the northeast. Bower's Harbor is on the east r'^e of the West arm of the bay, 10 miles N. N. E. from Traverse City. Good anchorage and protection from all winds. To enter the harbor from the north, run in between Tucker's point and Hog island, keeping a little nearer to Hog island. A LAKE MIOHIOAN. 167 Bky spot extends half a mile sonth from Tucker's point, and one abont le same distance northeast from Hog island. Old Mission Bay is on the west side of the East arm of the bay, H miles south from Mission Point light-house; it has good anchorage and protection from all winds. To enter the harbor from the north, haul iround the point, giving it a berth of half a mile to clear the spit ex- ending southeast from the point, and come-to o£f the village in ft fathoms. New Mission Point, or Dougherty's Harbor, is 5 J miles N. W. W. from Mission Point light. Elk Rapids is on the east side of the East arm of the bay, 7 miles JS. S. £. i E. ^om Mission Point light. Standing South on the East Shore of Lake Michigan, From Light-liouse Point to Point Betsey.— Between (the light-house and Cat Head point two spits extend over half a mile ffrom shore. — From Cat head to Carp river the coast can be approached iirithin half a mile, but there are two 12-foot detached rocky spots 4 [miles N. E. ^ N. from the dock at Carp river, If miles from shore. — In : Good Harbor bay are several shoals with only 8 feet of water on them. One of these will be found bearing N. E. ^ N. from the dock at Unity, and distant 4 miles; the shoal is directly on the line joining Carp River and Pyramid points. Another 8-foot spot bears from Unity dock N. E. \ E., distant 3f miles, and is a little inside the line joining Unity dock and Carp River point. — Southeast frcm the last spot, and half a mile dis- tant, is a 10-foot spot. — Three miles south of Pyramid point a rocky spit runs half a mile from shore, and shoal water extends for one mile towards Sleeping Bear. — From thence to Point Betsey the shore is bold, and can be approached within one-fourth of a mile, except at Platte River point,, where a spit extends to the north, having only 6 feet of water over it three-fourths of a mile from shore. Cat Head Point and Bay afford shelter in southerly winds. Good holding ground under Pyramid point. Unity dock affords protec- tion in all winds, except those from the north and northeast. Glen Arbor in the bay between Sleeping Bear point and Pyramid point has good shelter from all winds, from the west round by the south to northeast. ' SOUTH MANITOU ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.-A fixed white light, 3d order, visible 17^ miles. White tower, 91 feet high,, connected by a covered way with yellow brick dwelling. On the southeast point of South Manitou island. A guide into Manitou harbor and through the channel to the eastward of the Manitous. During thick or foggy weather, a steam whistle is sounded, giving a blast of 8 seconds' dura- tion each minute. The fog-signal houses are 34 yards to the noitheast of the Ifght. Southeast point of North Manitou, N. il. by E., 7^ miles. Point Betsey light-house, S. by W. | W., 23 J miles. South Manitou Harbor is protected from all winds, with good holding ground. The water is deep in the middle of the bay; the best anchorage is on the west side, about one-third the distance from the south dock to the Light-house point. 168 LAKB MIOHIGAN. Is % South Manitou Island can be approached within a quarter of a mile everywhere, except on the south and southwest sides, where shoal water extends half a mile from shore. There is also a rock, with only 3 fathoms of water over it, S. S. W. ^ W. from the southwest point of Manitou island, 2^ miles. North Manitou Island can be approached with safety within a quarter of a mile on the north Hide, and within half a miU on the east and west sides, butthereextenasina southerly direction a rocky spit more than three-quarters of a raiie from the southwest point of the island. Good shelter can be had in the bight on the east side of the island from winds from the southwest to northwest. The water is deep — from 14 to 20 fathoms. POINT BETSEY LIGHT-STATION,— A flashing white light; interval of flash, 10 seconds; 4th order, visible 13f miles. Yellow tower, 34 feet high, with brink dwelling attached. On Point Betsey (Pointe aux Beos Scies), east shore of Lake Michigan. Marks the turning point for vessels bound to and from the south end of Lake Michigan when Eassing through the chaunel to the eastward of the Manitous. South [anitou Island light-house, N. by E. f E., 23^ miles. From Point Bet- sey to Big Point Sable the shore is bold, and can be approached anywhere to within 2,000 feet; sand bottom. The Life Saving Station is a little south of the light-station. The fog-signal is a 10-inch steam whistle giving blasts of 5 seconds duration, separated by alternate silent inter- vals of 10 and 40 seconds. The fog-signal house is about 175 feet N. E. by N. from the light-tower. It is a corrugated iron structure painted dark brown. FRANKFORT PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 25 feet high; 76 feet from the outer end of the south pier at Frankfort, Michigan, 4^^ miles from Point Betsey light. Width between piers, 200 fe'3t. The harbor improvement consists of a dredged channel connecting Lake aux Bees Scies with Lake Michigan. The channel is protected on both sides by revetments and parallel piers extending west into Lake Michigan. The south pier extends 200 feet beyond the north pier. The Life Saving Station is at the inner end of the south pier. PORTAGE LAKE PIERHEAD LIGHT-STATION- A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12i miles. Square, white, pyramidal,' open frame-work tower, upper part enclosed. Near the outer end of north pier. Rang^e Light.- A fixed red light shown from a lens lantern, on a post at the outer end of the no> th pier. This light with the pierhead light forms a range showing the direction of the piers, and the course for entering the harbor. Portage Lake Harbor is 23 miles south of Point Betsey, and 24 miles N. N. E. ^ E. I'roin Big Point Sable. The project is to make it a harbor of refuge, with a navigable channel 370 feet wide, with not less than 18 feet of water. The piers extend into the lake W. ^ N., and are parallel. The north pier is 650 feet in length, and the south pier 500 feet. A channel has been dredged 75 feet wide and 11 feet deep, but it is thought that it will soon fill up again. MANISTEE PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 27 feet high. Near the outer end of the south pier. The fog signal is a LAKE MICHIGAN. 109 llO-inch steam whistle in duplicate; during thick and foggy weather it [will sound blasts, at the pierhead light-station, of 5 seconds, with inter- vals of 26 seconds. Width between piers, 180 feet. Tbo north pier -extends 100 feet beyond the south pier. Grande Pointe au Sable light- chouse, S. 8. W. f W., 15f miles. The harbor improvements consist of a dredged channel connecting Manistee river with Lake Michigan. The channel on both sides is pn oted by revetments and parallel piers extending into the lake W. by N. ^ N. Bangle Liight. — A fixed red light shown from a tubular lantern ion a post 25 feet above the level of the lake. On the outer end of the I south pier. This light will be visible in clear weather 2 to 3 miles, and will form with the main pierhead light a range showing the direction of the pier and the course for entering the harbor. The Life Saving Station is near the inner end of the north pier at Manistee. GRANDE POINTE AU SABLE LIGHT-STATION — A fixed white light, 3d order, visible lYf miles. Yellow tower, 100 feet high, connected by a covered way with dwelling, all of yellow brick. A coast light- on Grande Pointe au Sable, east shore of Lake Michigan. Petite Pointe au Sable light-house, 8. 28i miles. Point Betsey light, N. by E. i E., 46 miles. The Life Saving Station is close to the light-house on the south side. Hamlin is 2 miles south of Big Point au Sable; it has a small pier. Lincoln is 5^ miles to the southward of Big Point au Sable, and 2k miles north of Ludington. It has a harbor of very limited capacity. LUDINGTON PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A fixed red light, 6t'a order, visible 8^ miles. A white, open, frame-work tower, 20 feet high, near the end of the south pier at Ludington, Michigan, out- let of Pere Marquette lake. The harbor works consist of two parallel piers and a dredged channel between them, connecting the deep water in Pere Marquette lake with the deep water in Lake Michigan. Width between piers, 260 fpet at the outer end; as now constructed the south pier extends 350 feet beyond the north pier. Direction of the piers about W. ^ N. Ludington is the terminus of the Flint uth pier for a distance of 450 feet; it then converges towards the }uth pier so as to contract the width between the piers to about 186 feet. The Life Saving Station is on the north pier. Bangle Light. — A fixed red light shown from a tubular lantern >n a post, 25 feet above the level of the lake. On the outer end of the kouth pier. This light will be visible in clear weather 2 to 3 miles, and rill form with the piei'head light a range showing the direction of the Dier, and the course for entering the harbor. Bank Point. Lake Muskegon.— Black can buoy in 12 feet yf water. Marks the extreme point of the shoal, extending three-fourths }f a mile to the southward of Bank point, in Lake Muskegon, and also larks the turning point of the lake. There is no passageway to the lorthward of the buoy. Vessels bound to Muskegon will steer IL. ^ S. on leaving the cut and pass to the southward of the buoy, then haul up to E. ^ N. until abreast of the docks. Entrance to the out bears from Ithe buoy west 1|^ miles. Good anchorage in from 4 to 8 fathoms. Black Lake, or the Crimea, is 4f miles S. E. by S. ^ S. from [Muskegon. There are two slab piers, but not sufficient water to enter. [Vessels load outside. The shore from Big Point au Sable to St. Joseph is bold, and can [be approached at any place to within 2,000 feet. GBAND HAVEN LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white I light, varied by white flashes, 4th order, visible 15^ miles. The interval between flashes is 00 seconds. White tower, 24 feet high, attached to I dwelling, lantern black. Light 70 feet above lake level. A coast and [harbor light on the bluff at the south side of the entrance into Qrand i Haven, Michigan. Grand Haven Pierhead Beacon-liffht.— A fixed white [light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 26 [feet high; 3U0 feet from the outer end of the south pier at the entrance to Grand Haven. Width between piers, 400 feet. During thick or ' ^^SSY weather there is sounded a steam-siren, giving blasts of 5 seconds at intervals of 30 seconds. The fog-signal house is on the pier adjoining ■ and inside of the beacon. Signal in duplicate. Muskegon Pier Light, N. N. W. i W., 12^ miles. Kalamazoo Pier light, S. i E., 27^ miles. The harbor works consist of two parallel piers with a dredged channel connecting the deep water in Lake Michigan with the deep water in Grand river. As now constructed the north pier projects about 1,156 feet beyond the shore line, and the south pier about 1,350 feet. The shoalest water on the bar last fall was 14 feet, by keeping near the south pier 15 to 16 feet could be carried in. Bange Lights. — A fixed red light shown from a tubular lantern on a post, 26 feet above the level of the lake. On the outer end of the south pier. This light will be visible in clear weather 2 to 3 miles, and will form with the pierhead light a range showing the direction of the pier and the course fur entering the harbor. Grand Haven; is the bes^ ■ ■ I' ■- \ 172 LAKE MIOHIOAir. harbor on the east shore of Lake Michigan. In heavy gales from the south or southwest a strong current sets down the shore and across the entrance, and the same in heavy gales from the northwest a strong cur rent sets to the south. The same condition is noticeable all along the east shore. In such cases vessels should be careful to keep well to wind- ward. Grand Haven is the western terminus of the Detroit, Grand Haven & Mil wank ie R. R., which keeps their steamers running through- out th'^ year. The Life Saving Station is on the north pier inside the shore line. HOLLAND, OR BLACK LAKE PIERHEAD BEA- OON-LIGHT.— A fixed red li^ht, visible 11^ miles, 5th order White, open frame-work tower, 27 feet highi Near the outer end of the south LAKH MIOHIOAN. 173 de the shore line. at the entrance to Black lake, Michigan. Width between piers, 200 »t. Grand Hayen Pier lights N. f W., 19| miles. Kalamaioo Pier rht, S. ^ B., 7f miles. The harbor improvements consist of two par- lel piers, with a dredged channel connecting the deep water in Black \e with the deep water in Lake Michigan. The piers extend into Lake [ichigan about 700 feet from the shore line. Direction of piers, west, ^epth of water, on the bar just outside the piers and at the entrance, iere are 12 feet, but between the piers for a distance of 800 feet there only 6 feet. A cut 26 feet wide and 12 feet deep was made last July but it filled up again in the fall. The channel has been dredged out fre- luentl V, but owing to a leakage of sand through the piers, and that blown kbout by the winds from the sand hills, the depth cannot be maintained. Raiif^e Llg^ht. — Fixed red light, tubular lantern suspended on a >st, 25 feet above the level of the lake. On outer end of south pier, id forms with the pierhead light, a range showing the direction of the irbor entrance. Life Saving Station near inner end of south pier. Pig^eon Lake is 9 miles north of Hollana. KALAMAZOO PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.—A ced white light, 6th order, visible llf miles. White, open frame-work >wer, 27 feet high. Near the outer end of the south pier, at the entrance > Kalamazoo river. Width between piers, 225 feet. Holland Pier light, r. ^ W., 7f miles. Chicago main light, S. W. f W., 90 miles. The har- or works consist of two parallel piers and a dredged channel between lem connecting Lake Michigan with the Kalamazoo river. The south ier extends 288 feet beyond the north pier. The direction of the pier W. by S. In September, last there was a narrow channel dredged >8S the outer bar 12 feet deep, but in the fall there was scant 8 feet; le best water was on a line with the south pier close-to. SOUTH HAVEN PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A ed red light, visible 11^ miles, 5th order. White, open frame-work >wer, 27 feet high. Near the outer end of the South pier, at South kven, entrance of South Black river. Width between piers, 180 feet, je north pier extends 60 feet beyond the south pier. St. Joseph Pier iht, S. S. W. i W., 22i miles. Chicago main light, 8. W. by W. f W., ri miles. The improvement at this harbor consists of two parallel piers, snding from the mouth of South Black river into Lake Michigan. Krection of piers, W. I S. On the bar outside, the depth of water last Wmer was 12^ feet, between the ends of the piers 13 to 14 feet, and ^rther up not more than 10 feet. The Life Saving station is on tho th pier. Signal-Service Station on lieht-houfje reservation. Between Soutli Haven and St. Joseph tliere are several piers at which vessels of lit draught can load. ST. JOSEPH LIGHT-STATION.-A fixed white light, varied by white lies at intervals of 90 seconds, 4th order, visible 1 7 miles. Lantern on white frame dling, 44 feet high, on the bluff south of the harbor in tho city of St. Joseph, Signal-Service Station 400 yards north of light-house. St. Joseph Pierhead Beacon-llglit.— A fixed red light, Sth order, vis- • Of miles. White, open frame-work tower, light 60 feet above lake leveL Near outer end of the north pier, at the entrance to St. Joseph river, Michigan. A f-bcll, struck by machinery, at the pierhead light, during thick and foggy weather give 1 stroke at intervals of 80 seconds. Width between piers, 240 feet. Mich- I City Pier light, S. W. i 8. , 84^ miles. Kalamazoo Pier light, N. by E. | E., 41 «. Chicago main light, W. 8. W. | W., 61 miles. The harbor improvement consists of two piers connecting^St. Joseph river with te Michigan. Direction of piers, N. W. by W. i W. Depth of water: Last 174 LAKB MICHIGAN. Jane, on tbe bar ontside the piers, tbei^e was 15 feet, between the pien| and to the ore docks 16 feet, and theuce to Benton harbor 18 feet. Ig the fall not more than 13 feet was to be found at the ent/anoe. A san bar had formed at the break in the north pier. The Life Saving Station I is on the inner end of the north pier. Good anohorago off tbe piers in J fathoms of water. I I ^^KE MICH/ GAN LAKE MIGHIOAN. 1T6 Rangfe Lig^ht* — Owing to the formation of a bar ontside of the . jth pier, the fixed red tabular lantern range light shown from a post ^t the outer end of the south pier has been temporarily dUeontinuea. Channel Bu9y* — Blaclk 2G-foot spar buoy marks the north side the channel, at the end of the shoal making out from the north pier, ^erhead light-house, E. f N., 360 yards. The red buoy has been removed >m the opposite sid^^the channel. As regards the depth of water at lis harbor, no reliabl^feprmation can be given, owing to sadden f orma- ion of sand depositlHjn inside and outside of the piers, caused by ^eavy gales. ^^ The Shore from St. Joseph to Michigan City is bold, and can be Ipproacbed to within 2,000 feet, except for a short distance south of the lers at St. Joseph, where a shoal extends 8,000 feet There are several piers between St. Joseph and Michigan City. At and Marais, 8 miles; Greenbush, 17| miles; Chickaming, 19 miles; Tilkinson, 20^ miles, and Union 22 miles, all of which bear about S. S. r. i W. from St. Joseph beacon-light. New Buffalo is 0| miles N. E. by E. from Michigan City. There no light at New Buffalo and the harbor is not available for commerce. MICHIGAN CITY MAIN LIGHT.— A fixed white light, lible 13f miles, 5th order, tower rising from yellow brick dwelling 34 St high. Near the east side of entrance to the harbor. Chicago main |ght, W. N. W. f W., 38^ miles. St. Joseph pierhead light, N. E. i N., miles. Beacon Lights. — A fixed red light near the outer end of the sakwater pier and a fixed white light near the inner end of the break- Iter pier. These two lights form a ran^e for entering the harbor. A ced red light on the easterly end of the outer breakwater, and a MioHioAK crrr. 17« LAKB MIOHIOAN. \ fixed white light on the outer end of the west harbor pier; these lighti are all shown from tubular lanterns suspended on masts. They are maintained by the U. S. engineer in charge of the harbor works. Tbe two lights on the breakwaterpier, red and white, are 320 feet apart, and bear from each other N. by W. 1 W. and S. by E. f E. Michigan City harbor improvements consist of an inner har- bor and ail outer basin. The inner harbor, j||k mouth of the creek, has been widened and dredged. The uppaRp|bding basin is com- pleted. Y%f' The Outer Basin. — A jner starts from the shore at a 'point \,4()0 feet east of the entrance to the inner harbor and extends about N. K. if, into the lake 1,100 feet, connecting with a "breakwater" which runs ir 4vV S. W. direction to within 200 feet of the outer end of the west pier, from »Li8 point a pier "called the breakwater pier which is now conf-pieted, projects into the lake in a N. by W. f W. direction 600 feet. There IB an opening between the inne ' end of the breakwater pier and tbe outer end of the old eatit pier of 480 feet. The basin eiiclosed has an area 3f about 36 acres, but it has net been dredged to a sufficient depth to be of much service. Outer Breakwater. — ^The east end of the Outer Breakwater begins at a point 400 feet W. S. W. from the outer end of the break- waterpier, (600 feet of which is now under contract), and is to extend in a westerly direction 1,000 feet to the angle, this part is called the east arm, thence in a direction about S. S. W. 1,000 feet to wi lin 460 feet of the 18-foot curve of the shore, this part will be known as he west arm. If completed as proposed it will afford an area of protection against northerly winds of about 30 acres. Entering the harbor run straight in, S. by E. f E., keeping a look out for tbe end of the west harbor ?ier. There is good anchorage off the harbor in from 6 to 8 fatbomB. he Life Saving Station is on the old east pier near the shore line. The Shore around the south end of the lake as far as the Calu- met is bold, with the exception of two 18-foot spots, which bear S. £. by £. f E. from the Calumet Pierhead light, 6^ milas. Stamhng North Along the West Shore of Lake Michigan. Calumet Pierhead Beacqn-Llght.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 1 If miles. .Gray, open framework tower, 30 feet liigh. An elevated walk along the pier to the shore. On the outer end of the north pier at the entrance to the Calumet river, 11 miles to the south- eastward of the Chicago breakwater. Chicago Water Works crib, K. by W. \ W., 12^ miles. Michigan city harbor piera E. \ N., 32^ miles. The harbor improvements consist of two parallel piers, 300 feet apart, projecting from the shore in a N. E. by E. direction into Lake Miohigan. The north pier is 8,640 feet in length and projects 1,320 fefl'.< Trom the shore line; the south pier is 2,020 feet in length and pro- jects about 1,600 feet into the lake from the C. and C. C. and D. Co's. breakwater. The north pier extends into the lake 1,600 feet beyond the south pier. Depth of water: Last July, the channel was dredged to 10 feet, but in the fall not more than 16 feet could be carried to tha MICHIGAN. 177 bor pier; these lighu on masts. They art B harbor works. Tbe are 320 feet apart, and fE. isist of an inner har- .mouth of the creek, nding basin is con- shore at a '^oint 1,400 :tend8 about N. N. W, ter" which runs ir avV the west pier, from tbis 3h is now conr.pieted, tion 600 feet. There akwater nier and the »asin e&cfosed has an i to a sufficient depth he Outer Breakwater ;er end of the break- it), and is to extend in art is oalled the east b to wi in 450 feet of own as che west am. of proteoticn against !) harbor run straight d of the w&f>t harbor Tom 6 to 8 fathoms. ear the shore line. as far as the Calu- ts, which bear S. £. 38. f Lake Michigan, \ fixed red Mgbt, 4th tower, 30 feet liigh. the outer end of the 1 1 miles to the south- ater Works crib, K. rd B. i N., 32^ miles. allel piers, SCO feet direction into Lake and projects 1,320 et in length and pro- id C. C. and D. Co's. 1,600 feet beyond the lannel was dredged uld be canned to tho lling Mills slip, which is 2,800 feet from the outer end of the north pier. le Life Saviiag Station is inside the piers on the north side of the river. OALUHBT. Clark's Point Shoal (off Calumet).— Red spar buoy, in 18 Bt of water. Marks the east side of Rocky reef. If miles from Cain- Pier ligbt, and by keeping 300 feet outside of this buoy, and head- 200 yards east of pier light, no less than 18 feet of water will be id. No vessel should attempt to pass between this buoy and the re. Calumet Pier light, S. f E., If miles. South Park Shoal* — Red and black horizontal sl^ripes, 2d-clasB I buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks the east end of the 11-foot shoal off ith Park. This shoal is nearly 2 miles from the beach, and inside it and the Hyde Park buoy there is a channel f of a mile wide. ssels using it must keep half a mile to the westward of the buoys, [timet Pier light, S. by £. f E., 4^ miles. Chicago Pier light, N. W. *l\ miles. Hyde Park Shoal. — Red and black horizontal stripes, 8d-claM buoy in 18 feet of wa^er. Marks the east side of a small 16-foot \ off Hyde Pane, 111., 2 miles from the beach. Calumet Pier light, [by E. i E., 6i miles. Chicago Pier light, N. W. f N., 6^ miles. Morgan's Point.— Black, 16-foot spar buoy in 11 feet of water. rks the west side of a small 6-foot shoal outside the wharves at Hyda krk, 111. Small vessels keeping close to the shore, between Chioaso 4 South Chicago, shouldpass between it and the shore. Chicago Pier ^ht-station, N. by W. f W., 6^ miles. }hioagr<> Breakwater Beaoon-liipht (south).— A fixed red 6th order, visible 10 miles. .White, open frame-work toweri 80 178 LAKB MIOHIOAir. feet high. On the north side of the southern opening in the breakvau forming the outer harbor of Chicago. The breakwater commenwii on the south side of the entrance into the Chicago river^and. ^xtw^rTl -••<»4<'>fii«»J*r^S-7«r!}srSiiurt, and will bear E. by S. f 8., about 3^ miles, from the Pierhead saoon-light. The Middle orib has been placed at a point about 800 feet »uth of a point 2^ miles due east of Peck court and in line with the 180 LAKE mOHIOAN. Oater crib and Park row, and will bear S. E. f B. about 2^ milea from the Pierhead beaoon-light. Both cribs will be lighted by fixed white lan- tern lights placed aloft, and also by the lights used to carry on the work. Chicago Life Saving Station is on the south harbor pier, opposite the main light. GBOSSE POINTE LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied by red flashes, visible 18^ miles, 2d order. The interval between flashes is 3 minutes. Tellow tower, 99 feet high, connected by a covered way with brick dwelling. A coast-light on Grosse Pointe, 12^ miles from the Chicago light-house. During thick and foggy weather a 10-inch steam whistle will sound blasts of 6 seconds at intervals of 20 and 4o seconds. Focal plane 119^ feet above lake level. Chicago light-hoase, S. by E. f E., 12^ miles. Waukegan light-house, N.N. W. i W., 2 If miles. Evanston is pleasantly situated on Grosse Pointe. It has two pile piers, with from 10 to 11 feet of water at each. The Life Saving Station is on the Northwestern University grounds. Highland Park, lO miles north of Gross.' Pointe, on the North- western Railroad, has a pier extending 1,000 feet into the lake in an easterly direction; 14 to 16 feet of water. WAUKEGAN LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 14 miles, 6th order. White tower, rising from frame dwelling, 86 feet high. On the bluff, south side of Little Fort river, in the town of Waukegan, Illinois, ab«^ut 300 yards from the beach. There is good anchorage in 4 fathoms northeast from the outer end of the old pile pier. The point north of Waukegan protects the anchorage from northwest winds. Wauke^'^an Harbor works in process. The works are located a little north of the old pile pier. The project is to enclose a small basin by projecting piers into the lake, and obtaining additional room by dredging a channel from the basin through the low ground between the lake and bluffs. The south pier, as now constructed is 900 feet long and extends into the lake £. ^ N. The north pier extends into the lake 530 feet from the angle, direction E. by S. -^ S., thence E. ^ N. 392 feet. The north pier extends 200 feet beyond the south pier. Width between the outer ends of the piers 220 feet. In consequence of the large deposit of sand in the vicinity of the harbor it wiU be difficult to maintain any considerable depth of water. KENOSHA, OR SOUTHPORT LIGHT-STATION.- A fixed white light, varied by white flashes; the interval between flashes is 90 seconds, 4th order, visible lef miles. Yellow tower, 66 feet high; yellow dwelling detached. A coast and harbor light on the north side of the entrance to Kenosha harbor, about 100 jrards from the beach, and 10 miles to the southward of Racine, Wind Point (Racine Point) light- house, N. f E., 13f miles. Kenosha Pierhead Beacon-light.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 30 feet high. Near the end of the north pier, at the entrance to Kenosha harbor. Width between the piers, 170 feet. The harbor improvements consist of two parallel piers, extend- ing into the lake E. | N., with a dredged channel between them, con- necting Pike creek with the deep water in Lake Michigan. As now con- structed the north pier extends 2*70 feet into the lake beyond the south LAKE MICH lO AH. 181 about 2^ miles from id by fixed white Ian- to carry on the work, bor pier, opposite tlie • — A fixed white light rhe interval between anected by a covered Dinte,12i miles from J weather a 10-inch ervals of 20 and 4o Chicago light-house '.W.iW.,21f miles.' inte. It has two pile CTniversity grounds. ointe, on the North- into the lake in an fixed white light, m frame dwelling,' river, in the town oh. There is good of the old pile pier. ge from northwest e works are located Qclose a small basin dditional room by round between the is 900 feet long and Is into the lake 530 E. i N. 892 feet. . Width between )f the large deposit ifiicult to maintain T-STATION.- val between fiashes wer, 66 feet high; t on the north side 'om the beach, and loine Point) light- ixed red light, eth wer, 80 feet high. «ha harbor. Width pier. Depth of water. — Last Aogust, in mid-channel there was more than 14 feet, but in the fall not more than 11 feet could be carried in. The Life Saving Station is a little inside the inner end of the north pier. BAOINE LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, ^visible 18:^ miles. Tellow tower, 36 feet high, rising from brick dwelling. ' On the north pier, at the entrance into Root river, Racine, about 210 yards inside of the outer end of the pier. This light kept open to the north- 182 LAKB MIOHIQAN. ward of Pierhead light insures clearing Raoine reef. Wind Point (Raoine Point) light-house, N. by E. i E., 3f miles. Racine Pierhoad Beacon-light.— A fixed red light, 6th erder, visible Similes. White, open framc-^rork tower, 80 feet high. Near the outer end of the north pier at the entrance into Racine bar* bor. Width between the piers, 270 feet. Main light bears W. i S. 650 feet. Racine Harbor. — The improvements consist of two piers and a dredged channel between them, connecting the mouth of Root river with the deep water of Lake Michigan. The north pier as now con- structed extends 50 feet farther into the lake than the south pier, Direction of piers E. by N. The two lights in range lead to the end of the north pier, and is a guide to enter the harbor at night. Depth of water: Owing to the formation of sand bars at the outer ends of the piers no reliable information can be given. The Life Saving Station is inside the harbor. Racine Reef. — Red, Ist-class can buoy, in 17 feet of water. On the westerly edge of Racine reef, and about 500 yards 8. W. hj W. from its shoalest spot, which lies E. by S., 1^ miles from Racine light-house. The reef extends in an E. N. E. and W. S. W. direction about five-eighths of a mile, and north and south about three-eighths of a mile, with 8 feet of water on its shoalest part. The channel between the reef and the city has a depth of water from 3 to 6 fathoms; sand and clay. Racine Pier light, W. N. W. f W., If miles. Wind Point light-house (Racine Point), N. by W., 3 J miles. This reef is covered by a red light, dis- played from the watch room in the tower at Wind Point light-station. Racine Reef, East End. — Red sjpar buoy, 25 feet long, in 18 feet of water. Marks the eastern point of Racine reef, least depth of water between the buoys is 8 feet. Racine Pierhead light, W. f N., 2J miles. Wind Point light, N. by W. ^ W., 3f miles. WIND POINT. OR RACINE POINT, LIGHT-STA- TION. — A flashing white light, 3d order, visible 18 miles; interval be- tween flashes, 30 seconds. In addition to the 3d-order light there ia dis- plaved from the watch-room window of the same tower, immediately under the main light, a small fixed bbd light of the 6th order, with an arc of illumination covering Racine reef, a dangerous ledge of rocks, lying 8. by E. i E., 4 miles distant from the light-house. This red light is visible between the bearings N. ^ W. and N. N. W. ^ W., from pea- ward. Yellow tower, 102 feet high, connected by a covered way with brick dwelling, both yellow. On Wind Point, 3^ miles north of Kacine light, Wisconsin. During thick and foggy weather, there is sounded at this station a 10-inoh steam fog-whistle, giving a blast of 3 seconds, fol- lowed by an interval of 26 seconds; then a blast of 6 seconds, fol- lowed by an interval of 26 seconds. Milwaukee (North point) light- house, N. by W. J W., 20^ miles. Grosse Pointe light-house, 8. i E., 60^ miles. Milwaukee Pierhead Beacon-light.~A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 32 feet high. On the outer end of the north pier, at the entrance into Milwao- LAKE MIOHIQAN. IPS kee river. Width between piers, 286 feet. During thick or foggy weather, a steam-whistle is sounded, giving blasts of 5 seconds at inter- vals of 55 seconds. The fog-signal house is on the pier, inside of and adjoining the beacon-light. The keeper's dwelling, with the tower of the old discontinued light attached, both built of Milwaukee brick, is on the north pier, inside of the Pierhead light. Milwaukee light-house, N. by E. f E., 3 miles. Milwaukee Harbor. — This improvement consists of two par- allel piers and a dredged channel between them, known as the "North cut," connecting the deep water in Milwaukee river with the deep water in Milwaukee bay. The piers are of equal length, about 1,800 feet. Direction, L. 4r N. Depth of water: The channel between the piers for a width of 100 feet, is 16 feet deep. The Life Saving Station is near the inner end of the south pier. Harbor of Refugee, in Milwaukee bay, in process of constrac- tion. The project is to construct a breakwater, the north arm of which commences near North j- jint at a distance of about 600 feet from the north shore of the bay, in a depth of 8 feet of water, and extends S. S. E. I E., 2,460 feet to the north angle. From this point the direction of the main arm of the breakwater is changed to S. ^ W. for the proposed distance of 5,200 feet, with an opening of 400 feet at a distance of 1,000 feet from the angle to provide a fair weather entrance and exit for vessels. Present Condition of the Work.— The north arm of the breakwater, 2,450 feet is completed, and 1,U00 feet of the main arm of the breakwater to the 40Q feet opening is completed, and the main arm south of the 400 feet opening has been extended. 400 feet. A light-ship; painted red, is anchored at the south end of the unfinished breakwater, just inside with room to swing. A red and white light is shown verti- cally, white above red. Depth of water: The 18-foot curve of the bottom extends from about the middle of the north arm of the breakwater to the outer end of the harbor piers, and about a uniform distance from the shore, nearly MILWAUKKK. 184 LAKB MIOHIGAN. [ ^ 2,000 feet. The average depth alonq the south arm of the breakwater is 84 feet From the south end of the breakwater, as it now exists, to the east end of the harbor piers is 7,200 feet, bearing S. W. by S. f s! Dangers,— About 4 miles southeast from Milwaukee Pierhead light there are shoal spots three-fourths of a mile from shore, with from 13 to 16 feet of water over them. A O-fcot spot lies half a mile east from Fox point, 7 miles north of Milwaukee light, and a 14-foot spot two-thirds of a mile from shore, 3^ miles north of Fox point. With the above exceptions the shore in the vicinity of Milwaukee bay is bold, and can be approached within half a mile from shore. There is no reef off Milwaukee North point. MILWAUKEE lilGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied by white flashes, at intervals of 2 minutes, 4th order, visible 18| miles. Brown tow^, 28 feet high, attached to white frame dwelling, light 122 feet above lake level. A coast-light, on the extreme north point of Milwaukee bay, 3 miles to the northward of the entrance into the harbor. Milwaukee Pier light, 8. by W. f W., 3 miles. Wind Point (Racine Point) light-house, S. by E. } £., 2o| miles. TJlaOy 4f miles south of Port Washington, has a pile pier. South of the pier there are shoal spots with 11 feet over them half a mile from shore, and a 9-foot spot 600 feet east from the pier. PORT WASHINGTON lilGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 18^ miles, 4th order. Lantern on yellow brick dwelling, 40 feet high. A coast-light, on the bluff in the north part of the town of Port Washington, about 23 miles to the northward of Milwaukee, and 27^ miles to the southward and westward of Sheboygan. Port Washington Pierhead Beacon-ligrht.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, lan- tern black with brown parapet, upper part of tower inclosed for a watch room. On the outer end of the north pier at the entrance to the harbor of Port Washington. Milwaukee North point, S. ^ E., 23 miles. Little Point Sable light, E. N. E., 70 miles. Port Washington Harbor. — This improvement consists of two parallel piers, about 160 feet apart, extending from the shore line into 14 feet of water. The north pier is 920 feet long, and extends 100 feet beyond the south pier. Together with the formation of two interior basins, with an area of 2f and 3 acres respectively. Depth of water: In September, 1889, there was a channel 76 feet wiJe and 12 feet deep adjacent to the north pier, and a navigable channel of the same depth on the east and west sides of the north basin, and the north side of the west basin. Along the south pier, for about 60 feet therefrom, the depth is from 6 to 8 feet. Boulders and parts of a wreck make it dan- gerous near the south pier. Rouksville, lOJ^ miles, and Amsterdam, 12i miles, north of Port Washington, have pile piers extending into deep water. The shore from Ulao to Sheboygan is bold, and can be approached at any place within one-third to half a mile. Sheboygan Pierhead Beacon-Light.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 26 feothigh. On the outer end of the north pier at the entrance to the Sheboygan river, about 60 miles to the northward of Milwaukee. Width between piers, 256 feet. Sheboygan light-house, N. f E., 1 mile. LAKE MIOHIOAN. 186 L arm of the breakwater ter, as it now existg, to A'ing S. W. by S. f S. a Milwaukee Pierhead e from shore, with from »ot lies half a mile east wht, and a 14-foot spot if Fox point. With the waukee bay is bold, and e. There is no reef off — A fixed white light, 8, 4th order, visible 18| ' white frame dwelling, t, on the extreme north ird of the entrance into ''., 3 miles. Wind Point iles. has a pile pier. South ir them half a mile from ier. LTION.— A fixed white I yellow brick dwelling, north part of the town ward of Milwaukee, and sboygan. ►n-light.— A fixed red frame-work tower, Ian- iv^er inclosed for a watoh e entrance to the harbor }. ^ E., 23 miles. Little aprovemont consists of ag from the shore line feet long, and extends 1 the formation of two •espectively. Depth of el 76 feet wi3e and 12 able channel of the same in, and the north side of 60 feet therefrom, the a wreck make it dan- 2i miles, north of Port water, id can be approached at it. — A fixed red light, irork tower, 26 feet high ance to the Sheboygan nkee. Width between 1 mile. The Harbor improvements consist of two piers conneotinjf the mouth of the Sheboygan river with the deep water in Lake Michigan, and a dredged channel between them, and deepening the river inside the {>ier8. The north pier projects 1,725 feet into the lake from the shore ine, and 60 feet beyond the south pier. As regards the depth of water in the channel, no reliable information can be given. The Life Saving Station is in the harbor on the east side. Direction of the piers, east, their width increases from 190 feet at the shore line to 256 at their outer ends. Sheboygan Reef (south end). — Red, 3d class can buoy in 24 feet of water. Off the south end of Sheboygan reef, the center of which i lies N. E. I N., seven-eighths of a mile from Sheboygan Pier light. The 'reef is 600 yards in extent, north and south, with 7 feet of water on its shoalest part. There is a narrow passage-way about 300 yards wide, between the reef and the land, but this should not be attempted by strangers. [Sheboygan Pier light, S. W. f W., 1,400 yards. Sheboygan light-house, i N, W. f N., five-eighths of a mile. Sheboygan Beef (north end).— Bed, 3d class can buoy in 24 feet of water. Off the northeast end of Sheboygan reef. Least depth ; of water between the buoys, 7 feet. Sheboygan light-house, W. N. W. i^ W., 800 yards. SHEBOYGAN IiIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white li^ht, [6th order, visible 16 miles. Lantern on white dwelling, 34 feet high. On a point 1 mile to the northward of the entrance into Sheboygan river, [Wisconsin. liinzvillo, 8^ miles N. by W. ^ W. from Sheboygan light, has a [pile pier extending into deep water. Gentervine, lOj miles N. by W. from Sheboygan light, has two [pile piers. Yorkville, 12| miles N. f W. from Sheboygan I'^ht, has two pile Lpiers. Nordheim, 16f miles N. ^ W. from Sheboygan light, has two [pile piers. There are many shoals and rooky spots along the shore, from Sheboy- in to the south point of Manitowoc bay, rendering navigation dangerous rithin three-fourths to seven-eighths of a mile from shore, particularly in the vicinity of Yorkville and Centerville. Outside in from 4 to 6 Fathoms the bottom is generally clay with a light covering of sand, MANITOWOC PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 29 feet high. Near the end of the north pier, at the entrance into Manito- roo river. Width between piers, 250 feet. The old light-house is in khe town of Manitowoc, near the inner end of the north pier. A bell is Itruck by machinery, two blows in quick succession at intervals of 30 soonds, during thick or foggy weather. Twin River Point light-house, r. E. ^ N., lOJ miles. The Harbor improvements consist of two piers, with a dredged channel connecting the mouth of the Manitowoc river with the deep water |>f Lake Michigan. They are 228 feet apart at the shore line, and 250 at |;be outer end, direotion E. ^ N. Depth of water: In May, last year, \ 186 LAKE MIOHIOAN. there was 16 feet at the entrance, and a channel midway between the ?ier8 aboat 100 feet wide with a depth of 14 feet. There is no oater bar. 'he pier ends are opposite to each other. Manitowoc Bay has good anchotage, and affords protection from all winds, except from northeast by the eastward to south. The shore is bold, and can be approached within one-third of a mile. TWO RIVERS PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.-a fixed red lisfht, visible 8^ miles. On the outer end of the north pier harbor of Two Rivers. White open frame tower, the upper part encloaed for a watch room. Lantern black, light 35^ feet above lake level. She- boygan light-house, Wis., 8. by W., 27^^ miles; Manitowoc Pierhead light, Wis., 8. W., 6i miles; Grande Pointe au Sable light-house, Mich. E., 63 miles. Two Rivers Harbor. — The improvements consist of two par- allel piers and a dredged channel between them, connecting the mouth of the river with the deep water in Lake Michigan. The north pier ii 1,810 feet long, and the south pier 1,710. Width between piers at the outer end, 250 feet. Depth of water: The channel is midway between the piers, 90 feet wide and 12 feet deep. Direction of piers, S. E. | S. The Life Saving Station is at the entrance on the north side. TWIN RIVER POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, varied by white flashes every 30 seconds, 3d order, visible 18 miles. White tower, 100 feet high, connected by a covered way with dwelling. A coast light, on Rawley's point, about 6 miles to the north- ward of Twin rivers. The light stands on a low sandy shore. Pine barrens to the north, south and west. The fog-signal is a 10-incb staam whistle, giving blasts of 5 seconds duration at alternate intervals of 10 and 40 seconds. Fog signal house is on the beach 225 feet southeast of the light-house. Grande Pointe au Sable light, E. f S., 50 miles. Petite Pointe au Sable light, S. E. by E., 62 miles. Good anchorage and shelter from S. and S. S. E. gales can be found in the bight 6^ miles north of Twin River point. Come-to in 4 or 6 fathoms of water. Two Creeks, 7 miles north of Twin River Point light, has a pile pier. Dean's Pier is 13 miles to the northward of Twin River Point light. KEWAUNEE PIERHEAD BE ACON-LIGHT.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. Red, square frame-work tower, black lantern, with brown parapet. The upper part of the tower is inclosed for a watch room. On the outer end of the north pier, at the entrance to the harbor of Kewaunee. Entrance to Ahnepee river, N, by E. i E., 11 mV.en. Twin River Point li^ht-house, S. i E., 17^ miles. Ran^e Light. — A fixed red light, shown from a tubular lantern •uupended 25 feet above the lake level from a post set at the outer end of the north pier. This light will form with the main pierhead light a range showing the direction of the pier and the course into the harbor Kewaunee Harbor. — The improvement consists in the forma- tion of a channel, from a point about 2,000 feet south of the mouth of the Kewaunee river, through a spit 300 feet wide, connecting the river with the deep water in Lake Michigan. The piers have been extended, the pierhead light moved out, and the channel dredged. Width between LAKE MICHIGAN. 187 I midway between the . There is no outer bar. and affords protection ;astward to south. The third of a mile. lACON-LIGHT.~A end of the north pier , the upper part enclosed i above lake level. She- s; Manitowoc Pierhead Sable light-house, Mich., ents consist of two par- n, connecting the mouth igan. The north pier ii Ith between piers at the nnel is midway between ition of piers, S. £. f S. e north side. STATION.— A fixed jnds, 3d order, visible 18 by a covered way with )ut 5 miles to the north- low sandy shore. Pine signal is a 10-inch stoam iilternate intervals of 10 ch 225 feet southeast of E. f S., 60 miles. Petite L E. gales can be found )int. Come-to in 4 or 6 r Point light, has a pile rd of Twin River Point )N-LIGHT.-A fixed lare frame-work tower, ar part of the tower is f the north pier, at the e to Ahnepee river, N, juse, S. i E., IH miles. from a tubular lantern ost set at the outer end e main pierhead light a course mto the harbor t consists in the forma- Houth of the mouth of le, connecting the river ers have been extended, edged. Width between piers, 200 feet. Direction of piers, E. S. E. As now constructed, the north pier extends about 70 feet beyond the south pier. The shore from Twin River point to Ahnepee is generally bold, and can be approached at any place to within one-half to five-eighths of a mile. About 1^ miles S. 8. E. from the dock at Dean's, and nearly half a mile from shore, there is a shoal with only 3 feet of water on it. There is a 6-foot spot about 1,000 feet N. E. from the outer end of the north harbor pier at Kewaunee. Ahnepee is 28 miles N. i E. from Twin River Point light. Pier- head light-house to bt built. Harbor Improvement. — The first project was for the forma- tion of a small harbor connecting with the lake by a channel, to be formed by the construction of two piers 100 feet apart. Also for blast- ing and dredging rock from the river bed. The original project was modified so that in extending the piers they were placed 50 feet further from the center line of the channel than the old piers, making the chan- nel at the entrance 200 feet wide, narrowing to 100 feet. Direction of pierS) S. E. by E. Along^ the shore from Ahnepee to within 2 miles of Sturgeon Bay iSbip-canal, shoal water extends from three-quarters to 1^ miles from ! shore. There is a shoal 1^ miles, E. ^ N. of the piers at Ahnepee, with 17 feet of water on it; another E. N. E. ^ N., half a mile from the outer end of the piers and one-quarter of a mile from shore, with 12 feet of water over it. From 2 to 4 miles south of the piers at Sturgeon Bay I Ship-canal there are several shoal spots 1^ miles from shore, with from 13 to 15 feet of water over them. STURGEON BA.Y CANAL PIERHEAD LIGHT.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 8^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 29 feet high. On the end of the north pier, at the entrance to Harbor of Refuge and Sturgeon Bay Ship-canal. During thick and foggy weather there is sounded a 10-inch steam-whistle, giving blasts of 6 seconds' duration at intervals of 25 seconds. Fog signals adjoining light-house on north pier. Point Betsey light, E. f S., 63 miles. South Fox Island light, N. E. by E. i E., 83 miles. In passing through Stur- geon bay from the eastward, black buoys will be left on the starboard and and red buoys to port. Harbor of Refugee at the Entrance of Sturgeon Bay Ship-canal. — The harbor works oonsist of two piers 1,200 feet long, 850 teet apart at the shore line, and 235 feet apart at the outer ends, inclosing a basin of 10 acres, at the lake entrance to the canal. Beyond the piers are two detached piers, each 150 feet long and 335 feet between their outer ends, which are in 18 feet of water. Each detached pier is [Connected to the main pier by a double row of fender piling. Depth of [Water, last September, there was 16 feet at the entrance, thence to [the canal on the center line between the piers there was a depth of 15^ to 16 feet for a width of 75 feet. In the southwest corner ot the basin, ! 100 feet from the channel leading into the canal, there are rocks with [only 11^ feet of water over them. Entering the harbor steer straight [in between the piers and into the canal N. W. ^ W. Life Saving Station |bn eastern entrance of canal, north end. White Fish Point. — Red spar buoy, in 17 feet of water. Marks [the end of the shoal off the point. From VVIiite Fish point to Sturgeon 188 LAKK MIOHIOAN. 8TUEQE0N BAY CANAL. HI Bay Ship-canal, the coast trends in a southwesterly direction; there an shoals and rocky spii/S, rendering the coast dangerous to a distance of over 1 mile from shore. Sturgeon Bay Canal light, 8. W. ^ W., 1\ miles. The range leads over foul ground. White Fish point N. W. | W., 1 mile, BAYLEY'S HARBOR RANGE LIGHTS. — Front liisht, fixed white, 6th order, visible 10^ miles. White tower, V^ feet j high. Rear iLiirht, lixed white, 5th order, visible 13 miles, lantern on white frame dwelling, 24 feet high, on the north shore of Baylev's harbor, a little north of the village of Bayley's Harbor. To anchor in the harbor, bring the towers in range when 4 nailes irom the beacon; stand in on the range and anchor in 8^ or 4 fathoms of water, when between the old light-house and the village, being careful to avoid the shoal which extends about a mile to the southward of the old light-house. The entrance between the shoals at the mouth of the harbor is about three-fourths of s mile wide. The beacon and rear litrlit are in range N. N. W. and 8. 8. E., and are distant from each other 950 feet. There are three pile piers on the west side of Bay- ley's harbor with from 8 to 10 feet of water at them. On the west side of tlie bay the bottom is sand and rock, on the east side near the old light-house the bottom is mud and clay. Vessels seeking shelter in southerly gales should stand in on the ranges until nearly abreast of the old light house, when haul up for it, and come-to in auout 3^ fathoms of water close in, and avoid the swell that sets into the harbor, Bayley'ii Harbor IVUddle Ground.— Black 24-foot spar buoy, in 18 feet of water. Marks the southeastern point of the middle ground shoal in the entrance to Bayley's harbor. Front range light, N. I W., 8| miles. White Pish Point buoy, 8. by W. iW., 12mlle8. Bayley's Harbor Entrance CNorth Side).— Red 24-foot spar buoy, io 18 feet of water. Marks the southwestern point of the shoal making out from the eastern point of entrance at Bayley's harbor. Front range light, N. N. W. i W., 2i miles. Middle Ground huoy, 8. 8. W. i W., U miles. LAKB MIOHIOAH. 189 GAN terly direction; there an ngerous to a distance of al light, 8. W. i W., >i\ hite Fish point N. W. \ LIGHTS. — Front IB. White tower, IV feel | liles, lantern on white frame } harbor, a little north uf the r, bring the towers in range id anchor in 8i or 4 fathoms llage, being careful to avoid of the old light-house. The )r is about three-fourths of a N. W. and 8. 8. E., and are )iers on the west side of Bay- On the west side of the bay d light-house the bottom l< ales should stand in on the liaul up for it, and come-to b11 that sets into the harbor, 24-foot spar buoy, in 18 feet ground shoal in the entrance es. White Fish Point buoy, I.— Red 24-foot spar buoy, in shoal making out from the ge light, N. N. W. tW.,2i Hind Bay is midway between the old light-house at Bayley's harbor and Cana 'island; it has good anchorage and protection from all winds except from the south- feast. To make the anchorage, stand in for the middle of the bay beading about N.W. rby N., and come-to in about 3i fathoms well into the bay. Vessels have laid in ; Mud bay through the heaviest southcasters. CANA ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, [ad order, visible 16^ miles. Yellow brick tower, 80 feet high, conneotedby ia covered way with brick dwelling. A coast light, on Cana island, 14| Imiles S. by W. f W. of the Porte des Morts entrance to Green bay, and U miles to the northward of the entrance to Bayley's harbor. White [Fish point S. S. W. i W., 17 miles. North Bay Entrance (south side).— Black spar buoy in 14 [feet of water. Marks the extreme point of the shoal extending to the lortheastward from the south side of the entrance to North bay, which [is about 7 miles to the northward of Bayley's harbor. To enter the har- Ibor, which is small, pass midway between the buoys and round-to under Uither point, according to the direction of the wind. Care must be taken jnot to run too far in, as the anchorage ground is only three-fourths of a [mile deep from the entrance buoys. The width of the entrance between Ithe buoys is about three-eighths of a miie. Cana Island light-house, S. f [E., 2^ miles. Wood dock north side of bay N. ^ W., f mile. North Bay Entrance (north side). — Red spar buoy, in 24 Ifeet of water. Marks the point of the shoal extending to the southward [from the north side of the entrance into North bay. Cana Island light- jhouse, S. ^ W., 3 miles. RaMTlcy'fi Bay, Four-Foot Shoal.— Red 24-foot spar buoy, in 18 feet of ^Mrater. Marks the soutlieastern point of the shoal. Cana Island light-house, S. 8. [W. \ W., 5i miles. Outer Shoal buoy, N. N. E. J E., 6f miles. Rawley's Bay or False Door.— The head of this bay is 6 liles north of the entrance to the North bay; strangers should be care- |ful to avoid the shoals, whioh extend in a southerly direction from the >oint on the east side of the bay. To make the head of the bay, when jne-half mile east of the point north of the entrance to North bay, steer T. f W., 4^ miles, until Spider island bears east, when come to in 4| fathoms of water. This course leaves the Hog's back reef, on which lere is only 4 feet of water, to the eastward. Outer Shoal. — Red 2d-cla8s nun buoy in 21 feet of water. Off bhe southeast end of the extreme easterly shoal between Gravel and >ider islands, south side of the entrance into Porte des Morts passage. ^essels bound through the passage from the southward will pass one- lalf mile to the eastward of the buoy, and when abreast of it, haul up to " N. W. \ W. until abreast of Nine-foot Shoal buoy, Porte des Morts )assage, when change course to N. W. ^ W., which will lead fair into Ireen bay. Porte des Morts light-house, N. ^ E., 3^ miles. Gravel ilands, N. W. f W., 2 1-16 miles. Spider island (middle) 8. W. i W., If miles. The Coast from White Fish point to Porte des Morts, is rooky knd dangerous, with lar^e indentations fringed with rocky spits and de- shed shoals; all of which may be avoided when bound to the north- rd by steering N. N. E. when 3 miles east of White Fish point. PORTE DES MORTS LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red ight, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. Lantern on yellow brick dwelling, 14 feet high, on Pilot island, in the Porte des Morts passage, between "'ro Michigan and Green bay. During thick and foggy weather there 190 LAKE MICHIGAN. is sounded a steam-siren, giving blasts of 5 seconds at interv^lR cf 30 seconds. Cana Island light-house, S. by W. f W., 14| miles. Rocky spits extend from this island to the southeast and southwest for one quarter of a mile. Nine-foot Shoal (Porte des Slorts Passage).— Black 2d. class nun buoy in 18 feet o't water. Marks the southeast end of the 9. foot shoal in the Porte des Morts passage, on the southwest side of the channel. Vessels bouad tlircugb the passage from Lake Michigan can steer N. W. ^ W. when abreast this buoy. Porte des Morts light liouse N. E. by E. ^E., li miles. Northwest point of Plum island, N. | w' 2^ miles. Outer Shoal buoy, S. S. E. i E., 3 miles. ' To Enter Green Bay through Death's Door (Porte des Morts) passage, when 2 miles S. S. E. ^ E. of Pilot Island light, steer N. W. 1 W. until fairly into the bay. Detroit Island Passage.— Red spar buoy in 11 feet of water. On the southwest point of the shoal, which lies in the passage-way be- tween Detroit and Plum islands. The charts give 12 feet as the least depth of water on the shoal, but spots have been found with only 10 feet of water on them. The anchorage between Detroit and Plum islands is a safe one, and is frequently used, during eastern gales, by vessels bound from Green bay into Lake Michigan. The range between the west point of Washington island and Pilot Island light leads fair between this buoy and Plum island buoy, and in good water. Porte des Morts Range Lights.— To be built on the south west side of Plum island. Plum Island. — Black spar buoy in 14 feet of water. Marks the northeast point of the shoal extending to the northward from Plum island. It can be passed close-to from the northward, but on approach- ing it from the westward it should be given a berth of at least a half of a mile. Northwest end of Plum island, S. W. ^ W., ^ mile. Nine-foot Shoal (Bock Island Passage).— Red, 3d class can buoy in 21 feet of water. On the southwest side of the small 9-foot shoal in the passage into Green bay, between Rock and St. Martin's island, about 2 miles distant from the south end of St. Martin's Island and 2^ miles from Rock island. The shoal is of small extent, with deep water close-to. The usual passage-way is between the buoy and Rock island, and, unless familiar with the locality, vessels should not pass to the northward of the buoy. Pottawatomie light-house, S. W. by W". i W., 3 miles. Southeast point of St. Martin's island, N. by E. ^ E., 2^ miles. Fish island (awash), S. by E., 3f miles. POTTAWATOMIE, OR ROCK ISLAND LIGHT-STA- TION. — A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 19^ miles. Lantern on gray stone dwelling, 34 feet high, light 137 feet above lake level. On the north point of Rock island. A guide into the passage between Rock and St. Martin's islands. Off the southeast point of Rock island there are two dangerous reefs, witli rocks above wattr or awash, bearing from the point E. by S. f S. and S. S. E. -J E., distant respectively about 2^ and 3^ miles. There is a passage-way between these shoals and Wash- ington and Rock islands. Vessels from Lake Michigan for Green bay can bring the light to bear, in 18 fathoms water, from W. f N. to W. by S. i S., and stand for it, hauling half a mile to the northward as they approach the light, with the light abeam when standing for the west- ward. Southeast point of St. "Martin's island, N. E. | N., 4f LAKK MICHIGAN. 191 3onds at intervals of 30 W., U| miles. Rocky and southwest for one Passagre).— Black 2d. southeast end of the 9. he southwest side of the 'om Lake Michigan can e des Morts light house ■ Plum island, N. | w' les. ** Door (Porte des Morts) nd light, steer N. W. ^ ►uoy in 11 feet of water. in the passage-way be- ive 12 feet as the least found with only 10 feet 'oit and Plum islands is gales, by vessels bound J between the west point 8 fair between this buoy 'o be built on the south- 3t of water. Marks the northward from Phim ivard, but on approach- rth of at least a half of W., ^ mile. laage).— Red, 3d -class side of the small 9-foot Rook and St. Martin's of St. Martin's Island of small extent, with between the buoy and ty, vessels should not e light-house, S. W. by sland, N. by E. ^ E., 2'i .ND LIGHT-STA. 9^ miles. Lantern on above lake level. On passage between Rock t of Rook island there )r awash, bearing from respectively about 2^ hese shoals and Wash- chigan for Green bay •om W. f N. to W. by le northward as they tan ding for the west- E. I N., 4f miles. North point of Boyer's bluff, W. f S., 6t miles. Point Peninsula light- house, N. N. W. i W., I7i miles. POVERTY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A flashing red light, 4th order, visible 15| miles; the interval between flashes is 15 sec- onds. White tower, 65 feet high, connected by a covered way with white dwelling. On the south point of Poverty island. A guide to the passage into Green bay, between the Gull islands and Poverty island. Heavy draught vessels bound into Green bay should keep at least f of a mile south of Poverty Island light, then steer midway between the buoys on Gravelly Island and Poverty Island shoals about N. W. ^ W., and when past Gravelly Shoal buoy W. by N. f N. to clear Corona shoal. The fog- signal is a 10-inch steam whistle, giving a blast of 5 seconds duration, followed by an interval of 45 seconds, then a blast of 3 seconds, followed by an interval of 10 seconds. Point Peninsula light-house N. W. by W. ^ W., I7i miles. Pottawatomie light-house S. W. ^ W., 10^ miles. Gravelly Island Shoal. — Black, 25-foot spar buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks a small shoal with 17 feet of water over it 1^ miles north of Gravelly island. There is a small 14-foot patch f of a mile north of the island; therefore only light-draught vessels should pass to the south- ward of the buoy. Poverty Island Shoal buoy, N. E. ^ E., 1^ miles. Poverty Island light-house, E. by S. f S., 3^ miles. Poverty Island Shoal. — Red and black horizontal stripes spar buoy, 25 feet long, in 18 feet of water. Marks the southwestern point of a small shoal to the westward of Summer island. Least water is 15 feet. Gravelly Island Shoal Buoy, S. W. J W., 1^ miles. Poverty Island light-house, S. E. ^ E., 2f miles. POINTE SEUL CHOIX LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 16 miles. Open frame-work tower 47 feet high, surmounted by an octagonal wooden lantern painted black. On the extremity of Seul Choix Pointe. Poverty Island light, S. W. f W., 46 milcR. St. Helena light, E. ^ 8., 51 miles. North point of Squaw island, E. by. S. f S., 16i miles. In the bay to the north and eastward of the light there is good anchorage, and protection from all windg except from the south and east. Come-to with the light about S. S. W. 1^ miles distant. Keep a lookout for trap nets. Squaw Island. — A light-house and fog-signaMto be built early this season, for which an appropriation is available. Squaw Island Shoal. — Black 2d-class nun buoy in 22 feet of water, on the north end of Squaw Island shoal. The western edge of Whiskey island slightly open to the west of Squaw island. Northwest end of Squaw island S. S. W. ^ W., 2^ miles. East tangent of Garden island, S. E. -J E. Oarden Island Shoal. — A red and black horieontal stripes ^^ar buoy in 16 feet of water, known on the chart as the 18-foot spot, N. E. by N. i N., aj miles from the northwest end of Qarden island. Light Houses, Buoys and Harbors Standing to the North- ward in Green Bay, Drlsco*! Shoal.— Red and black horizontal stripes, 2d-clada can buoy in 2t feet of water. Off the northeast end of Drisco's shoal, in the north end of Green bay. The shoal is a dangerous one, lying nearly in the track of vessels bound from Porte des Morts to Escanaba, and is about one-quarter of a mile in extent in a northeast and Soutliwest direction. The charts indicate 6 and 7 fatlioms of water in its position. 192 OBBBN BAT. and the least depth of water found by the light-house steamer " Dahlia," in many souAdings, was 12 feet on the northeast end of the shoal. It is possible that there may be spots with less water on them, and in thick weather tlvi locality of th(! slioal should be avoided. When clear, the buoy may be passed within one-eighth of a mile to the eastward, and one-half a mile to the westward. Mill at mouth of Ford river N. W. f W., 12i miles. Point Peninsula light-house, N. i W., 7| miles. Hock Island light-house, S. E. f S., lOf miles. Center of Boyer's bluff, 8. i E., 9i miles. Corona Slioal. — Red and black horizontal stripes spar buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks the southern point of Corona shoal, which has its greatest extent, 275 yards, in a N. N. E. and S. 8. W. direction. The least water, 18 feet, is about 100 yards northeast of the buoy. Heavy-draught vessels in a sea should pass at least three- eighths of a mile south of the buoy. Point Peninsula light-house, N. i W. 3f miles Ten-foot Shoal buoy, N. W. i W. U miles. Ten-foot Shoal (oflF Point Peninsula).— Red 2d-clas8 nun buoy in 18 feet of water. On the south side of the 10-foot shoal off Point Peninsula. Unless perfectly familiar with the locality, vessels must not attempt to pass to the northward of the buoy. There is a small shoal spot, with 16 feet of water on it, one-half of a mile E. ^ N. from the buoy. Point Peninsula light-house, N. by E. f E., 2f miles. Escan- aba light-house, N. N. W. i W., 8 miles. Mouth of Ford river, W. N. W. i W., 8J miles. Point Peninsula Shoal. — Red spar buoy. Marks the south end of the shoal extending in a southerly direction from Peninsula point, One mile to the southwestward of this buoy there is a 10-foot shoal, marked by a 2d-cla8s can buoy, with a passage-way between the buoys, which, however, should not be attempted by strangers. Point Peninsula light-house, N. f E., If miles. Ten-foot Shoal buoy, S. S. W. f W., 1 mile. POINT PENINSULA LIGHT-STATION. — A flashing white light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles, interval between flashes 30 seconds. Yellow tower, 36 feet high, rises from brick dwelling. On tho extreme south point of Point Peninsula. Marks the approach to Little .?.nd Big Bays de Noquette. A shoal extends to the southward of the light, If miles, and there is a dangerous 10-foot spot, diarked by a buoy, 2^ niles to the southward and westward of Peninsula point, which should be passed to the southward. Escanaba(Sand Point) light-house, N. W. f 1^., 6| miles. Poverty Island light-house, S. E. by E. ^ E., IVf miles. Sand Point (off Escanaba). — Black spar buoy. Marks the end of the shoal extending in a northeasterly .direction from Sand point, and should be passed to the eastward. Escanaba light-house, S. W. by W. | W., f mile. Iron dock (Escanaba), W. f S., I mile. Ten-foot shoal buoy, off Point Peninsula, S. S. E. ^ E., 8 miles. When well past this buoy, haul up for the steamboat landing, or the iron ore docks. Good anchor- age and protection from all winds in the bay north of Escanaba. ESCANABA LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. Yellow brick tower rises from brick dwelling. Near the end of Sand Point (Escanaba). A shoal extends three-eighths of a mile to the northeastward of Sand point. A guide into the harbor of Escanaba and Little Bay de Noquette. Point Peninsula light-house, S. E. f S., 6| miles. Saunders point, N. by E. ^ E., 7i miles. Little Bay de Noo ShoaL-— Red 3d-class oan buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks the southwestern point of the shoal on the eastern side of Little Bay de Noquette. Escanaba light-house. S. W. i^ S. 1| miles. Point Peninsula light-house, S. S. E. } E., 6f miles. Ten-foot Shoal buoy, S. by E. f E. 8f miles. ORBKN BAT. 198 Saunders Point Shoal.— Red Sd-class nuD buoy in 18 feet of water. Marks [the eastern point of tlie shoal making out from Saunders point (Gladstone). Escanaba lighthouse, S. by W. i W.. 7^ miles. Squaw point, 8. 8. W. i S., H miles. End [of wharf at Saunders point. S. W. by W. i W.. 260 yards. I Saunders Point Shoal (Inside).— Black spar buoy in 17 feet of water. JMarks the nortliern edge of the shoal making out from Saunders point (Gladstone). [End of wharf at Saunders point, S. by E., 420 yards. Saunders Point buoy, S. E. [by E., 430 yards. Standing to Southward in Green Bay, Whale's Back Shoal (east end).— Red 27-foot spar buoy in 18 feet of [water. Marks the southeastern point of Whale Back sboal, which extends in a north- [westerly and southeasterly direction 1^ miles, and northeasterly and southwesterly \ [mile, with its shoalest spot midway between th« ends, and awash, or nearly so. The soundings in the proximity of the shoal are irregular; bottom, stone, sand, and [gravel. Great care should be observed in approaching its locality, except in clear [weather. Porte des Morts light-house, E. by S. i S., 13i miles. Chambers Island [light-house, S. W. | S., 14^ miles. Whale's Back Shoal (west end).— Black 27-foot spar buoy in 18 feet of (water. Marks the northwestern point of the Whale's Back shoal. Chambers Island IHght house, S. W. by 8. i S., 14| miles. Whale's Back Shoal buoy (east end), S. E. liE., li^ miles. Cedar Blver Pierhead Beaeon-l. Point Sable est of Manis- bicago ligbty Point Sable go Pierbead loj on Hyde of Calumet outer break- ist of Grosse miles east of outer break- ly S. i S. from ks orib. i' breakwater^ stp of Racine le reef, page 9 outer break- d Point ligbt, 18 miles J to e outer break- >f Sheboygan From tbe east point 3 milea md Ahne- M. i W., 162 ence N. f W., at Kewaunee, barbor piers hen 2^ miles^ liles soutbeast east of Chic- E. i E. from } east of Chic- ago light, steer N. ^ E., 292 miles, to a point 1 mile south of entrance to Manistique river, passing 1 mile east of the shoal east of Wiggins point. Waukegan to Michigan City.— When i^ miles east of Wau- kegan light, steer S. E. f E., 61^ miles, to a point 1^ miles northwest from Michigan City Pierhead light.- Waukegan to Point Betsey and Soutli Passage.— When 1^ miles east of Waukegan light, steer N. N. E. ^ N., 178^^ miles, to a point 4^ miles west of Point Betsey light, when see course from Chicago to Waugoshance. Wankogan to Little Point iSable.— When ij miles east of Waukegan light, steer N.N. £. f E., 110 miles, to a point 2 miles west of Little Point Sable light. Kenosha to Michigan City.— Wheu l mile E. by S. ^ S. from Kenosha Pierhead light, steer S. E. f S., 73^ miles, to a point 1^ miles northwest of the pierhead light at Michigan City. Kenosha to South Haven. — When i mile E. by S. i S., from Kenosha Pierhead light, steer E. ^ S., 76^ miles, to a point 1^ miles W. ^ N. from South Haven light. Kenosha to Grand Haven.— When i mile E. by S. ^ 8., from Kenosha Pierhead light, steer E. N. E. f N., 82 miles, to a point 2^ miles off. and in range of the two lights at Grand Haven. Kenosha to Point Betsey. — When i mile E. byS. ^ 8, from Keiiosha Pierhead light, steer N. N. E. ^ E., 163 miles, to a point 4^ miles west of Poin<^ Betsey light. Bacine to Michigan City.— When l mile S. E. by S. from Bacine Pierhead light, steer S. E. | S., 80^ miles, to a point 1^ miles northwest of pierhead light at Michigan City. This course leads inside the Bacine shoal. The buoy is on its western edge. Bacine to St. Joseph. — When l mile S. E. by 8. from the pier- head light at Bacine, steer S. E. h^ E. ^ E., 76 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. W. by W. from St. Joseph Pierhead light Avoid the extensive shoal E. by S., 1| miles from Bacine light Bacine to Manistee. — When l mile E. by N. ^ N. from Ba- cine Pierhead light, steer N. E. by N. ^ N., 127 miles, to a point 2 miles west of Manistee light. Observe that the main light kept open to the northward of the pierhead light leads clear of Bacine shoals. Bacine to Waugoshance. — When i mile E. by N. ^ N. from Bacine Pierhead light, sLeer N. N. £. ^ E., 152 miles, to a point 4^ miles west of Point Betsey light, when steer N. K. f N., 97J miles, to a point 1 mile northwest of Waugoshanc*^. iigbt, passing 1 mile southeast of the southeast point of North ManitCfU island. Bacine to Green Bay. — When l mile El. by N, ^ N. from Ba- cine Pierhead light, steer N. by E. ^ E., 3^ miles to a point 1 mile east of Wind Point light, when steer N. i E., 176 miles, to a point 2 miles S. S. E. of Pilot Island light. Milwaukee to St. Joseph. — When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer S. E. ^ E., 91i miles, to a point N. W. by W. 1^ miles from St. Joseph Pierhead light. Milwaukee to South Haven. — When 3 miles east of Mil. 208 LAKE MICHIGAN. '>} i '■: I I 1 J wuakee Pierhead light, steer S. £. by E. | £., 88f miles, to a point 1^ miles W. ^ N. from South Haven light. Milwaukee to Grand Haven.— When 3 miles east of Mil- waukee Pierhead light, steer £. ^ N., 77^ miles, to a point 2^ miles from' the piers, and in range of the two lights at Grand Haven. Milwaukee to Muskegon. — When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer E. by N. ^ N., 75 miles, to a point l^ miles w^'st of Muskegon Pierhead light. Milwaukee to Ludingrton.— When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. E., 93 miles, to a point 1^ miles west of Pere Marquette light. Milwaukee to White Lake. — When 3 miles oast of Milwau- kee Pierhead light, steer E. N. E., 75 miles, to a point 1^ miles west of White River Pierhead light. Milwaukee to Manistee. — When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. E. f N., 111^ miles, to a point 2 miles west of Manistee light. Milwaukee to Saugatuck. — When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer E. by 8. ^ S., 84 miles, to a point 1^ miles west of Kalamazoo light. Milwaukee to Frankfort. — When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. E. by N. ^ N., 185 miles, to a point 1^ miles west of Frankfort. Milwaukee to Point Betsey and Waugoshance.— When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, stfjer N. E. by N. f N., 139 miles, to a point 4^ miles west of Point Betsey light, when steer N. B. f N., 97^ miles, to a point 1 mile northwest of Waugoshance light, passing 1 mile from the southeast point of North Mauitou island. Milwaukee to North Manitou and Waugoshance.— When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. E. by N. f N., 174 miles, to a point 4^ miles from the most northerly point of North Manitou island, and in range of its west side; thence N. £. f E., 15 miles, until the South Fox Island light bears north 1^ miles, thence the same course N. E. f E., 47 miles, to a point 1 mile northwest of Waugoshance light. Note. — Vessela bound down through this passage should keep the highest land OD North Fox closed with the southern point of South Fox until within 1 miles of this point, to avoid the 18-foot shoal 4i miles 8. f W. from South Fox Island light. A rocky spit extends in a southwest direction from the south end of South Fox island one-half mile. Milwaukee to Sheboygan. — When S miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. ^ E., 50^ miles, to a point if miles east of She- boygan Pierhead light, passing 1 mile from the point south of Sheboygan. Milwaukee to Twin Biyer Point and Sturgeon Cay Ship-Canal. — When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. f E., 84 miles, to a point 2 miles east of Twin River Point light; thence the same course 40^ miles to a point 1^ miles southeast from the Ship-canal Pierhead light, passing close to the rooky spots south of ttntrance to canal. , \Iilwaukee to Bayley*s Harbor.— When 3 miles east of LAKE MICUIOAN. S09 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. by E., 142 miles, to a point 4 miles S. S. E. ^ E. from the beacon, and in line with the range lights. When see Bayley's Harbor range lights. Milwaukee to Green Bay. — When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer N. by E. ^ E., 159^ miles, to a point 2 miles S. S. E. from Pilot Island light. See Pilot Island light. Milwaukee to Manistique River.— When 3 miles east of Milwaukee Pierhead light, steer iN. by E. f E., 214 miles, to a point S miles tS. S. E. from the entrance to Manistique river. Port Washington to Manistee. — When i mile S. E. by E. from Port Washington light, st^eer N. E. ^ E., 94^ miles, to a point 2 miles west of Manistee Pierhead light. Port Washington to North Manitou and Waugo- shance. — When l mile S. E. by E. from Port Washington light, steer N. E. by N. ^ N., 154 miles, to a point 4^ miles from the most northern point ot Manitou island, and in range with its west side; thence N. E. f E., 62 miled, to a point 1 mile northwest of Waugoshance light. See course from Milwaukee to Waugoshance. Port Washington to Grand Haven.— When i mile S. K by E. from Port Washington light, stter E. by S. ^ S., 81 miles, to a point 2} miles from the piers, and in range of the two lights at Grand Haven. Port W^ashington to Green Bay.— When 3 miles east from Port Washington light, steer N. by E. ^ E., 135^ miles, to a point 2 miles S. S. E. of Pilot Island light. Port Washington to Muskegon. — When i mile S. E. by E. from Port Washington light, steer E. ^ S., 16 miles, to a point 1^ miles west of Muskegon Pierhead light. Port Washington to ^t. Joseph.— When i mileS. E. by E. from Port Washington light, steer S. E. f S., 110 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. W. by W. from St. Joseph Pierhead light. Port Washington to Milwaukee.— When i mile S. E. by £. from Port Washington light, steer S. f E., 22 miles, to a point 1 mile east of Milwaukee North Point light, then S. by "VY". f W., ? luJles, to a point 1 mile east of Milwaukee Pierhead light. Sheboygan to North Manitou and Waugoshance.— When If miles east from Sheboygan Pierhead light, steer N. E. |- N., 128 miles, to a point 4^ miles from the most northern point of North Manitou island, and in range of its west side, when see course from Mil- waukee to North Manitou and Waugoshance. Sheboygan to St. Joseph. — When if miles east of Sheboy- gan Pierhead light, steer S. E. by S. f S., 126^ miles, to a point 1^ miles N. W. by W. from St. Joseph Pi -head light. Sheboygan to Twin River Point and Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal. — When if miles east of Sheboygan Pierhead light, steer N. by E. ^ E., 83^ miles, to a point 2 miles east of Twin River Point light; thence see coarse from Milwaukee to Twin River point and Stur- geon Bay ship-canal. Sheboygan to Green Bay. — When if miles east of Sheboygan 210 LAKE MICHIGAN. 'fl ' Pierhead light, steer N. by E. i £., Ill miles, to a point 2 miles S. S. E. ' of Pilot Island light. Sheboyg^an to Waugoshance (west passage).— When If miles east of Sheboygan Pierhead light, steer N. E. by NT, 148 miles, to a point 2^ miles northwest of the north point of South Fox island; thence E. by N. | N., 19^ miles, until Beaver Island light bears north- west, 2 miles distant, when steer N. E. ^ E., 27 miles, to a point 1 mile north ivest of Waugoshance light. Note.— This ronte is often preferred in the spring and fall, when heavy westerly winds prevail. Ycajels holding on to the west shore until arriving in the vicinity of Bayley's harbor, will keep in smooth water, and if the wind should haul to the northwest, they can fetch the passage and not be exposed to a very heavy sea. Manitowoc to North Manitou and Waugoshance. — When 4^ miles east from Manitowoc Pierhead light, steer N. E. ^ N., 108 miles, to a point 4^ miles from the most northerly point of North Man- itou island, and in range with its west side, when see course from Mil- waukee to North Manitou and Waugoshance. ManitO'^v oc to Michigan City. — When 3 miles east of Man- itowoc Pierhead light, steer S. by E. f E., 168 miles, to a point 1^ miles northwest from the beacon-light at Michigan City. Manitowoc to St. Joseph. — When 3 miles east of Manito- woc Pieihead light, steer S. S. E. ^ E., 148 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. W. by W. from St. Joseph Pierhead light. Manitowoc to Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal.— When 4^ miles east from Manitowoc Pierhead light, steer N. E. by N. f N., 9^ miles, to a point 2 miles east of Twin River Point light, when see course from Milwaukee to Twin River point and Sturgeon Bay ship-canal. Manitowuc t(^ South Haven. — When 3 miles east from Manitowoc Pierhead i.ght, steer 8. E. by S. ^ S., 134 miles, to a point 1^ miles W. ^ N. frcu South Hriven Pierhead light. Manitowoc tc Muskegon. — When 3 miles east from Mani- towoc Pierhead light, steer S. E. f E., 85 miles, to a point li miles west of Muskegon Pierhead light. Manitowoc to Green Bay. — When 2 miles east of Twin River Point light, as in the course from Manitowoc to Sturgeon Bay ship-canal, steer N. by E. ^ E., 76 miles, to a point 2 miles S. S. E. from Pilot Island light. Manitowoc to Sheboygan. — When if miles east of Manito- woc Pierhead light, steer S. i W, 24 miles, to a point if miles east of Sheboygan Pierhead light. See courses from Chicago and Milwaukee to Sheboygan. Kewaunee to North Manitou and Waugoshance. — When 1 mile E. S. E. from the Kewaunee Pierhead light, steer N. E. f E., 88 miles, to a point i^ miles from the most northerly point of North Manitou island, and in range with its west side; thence see course from Milwaukee to North Manitou and Waugoshance. Kewaunee to Manistee. — When i mile E. S. E. from the Kewaunee Pierhead light, steer £. by S., 66^ miles, to a point 2 miles west of Manistee Pierhead light. Kewaunee to Grand Haven.— When i mile E, S. E. from LAKE MICHIGAN. 211 2 miles S. S. B. 9 £. 8. £. from the Eewaanee Pierhead light, fiteer S. E. f S., 112 miles, to a point 2^ miles from the Pierhead light, and in range of the two lights at Grand Haven. Kewaunee to St. Joseph.— When i mile E. S. E. from the Kewaunee Pierhead light, steer S. by E. f E., 169 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. W. by W. from St. Joseph Pierhead light. Ke'waunee to Chicago. — When 2 miles E. S. E. from the Kewaunee Pierhead light, steer S. ^ E., 170 miles, to a point 2^ miles east of Chicago light. Kewaunee to Green Bay. — ^When i mile E. S. E. from the Kewaunee Pierhead light, steer N. N. E. ^ E., 6i^ miles, to a point 3 miles S. S. E. from Pilot Island light. Note. — There are rocky spits, detached shoals, and rocky spots along the shore from Kewaunee to Death's Door, rendering navigation dangerous in places 2 miles from shore. The soundings are gradual, and in thick weather or on dark nights the frequent use of the lead is necessary. Kewaunee to Twin River Point.— When i* mile E. S. E. of the Kewaunee Pierhead light, steer S. f E., 17 miles, to a point 2 miles east of Twin Biver point, when see courses from Milwaukee and Chi- cago. Ahnepee to Twin River Point.— When i^ miles E. S. E. from the harbor piers, steer S. ^ W., 27^ miles, to a point 2 miles east of Twin River Point light. Ahnepee to North Manitou and Waugoshance. — When 1^ miles E. S. E. from the harbor piers, steer N. E. i E., 79 miles, to a point 4^ miles from the most northerly point of North Manitou island, and in range with its west side; whence see course from Milwau- kee to North Manitou and Waugoshance. Ahnepee to Grand Haven. — When i^ miles E. S. E. from the harbor piers, steer S. E. by S. ^ S., 119 miles, to a point 2^ miles from the Pierhead light, and in range of the two lights at Grand Haven. Ahnepee to Manistee.- When i^ miles E. S. E. of the har- b^:" pK-8, steer E. by S. |- S., 66^ miles, to a point 2 miles west of Manis- tee irierliead light. Ahnepee to St. Joseph. — When l^ miles E. S. E. from the harboi" piers, steer S. by E. | E., 178 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. W. by W. from the pierhead light at St. Joseph. Ahnepee to Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal. — When 2 miles E. S. E, from the harbor piers, steer N. by E. f E., 18| miles, to a point 2 miles southeast from Sturgeon Bay Canal light. This course leads close along the shore and requires watching. Sturg^eon Bay Sliip Canal to Michigan City.— vV^hen 1^ miles southeast of the pierhead light, steer S. ^ E., 212 miles, to a point 1^ miles northwest irom the beacon-light at Michigan City. Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal to Racine. — When 1| miles southeast of the pierhead light, steer 8. f W., 142 miles, to a point 1 mile east of Wind Point light; thence S. by W. ^ W., 3^ miles, to a point 1 mile E. by N. ^ N. from Racine Pierhead light. Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal to i^rand Haven.— When 1^ miles southeast of the pierhead light, steer S. 8. E. ^ E., 128 miles, to ■^: - ^-t ' 212 LAKE MlGUlOAi;. a point 2^ miles from the pierhead light, afid in rang^ with the two lights at Grand Haven. Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal to Manistee.— When i| miles southeast of the pierhead light, steer S. E. f E., 58 miles, to a point 2 miles west of Manistee Pierhead light. Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal to Waugoshance, passing south of Fox islands. — When 1^ miles southeast of the pierhead light, steer N. E. by E. ^ E., 81^ miles, to a point 1^ miles south of South Fox island light, when see course from Milwaukee to Waugoshance. Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal to Traverse City.— When 1^ miles southeast of the pierhead light, steer N. E. by E. ^ E., 66} miles, to a point 2 miles from the most northern point of North Manitou island, and in range with its west side; thence E. f N., 26 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. E. by N. from Grand Traverse light; thenoe S. S. E. ^ E., 2^ miles, when steer S. ^ W., 30 miles, to the docks at Traverse City. Sturgeon Bay Ship-Canal to South Manitou.— When 1^ miles southeast of its pierhead light, steer E. by N. t N., 60| miles, to a point 2 miles south of South Manitou Island light. Bayley's Harbor to Green Bay.— Run out on the ranges S. S. E. i E., 3 miles from the front light, then steer E. N. E., 3 miles, when Bteor N. N. E. i E., 16^ miles, to a point 2 miles S. S. E. from Pilot Island light. See note to course from Kewaunee to Green Bay. Bayley's Harbor to South Manitou. — Run out on the ranges S. S. I£. ^ E., 3 miles from the front light, then E. i S., 49 miles, to a point 2^ miles south of South Manitou Island light. Bayley's Harbor to Waugoshance, north of the Fox islands. Run out on the ranges 3 miles from the front light, S. S. E. i E.; thence N. E. by E. ^ E., 65 miles, to a point 2^ miles northwest of the north point of South Fox island, when see coarse from Sheboygan to Waugoshance. Porte des Morts (Death's Door).— Entering Green bay through this passage — When 2 miles S. S. E. from Pilot Island light, steer N. W. i W., 4f miles, until the northwest side of Plum island bears northeast, passing 1 mile south of Pilot Island light. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Ludington.— When 2 miles S. S. E. from Pilot Island light, steer S. by E. ^E., 84 miles, to a point li^ miles west of Big Point Sable: thence S. S. E., 1^ miles, to a point 1^ miles west of Pere Marquette Pierhead light. Porte des Morts (Death's I>oor) to Waugoshance. — When 2 miles S. S. E. from Pilot Island light, steer E. by N. i N., 70 miles, to a point 2 miles southeast of Beaver Island light; thence N. E. i E.. 27 miles, to a point 1 mile northwest of Waugoshance light. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to South Manitou Island.— When 2 miles S. 8, E. from Pilot Island light, steer E. S. E. ^ S., 41 miles, until the southwest point of South Manitou island bears north 2 miles; then steer east 3 miles, until South Manitou Island light bears north 2 miles. llock Island Passage into Green Bay, between Rock and h»t. Martin's island. See Pottawatomie light. Rock Island Passage to Chicago.— When 2 miles E. i 8. LAKE MICHIGAN. 213 the two lights from Rock Island light, steer S. ^ W., 246 miles, to a point 2^ miles east of Chicago light, passing inside the Fishing Island shoals. Poverty Island Passage Into Green Bay, between Poverty island on the east side and Gull islands and Gravelly island on the west. — For directions to enter the bay by this passage, see Poverty island light. Poverty Island to Chicago. — When three-quarters of a mile south of Poverty Island light, steer S. f W., 256 miles, to a point 2| miles east of Chicago light. Poverty Island to Michigan City. When three-quarters of a mile south of Poverty Island light, steer S. ^ £., 262 miles, to a point 1^ miles northwest from the beacon-light at Michigan City. Poverty Island to Waugoshance. — When three-quarters of a mile south of Poverty Island light, steer E. ^ N., 55 miles, to a point 2 miles southeast of Beaver Island light; thence N. E. i E., 27 miles, to a point 1 mile northwest of Waugoshance light. Poverty Island to the Straits of Mackinac, north of the Beaver group. — When three-quarters of a mile south of Poverty Is- land light, steer N. E. by E. ^ E., 58 miles, to a point 2^ miles nort^h of Squaw island; thence east 29 miles, ranging on north side of St. Helena, parsing about midway between the White shoals and Simmons' reef, to a point 6 miles west of the north side of St. Helena, and the same distance southwest from Point aux Chenes; thence E. by S. f 3., 13^- miles, to a point 1 mile north of the railroad dock at Old Fort Mackinac, passing 1 mile south of St. Helena shoal and the light on St. Helena island. Magnetic Declinations in degrees and tenths, corrected to the year 1890. • McGulpin's Point '. 0. 5 E. Waugosbance 0.7 E. Beaver Island Light 1.8 E. South Fox iBland 1.0 E. South Manitou Island 2.0 E. Manistee 8.3 E. Little Point au Sable 2.6 E. Grand Haven 2.0 E. St. Joseph 2.2 E. Michigan City 2.7 E. Chicago 3.3 E. Racine 3.7 E. Milwaukee 4.0 E. Sheboygan 4.1 E. Twin River Point 4.0 E. Bayley's Harbor 3.8 E. Rock Island 2.9 E. Seul Cholx Point 1.4 E. between Rock 2 miles B. i 8. Compass Courses and Distances in Green Bay. Bock Island Passage to Green Bay.— When one-fourth of a mile north of Rook Island light, steer W. ^ S., 6 miles, until Boyer's bluff bears E. S. E. 1 mile; thence S. W. f S., 22^ miles, keeping Eagle Bluff light a little open on the port bow, until it bears S. S. £. \ E., half a mile distant; thence S. by W. 6^ miles, heading a little inside the point 214 OREEN BAY. "i north of Egg harbor (passing the light give the shore a berth of 500 yards), until Hat island bears W". i S., when steer 8. W. I S., 49 miles, with Grassy Island lights open a little on the port bow until Long Tail Point light bears N.W. ^ W., 1 mile. See directions to enter Fox river. Rock Island Passage to Menominee. — When one-fourth of a mile north of Rock Island light, steer W. ^ S., 6 miles, until Buyer's bluflf bears E. S. E., 1 mile; thence S. W. ^ W., 26i miles, until Cham- Jbers Island light bears E. I N., If miles, when steer S. W., lOj miles, to a point 1 mile E. N. E. of Menomonee Pierhead light. Bock Island Passage to Escanaba.— When one-fourth of a mile north of Rock Island light, steer N. W. f N., 16 miles, until Point Peninsular light bears ir E. by N. | N., 3 mil , and the buoy on 10-foot shoal E. N. E. i N., 1 mile, when steer N. by V. ^ W., 8^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Sand Point light. Rock Island Passage to Cedar River. — When one-fourth of a mile north of Rook Island light, steer W. ^ S., 6 miles, until Boyer's bluff bears E. S. E. 1 mile; thence Vv'. f S., 18| miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of the Cedar River Pierhead light. Rock Island Passage to Burnt BlufiT, Garden Bluff, a,nd the Head of Bay de Noquette. — When one-fourth of a mile north oJ Rock Island light, steer N. by E. ^ E., 18 miles, to a point one- fourth of a mile west of Burnt bluff; thence N. N. E. ^ E,, 8 miles, to a point one-fourth of a mile west of Garden bluff; thence the same course, 5^ miles, to the head of the bay in 3^ fathoms, and 2^ miles west of Jack's bluff. Poverty Island Passage to Escanaba.— When three-fourths of a mile «outh of Poverty Island light, steer W. N. W. , 18i miles, until Point Peninsula light bears N, E. by N. # N.. 3 miles, and the buoy on 10-foot shoal bears E. N. E. i N., 1 mile, when steer N. by W. i W. , 8^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Sand Point light. Heavy-draught vessels when about f mile south of the light should steer N. W. i W., 8A miles, to a point about midway between the buoys on Gravelly Island and Pilot Island shoals, then steer W. by N. f N. 14i miles, passing f mile south of the Corona shoal, when steer as above. Poverty Island Passage to Big Bay de Noquette.— When three- fourths of a mile south of Poverty Island light, steer N. W. i W 5} miles, until Rock Island light is open by the west side of St. Martin's island; thence N. i E., 8 miles, to a point one fourth of a mile west of Big Burnt bluflE; thence N. N. E. i E., ISi miles, until Jack's bluff bears east 2i miles distant. Burnt Bluff. — In the bay north of Burnt bluff there is good anchorajje and protection from all winds; to make the anchorage, haul around the bluff and steer E. f N. about 1 mile, and come-to in 5 fathoms of water. Og^ontz Bay is on the northwest side of Big Bay de Noquette. To enter Ogontz bay: Get the west side of Burnt bluff astern, and steer N. f W., 10^ miles, from it to the head of the bay, parsing 1 mile east of Isle St. Vital, and the same distance west of a 9-foot spot 2f miles E. N. E. i N. from Round island, and in range with it and Garden bluff. Garden Bay is on the east side of Garden bluff. It has good anchorage and protection from all winds. To make the anchorage: Haul around the bluff, and steer E. by N. f N., 1^ miles, and come-to in 3 fathoms of water. Just east of the bluff the water is shoal. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Escanaba.— When 2 miles S. S. E. of Pilot Island light, steer N. W. i W., 4|- miles, until the n 3( OBEEN BAY. 215 !8, until Cham- W., lOi miles, one-fourth of a 88, until Point northwest side of Plum island bears N. E. 1 mile, when steer N. f W., 30^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Sand Point light, passing 1^ miles west of buoy on Ten-foot shoal. When well past the buoy on Sand point, haul up for the docks at EsoAuaba. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Big Bay de No- quette. — When the northeast side of Plum island bears N\ E. 1 mile, steer N. i E.> o miles, until the north point of Boyer's bluflf bears east 1 mile; thence N. E. by N. f N., 21f miles, to a point one-half mile west of Burnt bluff; thence the same course 8 miles until Garden bluff bears east i mile. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Cedar River.— When the northwest side of Plum island bears N. E. 1 mile, steer west 4^ miles; thence W. by N. i N., 14^ miles, with the north point of the Door bluff directly ascem, to a point 1 "iile southeast of the Cedar River Pierhead light, passing three-fourths mile south of buoy on the Whale's Back shoal. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Green Bay.— When the northwest side of Plum island bears N. E. 1 mile, steer west, 5^ miles, to a point 1^ miles W. N. W. ^ N. from the north point of the Door bluff; thence S. W. f S., 12 miles, until Eagle Bluff light bears S. S. E. -J E., ^ mile, when see course from Rock island to Greeu bay. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Menomonee. — When the northwest side of Plum island beara N. E. 1 mile, steer west 5^ miles to a point 1^ miles W. N. W. ^ N. from the north point of the Door bluff; thence Vv. S. W. ^ S., 17^^ miles, until Chambers Island light bears E. f N., If miles, when steer pouthwest, lOf miles, to a point 1 mile E. N. E. of Menomonee Pierhead light. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Green Bay, passing West of Chambers Island. — When Chambers Island light bears E. f N., If miles, as in the course to Menomonee, steer S. f W., 12^ miles, until Oreen Island light bears N. W. f W., 2^ miles; thence S. W. ^ 8., 39f miles, until Long Tail Point light bears N. W. J W. 1 mile. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Peshtigo.— When Green Island light bears N. W. f W., 2^ miles, as in the course from Death's Door to Green Bay, steer S. W. | S., 8 miles, until the buoy on Peshtigo shoal bears N. W. f W., ^ mile distant; continue the same course three-fourths mile to clear the shoal, when haul up W. by N. f N., 3^ miles, to a point 1 mile south of the mouth of Peshtigo river. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Oconto.— When tho buoy on Peshtigo shoal beara N. W. f W., ^ mile, as in the course to Peshtigo, sLeer W. S. W., 12 miles, to a point one-half mile northeast of the harbor piers. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Favette. — ^ /hen one-half mile w.ist of Burnt bluff, as in the course from Death's Door to Big Bay de Noquette, steer N. E. ^ N., heading on Snake island for 3f miles, until the houses in. Snail Shell harbor bears S. by E. ^ E., when haul in mid-channel. Porte des Morts (Death's Door) to Washington Harbor. — When the northwest side of Plum island bears northeast 1 mile, steer N. ^ E., 8 miles, until the north point of Boyer's bluff bears east 1 mile, when haul around the bluff point, giving it a berth of one- 216 ORE EN BAT. third of a mile, until the head of the hay hears S. hy E., when run to the dock on the west side, or come-to in the head of the hay in 10 fathoms of water. There is good anchorage and protection from all winds except from N. N. W. hy the northward to N. E. The shores are bold and can be approached close-to. Escanaba to Green Bay. — When i mile east of Sand Point light, steer S. | E., 6^ miles, until Point Peninsular light bears E. ^ N., distant 3 miles; thence S. W. by S. f S., 37 miles, until Chambers Island light bears E. f N<, 1} miles; when see course from Death's Door to Green Bay west of Chambers island. Escanaba to Cedar River. — When l mile east of Sand Point light, steer S. J E., 5^ miles, until Point Peninsular light bears E. ^ N., distant 3 mik*s; thence S. W. | S., 23| miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of the Cedar River Pierhead light. Cedar Fiver to Green Bay.— When i mile southeast of the Cedar River Pierhead light, steer 8. ^ W., 13^ miles, until Chambers Island light bears E. f N., If miles, when see course from Death's Door to Green Bay west of Chambers island. Cedar River to Menomonee. — When i mile southeast ot the Cedar River Pierhead light, steer S. by W. f W., 8^ miles, until Point Rochereau bears W. N. W , 2 mile^, when steer S. W. by S. f S., 14| miles, to a point 1 mile E. 'A. E. of Menomonee Pierhead light. Sturgeon Bay to Menomonee.— When i mile east of Sherwood^ Point light, steer N. N. W. f W., 16^ miles, to a point 1 mile E. N. E. of Menomonee Pierhead light, passing Ik miles west of the northwest point of Green island, and the same distance east of the shoal S. S. E. of the entrance to Menomonee river. Sturgeon Bay to Green Bay.— When l mile east of Sher- wood's Point light, steer W. N. W., 2 miles; thence m est, 4 miles, until the west point of entrance to Little Sturgeon bay bears 8. ^ W., 4 miles, when steer S. W. f S., 30 milee, until Long Tail Point light bears N. W. ^ W., 1 mile. Sturgeon Bay to Feshtigo. — When 1 mile east of Sher- wood's Point light, steer W. N. W., 2 miles; thence W. by N. ^ N., 10^ miles, to a point 1 mile south of the mouth of Peshtigo river. Sturgeon Bay to Oconto. — When l mile east of Sher- wood's Point light, steer W. N. W., 2 miles; thence W. f S., 17 miles, to a point half a mile northeast of the harbor piers. Sturgeon Bay to Escanaba. — When l mile east of Sher- wood's Point light, steer N. i W., 21J miles, until Chambers Island light bearu E. f N., If miles, passing close to the shoal off the west side of Chambers island; thence N. E. by N. f N., 37 miles, until Point Penin- sular light bears E. ^ N., 3 miles, when steer N. ^ W., 6^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Sand Point light. Sturgeon Bay to Cedar River,— When if miles W. f S. from Chambers Island light, as in the course from Sturgeon bay to Es- canaba, steer N. i E., 13^ miles, to a point 1 mile southeast of the Cedar River Pierhead light. Sturgeon Bay to Fensaukee. — When l mile east of Sher- wood's Point light, steer W. N. W., 2 miles; thence W. S. W. k S., 19^ ORKKN BAY. 217 to a point 1 miles, to a point half a mile southeast from Pensauke'e Shoal buoy, when see Pensaukee river. Stureeon Bay to Egg Harbor. — When i mile east of Sherwood^ Point light, steer N. J E., 7^ miles, ranging on the west side of Chambers island, until Green Island light bears northwest, 6 miles; thence northeast 1 miles, heading on the point 2 miles north of Egg harbor, until in range with Hat island and the wood dock on the west side of Egg harbor, when run to the dock. There is good anchorage in Egg harbor, but the bay is open to the northwest. Egg Harbor to Fish Creek. — Bun out on the range of Hat island 1^ miles, then N. by E. | E., heading on Eagle Bluff light, Bk miles, until the dock at Fish Greek bears southeast, when haul in for it. Fish Creek to Escanaba. — Run out on the range of the dock and the South Strawberry island, until a little past the range of the bluff bank, 1 mile south of Fish creek and Eagle Bluff light, when haul up about N. by E., heading a little outside Eagle Bluff light, to a point one- third of a mile west of it. And note that about 1 mile north of the dock at Fish creek, a rocky flat extends from the main shore about 400 yards. A rocky shoal extends from the South Strawberry island three-quarters of a mile in a southeast direction. The channel is between these shoals, and is about one-third of a mile wide. When one-third of a mile west of Eagle Bluff light, steer N. E. f N., 9 miles, until Sister bluff bears S. E., li miles, when steer N. f E., 2li miles, until Point Peninsular light bears E. i N., 3 miles; thence N. ^ W., 5^ miles, to a point 1 mile east of Sand Point light. Magnetic Declinations, in degrees and tenths, corrected to the year 1890: Head ojf Green Bay 4° .5 E. Green island 3" .9 E. Menomonee harbor 4° .0 E. Sturgeon bay «' .9 E. Egg harbor H° .4 E, Plum island 2° .9 E. Little Bay de Noquette 3' .0 E. <> » p-^T-*— ** 218 LAKE MICHIGAN. H ', I f it I 1 s .1 '«^n* 'M [IIpIIillP^TslI^^ wo CO «9*0« "f^A 5^ g^iSiS^sSssss g 8t:$S i^'^o^ feSsSsSSsegS2S S SS : : : : : '^■8!fo ■*. •«• 01 vH ^^ ;^ ^- r-l r^ » . y^oft. '°'n»»» 1^ troa ■»e4». ''^JfOJI 'flr ■•^OWo */0»B ■»«/ft •4H, Ponifl SfcSff ■9oo *a- ss o^m 'Or PisiiiSSsssjs •'s iggpsSises ^"^G gggSI^SfeSS J -H m a< I- ■<* T< 3 ^- o> o c» o »-i i l-H ?-l T-l ♦ 1-.® — QMJJf-CS ■o*..,.^ ■* vH ■P^ 1-» ^^ 1-^ *« tH,»-i »-t -^ « i-ceoi-iiON '41 » Si i Is •a « 0^[ : fl o : w : a a. a I If S GO aas*.S»aiiM MsU 8^ BTBAIT8 OF 8T. HABT. 219 STRAITS OF ST. MARY. Light-Houses and Buoys Standing North and West in tJie Straits of St. Mary. The St. Mary's River, connecting Lake Huron and Superior, is 60| miles in length from Point Detour to Round island, Lake Superior, and, at the usual stages of water, is navigable for vessels drawing 15^ feet of water. To ascend the river from Lake Huron with Detour light- house N. N. W. \ W., distant 2 miles, and in line with Flying Pan Is- land, and Pipe Island lights, bearing N. \ W. nearly, proceed on that course to within ^ to | of a mile of Frying Pan Island light, when haul to tlie northeastward to clear it, giving the light a berth of about 250 yards, and when well past it haul up for the east side of Pipe island, and when within \ mile of it, haul to the northwestward and open Pipe Is- land light on the starboard bow, leaving black buoy No. I on the port hand. When abreast of Pipe island, head for the opening between St. Joseph's and Lime islands, and run in this direction 1\ miles; then open Lime island on the starboard bow, heading N. W. by W. ^ W. until Round island is about twice its width open to the loft or westward of Lime island; then change course to the northward, and bring Round is- land a little on the port bow, which will lead clear past Lime and Round islands. After passing Round island, Pointe auz Chenes black buoy will be in light on the port bow, and some rocks above water on the starboard. When well past Pointe aux Chenes black buoy, having these rocks above water, bearing kbout southeast, change course so as to bring them directly astern, heading N. W. \ W. for the Ist-class can buoy marking the turn- ing point in Mud lake. From this buoy, head a little east of Raines' is- land, passing up the river between the buoys, which are in sight from one to another up to Little Mud lake, the course through which is north until you make the black buoy No. 13, then the buoys marking each side of the channel are again in sight one from another, until above the Nee- bish rapids. The new cu: on the American side of the East Neebish rapids ia now completed and marked by buoys. All vessels are recommended to use it. The Eastern, or Canadian channel, is still buoyed, but is not as safe for vessels deeper and straighter than the course usually steered. LAKE SUPERIOR. Light-Houses f Buoys and Harbors Standing Westward along the South Shore of Lake Superior, POINT IROQUOIS lilGHT-STATION.— A flashing white light, 4th order, visible 16:^ miles, interval between flashes 30 seconds. White tower, 56 f 3et high, connected by a covered way with white dwelling, on Point Iroquois. A guide to and from St. Mary's river. The fog-signal is a 10-inch steam whistle, in duplicate, which will sound a blast of 6 seconds followed by an interval of 25 seconds. Gros Cap LAKE Sni'EBIOB. 223 OQ the 14-fool in no place lesu yestward along (Canada), N. N. F. f E., 3| miles. White Fish Point light-house, N.W. \ N., 25^ miles. Parisian Island, N. N. W., 12 miles. WHITE FISH POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3d order, visible 16^ miles. This light is ordered to bechanced to a fixed tohite light varied by red flashes at intervals of 20 seconds; the order of the light will not be changed. Brown iron pile structure, 70 feet high, connected by a covered way with the dwelling. A coast light on White Fish point, and a guide to and from White Fish bay, southeast extremity of Lake Superior. During thick or foggy weather a steam-whistle is Hounded, giving a blast of 5 seconds, followed by an interval of 13 sec- onds; then a blast of two seconds, followed by an interval of 40 seconds. Point Iroquois light-house, S. E. ^ S., 25 J miles. North point of Paris- ian island, E. S. E. f E., 11^ miles. There is good anchorage in the bay south of the light, and protection from north and westerly gales; the water is deep, and it is necessary to come-to close to the shore; the best anchorage is a little south of the dock. To make a lee from the west- ward haul around the point, giving it a berth of three-fourths of a mile, and steer in W. S. W., about 1 mile south of the light. Storm, oantion- ary, and wind signals are displayed from a mast near the fog-signals. Grand Marais (Mich.) is 49 miles about W. i S. from White Fish point, and 8^ miles east of Big Sable light. Grand Marais Harbor. — The project for a harbor of refuge at this place consists in the construction of two parallel piers, 500 feet apart, extending into 22 feet of water in Lake Superior, and connected with the deep water in the bay of Grand Marais, by a cut through the sand spit which separates the bay from the lake, making a channel 20 feet deep and 300 feet wide. Direction of piers, north. Present Condition. — 1,300 feet of the north pier is completed and about 800 feet of the east pier. Last summer a channel was dredged into the harbor, midway between the piers, 175 feet wide and 17 feet deep, but it is thought it will soon fill up again unless the piers are extended. BIG SABLE LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3d order, visible 171 miles. White tower connected by covered way with ness seems to be entirely suspended. PORTAGE LAKE SHIP-CANAL LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 14 miles, 3^ order. Bed tower, 33 feet high, attached to brick dwelling. A coast and harbor light on the west bank of the entrance into Portage Lake ship-channel. Rock of Ages N. W. f N., 54 miles. Passage Island light, N. ^ E., 69 miles. Portag^e Lake Ship-Canal Pierhead Beacon-light. — A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 11^ miles. White tower, 18 feet hi^h, on PM open frame-work foundation, with an iron lantern on top. Elevated walk along the pier to the shore. On the end of the west pier, at the entrance to the Portage Lake ship channel. The light marks the end of the pier, and is not intended as a range light with the main one. During thick and foggy weather a fog-bell struck by machinery will be sounded — a single blow at intervals of 20 seconds. The bell is on the end of the west pier, connected to the beacon-light tower. Portagre Lake Ship Canal Harbor of Refiig-e.-^The har- bor works consist in the construction of two crib piers 1,0P0 feet in length, enclosing the Lake Superior entrance to the canal. The piers are 250 feet apart at the outer ends; the east pier is straight; direction, N. W. ^ N. The west pier diverges so as to enclose a small basin, which is not dredged. Depth of water usually from 12 to 14 feet. This dept.h is not always reliable, owing to the formation of a sand bar between the piers, but the bar does not extend far beyond the outer endL of the piers. To enter the harbor: Bring the lights in range about S. E. by S., and when about one-fourth of a mile from the beacon open the main light a little to the eastward of it, and run in mid-channel; follow the east pier, giving it a berth af about llu feet, which will lead into the canal. Tlie channel is not dredged close to the piers. Portage Lake ship-canal connects the head of Portage lake with Lake Superior. The canal is 2^ miles in length, 100 feet in width at the nar- rowest point, and 160 feet in Lily pond, the widest part. Depth of water, 13 feet. The sides of the canal are protected by a pile revetment with a donble row of sheet pilinsf. The Portage Lake Canals have been sold and transferred to the United States, and extensive improvements are contemplated. The Life Saving Station is on the east bank of the canal about ^ mile from the piers. ONTONAGON LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 13^ miles. Yellow tower, 39 feet high, rising from brick dwelling. A coast and harbor light, on the west bank of the mouth of Ontonagon ri^er. La Point light-house, W. S. W. f W., Tl miles. Michigan Island light-house, W. ^ S., 55^ miles. OutonaKon Pierhead Beacon-light.— A fixed red light, 6th order, visible 1 miles. White open frame-work tower, 22 feet high. I fi32 LAKE 8UPEBIOR. I I > and at present about 450 feet from the outer end of the west pier. An elevated walk along the pier to the shore. The two lights in range lead to the end of the west pier, although not iu tended for range lights. Ontonagon harbor consists of two parallel piers 250 feet apart, extending in a N. W. t N. direction from the mouth of the Ontonagon river. As now constructed the west pier extends into the lake 1,700 feet from tlie shore line, and projects 150 feet beyond the east pier; the outer 150 feet is without superstructure and vessels entering at night should look out for the submerged eribs. The east pier projects 1,950 feet into the lake beyond the shore line (the shore lines are not opposite each other). The bar outside the piers continues to advance, and the channel across it is uncertain and shifting. Last season the depth of water was from 12 to 18 feet. The Shore from Eagle River to Ontonagon. — One mile north of the Portage Lake ship-canal there is a spit extending one-half mile to the north, and from 14-mile point there extends also a spit to the north for one '"liF 'v mile. OUTER Tj^tSTD light-station.— a flashing white light, 3d order, ibl »)^ miles; interval between flashes is 90 seconds. White brick tow^", 19 i ^'- high, connected by a covered way with red brick dwelling. Height of .light above lake level, 130 feet. On the north point of Outer island. Apostle group. During thick and foggy weather a steam-whistle is sounded, giving a blast of 8 seconds, with an interval of 62 seconds. Fog signals on the bluflf about 300 feet west of the tower. Grand Marais, Minn., N. ^ W., 47 miles. Norih point of Devil island, W. ^ S., 14^ miles. Good anchorage in the bight on the west side of Outer island, and protection from easterly gales; a sand spit extends from the south point of the island about one-fourth mile with deep water close-to; a shallow spot 1 mile N. by E. ^ E. from the light. DEVIL. iSiLAND E.I0HT-STAT10W.— A fixed red light, 4th order, vis- ible 13 miles. Black lantern surmounting a white open frame-work tower, 60 feet high. The upper part is enclosed for a watch-tower.* The focal plane is 87 feet above lake level. Red brick dwelling in rear of tower. On the north point of Devil island, the most northerly of the Apostle group. The fog-signal is a 10-inch steam whistle, and in thick or foggy weather will sound blasts of 5 seconds duration with alternate niieut intervals of 10 and 40 seconds. The fog-signal house is located on a point about 500 feet northwest from the light-tower. The island is steep-to on all sides. Sand Island light, S. W. i W., Hi miles. Outer Island light, E. i N., 14i miles. Two Harbors light, W. by S, i 8., 44^ miles. MICHIGAN ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, 3^ order, visible 19^ miles. White stone tower, 44 feet high, stone dwelling attached. Light 129 feet above lake level. On the south point of Michigan island, and a guide between Michigan, Magdalene, and Stockton islands to Bayfield and La Pointe. Ontonagon light-house, E. i N., 55^^ miles. There is a rocky islet three- fourths of a mile north- east of Michigan island with shoal water between it and Michigan island; shoal water extends along the south shore of the island; two dangerous spots lie nearly three-fourths mile south of the light. A spit extends from the northeast point of Magdalene island in an easterly direction nearly three-fourths of a mile. Entering the channel between Michigan and Magdalene islands, bring Michigan Island light to bear N. E. f N., 2 miles distant, when steer W. N. W., 5 miles, to a point three-fourths mile north of the northern point of Magdalene island; thence S. W. -J W., 10 miles, to a point three-fourths of a mile east of Bayfield. Presque Isle Harbor. — There is good anchorage in the bay on the west side of Presque Isle, and pi*oteotion from all winds. To make the harbor from the southward, when Michigan Island light bears N. E. .-^ LAKB 8UPEBIOB. 233 I N., distant 2 miles, steer N. W. by N. 4^ miles, when haal up east into the bay and come-to in 7 fathoms. liA POINTE IiIGHT-STATION.— A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 12f miles. Lantern on white frame dwelling, light 42 feet above lake level. Near the north end of Cbaquamegan point at the »o \ channel entrance into Chaquamegan bay. Ontonagon light house, E. n. E. f E., 71 miles. From the southwest point of Magdalene island a 4- foot spit extends in a southeasterly direction for one-half a mile. The Fos-§lgnal is a 10 inch steam whistle, gives blasts of 5 seconds with silent intervals of 25 seconds. The signal is on the oeach about three-fourMis of a mile to the eastward of the light-house. Entering the South Channel to Bayfield, steer W. by S. S., keeping the south side best on board until La Pointe light bears S. . f E., 1 mile distant, when steer N. f W., 4J miles, to Baytield; or S. by W. f W., 7 miles, thence about 8. by W. for the outer end of break- water. • La Pointe is in the bight on the west er of Magdalene island, Sf miles to the northward of La Pointe light; it L/is ^afe harbor with good anchorage in 4 fathoms of water off the old -^ock. At present the dock is in a dilapidated condition and the shipping nyusiness entirely suspended. Bayfield is on the main shore, opposite La Pointe. It has two good docks, with deep water alongside of th^m. It has an important trade in fish and lumber. In heavy gales "om the northeast vessels can- not lie at the docks in Bayfield; at such ti .^es La Pointe affords excellent shelter. Chaquamegran Bay. — In the bay the 1 2-foot curve" extends 2 miles westward from Oak point. In the head of the bay the 12-foot curve extends 1^ miles from shore. Towards the north, along the west coast of the bay, and as far as Point Detour, there is deep water close to the shore. Oood anchorage and protection from all winds can be found almost anywhere inside the Apostle island. Washburn is situated on the west shore of Chaquamegan bay, about two miles to the southwestward of Houghton point. It has become quite an important shipping point. It is the lake terminus of the Chicago, St. Paul, M. & O. R, R. There are two docks with deep water alongside of them, one is the general merchandise dock with warehouse on it, and the other is the grain elevator dock; there is a bulkhead connecting the two docks, used for unloading cargoes of coal. At night there is a red light shown from each dock, one on the end of the Warehouse, and the other from a window in the elevator. Ashland is situated near the head of Chaquamegan bay, and is now one of the most important shipping points on Lake Superior. Harbor Improvements. — The present project is the construc- tion of a breakwater to protect the wharves of the city from the action of the north and northeast storms, and to afford protection to the ship- Sing while loading and unloading, and also for dredging in front of the ock line to provide for vessels drawing 16 feet. As now constructed the breakwater commences in about 12 feet of water and extends in a W. N. W. direction 4,650 feet into the bay, and about 1,000 feet to the east- ward of the iron ore docks. LAKE KUPEBIOB. 1 1* LAKE SUPEBIOB. 285 55 % Rocky Island and South Twin island are connected by shoal water. North Twin island has a spit extending half a mile to the south- west. York island has a spit extending half a mile to the south. The passage between Sand island and the main shore ought not to be attempted by vessels drawing more than 6 feet. R VSPBERRY ISLAND LIGHT-STATION. -A fixed light varied by white flashes, at intervals of 90 seconds, 6th order, visible 15 miles. Lantern on white frame dwelling, light 77 feet above lake level. On the southwest point of Raspberry island, Apostle group. A guide for the channel between main-land and Raspberry island. To enter Raspberry Island passage, bring Raspberry Island light to bear S. E. \ E., and run for it on that course, until Sand Island light bears S. W. \ W., 3j^ miles, when haul up southeast, 11 miles, until the southwest point of Oak island bears N. i W., 1^ miles, passing about half a mile southwest of Raspberry Island light. Good anchorage on south side oi Raspberry island and protection from all winds. SAND ISLAND LIGHT-S x'ATION.— A fixed white li^ht, 4th order, visible 14 miles. Red sandstone tower, 37 feet high, rising from sandstone dwelling. On the north point of Sand island. The shore on the south side of Lake Superior from the Apostle islands to the head of the lake is bold, and can be approached anywhere within half a mile. Minnesota Point Lig^ht-honse (light discontinued). — White stone tower, 45 feet high, connected by covered way with dwelling. On the south end of Minnesota point, at the south entrance iuto Superior bay and bay of Allouez. ST. LOUIS RIVER PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A fixed white light, 6th order, visible 13f miles. White frame tower, light 63 feet above lake level. On the outer end of the north pier, at the south entrance to Superior and Allouez bays. The harbor works consist of two parallel piers connecting the south end of Superior bay with Lake Superior, with a dredged channel between them. The piers are 2,600 feet in length and 300 feet apart, ex- tending N. E. :J E. Present depth of water: On lake approach, 16 feet; entry between the piers, 16 feet; in the St. Louis River channel from the entry to Connor's point, 16 feet; from St. Louis River channel to North- ern Pacific dock, 16 feet; in front of Quebec dock, 16 feet. The chan- nels are all well buoyed by private enterprise. Entering the harbor keep straight in midway between the piers, when about half way up, keep nearest the south pier until up to its end, giving it a fair berth, then port slowly and head up just outside the dock op- posite the old light house, keeping between the buoys. In northeasterly gales a scrong current generally sets out of the piers, and vessels should have good headway until inside the piers. Tugs are generally at the piers to assist heavy draught vessels to the different points in the bay. DULUTH PIERHEAD BEACON-LIGHT.— A fixed ed light, 4th order, visible 12^ miles. White, open frame-work tower, 37 feet high. On the outer end of the south pier, at the entrance into Du- luth harbor. During thick and foggy weather a steam-whistle is sounded, 28R \i LAKE BITPBBIOB. - iMMT SUPERIOR HARBdR LAKE SUPERIOR 8T. LOUIS. giving blasts of 5 seconds, followed by an interval of 30 seconds. Fog signal-house of corrugated iron, connected to the tower. Elevated walk along the pier to the shore. St. Louis River light, S. E. i E., 6^ miles. DUIiUTH MAIN LIGHT.— A red flashing light, 4th order, giving a red flash every 6 seconds, visible 13 miles. White, square, wooden tower, 64 feet above the lake level, black lantern with brown parapet. The lower part of the tower is open frame-work, the upper part is enclosed for a watch room. On the inner end of the south pier at the entrance to Duluth. This light with the beacon-light forms a range showing the direction of the pier, and the course to be followed in entering the harbor. Beacon-light, N. E. by E., 1,100 feet. The Harbor of Duluth consists of a canal cut through Min- nesota point, connecting Superior bay with Lake Superior. The sides of the canal are protected by piers 300 feet apart, and 1,150 feet in length, extending into the lake N. E. by E. Depth between the piers at the entry, 17 feet, in the harbor 16 feet, in the Blast Furnace channel to a point opposite Elevator E 16 feet. From point opposite Elevator E through dredged channel along east side of Rice's point to the St. Louis river 16 feet. In channel on north shore of St. Louis bay, for a distance of 7,300 feet, there is a depth of 16 feet. Entering the harbor, vessels LAKE 8UPBRI0B. S37 QUtZ seconds. Fog Elevated walk ^ E., 6i miles. rht, 4th order, V^hite, square, rn with brown fork, the upper the south pier -light forms a be followed in t. |t through Miu- . The sides of |feet in length, .he piers at the le channel to a lite Elevator E [o the St. Louis ;, for a distance harbor, vessels should give the end of the south pier a berth of at least 20 feet to avoid rip-rapping. In northeasterly gales a strong current generally sets out of the harbor, or across the end of the piers, when vessels entenng re- quire to keep good headway. TWO HARBORS LIGHT-STATION. -A fixed r light, 4th order, visible 13 miles. Red brick tower, 43 feet high, forms a cor- ner of a two-story red brick dwelling, with red roof. The focal plane is 78 feet above the level of the lake. On the point of land between Agate and Burlington bays. The fog-signal is a 10- inch steam whistle; during thick and foggy weather it will sound blasts of 6 seconds duration, with i\ ; ( 238' LAHE SUPBfilOS. alternate silent intervals of 17 and 33 seconds. The fog-sig al house is located about 100 feet southwest from tho light tower, it is au ron struc- ture, painted dark brown. Sand Island light-house E. f N S4^ milfs. Isle aux Roches, S. W. ^ S., 7 miles. Devil Island light-house, E. by N. i iJ., 44j^ miles. Two Harbors, or Agate Bay. — ^Two Harbors is on the north shore of Lake Superior, 27 ^liles N. E. by N. ^ N. from the St. Louis River Pierhead lighu, and 45 miles W. by S. ^ S. from a point 1^ miles north of Devil island. It has two elevated iron ore docks with a dredged slip between, where vessels load, the docks extend E. S. E. There are two recrcnjindise docks to the eastward of the ore docks; they extend into the lake S. S. E., and have deep water alongside. The shore around the point between Agate and Burlington bays is bold. Anchorage off the ore docks; vessels must come-to close in, as the water is very deep, SupE^of^- From Duluth to Two Harbors, run out in line with the piers :J of a mile, when steer N. E. ^ E., 18 miles, until Granite point bears N. W. 1 mile distant; thence N. E. ^ N., 7 miles, to abreast the docks. It is said that vessels can lie at the docks in heavy northeasters. Breakwater. — The present project for the improvement of this harbor, adopled in 1887, consists in the construction of two breakwater Eiers extending froiu the eastern and western points of the bay, the east reakwater to bo 1,000 feet in length, and the west 000 feet long, and on a line with each other, leaving an opening of 1,340 toot between the outer extreraeties and enclosing an area of 109 acres; 750 linear feet of the east breakwater has been conipleted. Gooseberry River Keel*.-— This is a small rocky shoal with only 13 feet of water over it in its shualest place. Its greatest length is / LAKB SUPEBIOB.' 239 north and south, being about 400 feet inside the 18-foot curve of the bot- tom. It does not appear on the chart of the lake survey, and its exist- ence is not generally known. It lies one mile south of Gooseberry river, ^ mile from shore, 1^^ miles from Castle Danger reef, and 13 miles north- east of Two Harbors. GRAND MABAIS (MINN.) PIERHEAD BEACON- LIGHT.— A fixed white light, 5th order, visible 12;^ miles. White, square pyramidal tower, lantern black, light 38 feet above lake level. On the outer or west end of breakwater. A fog-bell, struck by machinery, will be sounded from the beacon during thick and foggy weather, giving a double blow at intervals of 30 seconds. Minnesota point, S. W. f S., 107 miles.' Ontonagon, S. E., 77 miles. Outer Island light, S. ^ E., 47 miles. y«llNN!:SOT/\ i/i/rg' SaP£RIOR Grand Marais Harbor consists of a small bay about 2,500 feet from efi3t to west and 1,400 feet from north to south, semicircular in form, and protected by a breakwater extending from the east point 350 feet W. \ N. The project is to extend the breakwater 350 feet more, and dredge the entire harbor area within the 6-foot curve of the bottom. At E resent there is & dredged area of 22 acres 16 feet deep. To enter the arbor: Run in heading from N. E. to N. N. E., haul around the west uid of breakwater, giving it a berth of 100 feet, and steer for the dock about E. N. E. The water is deep at the west end of the breakwater, but shoal on the inside caused by rip-rapping. There is 16 feet of water up to the dock. The north shore of Lake Superior from Duluth to Portage bay is rocky and bold, and can be approached with safety within f of a mile. Grand Marais is the only harbor of refuge and the only light between those points. « • 240 LAKE 8CPKSI08. ■! iL Light-Houses and Harbors on Isle Roy ale and Passage Is- land, ISLE ROYALE (MENAGERIE ISLAND) LIGHT- STATION.— A fixed white light, 4th order, visible 15^ miles. White tower, 65 feet high, connected by a covered way with dark-brown dwell- ing, all stone. On the eastern end of Menagerie island, at the south side of the entrance into Siskiwit bay, Isle Royale. A coast light, and marks the entrance into Siskiwit bay. Manitou light, S. E. by E. f E., 66 miles. Portage Lake ehip-canal, S. by E., 60j miles. To make an an- chorage in the bay: When half of a mile north of the light, steer W. 8. W. i S., 11 miles, to near the head of the bay, and come-to in 6 or 7 fathoms nearest to south shore. Good holding ground and protection from all winds except from the nortlieast. Danglers. — There are two small patches of rock bearing N. E. by E. from the light, one 950 yards with 8 feet, and the other 1,200 yards with 6 feet of water over it. Rock Hai;l)or Light-house (light discontinued).— Drab tower, 70 feet high, of mixed stone and brick, connected by a passage- way with brick dwelling. On the west side of the west entrance into Rock harbor. Isle Royale, and about 10 miles from the northeast end of the island. To enter the harbor: Bring the west passage to bear N. W". by W. ^ W., and run in on that course, mid-channel, between the light- house and a group of small islands (Middle islands). The channel is * deep but narrow. A rocky ledge extends nearly half-way across the channel from the old light-house, or about 260 feet east of it. Wher through the passage haul to the west and come-to in 7 or 8 fathoms c the north side of the harbor; the water shoals rapidly; good anchora^ / and protection from all winds. Leaving Rock harbor bound to the nortn- ward, keep the inside passage N. E. f E., about 10 miles, mid-channel; passing out of the channel, look out for the 6-foot spot 1 mile east of JBlake's point, the northeast extremity of Isle Royale. PASSAGE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION. — A fixed red light, 4th order, visible 17 miles. Gray tower, 37 feet high, rising from stone dwelling. Light 97^ feet above sea level. On the sontl^west point of Passage island. A guide through the channel between Isle Royale and Passage island. During thick and foggy weather a ; 0-inch steam- whistle is sounded, giving blasts of 6 seconds' duration, followed by inter- vals of 25 seconds. Fog-signal adjoining tower. Five-foot spot 1 mile east of the northeast extreme of Isle Royale, S. S, W. | W., 3| miles. The southwest point of Passage island is steep-to. Vessels should keep this side of the passage best on board. Siskiwit Bay. — In southwest end protection will be found from all winds except from the northeast, also good holding ground l^ miles south of Wright's island. See Menagerie Island light. Washington and Grace Harbors are good, giving protec- tion from all except south winds, with generally good holding ground. Todd's Harbor will afford good protection, except in northerly winds; but care should be taken to avoid the 1-foot spit in the middle of the harbor. LAKE 8UPEEI0E. 241 Tobin's Harbor gives protection from all winds, with excellent holding ground. Care should be taken to anchor in the middle, as there is not much room to swing. The entrance is narrow, but the shores are 8teep-to. Dangers to be Avoided. The 6 and 12-foot shoals one-half and one mile to the southwest and south of Rock of Ages should be avoided; also the 8 and 14 foot spits, 1 mile northeast of Rock of Ages, should not be approached without due caution. The south coast of Isle Royale from Siskiwit bay to the most south- ern point of Isle Royale should not be approached nearer than 2 miles from shore, as it abounds in ledges and rocky spots, rendering this coast very dangerous. There is a 3-foot spit three-fourths mile southwest from Washington island, near the entrance to Grace harbor. The coast from Washington harbor to McCargoe's cove shows some detached rocks from one-fourth to one-half mile from shore. — 3-foot spit three-fourths mile W. S. W. of Canoe rocks. — 5-foot shoal 1 mile east of Blake's point. — 9-foot '•eef 2^ miles W. N. W. of Gull islands. — 1 and 3-foot spots one-half a mile south of Gull islands. — 3 foot spot one-third mile east of Batteau rocks. Foul ground within one-half mile around Wright's island in Siskiwit bay. Compass Courses and Distances on Lake Sz^penor. Note. — Courses and bearings corrected for magnetic varialiou. Distances in statute miles. Point Iroquois to White Fish Point.— When U miles northeast of Point Iroquois light, steer N. W. f N., 2b^ miles, until White Fish Point light bears southwest 1^ miles distant, when follow around the point 1 mile until the light bears south l^ miles distant. White Fish Point to Duluth.— When l^ miles north of the light, steer W. by N. ^ N., 145^ miles, to a point 2 miles north of Cop- per Harbor main light, passing about 12 miles to the northward of Stan- nard Rock light, and 1^ miles north of Manitou light; thenco W. 7 miles, thence W. by S. 8 miles to a point 2 miles off Eagle Harbor main lighc, and in line of thu range lights, keeping two miles off shore; thence steer W. by S. i S., 124 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. f W. of Devil island, passing about 5 miles north of Outer Island light; thence W. S. W. i S., 68 miles, to within \ mile of the beacon, and in range of the two lights at Dululh. White Fish Point to Ashland.— When 2 miles off P:agle Harbor main light as in the course to Duluth from White Fish point, steer S. W. by W. ^ W., 136 miles, to a point 1 mile N. W. & W. from La Point light, thence 8. by W J^ W., 8 miles, to the outer end of the proposed extension of the breakwater at Ashland, White Fish Point to Two Harbors.— When 2 miles off Eagle Harbor main light as in the course from White Fish point to Duluth, steer W. by 8. i 8., keeping a little to the westward, for 168 243 LAKE SUPERIOR. uiilea, to a point 1 mile south of the breakwater ;.: *.:^T.te hay f r Two Harbors, oassing 8 miles north of Outer Island l), miles north of Devil island. White Fish Point to Grand Marais.- -When i^nlies north of the light, steer W. ^ S., 15 miles, until past Point Vermilion; thence W. f S., 34 miles, to a point 1 mile north of the piers. Wliite Fish Point to Grand Island Ha-rbor.— When 1^ miles north of the light, steer W. ^ S., 56 J miles, until Big Sable light bears south distant 2 miles; when steer S, W. f W., 18^ miles, to a point one-half mile north of Grand Portal; thence S. W. ^ S., lOi^ ii.iles, to abreast of the beacon. See Grana Island Harbor Beacon for further directions. White Fish Point to Marquette. — When i| miles north of the light, steer W. ^ S.^ 56| miles, until Big Sable light bears south 2 miles distant; when steer W. by S. ^ S., 60 miles, to the beacon on break- water. This course leads 4^ miles north of Grand Island light. White Fish Point to Portage Entry.— Wh(^n H mWea north of the light, steer W. i N., 145 miles, to a point 1^ miles N. f W. of Huron Island light; whence steer W. ^ S., 20 miles, or until the lights at the entry are in range, passing three-fourths of a mile south of Port- age River light. White Fish Point to Mendota (Lac La Bel !«).— When 1^ miles north of tne light, steer W. by N, f N., 146 milest, ranging on Mt. Bohemia, and passing 4 miles north of Stannard's Rock light, until Mendota light-house (light discontinued) bears W. f S., when haul up on that bearing for the canal, 2 miles distant. White Fisli Point to Copper Harbor. — When 1^ miles north of the light, steer W. by N. f N., 145^ miles, pahsing 1^ miles north of Manitou light, until abreast of Copper harbor, l^ mi'es distant, and in line of the range lights. White Fish Point to Roclc Harbor (Tsle Royale).— When 1^ miles nortl' of the lig'U, .stedr N. W. by W. f W., 192^ miles, ranging on the light-he use to wit! > f ' le-half mile of it, when see Rock Island light-house for further directions. White Fish Point to Silver Islet Landing.— When l^ miles north of the light, steer N. W. by W. f W., 187 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Passage Island light; thence W. by N. f N,, 22;J^ miles, to the north entrance to the landing, passing two-thirds mile porthward of Silver islet. Silver Island landing is on the main shore behind Burnt island. To make the landing from the southward, when 1 mile south of Passage island light, steer W. by N. ^ N., 22 miles, to a point one-fourth mile W. ^ S. of the crib on Silver islet, thence about N. W. ^ W., until the passage between Burnt island and the main shore is fairly op^n, when steer in mid-channel about N. E, ^ E., keeping a lookout for patches of rooks on each side; there are two high posts of the wharf on which range lights .'re sometimes placed to guide to the dock at night. White Fish Point to Port Arthur.— When i Pa3'«age Island lijjfht as in the course to Silver islet, i^teer mi'i -i, unti' I'liunder Cape light bears N. E. ^ N., distant 2 N. W. I W., 9i mf.las, to a point three fourths mile northeast of the Welcome iwlands; thenoe N. W. | W., 6 miles, to the dock at Port Arthur. mile south of W. f N. 28i miles, thence LAKK SUPEUIOB. 5*4.3 hay rr iwo miles north i^ rilles north ilion; thence r.— When 1^ g Sable light es, to a point 10^ ii.iles, to • a for further niles north of bears south 2 con on break- ;ht. ht?n 1^ railes niles N. f VV. ntil the lig[hts louth of Port- 11«).— When lit, ranging on ck light, until en haul up on hon 1^ miles ing 1^ miles lies distant, |Royale). — 192^ miles, idu see Rock -When li iS, to a point 22|: miles, to berth ward of )ehind Burnt lilo south of ht oiiG-fourth i W., until ly op'^n, when |or patches of which range lile south of }V. t N. 28i Imiles, thence li''ast of the look at Port White Fifeh Point to Caribou Island.— When l^mile? north of the light, steer N. W. ^ W., 55^ miles, to a point 4 miles south- west of the south point, and avoid the extensive reef which spreado ou / from the southwest point of the island. Wliite Fish Point to Nepigon Bay.- When ik miles ncnH of the light, steer N. W. ^ N., 183 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Batl vi Island light, passing 2^ miles to the northeastward of the north point of Caribou island. White Fish Point to Michipicoten Island.— When H miles north of the light, steer N. W. by N., V* miles, to a point 3 miles southwest of Michipicoten Island light. White Fish Point to Michipicoten River.— When 2 miles east of While Fish Point light, steer N. i W., 36 miles, to a point 3^ miles west of Cape Choyye, passing If miles west of Cape Gargantua; thence N. E. by N, ^ N., 17^ miles, to a point 3 miles southwest of the entrance to the river. White Fish Point to Montreal River.— When 2 miles east of White Fish Point light, steer N. by E. ^ E., 30 miles; thence northeast, 5^ railes, to a point 1^ miles west of the entrance to the river^ Grand Marais to Marquette. — When i mile north of the piers, steer W. ^ N., 8 miles, to a point 2 miles north of Big Sable light, when see course from White Fish point to Marquette. Grand Marais to Manitou Island and Copper Har- bor. — When 1 mile north of piers, steer N. W. by W. ^ W., 92 railed, to a point Ij miles north of Manitou light; thence W. by N. ^ N., 13 miles, to a point 1^ miles off, and in range of the lights, to guide into the harbor. Grand Marais to Portage Eatry. — When l nil- n .rtV. of the piers, steer W. |^ N., 98 miles, to a point 1^ miles north iluron Island light, whence see course from White Fish poi'^.tto Portu « entry. Grand Island Harbor to Marquette.— Run oat .;i the range lights N. by W. f W., about 6 miles, to a point 1 mile N. K. f K. from the north point of Wood island, when Leer W. ^ N., 1"' raiie;^, until Laughing Fish point bears south, distant i mile, thence W. g^ S., H miles, to the beacon-liglit at Marquette. Grand Island Harbor to Copper Harbor.— When 1 mile N. E. f N. from the north point of Wood island, as in the last course, steer N. W. f N., 75 railes, to a point 1^ miles north of Manitou light, when see course I'rom Grand Marais lo Manitou and Copper ha»*bor» Grand Island Harbor to Portage Entry.— Run out on the ranges N. by W. f W., about 8 railes, until Grand Island light bears E. \ N., 3 railes distant, when steer W. N. W. ^ N., 66 railes. to a point 1^ miles north of Huron Island light, when see coursn from White Fish point to Portage entry. Marquette to Portage Entry. -*Vhen i mile ea»t of Mar- Juotte liglit, steer N. ^ W., 4$ railes, until tno north point ot' Presque slo bears southwest, 2 railes distant, passing one-quarter of a mile east of .the rockfl extending five-eighths of a mile east of the north end of Presque Isle, when steer N. W. i N., 22 miles, until P.ig B.\y point bears H. W. ^ 8,, 9 miles, thence W. N. W., 18 miles, to a point l^ miles N. | W. of m 244 LAKE 8UFKR10K. ! ! il t' i: ' » Huron Island lights when see course from White Fish point to Portage entry. To Bun Inside the Rocks off Presque Isle. — When abreast the pierhead beacon-light, steer N. E. by E., about 1 mile, until Granite Island light opens by Presque Isle, when haul up for it N. by W, ^ W., 6 miles, passing mid-channel between Presque Isle and the rooks, when steer N. W. J N., 20 miles, until Big Bay point bears S. W. ^ S., 2 miles, whence see preceding course to Portage entry. Marquette to Mendota (Lac La Belle). — When 2 miles northeast of Presque Isle, as in the course to Portage entry, steer N. W. by N. f N., 60 miles, ranging on Mt. Houghton, until the light-house (discontinued) at the entrance to the canal bears W. f S., 2^ miles distant, when steer for it. Marquette to Manitou Passage. — When 2 miles northeast of Presque Isle, as in the course to Portage entry, steer N. by W. ^ W., 51^ miles, passing half a mile east of Granite Island light, until Gull Rock light bear.? N. E. J N., IJ miles, or about midway between it and the southeast extreme of Keweenaw point, when follow around the coast, keeping 1 mile from shore for 11^ miles to Copper harbor. Marquette to Stannard Rock.— When i mile east of main light, steer N. f E., 44 miles, to a point one-eighth of a mile west of day beacon. Huron Island to L'Anse. — When l^ miles N. f W. of Huron Island ligUt, steer W. J S., 10 miles, passing three-quarters of a mile north of Polnte Abbaye, thence S. W. f W., 13 miles, until Pe-qua-qua- wa-raing point bears E. S. E., 1^ m/es, thence S, ^ W., 7 miles, to the railroad whrrf at L'Anse. L'Ans© to Portagre Entry. — From the merchandise dock steer N. -^ E., 14^ miles, to a point three-quarters of a mile S. by E. f E. of the pier at the entry, and in line of the range lights. Portage R-Ver. — All the dangers are marked with buoys. Run- ning up, ket'p about the middle of the river and cuts. Generally the buoys oan bo seen from one to another. Some precaution is necessary to prevent ineeting steamers or tows in narrow water. Leave red buoys to starboard and black to port. Least water in channel, 13 feet. From the entry to the head of river is 6 miles. Passing into Portage lake, steer N. by W . f W., 4f miles, until a point three-quarters of a mile below Dollar b.iy bears E. f N., one-quarter of a mile; thence N. f W., five-eiphi '13 of R*; spot is neariy in the center line of the north opening in the bridge and about 600 feet above the biidge. Portage Entry to Mendota (Lac La Belle.)— When 2 miles E. by S. from Portage River light, steer N. E. f N., 34^ miles, until Mt. Houghton bears N, W. by N. | N., and the entrance to the t to Portage sle. — When 1 mile, until for it N. by Isle and the , bears S. W. /"hen 2 miles , steer N. W. 5 light-house miles distant, 1 northeast of n: f w., 6H il Gull Rock a it and the d the coast, east of main ) west of day rs W. of Huron of a mile Pe-qua-qua- miles, to the le dock steer <:. f E. of the ■ buoys. Run- ;ut'rally the necessary to |red buoys to feet. From rtage lake. Is of a mile N. f W., iddle of the miles until Ira id -channel jto Hancock, the whistle. 8 H miles; It 300 feet, jning in the ()— When 2 84^ miles, L-ince to the LAKE BUPEUIOB. 245 oanal N. W. by W. f W., when steer N. W. by N. f N., until the en- trance bears W. f S., 2 miles distant, when run for it on that bearing. Fortaee River to Manitou Passage. -When 2 miles E. by S. from Portage River light, steer N. E. ^ N., 45 miles, ranging on Gull Rock light until within 1^ miles of it, and in mid-channel, when follow around the coast, keeping about 1 mile from shore for 11^ miles, to Copper harbor. Maiiitou Island to Passage Island. — When i mile north- east of the light, steer N. W. f N., 66 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Passage Island light. , Manitou Island to Rock Harbor. — When l mile northeast of the light, steer N. VV". f W., 65 miles, until the liglit-house (discontin- ued) bears N. W. by W. ^ W. See directions for entering the harbor. Manitou Island to Copper Harbor. — When i mile north east of the light, steer W. by N. i IT., 11 miles, thence W. ^ N., 3 miles to a point 1 mile off, and in line of the range lights. Manitou Island Passage to Ontonagon and Inter- mediate Ports. — When 1^ miles S. W. ^ S. from Gull Rock light, follow around the coast at a distance of not less than one mile for 33 miles, to a point 2 miles N. W. f W. from Eagle River light, keeping a look- out for the reefs extending along the coast from Eagle harbor to Eagle river; thence S. W. f W., 60^ miles, until the two lights at Ontonagon are in range, distant 1^^ miles from the beacon. Copper Harbor to Rock Harbor (Isle Royale).— When 1 mile N. f E. from front beacon, and in line of the range lights, steer N. W. ^ N., 53 miles, until the light-house (discontinued) bears N. W. by W. ^ W. See directions for entering the harbor. Copper Harbor to Passage Island.— When l mile N. ^ E. from the front beacon, and in line of the range lights, steer N. K. W. f W., 56 miles, to a point 1 mile south of Passage Island light. See course from White Fish point to Port Arthur and Silver islet. Copper Harbor to Eagle Harbor.— When l mile N. f E. from front beacon, and in line of the range lights, steer W. 7 milep, thence W. by 8. 7f miles, to a point II miles from Eagle harbor and in line of the range lights, keeping 1 mile from shore. Eagle Harbor to Rock Harbor (Isle Royale.)— When 1^ miles from front beacon, and in line of the r:;n«er, p.inted white, iron lantern {tainted red, tower 48 feet high, focal plane V Tjet above the level of the like. On the summit of a small island in the mouth of Oargantna bar- bor on the northeast coast of Lake Superior. South point of Caribon island W. by S. \ S., 42^ miles. White Fish Point light south 66^ miles. MICHIPICOTEN ISLAND LIGHT-STATION. — A fixed white light, vinible 16 miles. White, square wood tower, light 60 feet above lake level. On the Bouth point of the island. A fog-bell at this station. — >" ■ < M . » - LAKE 8UPKBI0B. 951 /i/ / / ,r 1 I M-^/l/ / ^m Islilii f 9V, 871 804 S04 ])3() 858 «84 Sm 818 •i78 ♦«8B «-4A9 •1W« ♦IR-i •SOT ♦in •16» 1M 117 184 «07 106 1K9 1»« 87 14« 1«9 n ll^ 187 7!> M '.B 89 7a 94 M 178 197 81 IM 1 ' * * * .... o| Superior, i fixed white 30 feet above d white light, lling attached, entrance to -A revolving liles. White, ling attached, island, on the iouth of li^ht >nd8' duration, is in a south- rthw68t side of t 1^ miles; the white light, ,e, iron lantern he level of the Jargantna har- nt of Caribou Duth 65^ miles. LTION. — A ower, light 66 A fog-bell at AGATE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, square wood tower, light 32 feet above lake level. In Quebec harbor, near Michipicoten Island harbor. PENINSULAR HARBOR LIGHT-STATION. — A re- volving white light, greatest brilliancy every 30 seconds, visible 16 miles. White, square wood tower, with white dwelling attached. Focal plane 106 feet above the level of the lake. Lantern painted red. Coast light and marks the entrance to Peninsular harbor. On the south end of the island opposite the Peninsular. Vessels entering the harbor should leave it about one-third of a mile distant on the port hand, but there is good water throughout the entrance between island and the Peninsular. BATTLE ISLAND LIGHT-STATION. — Alternate red and white flash, greatest brilliancy every 4 minute, \iRible 18 miles. White, square wood tower, light 105 feet above lake level. Entrance to Nepigon bay. LAMB ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 17 miles. White, square wood tower, with dwelling attached. Western entrance to Nepigon bay. PORPHYRY POINT LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 14 miles. White, square wood tower, light 56 feet above li^e level. Entrance to Black bay, Edward island, Algoma. THUNDER CAPE LIGHT-STATION.- A revolving white light; period of revolution, 1 minute; visible 12 milca. White, square wood tower, 45 feet above lake level, dwelling attaciied. Fog-signal building white, with brown roof, 50 yards south of light-house. Entrance to Thunder bay. Fog-horn, operated by compressed air, gives blasts of 5 seconds' duration, with intervals of 25 seconds. KAMINISTIQUIA REAR RANGE LIGHT.— A fixed white light, visible 10 miles. White, square wood tower, dwelling at- tached. On the north shore of the river, near Fort William. Kamlnistlquia Front Range Liffht.— A fixed white light visible 8 miles. Open frame lower, 293 yards E. N. E. from rear light. These two lights in one lead through the dredged channel at mouth of river. PORT ARTHUR LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 1 1 miles. White, square wood tower, light 43 feet above sea level. On the westermost end of the breakwater, built out in the bay to protect the harbor, 2,320 feet S. E. ^ S., from its former position on the end of the C. P. R. wharf. The light is 81 feet from the ex- treme end of the breakwater. Vessels running for shelter of the break* water, will leave it on their starboard hand in passing. VICTORIA ISLAND LIGHT-STATION.— A fixed white light, visible 16 miles. White, square wood tower. Lantern red, white frame dwelling, on lower ground southwest of the tower. The light is 78 feet above the lake level, and is visible all around the horizon, except where, intercepted by trees on the north and east sides of the island. Tne light stands on a high rook rising abruptly from the low ground near the western extremity of the island. 252 BAILING DISTANCES. HilllllllllilllllsfillP" i§§ii§§gg§i§i§g§§§iiP^s §giiS§gg^§§§^§ggig|fP §§ 8§gggg§§i§§§igg Sg|| sii§i§ssi§^§§^gi§§^°°- ^is§ii§l§§§i^ies§s i§§liS7ll^i«i§sii lg|gg§ii§§§i|^3S ^eg§gi§i§li§SS3 Sfgaiiiiiiiggg i§i.^3§§§ISs§S Isl^iillilS- sililSi^ii® Seo^S!SSif sfsssssess §S2ssa SSSESiS {3gSiS ^39 SS S ^ BU « I m n. sounding the whifitle, as may be necessary, to guard against collision or other accidents. Section 4283, RsviiBD Statttes. — BuU Uo&uiy-four. In construing and obejring these rules, due rp^ardmust be had to all dangers of navigation, and to any speciu circumstances Vuicb oiay ezibt in any particular caas rendering a departure from them necessary in order to avoid immediate dauger. Rule IX. — All double-ended ferry-boats on lakes and seaboard shall carry a central range of clear, bright, white lights, .bowing all around the horizon, placed at equal alcitudes forward and aft, also suoh side- lights as specified in section 4233, Revised Statutes, Rule Three, para- graphs B and C. Local inspectors in districts having ferry-boats shall, whenever the safety of navigation may require, designate for each line of such boats a oertam light, white or colored, which shall show all around the horizon, to designate and distinguish such lines from each other, which light shall be carried on a flag-staff amidship, fifteen feet above the white range- lights. The line dividing jurisdiction between Pilot-Rules on Western Rivers and Lakes and Seaboard at New Orleans shall be the lower limits of the city. appendix: 256 EXTRACTS FROM REVISED STATUTES SiiO. 4233. The fo'^owing rules for preventing collisions on the water shall he followed in the navigation of vessels of the Navy, and of the mercaiUile marine of the United States: STEAM AND SAIL VBS8BLS. RuLB Onb. Every steam vessel which is under sail, and not under Bteam, shall be considered a sail- vessel; und every steam vessel which is under steam, whether under sail or not, shall be considered a steam- vessel. LIGHTS. BuLX Two. The lights mentioned in the following rules, and no others, shall be carried in all weather, between sunset and sunrise: Rule Thbbb. All ocean-going steamers, and steamers carrying sail, shall, when underway, carry — (A) At the foremast ht^ad, a bright white light, of such a character as to be visible on a dark night, with a clear atmosphere, at a distance of at leant five miles, and ao constructed as to show a uniform and un- broken light over an arc of the horizon of twenty points of the compass, and so fixed as to throw the light ten points on each side of the vessel, namely, from right ahead to two points abaft the beam on either side. (B) On the starboard side a green light, of such character ^s to be visible on a dark night, with a clear atmosphere, at a distance of at least two miles, and so constructed as to show a uniform and unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of ten points of the compass, and so fixed as to thro >7 the light from right ahead to two points abaft the beam on the starboard side. (C) On the port side, a red light, of such character as to be visible on a dark night, with a clear atmosphere, at a distance of at least two miles, and so constructed as to show a uniform and unbroken light over an arc of the horizon of ten points of the compass, and so fixed as to throw the light from right ahead to two points abaft the beam on the port side. The green and red lights shall be fitted with inboard scre^sns, project- ing at least three feet forward from the lights, so as to prevent them from being seen across the bow. RuLB FouB. Steam-vessels, when towing other vessels, shall carry two bright white mast-head Hghts vertically, in addition to their side- lights, so as to distinguish them from other steam vessele. Each of these mast-head lights shall be of the same character and construction as th« mast-head lights prescribed by Rule Three. RuLB FiYB. All steam vessels, other than ocean-going steamers, and steamers carrying sail, shall, when under way, carry on the starboard and port sides lights of the s'^.me character and construction and in the same position as are prescribed for side-lights by Rule Three, except in the case provided in Rule Six. RuLB Six. Relates only to steamers navigaticg waters flowing into the Qulf of Mexico. SS6 APPENDIX. RuLM Sbyxv. am coasting steam-vesse'.s, and Bteam-vessela other than ferry-boats and vessels otherwise expressly provided for, navigating the bays, lakes, rivers, or other inland waters of the United States ex- cept those mentioned in Rale Six, shall carry the red and green lights, as presoribeo for ocean-going steamers; and, in addition thereto, a cen- tral range of two white lights; the after light being carried at an eleva- tion of at least fifteen feet above the light at the head of the vessel. The head light shall be so constructed as to show a good light through twenty points of the compass, namely: From right ahead to two points abaft the beam on either side of the vessel; and the after light so as to show all around the horizon. The lights for ferry-boats shall be regulated by snch rules as the board of supervising inspectors of steam-vessels shall prescribe. DIAGRAMS. The following diagrams iare intended to illustrate the workings of the foregoing system of colored lights, and are to be used by pilots in con- nection with the rules, as sailing directions on meeting or nearing other steamer*.' FIBST SITUATION. Here the two colored lights, visible to each, will indicate their direct approach (''head and head") toward each other. In this situation it is a standing rule that both shall put their helms to port and pass to the right, each having previously given one blast of the steam-whistle. 8B00ND SITUATION. Here the green light only will be visible to each, the screens prevent- ing the red light horn being seen. They are therefore passing to star- board, which is ralable in this sitaation, each pilot havi.ig previously j^ signified his intention by two blasts of the steam-whistle. THIBD BITUATIOir. A and B see each other's red lisht onlv, the screens preventing the green lights from being seen. Both vessels are evidently passing to port, which is ralable in this situation, each pilot having previously signified his intention by one blast of th^i steam-whistle. APPEirDIZ. 867 rOUBTH BITUATlOir. This is a situation reqairing great caution; the red light of B in view to A, and the green light of A in view to B, will inform both that they are approaching each other in an oblique direction. A should put hu helm to f)ort, and pass astern of B, while B should continue on his course, or port his helm, if necessary to avoid collision, each having previously ^iven one blast of the steam- whistle, as required by the rules when pass- ing to the right. FIFTH SmiATJON. This is a situation requiring great caution; the red light of A in view to B, and the green light of B in view to A, will inform oth that thej are approaching each other in an obliij^ae direction. B s.ionM put his helm to port, and pass astern of A, while A should continn< iis oonrae or port his helm, it necessary to avoid collision, each hav reviously given one blast of the steam whistle, as required by tlie > es when passing to the right SIXTH SITUATICN. In this situation the steamer A will only see the red light of the steamer B in whichever of the three positions the latter may happen to be, because the green light will be hid from view; A will be assured that the port side of B is toward him, and the latter is therefore crossing th« 268 AmanxpL bows of A in lome direction to port; A will therefore (if lo near as to fear a collision) port his helm with confidence and pass clear. On the other hand, the steamer B, in either of the three positions, will see both the red and green lights of A, by which the former will know that a steamer is approaching directly toward him; B will act accordingly. And keep away if necessary. B B BSVSNTB SITUATION. In this sitaation the steamer A will only see the green light of the steamer B in whichever of the three positions the latter may happen to be, because the red light will be hidden from view; A will be assured that the starboard side of B is toward him, and that the latter is there- fore crossing the bows of A in some direction to starboard; A will there- fore (if so near as to fear a collision) starboard his helm with confidence and pass clear. On the other hand, the steamer B, in either of the three positions, will see both the red and green lights of A, by which the for- mer will know that a steamer is approaching directly toward him; B will act accordingly, and keep away if necessary. The manner of fixing the colored lights should be particularly attended to. They will require to be fitted each with a screen^ of woc<^ or can- vas, on the inboard side, and dose to the light, in order to prevent both being seen at the same moment from any direction bat that of right ahcM to two points abaft the beam. APPENDIX. 269 This is important, for without the soreens any plan of bow-lights wonld be ineffectual as a means of indicating the direction of steerug. This will be readily understood by a reference to the preceding illustra- tions, where it will appear evident that in any situation in which two Tessels may approach each other in the dark, the colored lights will in- stantly indicate to both the relative course of each; that is, each will know whether the other is approaching directly, or crossing the bows either to starboard or port. This intimation, with the signals by whistle, as provided, is all that is required to enable vessels to pass each other in the darkest night with almost equal safety as in broad day. If at anchor, all vessels, without distinction, must exhibit a bright white light at least twenty feet above the surface of the water. RULES OP THE' ROAD AT SEA. ▲ID TO MBMOBT, IK FOITB VBBSKS, BT THOMAS OBAT. 1. TWO STEAM-BHIFS IIEETINO. When both side-lights you see ahead, Port your helm, and show your RED. 9. TWO STBAX-BHIFS PASSmO. GREEN to QREBN. or RED to RED^ Perfect safety— Go ahead I 8. TWO STBAM-8HIP8 CBOBSINO. \^OTB.— >Thi8 is the position of greatest danger; there is nothing for it but good lookout, caution, and judgment, with prompt action. If to your starboard RED appear, * It is your duty to keep clear; To act as judgment says is proper;— To Port— or Starboard— Back— or Stop her! * But, when upon your Port is seen A steamer's starboard light of GREEN, There's not so much for you to do. For GREEN to port keeps clear of you. 1. ALL SHIPS MUST KBBP A OOOD LOOKOUT, AKO 8TBAM SHIPS MUST STOP AND SO ASTBBN IP MECB88ART. Both in safety and in doubt Always keep a good lookout; In danger, with no room to turn. Ease her I— Stop her 1— Go astern! \ 360 ▲PPKNDUL I a RULES BE0OHHKin>IKa OBBTAIK FOO-SIOKALS TO BB OBSBBVED BT STBAMBBS, SAILINO-VBSSBLS, AND OTHXB GRAFT. Svery steamer, when undei; way, shall use a steam-whistle. Sailing vessels, and all other craft propelled by sails, shall use a fog-horn. Whenever there is a fog, whether by day or night, the fog-signals described below shall be sounded. Sailing-vessels and every craft propelled by sails upon the ocean, lakes, and rivers, shall, when on their starboard tack, sound one blast of their fog-horn; when on their port tack, they shall sound two blasts of their fog-horn; when with the wind free, or running large, they shall sound threie blasts of their fog-horn; when lying-to or at anchor, they shall sound the bell. In each instance the above signals shall be sounded at intervals of not more than two minutes. Sailing-vessels, when not under way, and anchored or moored in the channel or fair-way of commerce, shall sound the bell signal at intervals of not more than two minutes; and all steamers navigating in a fog or thick weathsr shall, by the rules governing pilots, sound their steam- whiutle at intervals of not more than one minute. Sailing-vessels shall at all times, on the approach of any steamer daring the night-time, show a lighted torch upon that point or quarter to which such steamer shall be approaching. And upon any craft navi- gating rivers without being in tow of a steamer, such as rafts, flat-boats, wood boats and other like craft, they shall sound a fog-horn at intervals of not more than two minutes. It shall at all times be the duty of steamers to give to the sailing- vessel, or other craft propelled by sails, every advantage, and keep out of her way. FOO SIGNALS FOB rO\7ING-BOATS. AU steam-vessels, when engaged in towing during fog or thick weather, shall sound three distinct blasts of their steam-whistles in quick succesiion, repeating at intervals not exceeding one minute. Approved March 1, 1884. GhAS. J. FOLOBB, Secretary. STEERING AND SAILING RULES. Rule XVI. — If two sail-vessels are meeting end on, or nearly end on, so as to involve risk of collision, the helms of both shall be put to port, BO that oach may pass on the port side of the other. RjLB XVII. — When two sail-vessels are crossing so as to involve risk of collision, then, if they have the wind on different sides, the vessel with the wind on the port side shall keep out of the way of the vessel with the wind on the starboard side, except in the cape in which the ves- sel with the wind on the port side is close-hauled, and the other vessel free, in which case the latter vessel shall keep out of the way. But if APPENDIX. 261 they hftve the wind on the same side, or if one of them has the wind aft, the vessel which is to windward shall keep out of the way of the vessel which is to leeward. Rule X v ill. — If two vessels nnder steam are meeting end on, or nearly end on, so as to involve risk of collision, the helms of both shall be pat to port, so that each may pass on the frt side of the other. Bulb XIX. — If two vessels under steam i^e crossing so as to involve risk of collision, the vessel which has the other on her own starboard side shall keep out of the way of the other. RuLB XX. — If two vessels, one of which is a saiUvessel and the other a steam- vessel, are proceeding in such directions as to involve risk of col- lision, the steam*ves8el shall Keep out of the way of the sail-vessel. RuLB XXI. — Everv steam-vessel, when approaching another vessel, so as to involve risk of collision, shall slacken her speed, or, if necessary, stop and reverse; and every steam- vessel shall, when in a fog, go at a moderate speed. Bulb XXII. — Every vessel overtaking any. other vessel, shall keep out of the way of the last-mentioned vessel. Rui5! XXIII.— Where, by Rules XVII, XIX, XX, and XXII, one of two vessels shall be kept out of the way, the other shall keep her course, subject to the qualifications of Rule XXIV. RuLB XXIV. — In construing and obeying these rules, due regard must be had to all dangers of navigation, and to any special circum- stances which may exist in any particular case rendering a departure from them necessary in order to avoid imn^ediate danger. OROSS-SIQNALS. Extract from circular issued by the Supervising Inspector-General, and approved by the Secretary of the Treasury, June 21, 1888. Refer- ring to Rule III, it says: The rule quoted qualifies all the others, and is the only qualification that can be permitted with safety when nleamera are meeting in such positions as to render collisions possible. There is no authority in the rules and regulations for what has become techui> oally known among pilots as "cross-signals" — that is, answering one whistle by two, ana answering two whistles with one. In all cases, and under all circumstances, when a pilot receiving either of the whistle sig- nals provided in the rul.^s, which for any reason he deems injudicious to comply with, instead of answering it with a cross-signal, as is now so mucn the custom to do, it is his imperative duty to at once observe the provisions of Rule III, namely, give the alarm signal whistle and at once slow his engine and reduce speed to bare steerage- way; and the oppos- ing vessel, immediately on hearing the alarm-signal whistle, should also slow down, and stop if necessary, till the danger of collision is passed. In investigating collision cases, insp^jctors of steam-vessels would be justified in considering any pilot who gives a cross-signal instead of com- plying with Rule \\\ prima faci« guilty of neglect ofduty. So, also, of the pilot giving the first signal, woo fails to slow or stop his boat im- mediately after hf^ discovers his signal whistles are answered otherwise than as given by himself. Rule 2 of the Pilot-Rules for Western Rivers has the same applioa- 263 A^PKNDIX. tion to those niles that Rule III of the Pilot-Rales for Lakes and Sea- board has to the latter rules, and it must be observed in the same man- ner. It is desirable that all pilots should thoroughly understand that when whistles are blown as passing signals it is a rule, n^n^er to be devi- •""*"-««dJ^rom, that one wt^i^ tfe ipaftn a.Jj>a6*-ti?fe -*«8ril&rglving such signal is or intenHs ptSrcingTer Ae/m/ two whistles, that the vessel giving it is or intends putting her helm to starboard. I GENERAL RULE FOR STEAM-SHIPS MEETING, AND PARTICULAR RULE FOR STEAM-SHIPS CROSSING. (fBOM THB sailors' POOKET book, BT OAPT. F. a. D. BSnFORD, B. N.) The general rule of the road for steamers is precisely the same as the general rule of the pavement for foot passengers in London and in all our large towns, viz., that in all ordinary cases two steamers, like two pedestrians, meeting face to face, or "end on or nearly end on," so as to involve risk of collision, sbull port, that is to say, shall keep to the right, so that each may pass on the port (left) side of the other. Nothing can be more simple than this; but the man who will persist in crossing right over the pavement, if, when proceeding along the left hand side, he sees another man coming along to his own right on the other side, cannot justify his proceoding by the rule. He will obviously get in the way of the other. The particular rule of the road for steamers is, that if they are cross- ing, then the steamer that has another steamer on her own right hand side shall get out of her way. ^ Steam-ships crossing so as to involve risk of collision always show to each other a different colored light — green to red, and red to green; un- less, therefore, a steamer sees another steamer's green light on her own port side, or another steamer's red light on her own starboard side, there IS no danger so far as steamers crossing are concerned. There are only six cases in which it is your duty to alter course to avoid risk of collision — 1. In a steamer meeting a steamer end on or nearly end on. 2. In a steamer, nearing a sailing-vessel. 8. In a steamer, approaching another on your starboard side. NoTB.— This case should be carefully considered, as it it Is one requiring the most caution and judgment. 4. If under sail on the port tack, nearing a vessel under sail — on the starboard tack. 6. If under sail going free, nearing a vessel under sail— close-hauled. 6. If under sail going free, and npr^ring another vessel to leeward — going also free. APPKMDIX. 268 In the Jirat ccue only ig it right to port the helm without further oon- ■ideratioD. In the other five oases the course should not be altered until— either by bearings taken with an interval between them, or by bringing the vestol on with some part of the rigging, and watching whether she draws aft or forward — it is ascertained tnat the vessels are converging on one point, and which is the best way to alter it, to avoid collision. Seamen are to be found who port at every light seen ahead, or nearly ahead ; but if they port when they should not — for example with a green light, say two points on their starboard bow, and say they do it because the light is nearly ahead or nearly end on with them — that is no fault of the rule, and has no reference to the rule, for the rule does not apply in oases where there is no risk of collision; and there is no risk of collision as has already been admitted, if a green light is seen ahead or any- where on the starboard side. One of the most fruitful causes of collision is, that the ship that has by the rules to alter course, does not do so promptly and sufficiently to show to the other ship clearly, and evidently, that she knows her duty and is performing it. When this is not done, the other ship is often led to adopt some wrong 'bourse to avoid collision, and thus bring it to pass. If under steam, a slight yaw with the helm will serve to show the direc- tion you intend to take; if under sail and about to tack, let fly the jib sheet; if to bear up, start the after sheets. So long as you keep a green light opposed to a green light, or a red light opposed to a red light, no collision can happen between passing ships. The reckless use of port helm leads to collision. Thb Rulb op thk Road should be so thoroughly mastered that there would be no hesitation in the action to be taken in meeting or pass- ing vessels, by night or day, whether under steam or sail. The sailor should be as familiar with these laws as he is with the points of the compass, so as to enable him to move his ship as instinctively as he moves his own body. The state of the bow lights as well as that of the masthead lights should be the constant care, not only of the officer of the deck, but also of the lookout man. The Lead. — Above all, the sailor's attention is most earnestly called to that simple but important instrument, to that best of all inventions for saving life at sea, viz. : the lead; the neglect of which may be said to have been the great cause of many of the modern disasters to shipping. The deep sea lead as well as the hand lead, should never be lost sight of, and the crew made familiar with the method of "passing the line along," so as to obtain a deep sea cast with as little delay as possible. ^ , ■" CODE OF ENGINE-SIGNALS FOR THE EIGHTH AND NINTH SUPERVISING INSPECTION DISTRICTS. The attention of Maatera, Pilots and Migineera is directed to the code of signals adopted by the Board of Supervising Inspectors of Steam- Ves- sels, and approved by the Secretary of the Treasury, February 18, 1886, for nae on steam- vessels navigating the following-named waters: 364 ▲PPEMDUL. EiOBTH DivnicT'^All the wcUera of the lake* north and toeat of Lake JSrie, with their tribiUarieSf and the upper portion of the Illinois river dovm to and indttding Peoria, lU. Ninth Dmtbiot — All the waters of Zake M-ie, Ontario, and Cham »-^pMirC, 9oUhthe Riifir St, Zawrence, and their 'triotdUriee, •If COnE OP SIONALfl. 1 Whistle or Bell Oo ahead. 1 Whlgtleor Bell Stop. SWhistleBor Bells Back. 8 Whistles or Bells Cheek. 1 Long Whistle or 4 Bells Strong. 1 Long Whistle or 4 Bells All right. 2 Whistles or 2 Bells, when the engine is working ahead, will always be a signal to Stop and Back Strong. DEFINITION OF GEOGRAPHICAL, OR NAUTICAL, AND STATUTE MILES. A nautical mile, or a sea mile, is the length of one minute of longi* tude of the earth at the equator, at the levc ' of the sea, or the vriirT P^''^ of the earth's equatorial circumference. By the United States standard, and as used by the Coast Survey, its length is 1,162,664 common statute or land milert; 1865.11 meties; 2028.69 yards; or 6086.07 feet; conse- quently, 1 degree of longitude at the equator=69.160 land miles; and a land mile=:0. 86755 of a nautical mile. By British standard the sea mile is about 4 inches longer than by United States. Sometimes one minute of mean latitude is taken as a nautical mile. A minute of latitude at the equator is about 6,046 feet; and at the poles about 6,107; the mean of which is 6,076^ feet. LENGTH OF A DEGREE OF LONCTUDB. IN DIVKSBEXt LATITUDES, AND AT THE LEVEL OF THE SEA. These lengths are in common land or statute miles, of 5,280 feet. Since the figure of the earth has never been preciaeli/ aHcertained, these are but close approximations. I on. IB 69 18 68 U« 68.78 6H.4tt 68.19 «7.M 1^ U 16 ]H flO 83 84 86 •17.18 (IH.50 65 80 «fi08 tu.is 61.81 08 80 88 80 88 84 86 88 40 a 61.11 MIM M.70 t)7M B6 01 M.&6 03 OB 48 44 46 48 SO A8 M M.47 4tt.H3 48.18 40 86 44.n4 48.07 40.74 M 08 00 03 04 06 08 S8.70 8tl.74 8167 33.00 8()40 88.31 80. »8 70 73 74 76 78 80 8S 98 78 81 48 19.18 16.78 14.48 18.00 9.60 APPENDIX. LIFE-SAVING SERVICE! £Rp( ^ 3 3 1 as 78 9 81 48 4 10.18 A 16.78 8 14,4tj 18.()5 9 0.60 IirSTBTJCnONS TO MABIHXR8 IN CASK OF SHIPWRECK, WITH OXNSBAL INFORMATION GONCSRNIMO THK Lir£-8AVINO STATIONS. Life-saviDg Btations are located upon the lake coast, as shown in the lilt of stations following. Upon the lake coast the stations are manned from the opening ontil the close of navigation. All life-saving stations are fally supplied with boats, wreck-gun, beach apparatus, restoratives, etc. All services are performed by the life-saving crews without other compensation than their wages from the Government, though, in view of the meagerness of their pay, they are not prohibited from receiving such rewards for labor performed or rmks incurred at wrecks as owners or masters of vessels or other persons may see fit to voluntarily bestow upon them, but they are strictly forbidden to solicit such rewards. Destitute seafarers are provided with food and lodging at the nearest station by the Government as long ao necessarily detained by the oir- onmstances of shipwreck. The station crews patrol the beach from two to four miles each side of their stations four times between sanset and sunrise, and if the weather is foggy the patrol is continued through the day. Each patrolman carries Goston signals. Upon discovering a vessel standing into danger he ignites one of them, wliich emits a brilliant red flame of about two minutes* duration, to warn her off; or should the ves- sel be ashore, to let her crew know that they are discovered and assist- ance is at hand. In the day-time, a red flag will be shown from the station for the same purpose. If the vessel is not discovered by the patrol immediately after striking, rockets or flare-up lights should be burned; or if the weather be foggy, guns should be fired to attract attention, as the patrolman may be some distance away on the other end of his beat. Masters are particularly oautionedf if they shotUd be driven ashore anywhere in the neighborhood of the etations, especially on any of the sandy coasts where there is not much danger of vessels breaking up immc' diatelyf to remain on board until assistance arrives^ and under no cir- cumstances should they attempt to land through the surf in their own boats until the last hope of assistance from the shore has vanished. Often, when comparatively smooth at sea, a dangerous surf is running which is not perceptible four hundred yards off shore, and the surf when viewed from a vessel never appears as dangerous as it is. Many lives have been unnecessarily lost by toe orews of stranded vessels being thus deceived and attempting to land in the ships' boat. The difficulties of rescue by operations from the she re are greatly increased in cases where the anchors are let go qfter entering the break- ers, as is frequently done, and the chances of saving life correspondingly lessened. INSTRUCTIONS. JResoue with the Life- Boat or Surf Boat. The patrolman, after discovering your vessel ashore and burning i Coston signal, hastens to his station for assistance. If the use of a boat mm*. I • 266 APPKNDaC ■ i ii practicable, either the large life-boat is launched from its ways in the station and proceeds to the wreck by water, or the lighter surf-boat is hauled overland to a point opposite the wreck and launched, as circum- stances may require. ^ Upon tne boat-reaoTing youf^essel, tue~llire6tions and orders of the keeper (who^ always commands and steers the boat) should be implicitly obeyed. Any headlong rushing and crowding should be prevented, and the captain of the vessel should remain on board, to preserve order, until every other person has left. Women, children, helpless persons, and passengers should be passed into the boat first. Goods or baggage will positively not be taken into the boat until all are landed. If any be passed in against the keeper's remonstrance, he is fully authorized to throw the same overboard. Heacue toith the Breeehea-Btioy or Life- Car, Should it be inexpedient to use either the life-boat or surf -boat, recourse will be had to the wreck-gun and beach apparatus for the rescue by the breeches-buoy or the life-car. A shot with a small line attached will be fired across your vess^L Get hold of the line as soon as possible, and haul on board until yon get a tail-block with a whip or etidless line rove through it. This tail- block should be hauled on board as quickly as possible to prevent the whip drifting off with the set or fouling with wreckage, etc. Therefore, if yon have been driven into the rigging where but one or two men can work to advantage, cut the shot-line and run it through some available block, such as the throat or peak halliards block, or any block which will afford a clear lead, or even between the ratlines, that as many as possible may assist in hauling. Attached to the tail-block will be a tally-board with the following directions in English on one side and French on the other: " Make the tail of the block fast to the lower mast, well up. If the masts are gone, then to the best place you can find. Cast off shot-line, see that the rope in the block runs free, and show signal to the shore." The above instructions being complied with, the result will be as shown in Figure 1 on page 267. As soon as }i our signal is seen, a three-inch hawser will be bent on to the whip and hauled off to your ship by the life-saving crew. If circumstances will admit, you can assist the life saving crew by manning that part of the whip to which the hawser is bent and hauling with them. When the end of the hawser is got on board a tally-board will be found attached, bearing the following directions in English on one side and French on the other: "Make this hawser fast about 2 feet above the tail block, see all clear and that the rope in the block runs free, aud show signal to the shore." These instructions being obeyed the result will be shown in Figure 2. Take particular care that there are no turns of the whip-line round the hawser. To prevent this take the end of the hawser up between the parte of the whip b^ore making it fast.. When the hawser is made fast, the whip cast off from the hawser, and your signal seen by the life-saving crew, they will haul the hawser taut and by means of the whip will haul off to your ship a breeohes-baoy 8«b- APPSVDIX. ser as oironm- FIQURB 1. FIOUBB 2. e bent on to ponded from a traveler blook, or a life-oar from rings, running on the hawser. Figure 8 on the following page, represents the apparatus rigged, with the breeches buoy hauled off to the ship. If the breeches buoy be sent, let one man immediately get into it, thrusting his legs through the breeches. If the life oar, remove the hatch, place as many persons into it as it will hold (''dur to six), and secure the hatch on the outside by the hatch-bar and hook, signal as before, and the buoy or car will be hauled ashore. This will be repeated until all are landed. On the last trip of the life-car the hatch must be secured by the inside hatch bar. In many instances two men can be landed in the breeches buoy at the same time by each putting a leg through a 1'3(; of the breeches and holding on to the lifts of the buoy. Children when brought ashore by the buoy should be in the arms of older persons or securely lashed to the buoy. Women and children should be landed first. In signaling, as directed in the foregoing instructions, if in the day- time, let one man separate himself from the rest and swing his hat, a handkerchief, or his hand; if at night, the showing of a light, and con- cealing it once or twice, will be understood; and like signals will be made from shore. Circumstances may arise, owing to the strength of the current or set, or the danger of the wreck breaking up immediately, when it would be impossible to send off the hawser. . in such a case a breeches-buoy or lifeHsar will be hauled ofT instead by the whip, or sent off to you by the shot-line, and you will be hauled ashore through the surf. If your vessel is stranded during the night and discovered by the patrolman, which you will know by his burning a brilliant red light, keep a bright lookout for signs of the arrival of the life-saving crew abreast of your vessel. From one to four hours may intervene between the burning of the light and their arrival, as the patrolman will have to return to his tta- 268 ▲PPSNDIX. [ (I- f 'tl 1 -- \ nOURE 3. tfon, perhaps three or four miles distant, and the life-saving orew draw the apparatus or surf boat through the sand or over bad roads to where your vessel is stranded. Lights on the beach will indicate their arrival, and the sound of <}annon- firing from the shore may be taken as evidence that a line has been fired across your vessel. Therefore, upon hearing the cannon, make a strict search aloft, fore and aft, for the shot-line, for it is almost certain to be there. Though the movements of the life-saving crew may not be per- ceptible to you, owing to the darkness, your ship will be a good mark for men experienced in the use of Ihe wreck gun, and the first shot sel- dom fails. RECAPITULATION. Remain by the wreck until assistance arrives from the shore unless your vessel snows signs of immediately breaking up. If not discovered immediately by the patrol, burn rockets, fiare-np, or other lights, or, if the weather be foggy, fire guns. Take particular care that there are no turns of the whip line round the hawser before making the hawser fast. Send the women, children, helpless persons, and passengers ashore first. Make yourself thoroughly familiar with these instructions, and re- member that on your coolness and strict attention to them will greatly depend the chances of success in bringing you and your people safely to land. AIM'KNDU. 269 LI8T OF LIFE-SAVING DISTRICTS, AND STATIONS ON THE LAKES. NINTH DISTRICT. BMBRAr^NO LAKES ONTARIO AND* ERIE. ^_ NAMTC OP STATION. KEEPER. POSTOFFICE ADDRESS. BIk Suidjr Williftin FiHh Elltoburg, New York. Texas, New York. Sabnon C reek. Edwin E. ChaDman Oswesro. New York. Obarloito Joseph 0. Doyle Charlotte, New York. Buffalo Thomas WilllAnu Buffalo. New York. Brie Andrew Jansen Erie, Penn. Falport Oeorite F. Bab"OCk Painesville. Ohio. OieT<>!iMid Char les 0. Gtoodwin Cleveland, Ohio. ?r,'.at filarblehead. Luc'sii M. Clemens Point Marblehead. Ohio. Louisville * '. . WilUam II. Devan Louisville, Kentucky. TENTH DISTRICT. LAKES HURON AND SUPERIOR. NAME OF STATION. KEEPER. POSTOFFICE ADDRESS. SandBeaoh Point anx Barques . . Grindstone City Ottawa Point Stumreon Point Thunder Bay Island. Middle Island Hammond Bay Bois Blanc Vermilion Point. . . . Crisp's .• Two Heart River. . . . Muskallonge Lake. . . Marquette Ship-Canal George W. Plough. Henry D Ferris Henry Gill, Jr. Frank J. Ocha. — . . , . . James E. Henderson. . , JohnD. Persons Donald McKenzie Joseph Valentine George 8. Cleary ....... Samuel F. Bemier Robert M. Small Thomas H. McCormick. John H. Frahm Henry Cleary George A. Smith Sand Beach, Mich. Huron City, Mich. Grindstone City, Mich. East Tawas, Mich. Harrisville, Mich. Alpena, Mich. Alpena, Mich. [gan. Midi. Hammond's Bay, via Cheboy- Bois Blanc, Mich. Deer Park, Luce Co , Mich. Deer Park, Luce Co., Mich. Deer Park, Luce Co., Mich. Deer Park, Luce Co., Mich. Slurquette, Mich. Hancock, Mich. ELEVENTH DISTRICT. LAKE MICHIGAN. NAJtE OF STATION. Beaver Island North Manitou Island. . . PointBetsy Frankfort Manistee Grande Pointe au Sable. Lud^ngton Pent Water. White River Mu8kef.on GranJ Haven. Holland South Haven. Saint Joseph Michigan City Chicago South Chicago. Evanston Kenosha Racine Milwaukee Sheboygan Two luvers Sturgeon Bay Canal .... Owen Gallagher. ...... Peter Olsen Harrison Miller George Morenoy John Hanson George Wilson Charlee Tufts. . . . .■ Martin Ewald Charles Lysaght Henry J. Woods John Lysaght Charles Mv "ton John I'.. McKenzie . . . . William L. ijtevens.. . . Henrv Finch Telesford Nt. Peter Edmond Dionnc> Lawrence O. Lawson . Benjamin G. Cameron George Breckenfeld. . . Nells A. Peterson Wm. Nequette Oliver Pilon Joseph Dionne POSTOFFICE ADDRESS. St. James, Beaver Harbor, Mich. Leland, Mich. South Frankfort, Mich. Frankfort, Mich. Manistee, Mich. liii.coln, Mich. Ludington, Mich. Pent Water, Mich. Montague, Mich. Muskegon, Mich. Grand Haven, Mich. Holland, Mich. South Haven, Mich. St. Joseph, Mich. Michigan City, Ind. I. C. Pier No. 1, Chicago, 111. South Chicago, III. Evanston, III. Kenosha, Wis. Box 683, Racine, Wis. Milwaukee, Wis. Sheboygan, Wis. 'I wo Rivers, Wis. Sturgeon Bay, Wis. S70 APPBNDIX. DIRECTIONS FOR RESTORING THE APPARENTLY DROWNED. Role I. Arouse the patient. — Unless in danger of freezing, do not more the patient, but expose the face to a oarrent of fresh air, wipe dry the month and nostrils, rip the clothing, so as to ev . -e chest and waist, and give two or three quick, smarting slaps l . .. stomach and ohesv with the open hand. If, however, there is reason to believe that considerable time has elapsed since the patient bedame insensible, do not lose furlj^er ticie by practicing Rule I, but proceed immediately to Rule IL After loosening clothing, etc, if the patient does not revive, then proceed thus: RuLB II. To draw off water, eto.,f^om the stomach and chest. — If the jaws are clenched, separate them, and keep the mouth open by placing between the teeth a cork or small bit of wood; turn the patient on the face, a large bundle of tightly-rolled clothing being placed beneath the stomach, and press heavily on it for half a minute, or bo long as fluids flow freely from the mouth. Rule IIL To produce breathing. — Clear the mouth and throat of mucus, by introducing into the throat the corner of a handkerchief wrapped closely around the forefinger; turn the patient on the back, the roll of clothing being so placed beneath it as to raise the pit of the stomach above the level of any other part of the body. It there be another person present, let him, with a piece of dry cloth, hold the tip of the tongue out of one corner of the mouth (this prevents the tongue from falling back and choking the entrance to the windpipe), and with the other hand grasp both wrists and keep the arms forcibly stretched back above the head, thereby increasing the prominence of the ribs, which tends to enlarge the chest. The two last-named positions are not, however, ab- solutely essential to success. Kneel beside or astride the patient's hips, and with the balls of the thumbs resting on either side of the pit of the stomach, let the fingers fall into the grooves between the short ribs, so as to afford the best grasp of the waist. Now, using your knees as a pivot, throw all your weight forward on your hands, and at the same time squeeze the waist between them, as if yon wished to force everything in the chest upward out of the mouth; deepen the pressure while you can. count slowly one, two, three; then suddenly let go with a final push, which springs you back to your first kneeling position. Remain erect on your knees while you can count one, two, three; then repeat the same motions as before at a rate gradually increased from four or five to fifteen times in a minute, and continue thus this bellows movement with the same regularity that is observable in the natural motions of breath- ing which you are imitating. If natural breathing be not restored, after a trial of the bellows movement f v r the space of three or fout- minutes, then turn the patient a second time on the stomach, as directed in Rule n, rolling the body in an opposite direction from that in which it was first turned, for the purpose of freeing the air passages from any remain- ing water. Continue the artificial respiration from one to four hours, or until the patient breathes, according to Rule III; and for a while, aiter the appearanoe of returning life, caref nlly aid the first short saeps until deepened into full breaths. Continue the drying and rnbbmg, which should have been unceasingly practised from the beginning by the APPENDIX. 271 isriatants, taking care not to interfere with the means employed to pro< 'lace breathing. Thns the limbs of the patient should be rabbed, always in an npward.direc^jo/i jtowards the body, with jBrm-grasping pressure and energy, nsing the bare hands, dry flannels or handkerchiefs, and con* tinning the friction under the blankets or over the dry clothing. The warmth of the body can also be promoted by the application of hot flannels to the stomach and arm pits, bottles or bladders of hot water, heated bricks, Ac, to the limbs and soles of the feet. RuLB IV. Aftbb Treatmbnt. — Bxtemally: As soon as breathing is established, let the patient be stripped of all wet clothing, wrapped in blankets only, put to bed comfortably warm, but with a free circulation of fresh air, and left to perfect rest. Internally: Give whisky or brandy and hot water in doses of ateaspoonful to a tablespoon ful, according to the weight of the*patient, or other stimulant at hand, every ten or fifteen minutes for the first hour, and as often thereafter as may seem expedi- ent. Later manifestations: After reaction is fully established, there is great danger of congestion of the lungs, and if perfect rest is not main- tained for at least forty-eight hours, it sometimes occurs that the patient is seized with great difficulty of breathing, and death is liable to follow unless immediate relief is afforded. In such cases apply a large mustard plaster over the breast. If the patient gasps for breath before the mustard takes effect, assist the breathing by carefully repeating the arti- oial respiration. NoTB. — An eminent authority, Dr. Labordette, the Supervising Surgeon of th6 Hospital of Lisieux, in France, appears to haVe established that the clinching of the Jaws and the semi-contraction of the fingers, which have hitherto been considered signs of death, are, in fact, evidences of remaining vitality. After numerous ex- periments with apparently drowned persons, and also with animals, he concludes that these are only signs accompanying the first stage of suffocation by drowning, the jaws and hands becoming relaxed when death ensues.* This being so, the mere clenching of the jaws and semi-contraction of the hands must not be considered as reasons ror the discontinuance of efforts to Bave life, but should serve as a stimulant to vigorous and prolonged efforts to quicken vitality. Persons engaged in the tasks of resuscitation are, therefore, earnestly desired to take hope and encouragement for the life of the sufferer, from the signs above referred to, and to continue their en- deavors accordingly. In a number of cases Dr. Labordette restored to life persons whose jaws were so firmly clenched that, to aid respiration, their teeth had to be forced apart with iron instruments. TREATMENT OF FROST-BITES. AS BBCOHMBNDBD BT THB 8UBOBON-OEKBBAL OF THB HABINE- HOSPITAL BBBYICB. 1. Do not bring the patient to the fire, nor b^ohe the parts in warm water. 2. If snow be on the ground, or accessible, take a woolen cloth in the hand, place a handful of snow upon it, and gently rub the frozen part until tne natural color is restored. In case snow is not at hand, bathe the part gently with a woolen cloth in the ooXAe^t fresh water obtainable — ioe water if practicable. rrhe mtwoaUr rigidity of death {Hgor inortU) oooort later, atter the temporaiy relaxation referred to. n% ▲PPSMDIZ. 8. In OMO ihe froatared according to Service formula. As it contains opium, do not administer morphia or other opiate. 5. In the case of a person apparently dead from exposure to cold, fric- tion should be appliea to the body and the lower extremities, and arti- ficial respiration practiced as in oases of the apparently drowned. As soon as the circulation appears to be restored, administer spirft and water at intervals of 15 or 20 minutes, until the flesh feels natural. Even i^ no signs of life appear, friction should be kept up for a long period, as instances are on record of recovery after several hours of suspended ani- mation. Carron oil — (Service formula): Olive-oil or linseed-oil (raw). Lime-water, of each 12 parts. Tincture of opium, 1 part , Mix. MEASURING DISTANCES BY SOUND. Sound travels at the rate of 1090 feet in a second of time when the temperature is at the freezing point, and about 1125 feet when the tem- perature is 60 degrees above zero ^.cale of Fahrenheit), which may be used for all ordinary purposes. This circumstance affords an aid to the mariner navigating in a fog, if by sounding the steam-whistle he can get an echo from the shore. The usual method is to observe carefully the time in seconds between the sound of the whistle and the echo, and multiplying it by the distance that sound travels in a second. i • * EXAMPLE. H. The whistle is sounded at 10 The echo is heard by the observer at 10 M. s. 6 13 6 81 10 Then 1125x19=21,375 feet, which is approximately four miles. But it must be observed that the shore, or whatever the sound was projected against, is only one-half that distance from the observer, because the sound had to travel there and return. In this connection it may be well to remark that the echo does not always come from the nearest shore, but sometimes from a neighboring hill-side, back from the shore or from a dense fog bank, when there is no land near in that direction. < t' APPENDIX. 978 TO DETERMINE THE DISTANCE OF AN OBJECT ON SHORE, WHEN RUNNING ALONG THE LAND. Take the bearing of the object, and note the time, keeping the tame coarse; see how many points it differs from the coarse; when its differ- ence is doubled, the ship will be as far from the object as she has run in the interyal. EzAMPLB. — Steering N. by W. along the shore making 10 miles an hour; at noon Sand Beach ligbt-hoase bore N. W. by N. The difference between the course and bearing 2 points, proceeding on the same course until it bears N. W. by W., which is 4 points from the course, or double the difference of two points, time half-past twelve; the distance run in the half-hour, 6 miles, equals the distance from the light-house when it bears N. W. by W. Akothbb Method. — When an object on shore is nearly abeam, note the interval until the object changes its bearings two and a half points. Twice the distance run in this time is the distance of the object. EZA.MPLB. — Steering N. by W. along the shore. Sand Beach light- house bears W., 1 point forward of the beam, proceeding on the same oourse until it bore W. S. W. ^ S., 1^ points abaft the beam; time running, one-quarter of an hour; distance run, 2^ miles; twice this dis- tance, 6 miles, is the distance of the light when the second bearing was taken. . . THE BAROMETER. 1. Wind is air set in motion. The barometer is almost always affect- ed before the wind actually begins to blow or the rain to fall. The length of time which passes between the first appearance of a change of weather and the actual setting-in is not always the same. 8. When the barometer is steady there is no great likelihood of a storm being near us, while, when it is unsteady, there is danger of the wind freshening to a gale. This unsteadiness may be due to mere local causes, so that it is at times very hard to say whether it shows that a serious storm or only a slight squall is coming on. 3. A sudden /ise of the barometer is very nearly as dangerous as a sudden fall, because it shows that the level is unsteady. In an ordinary gale the wind often blows hardest when the barometer is just beginning to rise, directly after having been very low. 4. When the barometer at any place rises very high and continues so for some days, it is because there is too mach air at the place, and the wind will be very light. A gale can only set in when the wind flows away, and it will not at first be severe at that place. 5. When the barometer is very low and continues so, there may be calm and even dry weather for a short time, what is called a " pet day ** or a " weather-breeder; ^ but there is great danger of a serious storm, because the air will try to force its way into the districts where the bar- 274 APPENDIX. ometer is low and increase the pressuro there. The storm will probably be the worst where the barometer has been lowest. 6. The barometer rises for northerly winds (including from north- west, by the north to the eastward) for dry or less wet weather, for less wind, or for more than one of these changes. 7. The barometer falls for southerly winds (including from southeast by the south to the westward) for wet weather, for stronger wind, or for more than one of these changes. 8. Besides these rules for the barometer, there is one about the way in which the wind changes, which is very important. It is well known to every seaman, and is contained in the following couplet: " When the wind veers against the sun, Trust it not for back it will run." 9. The wind almost always shifts with the sun, that is, from left to right in front of you. A change in this direction is called veering. 10. If the wind shifts the opposite way, that is against the sun, the change is called backing, and it seldom occurs unless when the weather is unsettled. THE THERMOMETER. As the barometer shows weight or pressure of the air, so tbe ther- mometer shows heat and cold, or temperature. The result of numerous observations shows, that in the northern hem- isphere: The thermometer rises with E., S. E., and S. winds; with a S. W. wind it ceases to rise and begins to fall; it falls with W., S. W., and S. winds; and v ith a N. E. wind it ceases to fall and begins to rise. Tne above r3marks must be considered as relating to the hemisphere generally, there are local exceptions to this rule, on the lakes we some- times have a high thermometer with northwest winds. By examining carefully the following article on the instrumental and other local indi- cations of approaching storms on the lakes, it will be observed that as the barometer falls rapidly the thermometer rises, the only exception seems to be with northeast gales, which are sometimes preceded by a high bar- ometer with falling temperature. Northwest gales in the fall are gener- ally preceded by light southeast winds, veering to the south, heavy clouds banked in the west, with lightning, and rain, barometer falling rapidly, and thermometer rising. The thermometer should always be read in oonj unction with the bar- ometer. APPENDIX. 975 k'ith the bar- INSTRUMENTAL AND OTHER LOCAL INDICATIONS OF AP- PROACHING STORMS. (OOMPILBD FROM REPORTS MADE TO THE CHIEF SIGNAL OFFICER BT OB- SERVERS OF THE SIGNAL SERVICE, U. S. A.) Alpena. — Cirrus, cirro-cumulus or cirro-stratus clouds in upper, and a dull haze in lower atmosphere. Lower winds from westerly direction, falling barometer and rising temperature. Buffalo. — Rising baroneter, with comparatively clear sky, mild temperature and light to fresh winds from west to southwest. Light cirrus or cirro-stratus clouds move from the west, apparently very high in the atmosphere; humidity and wind decrease, and occasion* ally a calm ensues. This is followed by light winds froL'^ northeast, east, or southeast. Barometer begins to fall, and temperature to rise slowly; huinidity in- creases steadily; cumulus clouds appear, moving slowly from west to southwest, and are soon followed by cumulo-stratus; wind increases in velocity, and shortly before precipitation occurs a dense white vapor re- sembling haze, and moving with the surface current, gradually covers the whole sky. Wind-storms are preceded by unusually rapid barometric depression, increase in temperature and humidity, stratus or cumulo-stratus clouds, with southwest winds. Water at the foot of lake Erie rises in advance of the storm. Detroit. — Falling barometer from twelve to twenty-four hours in advance of the storm, with wind from southeast to northeast. Duluth. — Northeast storms, preceded by hazy atmosphere and fog over the lake, the former turning to stratus and the latter to nimbus cloud as storm approaches. Falling barometer, increasing humidity and falling temperature. Northwest storms by low and falling barometer, rising temperature, high and increasing humidity, with cumulus and cumulo-stratus clouds. This class of storms most frequent in winter and spring. Northern storms by falling barometer, falling temperature, increas- ing humidity, and cumulus clouds; most frequent in wmter, and accom- panied by snow. Southern storms by falling barometer, rising temperature, increasing humidity, with hazy atmosphere. Eastern storms by high and rising barometer, rising temperature, increasing humidity, with stratus clouds. Western storms by falling barometer, high or rising temperature, and humidity, with heavy banks of stratus clouds in western sky. Occur at all seasons of year. Fogs are usually followed by rain within twenty-four hours. Erie. — Storms from north, northwest, and west are preceded by fall- ing barometer, brisk to high southerly winds, rising temperature, and increasing humidity. Storms from the southwest to southeast are pre- ceded by slowly falling barometer, rising temperature. With steady south wind at any season of the year, rain is probable within twelve hourfl. \ 976 APPENDIX. Mabqitbttb. — Faliinff barometer for twenty-four or forty-eight hours, rising temperature, southerly winds, with cirro-stratus clouds moving from a westerly or southwesterly direction. OswBOO. — Wind storms are preceded by rapid fall of barometer, with wind veering from southeast to southwest, west, and northwest. Rain storms by oscillating barometer, with downward tendency, hazy atmos- phere graduallv changing to cirro-stratus or cirro-cumulus clouds moving from westward. Northeast storms by high barometer and low temperature. Local storms by sudden fall of barometer, rising temperature, low humidity, oumulo-stratus clouds in west or southwest. BocHBSTBB. — Falling barometer, rising temperature, east to south- east wind, low humidity, and clouds moving n-om the southwest. A northeast wind backing to northwest or west, or veering to southwest in winter, indicates snow. Saint Paul. — Falling barometer, rising temperature, low humidity, southeast wind, with cirrus and cirro-stratus clouds. ToLBDO. — Barometer falling rapidly, rising temperature, low humid- ity, easterly winds, cirrus clouds in western horizon moving eastward, followed by stratus until sky is obscured. Laobossb, Wis. — Barometer falls steadily for twenty-four hours, with rising temperature, increased humidity, and cirro-stratus clouds before rain. Wind storms same as above, with addition of cirrus of great ele- vation moving in opposite direction to surface wind, and apparently highly electrified. Winter storms are preceded by gentle south to south- west winds, veering to north or northeast. PoBT Huron. — Thick, heavy haze or clouds in northwest, with south- east wind, indicates rain. Low and falling barometer, with wind from the west, northwest or east-northeast, indicates wind. PROVERBS RELATING TO CLOUDS. STORM-PRBSAQINO CLOUDS. {Metracta from Signal Service Notes.) From Aristotle's time the value of cloud si^iis in storm and rain progno8ticatix)ns has boon recognized, but their interpretation has only recently become possible, since the movement of storm centers over wide areas has been systematically traced. The irregular motions of the high clouds, perhaps more than their forms (presenting the ap- pearance of having been divided and torn up b^ up-rushing currents), indicate dangerous cyclones. If the equatorial air current in which cy- clones are borne along is undisturbed by a cyclonic vortex, the clouds floating in its higher strata would sail on it at a uniform rate. But if we suppose that a storm is moving in the great current, the ascending air in the storm's center is ceaselessly invading the cloud stratum above. It is this uprushing air which divides the clouds. But as the interchange be- tween the surface and upper air in the cyclone center tends to retard the APPENDIX. 277 ■wift upper onrrent which transports the oirriform clouds, the motion of these clouds, both over the storm center and far out in front of it, must often be retarded. Anvil Clouds. — AnviUshaped clouds are yery likely to be followed by a gale of wind. Appbajbanoes. — Soft-looking, delicate clouds foretell fine weather with moderate, or light breezes. Hard edged, oily appeariog clouds, wind. A dark, gloomy, blue sky indicates wind; a brignt, blue sky, clear fine weather. Generally the softer the clouds the less wind. Small inky clouds foretell rain. AssBMBLAQB OF Clouds. — If an assemblage of small clouds spread out or become thicker and darker, expect rain. Against thr Wind. — If you see a cloud rise against the wind, when that cloud comes up to you, the wind will blow the same way that the cloud came, and the same rule holds good of a clear place when all the sky is equally thick except one clear edge. Bull's Eye. — A small, fast growing, black cloud in violent motion, seen in the tropics, is called the Bull's £ye, and precedes the most violent hurricanes. Black Scuds. — Small black scudo (clouds), drifting from southwest, is a sign of rain. Blub Skt. — Enough blue sky in the northwest to make a Scotchman a jacket is a sign of approaching clear weather. Cross- Wind Clouds. — If you see clouds going cross wind, there is a storm in the air. Clouds — Wind. — Clouds flying against the wind indicate unsettled weather. Dabk Sky. — If the sky becomes darker without much rain, an'l di- vides into two layers of clouds, expect sudden gusts of wind. Dark clouds in the west at sunrise indicate rain on that day. EvBNiNO AND Morning. — Evening red and morning gray Will set the traveler on his way; But evening gray and morning red Will bring down rain upon his head. Fair.— If the sky beyond the clouds is blue, Be glad, there is a picnic for you. Fine Wkathkr. — If clouds at the same height drive up with the wind and gradually become thinner and descend, expect fine weather. Gusts. — If there be a cloudy sky and dark clouds driving fast under higher clouds, expect violent gusts of wind. Hbavy Sky. — If the sky after fine weather becomes heavy with small olouds, expect rain. Hubs. — Clouds being soft, undefined, and feathery, will be fair. Gen- erally, any deep, unusual hue of clouds indicates rain and wind, while the more quiet and moderate tints indicate fair weather. Low Clouds. — Clouds floating low enough to cast shadows on the ground are usually followed by rain. J 278 APPENDIX. Maokbrsl Clouds. — Mackerel scales and mares' tails Make lofty ships carry low sails. Rkd Skt. — When it is evening, ve say it will be fair weather, for the sky is red; and in the morning it will be foul weather to-day, for the sky is red and lowering. (Matthew xvi: 2, 3.) When the ulouds are gathered towards the sun at setting, with a rosy hue, they foretell rain. If there be red clouds in the west at sunset, it will be fair; if the clouds have a tint of purple it will be fine, or if rod bordered with black in the southeast. Stobm. — Behold there ariseth a little cloud out of the sea like a man's hand. Prepare thy chariot and get thee down, that the rain stops thee not. And it came to pass in the meanwhile that the heavens were black with clouds and wind, and there was great rain. (Kings xviii: 44, 46.) Wind. — If the wind blow between north and east or east, with clouds for some days, and if clouds bo then seen driving from the south high up, rain will follow plentifully, sometimes forty-eight hours after; if after the rain the wind goes to the south or southwest, better weather Will follow. Ykllow Skv. — A light yellow sky at sunset presages wind. A pale yellow sky at sunset presages rain. PROVERBS RKLATING TO THE MOON. Dbt Wbatiikr. — When the horns of the moon are sharp it indicates dry weather. New moon far in the south indicates dry weather for a month. East Wind. — If the moon changes with the wind east, the weather during that moon will be foul. Fair Wkatiibr. — Phases of the moon occurring in the evening, expect fair weather. Fine Weatiikr. — If the full moon rises clear, expect fine weather. Galb Moon. — If the moon i« soon between the scud and broken clouds during a gale, it in uxpocted to souif away the bad weather. Halo. — The larger the halo (ring) abcut the moon the nearer the rain clouds, and the sooner the rain may be expected. A lunar halo indicates rain, and the number of stars inclosed, the number of rainy days. The moon with a circle brings water in her beak. Moon, Wind-Clouds, Etc. — When first the moon appears if then she shrouds ' ' Her silver orescent, tipped with sable clouds. Conclude she bodes a tempest on the main, And brews for fields impetuous floods of rain. Or if her face with fiery flushings glow, Expect the rattling wind aloft to blow. 4PPBMDIX. 379 But four night! old (for that is the best sign), With sharpened horns, if glorious then she shine, Next day not only that, but all the moon Till her revolving race be wholly run Are void of tempests both by land and sea. MooK Halo. — A large ring around the moon and low clouds indicate rain in twenty-four hours; a small ring and high cloudH, rain in several days. Moon, Pointb or. — If the new moon appears with the points of the crescent turned up, the month will be dry. If the points are turned down, it will be wet. New Moon. — New moon on its back indicatCH wind; Htanding on its point, rain in the summer and huow in winter. (Dr. John Monual.) Old Moon. — In the old moon A cloudy morning means a fair afternoon. The old moon seen in the new moon's arms is a sign of fair weather. Rbd, Dim, or Pale Moon. — A dim or pale moon indicates rain, a red moon indicAtus wind. If the full moon riHes red, expect wind. Whan the moon rises red and appears large, with cloudH, expect rain in twelve hours. PROVERBS RELATING TO RAIN. Olbabitkss. — Unusual clearness in the atmosphere, objects being seen very distinctly, indicates rain. EVKNINO AND MORNINO. — Evening red and morning gray, * Are sure signs of a fine day. " Evening gray and morning red, Put on your hat or you'll wet your head. Hours op Commbnoinq. — If rain commences before daylight, it will hold up before 8 a. u.; if it begins about noon, it will continue through the afternoon; if it commonceH after 9 p. m., it will rain the next day; if it clears off in the night, it will rain the next day; if the wind is from northwest or southwest, the storm will be short; if from the northeast, it will bo a hard one; if from the northwoHt, a cold one, and from the southwest a warm one. If rain ceases after 12 m., it will rain next day. If rain ceases before 12 m., it will be clear next day. Morninq Rain. — If it rain before seven. It will clear before eleven. If rain begins at early morning light, 'Twill end ere day at noon is brigul. • Notice. - Rain long foretold, long last; Short notice, soon past. 380 APPSNDIX. Wind and Rain. — Marry the rain to the wind and you have a calnu Wdid.— With the rain before the wind, Your topsail halyards yon mast mind. PROVERBS RELATING TO THE RAINBOW. Clsab. — The rainbow has bnt a bad character; she ever commands the rain to cease. GoLOB. — If the green be large and bright in the rainbow, it is a sign of rain. If red bo the strongest color, there will be rain and wind to- gether. After a long drought the rainbow is a sign of rain. After much rain it indicates fair weather. If it breaks up all at once, there will fol- low severe and settled weather. If the bow be in the morning, rain will follow; if at noon, slight and heavy rain; if at night, fair weather. The appearance of two or three rainbows indicates fair weather for the pre- sent, but settled and heavy rains in a few days. Evening Rainbow. — If there is a rainbow at eve, It will rain and leave. East and West Rainbow. — Rainbow in the east indicates that the following day will be clear. A rainbow in the west is usually followed by more rain the same day. Fair Wkatheb. — The boding shepherd heaves a sigh, For see, a rainbow spans the sky. High Rainbow. — When rainbow does not touch water, clear weather will follow. MoitNiNG AND Evening Rainbows. — Rainbow in the mornrng, shepherds take warning; Rainbow at night, shepherds' delight. A morning rainbow indicates rain; an evening rainbow, fair weather. West and East Showbb. — Rainbow in the morning shows that shower is west of us, and we will probably get it. Rainbow in the even- ing shows that shower is east of us and is passing off. PROVERBS RELATING TO STARS AND METEORS. . Comets Bbino Cold Wbatubb. Falling Stabs. — If there be many falling stars during a dear even- ing in summer, expect thunder. If there are no falling stars on a bright summer night, expect fiu» weather. Mant Stabs. — When the sky is full of stars, expect rain. Many stars in winter indicate frost. In summer, when many stars twinkle^ dear weather is indicated. i have a calnu APPENIMX. 281 Mii.*:t Way. — ^The edge of the Milky Way, whioh is the brightest, indicates the direction from which the approaching storm will come. Shooting Stars. — ^If meteors shoot towards the north, expect a north wind next day. Many shooting stars on summer nights indi'^ate hot weather. Tempest. — When a star tows the moon and another chases her astern, tempestuous weather will follow. The phenomenon is probably styled a big star chasing the moon. Wind and Rain. — ^If the stars appear large and clear, expect rain or wicd. dear weather PROVERBS RELATING TO THE SUN. AuROBA. — Aurora Borealis denotes cold. * \ Cloudt Sunset. — The sun sets weeping in the lowly west, Witnessing storms to come, woe and unrest. — Shakespeare. Dark Clouds. — If the sun sets in dark, heavy clouds, expect rain next day. If at suorise there are many dark clouds seen in the west, and remain there, rain will fall on that day. Double Setting. — Sun setting double indicates much rain. Red sun indicates fair weather. Orange sun, usually foul weather. Mook SUDS in winter are usually followed by intense cold. Dull Color. — When the sun appears a pale or dull color expect rain. Drawing Water. — Rays of the sun appearing in a cloud forbode rain. If the sun draws water in the morning, it wUl rain before night. Golden Set. — * The weary sun hath made a golden set. And by the bright track of his fiery car, ' Gives tokens of a goodly day to-morrow. JRichard III. Halo. — A solar halo indicates bad weather. A halo around the sun indicates the approach of a storm, within three days, from the side which is most brilliant. If there be a ring or halo around the sun in bad weather, expect fine weather soon. A bright circle around the sun denotes a storm, and cooler weather. Haziness. — A blur or haziness about the sun indicates a storm. Pale Twilight. — Pale^ yellow twilight, extending high np, indicate! threatening weather. Pale Sbt. — If the snu sets pale, it will rain to-morrow. A green •onset indicates rain. Pale Sunrihu. — If the sun rises pale, a pale red, or even dark blae, there will be rain during the day. 283 apjPbmdix. 1/ ; Red Clouds. — If the clouds a'l sunrise be red, there will be rain the following day. Rbd. — A red evening indicates fine weather; but if the red extends ' far upwards, especially in the morning, it indicates rain or wind. Red Sun. — A red sun has water in its eye. • Sba-Gbbeit Sky. — When the sky during rain is linged with sea-green the rain will increase ; if with deep blue, the rain will be showery. Yellow Sunset. — A bright yellow sunset indicates wind; a pale yel- low, wet; a neutral gray is a favorable sign in the morning and an unfav- orable one in the evening. The sun reveals the secrets of the sky. And who dares give the source of light the lie ? CANALS. Table showing the smallest locks on the several lines of navigation; also the dimensions of the largest vessels which may pass through them: Nai» or OiifAi.. Lacbfne Beauharnois Cornwall Williamsburgr Weliand St. Ours Lock Cbambljr Rideau Ste. Anne Carillon Qrenville Culbuce St. Peter's River Trent United States Canals. Erie Cbamplaln. Dimensiona of Lock in Feet. Length. 270 200 2(10 200 270 200 Its 134 200 200 200 200 200 181 110 100 Breadth. Depth of water on SUIs. 45 45 65 46 45 45 g« 45 45 45 45 m 18 18 12 9 9 9 14 7 7 5 9 9 9 18 Dlmenaions of Vessels in FMt. Length. Breadth. Draught of water when loaded. SSO 180 180 180 250 180 110 120 180 18G 180 180 199 102 0;i 44 44 54 44 44 44 28 f^ 44 44 44 49 l^ 12 9 9 9 14 7 61 S 9 9 6 17« •4 Tonnage of Vessels. 1,000 TOO 760 700 1,000 600 280 2fi0 700 700 700 680 1,000 80 ST. CLAIR FLATS SHIP CANAL. This canal was projected in 1866, with a view to obtaining a straight channel across St. Glair Flats, 13 feet deep, 300 feet wide, and provided on each side with a dike 7,300 feet long. The dikes to consist of timber cribs resting upon piles driven into the original bottom of the shoal, and filled with materials dredged from the channel between them, each dike being protected on both sides by sheet-piling. The work was oompleted, according to this project in 1871. APPENDIX. 288 The project was modified iii 1873, so as to fartber improve the mid- ohannel to a depth of 16 feet, and width of 200 feet. This modification was completed in 1874. Improvements are now in progrest} by which the depth will be increased to 18 feet. ST. MAJIY'S FALLS SHIP CANAL. This canal, which overcomes the rapids in the St. Mary River, con- necting the water of Lakes Huron and Superior, is situated in the State of Michigan, and was first projected in 1837. The canal was not, how- ever, commenced until 4th June, 1853, and the first boat passed through the old canal on the 18th June, 1855. Cost of old Canal to 14th May, 1885, $999,802.46. In 1870 the enlargement of the canal was commenced, and it was opened to navigation on 1st September, 1881, but not com- pleted until 1882, up to which time the cost of enlargement had been 12,150,000. The length of the oanal is about 7,000 feet. The width varies; the least, width is at the swing bridge, or movable dam, 108 feet, the depth of water from 15^ to 16 feet. The lock is 515 feet long between gates, 80 feet wide in chamber, and 60 feet wide at the gates, with 16 feet of water during mean low water; total lift varies from 16f to 18 feet. The fates and capstans are operated by machinery; the power is produced y two turbine wheels, which also furnishes power to run the electric lights. New Lock. — The new look to be constructed upon the site of the eld State locks is to have a length of 800 feet between gates, a width of 100 feet throughout, a depth cr 21 feet on the miter-sills, and a lift of 18 feet. The canal is to be deepened to correspond. GREATEST DEPTH OF WATER IN THE LAKES. Lakb Suprbior. — The greatest depth as appears from the Lake Sur- vey is 168 fathoms, at a point 53 miles N. N. E. \ E. from Maniton Island light, and 61 miles E. \ S. from Passage Island light. Lake Michigan. — The greatest depth is 145 fathoms, at a point 26^ miles S. W. by W.*^ W. from Point Betsey light, and S. E. by E. i E. 33^ miles from Sturgeon Bay Ship canal light. Lake Huron. — The greatest depth is 125 fathoms, at a point 26^ miles S. S. W. \ W. from Cove Island light, and 58 miles E. \ S. from Thunder Bay Island light. Lake Erie. — ^The greatest depth is 35 fathoms, at a point 6^ miles S. E. i E. from Long Point light, and N. by E. ^ E. 24} miles from the main light at Erie. Lake Ontario. — The greatest depth is 123 fathoms, at a point 28 miles N. E. by E. \ E. from the pierhead light at Charlotte, and N. N. W. i W. 15^ milei from the main light at Big Sodus. S84 APPENDIX. WATER TABLE. Showing the mean level of Lake Michigan and Lake Huron during the months of May, June, July, August, September,|Octoborj and Novem- ber, for sixteen years, from 1876 to 1891. Date. Mar. June. July. Aug. Sept. Oct. Not. 1876 1.9 2.2 2.5 3.4 3.4 3.0 2.6 2.5 1.9 2.0 1.3 2.1 2.85 3.63 3.76 3.89 1.0 2.2 2.8 3.3 2.9 2.8 2.4 2.1 1.8 1.7 1.2 1.9 2.55 8.30 3.38 3.94 1.2 2.1 2.3 3 2 2.7 2.6 2.2 1.6 1.7 1.0 1.4 2.0 2.52 3.04 3.14 8.91 1.8 2.2 2.3 3.4 2.8 2.8 2.2 1.5 1.9 1.5 1.5 2.2 3.48 8.10 8.14 4.04 1.8 2.4 2.6 8.5 2.9 2.9 2.3 1.8 2.2 1.6 1.7 2.5 2.78 3.27 3.41 4.20 1.7 .2.6 2.5 8.7 8.2 2.7 2.5 2.1 2.0 1.8 1.8 2.8 8.07 8.64 8.62 4.57 1.8 1877 2.6 1878 2.8 1879 8.8 1880 8.8 1881 2.6 1882 2.7 1883 2.0 1884 2.4 1885 2.0 1886 2.1 18S7 3.2 1888 8.25 1889 8.98 1890 8.83 1891 4.88 NoTK. — The above figures, from official records indicate the number of feet and tenths, that the level of the lake was below the plane of reference, which corresponds with the High Water of 1838. The high- est water of which we have any authentic record was in the year 1838, and the lowest water occurred in 1819; the diflference between the extreme fluctuations was 5^ feet. A new plane of reference has been adopted. It is the mean level of the sea, observed in NetV York Bay. In January, 1891, the mean level of Lake Michigan and Lake Huron was 680.02 feet, and Lake Superior 600.66 feet above this plane of reference. The height of Lake Superior, as observed above the lock in the Sault River, is 20.64 feet above Lake Huron. The level below the lock is 3.07 feet above Lake Huron. REGULATIONS FOR ISSUING CHARTS OF THE LAKE SURVEY. 1. Charts are no longer issued free of charge to vessels. 2. Charts can be purchased by any one, at the U. S. Engineer's office, 34 West Congress" St., Detroit, for 20 cents per sheet. The general chart of Lake Superior is in three sheets, and that of Lake Michigan in two sheets and Lakes Huron, Erie and Ontario in one sheet. AREA OF THE LAKES, AND THEIR HEIGHT ABOVE THE SEA. Lake Superior contains 31,200 square miles, and its mean level for nineteen years is 601.55 feet above the mean level of the sea. Lake Michigan contains 22,450 square miles, and its mean level for 19 years, is 581.56 feet above the mean level of the sea. Lake Huron contains 23,800 square miles, and its mean level for 19 years is 581.56 feet above the mean level of the sea. Lake Erie contains 9,960 square miles, and its mean level is 078 feet above the mean level of the sea. Lake Ontario contains 7,240 square miles, and its mean level is 246.66 feet above the mean level of the sea. iron daring and Novem- kst. Not. 1.7 1.8 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.8 3.7 8.8 8.2 8.8 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.7 2.1 2.0 2.0 2.4 1.8 2.0 1.8 2.1 2.8 8.2 3.07 8.25 3.64 8.98 8.62 8.83 4.57 4.88 INDEX. the number the plane of The high- e year 1838, )etween the lean level of 9 mean levfal ike Superior in the Sault 5 lock is 3.07 HE LAKE I. 2. Charts ce, 84 West ral chart of ligan in two BOVE THE an level for a. lean level for level for 10 al is 578 feet lean level is Agttte baj, 287. Agate harbor, 230. Agate island, 'i50. Ahnepee, 187, 211. Alexaikdria bay, 27. Alexander rock, 138. Alec Clark rock. 137. Allen Otty shoal, 30. Alpena, 113. A.medroz inland, 146. Amherstburg, 86. Amsterdam, 184. Anderson ledge, 121. Annie rock, 136. Ann Long bank, 189. Arran island, 83. Ashland, 233, 234. Ashtabula, 61, 75. Au Sable, 104, 111. Azov ledgci. 137. Badgely island, 140. Bad Neighbor rock, 120. Baker point, 146. Ballast island, 66. 67. Bank point, 171. Bar point, 83. bsss islands, 66. Batile island, 251. Bay Oity, 10 {. Bayfleid, 114, 117, 233, 247. Bayley'c harbor, 188, 212, 213. Bay State shoal, 24. Beach point, 130. Rear's Back island, 145. Bear's rump, 122, 153. Beauty island, 148. Beaver bay, 249. Beaver island, 143, 163, 201, 213. Beaver island harbor, 168, 801. Bedford island, 145. Belle isle; 91, 92. Belleville, 44. Benona, 170. Beverly island, 148. Bernard rock, 185. Bete Qrise bay. 229. Big Burnt island, 135. Big Ott.jr creek, 80. Big Point Sable, '<>03, 223. Big Rock point. 202. Big Sable. 228. Big Sodus, 82, 88, 88, 41. 158. Big Suamico, 196. Bird Island reef, 55. Black lake, 171. Black river, 63, 76, 105. Black River bay, 30. Black Rock harbor. 64. Blake island, 145. Blue Ledge, 99. Bois Blanc island, 88, Hold point, 136. Bower's harbor. 166. Bowlder bank, 149. Braddock's point, 88. Brock's group. 22. Brockville, 22. BroT^n's point, 43. Dnff alo, 64, 66, 67, 78, 74, ■';y. Bull Rock point, 30. Burlington bay, 41, 48, 62. Burnt bluflf, 214, Burnt island, 43, 135. Burbidge island, 148. Bustard rocks, 127. Button bay, 28. Byng inlet, 127. Cabot head, 123, 168. Calf Island spit, 81. Calumet, 176. 177. Calumet islands. 28. Campbell rock, 184. Cana island, 189. Canoe rocks, 241. Cape Robert, 161. Cape Smith. 184. Cape Vincent, 86. Caribou island, 250. Carleton island, 39. Carleton point, 146. Carling point, 146. Caron point. 148. Carp river, 160. Cat Fish creek, 80. Cat Head point, 167. Cedar islands, 25. Cedar point, 65. Cedar river, 192, 216. Celeron island, 82. Center island, 141. Centerville, 186. Chamber's island, 198. Channel rock, 129. Chantry island. 116. Chaquamegan bay. 288. Charity fsland, 102. L'^86] Charity shoal, 29. Charles point, 33. Charlevoix, 164. Charlotte, 83, 39. 41. Chaum^-at bay, 30. Cheboygan, 112, 158, 169, 198. Cherry island, 30. Chicago, 177, 178, 179, 206, 206, 218. Christian island, 126. Church hill, 134. Churchville, 219. Clrtpperton island, 146, 147, 148, 157. Clapperton channel, 148, 150, 151, 157. Clark's Point shoal, 177. Clay cliff, 134. Clayton, 28. Cleveland, 62, 63, 76. Club island, 128, 129. Cobourg, 45, 61. Colchester reef, 82. Collingwood, 125, 126, 164, 165. Collins inlet, 189. Cole's Ferry shoal, 24. Cole shoal, 42. Confiance shoal, 121. Conneaut, 61. Copper harbor, 229. 245. Corsica shoal, 97. Corbay point, 250. Corona, 97. Cove island, 116, 120, 158. Courtney bank, 149. Crimea, 171. Croker island, 147. Cross-Over island. 24. Darling's reef. 128. Darlington, 46. Dawson rock, 128. Dean's pier, 186. Deseronto, 44. Detour, 108, 112, 219, 220. Detroit river, 72, 78, 78, 79, 82, 86, 86, 87, 88, 91, 92. Detroit Island passage, 190. Deviation of compass, 7 to 17. Devil river, 105, 106. Devil's nose, 88. Devil island. 282. il 286 INDBX. Doctor island, 128. Drisco'a shoal, 101. Drummond's island, 118. Duck lake. 170. Dulutb, 285, 286, 237, 248. Dunkirk, 67, 58, 74. Dunlap reef, 195. Dutchman's bead, 147. Eagle bluff. 198. Eagle harbor, 193, 280, 246, 246. Eagle point, 120. Eagle river, 230, 246. East point, 148. East Kous island. 146. Echo island, 123. Lgg harbor, 217. Eighteen -mile creek, 84. Eleven-foot rock, 146. Elk Rapids, 167. Elm island, 146. Emerald channel, 66, 66. Empire shoal, 26. Entrance to Georgian bay. 118. Erie, 68, 59, 60, 61, 74, 76. Erie shingle, 129. Escanaba. 192. 216. Evans point, 141. Evanstoj. 180. Fair Haven. 32. Fairport, 61, 75, 78. False Detour, 116, 119. False Ducks, 41, 44. False Presque IsLe, 106, 112. Feather-bed shoal. 28. Fighting island. 87, 90. Fish creek, 217. Fisherman's island, 165. Fishery point. 129. Fish point, 139. Fitzwilliam channel, 132. Flat island, 144. Flower- pot island, 123. Forestville, 109. Fort Gratiot. 97, 108, 109, 117. Fort Maiden, 89. Fort Mississagua, 49. Fort Niagara, 41. Foster bank, 146. Fox Island shoal, 165. Fox river, 197. Francis point, 147. Frankfort, 168, 203. Frenchman's bay. 46. French river, 127, 156.' Frontenac shoal, 27. Frying pan island, 220. Galloo island. 30. Galloo Island shoal, 80. Gananoque, 42. Garden bay, 214. Garden bluff, 214. Garden City reef. 108 Garden island. 148. Gargantua, 260. Genesee river, 88. Georgian bay, 118. 119, 120. George island, 139. George rock, 189. Gibraltar cliff, 142. Gibraltar point, 46, 51, 52. Gig point, 120. Gin rock, 126. Glasgow, 83. Glen harbor, 167. Goderich, 113, 114, 117, 118. Gold Hunters' bank, 135. Good harbor, 167. Gooseberry River reef, 238. Goose Island shoal. 160. Goose Island spit, 160. Gore bay, 151, Grace harbor, 240. Grand Haven, 80, 171, 172. 204, 213. Grand island. 226. Grand Island channel, 58. Grand Island shoal, 54, 223, 248. Grand Marais, 228, 224, 289, 243, 249 Grand Point au Sable, 16!). Grand river, 80. Grand Sable, 223. Grand Traverse bay, 165. Granite island, 226. Granite State shoal, 27. Grassy island. 90. 197. Gravel island. 189. Gravelly point, 102. Gravelly Island shoal, 191. Gray's reef, 162. Great Barrier, 121. Great Duck island, 116. Green bay, 190. 197, 217 Green island, 68, 77, 137, 194. 217. Grenadier island, 26, 42. Griffith's island, 124. Griffith's point, 144. Grosse Isle flats, 90. Grosse Pointe, 92, 180. Grosse Pointe lightship, 92. Grosse Isle St. Martin, 160. Guffln bftv, 30. Gull island, 191. Gull Island shoal, 66. Gull Island reef, 187. 201. Gull rock, 229. Gull Rock shoal, 229. Gull roost, 189. Half moon island, 123. Halkett rock, 138. Hamilton, 49. Hammond bay, lift. Hamlin, 169. Harbor point, 164. Harlem shoal, 98. Harrisville, 105. Harty patches, 138. Heywood island, 141. Hey wood sound, 141. Henderson bay, 30. Hell's Half Acre. 64. Herson's island, 96, 96. High island. 201. Highland Park, 180. Hill's point, 195. Hinkley's Point spit, 28. Hog Island reef, 163. Holland, 172. Hope island, 126. Horsburg point, 184. Horse island, 30. Horseshoe reef, 56, 66, 198. Horseshoe island, 193. Hungerford point, 130. Huron, 64, 77. Huron bay, 227. Huron island, 227, 244. Huronia Beach, 98. Hyde Park shoal, 177. Indian Dock point, 142. Indian Harbor point, 132. Innis island, 157. International bridge, 54, 220. Inverhuron, 116. Ironsides shoal. 26. Iron-works shoal, 68. - Islay island, 38. Isle Marquette, 160. Isle Royaie, 240. Isle aux Pdches, 92. Jackma ^'>ck, 189. Jackstrav »hoal, 42. James oay, 184. James Foote patch, 146. James island. 138. Kagawong, 151. Kalamazoo, 178. Eaministiquia river, 251. Eelley's island, 66. Kenosha, 180, 207. Kennedy's rock, 127. Kewaunee, 18tf, 210, 211. Killarney, 139, 140, 166. Killarney east, 139. Killarney west, 140. " Kincardme, 115, 118. Kingston, 86, 87, 41, 48. 49. Kingsville, 82. Knapp's point, 48. Kokanongwi island, 140, 141. Lake Erie, 66. Lake Huron, 97. Lake Michigan, 164. IXTDEX. 287 Lake Ontario, 30, 49. l4ikeport. 113. Lake St. Clair, 92. Lake Superior, 333. Lamb island, 251. Langevia rock, 143. Lansdowne rocks, 146. L'Anse, 228. 244. La Point, 2Ji. Lead and Line, 18. Leamington, Si. Leech island, 143. Le Hayes point, 140. Le Haye rock, 188. Lewiston; 85. Lexington, 100. Lime island, 219. Lime-Kiln crossing, 88, 81) Lime- Kiln reef, 65. Lincoln, 169. Lindoe island, 43. Linter rock, 140. Lingville. 185. Little Bay de Noqaette, 817. Little Charity island. 102. Little Current, 144, 167. Little island, 132. Little Point Sable. 213. Little rock, 139. Little Sod us, 83. Little Sodus bay, 38. Little St. Martin's island, 160. Little Sturgeon bay, 105. Little Suamico, 196. Little Traverse, 164, 203. Little Traverse bay, 165. Logan island, 140. Lone Brother islands, 26. Lone rock, 136. Lonely island, 137. Long island, 28. Long point, 60,80,84. Long Tail point, 107. Loon island, 143. Low island, 144. Lucas channel, 123. Ludas island, 133. Lucas Island reef, 122. Ludington, 203. Lyal island, 116. Macuair's islands, 33. Mackinac, 113, 198. Mackinac harbor, 150. Magdalene island, 338. Magee point, 146. Magnetic declinations, 41, 70, 113, 218, 317, 240. Magnetic reef , 116. Mamajuda, 90. Manistee, 168. 308, 318. Manistique river, 100. Manitou island, 330, 245. Manitoulin laland, 188. Manitou Paymen shoal, 161. Manitowaning, 142, 156. Manitowaning bay, 141. 156. Manitowoc, 185, 210. Maple bank, 150. Marblehead, 67. 78. Marquette, 226, 243. 244. Marquette bay, 160. Martin's reef, 108. Matheson rock, 137. Maumee bay, 69, 70, 71, 72. 77, 78. McCargoe's cove, 241. McCartliy's ledge. 133. McGuIpin's point. 161, 318 McKenzie's wharf, 134. McLelan rock, 133. McLeod's bay, 150. Meaford, 124, 125. Menagerie island, 217. Meuomonee, 194. Meredith island, 148. Michael's point, 116. Michigan City, 175. 176, 205, 313. Michigan island, 2.*)3. Middle island. 83. 106, 123. Mid channel reef. 34. Michipicoten island, 250. Middle Bass island. 67. Middle passage, 78. 303. Middle bank, 140. Middle reef, 55. Middle Village. 165. Milwaukee. 183. 188. 184. 207. 208. 200. 213. Mink island, 145. Mink Island shoal, 58. Minnesota point, 235. Ixission point, 166, 323. Mississagua island, 153. Mississagua straits, 116, 119. Mowat island, 148. Mohawk island, 70. Monroe, 73, 79. Morgan's point, 177. Mouse Island reef, 68. Mud bay, 188. Mud Island shoal, 00. Munisiug, 225. Muskegon, 170, 304. Narrow island, 145. Nautical mile, 10. Neebish rapids, 319. New Buffalo, 175. New Mission point, 167. Niagara river, 84, 85, 49, 54. Niagara reef, 68. Niagara shoal, 37, 85, 63. Nice's shoal, 68. NicholBon rock, 188. Nine-foot shoal (Porte dea Morts passage), 190. Nine-foot shoal (Rock Isl- and passage) 190. Nordheim, 185. North bay. 189 North Colborne island, 28. Northeast Point reef. 131. Northeast shingle, 128. North Graham shoal, 159. North Manitou island, 168: North point, 106, 113. Northport bay. 166, 202. North shoal, 28, 149. North Sister rock. 162. North spit, 186. Nottawasaga island, 135. Northwest Burnt island, 185. Northwest shoal, 98. Oak Orchard, 84, 89, 41. Oak point. 113. Oak Point shoal. 24. Oakville, 48. Oconto, 196. Oconto bank. 196. Ogdensburg, 31. Ogontz ba' , 314. Olcott, 84,* 41. Old Fort Mackinac, 160. Old Mission. 167. Old Point Mackinac, 160. Oneida shoil, 35. Ontonagon, 331, 383, 247. Oshawa, 46. Oswegatchie river. 31. Oswego. 31, 82, 88, 41. Ottawa poiut, 103, 104. Otter islands, 123. Outer island, 232. Outer shoal, 189. Owen channel, 120, 180, 181. Owen Island bank, 180. 0^-en Sound, 134, 153, 164. Oxley point, 141. Papoose island, 187. Parry Sound. 126. Partridge island, 141. Passage island, 240. Peach Orchard point, 67. Pelkie rock, 135. Pelee island, 81, 84, 86. Pel6e spit, 81. Penetanguishene, 130. Pensaukee, 196. Pentwater, 169, 203. Pe-qua-qua warning point 328. Pere Marquette, 160. Pestigo, 196. Peter rock, 45. Petley rock, 130. Petite Pointe au Sable, 170. Petoskey, 166. 2S8 INDEX. \\ Phipp's Point sliual, 143. PicDic island, 144. Pictured rocks, 2i3. Pigeon island, iH. '■ Pigeon lake, 173. Pilot shoal. 2C. Pine River point, 165. Pipe island, 220. Pisbaube's village, 166. Platte river, 167. Plum island, 190, 217. Poe's reef, 168. Point Abbaye shoal, 228. Point Abino, 56. Pointe Aux Barques, 101, 109, 110. Point Au Baril, 126. Point aux Ores, 113. Point aux Pins, 221, 250. Point Betsey, 168. 202. Point Clark, 114. Point Edwards, 98. Point Epoufelte, 161. Point Iroquois, 223, 341. Point Isabelle, 229. Point Mildram, 157. Point Mouili^, 72. Point Peninsular, 80, 102. Point Peter, 44. Point Pleasant, 44. Point Sable. 104. Point St. Ignace, 160. Porphyry point, 251. Portage Lake Imrbur, 168. Portage Lake Sbip-canal, 281, 246. Portage river, 228, 229, 244. Port Arthur, 251. Port Austin, 101. Port Bruce, 80. Port Burweil, 80, 84. Port Clinton, 68. Port Col borne. 79, 83, 84. Port Credit, 48. Port Diillioiisie, 35, 40. 49. Porte Des Morts, 181), 190, 212, 214, 215. Port Dover, 80, 84. Port Elgin, 115. Port Hope, 45, 61. Port Huron, 95. Port Maitland, 80, 81. Pou Sdiiilac, 98, 113. Port :»anley, 80. Port WashiDgton, 184, 209. Poverty island, 191. Poverty Island passage, 213. 214. Poverty Island shoal, 191. Pottawatomie or Uock isl- and, 190. Presqne Isle, 44, 45, SO, 61, 60, 107, 112,326,282. Pridgeon shoal, 26. Pullman shoal, 27. Pultneyville. 33. Put-in bay. 67, 78. Pyramid point, 167. Rabbit island, 133, 142. Rabbit's Back peak, 196. Racine. 181, 182, 207, 213. Racine reef, 182. Ragged point, 136. Raisin point, 72. Raspberry island, 336. Rat island, 141. Rattle Snake harbor, 131. Rawley's bay, 189. Red Cliff flat, 135. Red Horse rock, 48. Red rock, 188. Robertson's rock. 147. Rock of Ages, 241. Rock harbor, 240. Rock island, 27, 218. Rock Island passage, 312, 213, 214. Rock Island reel, 38. Rondeau, 81, 84. Rouksville, 184. Round island, 221. Round Island shoal, 26. Russell island, 95, 96. Sable point, 197. Sackett's harbor, 80, 37. Saginaw river, 102, 103, 110. Sand Beach, 99, 100, 101, 109. Sand Island, 235, 348. Sand point, 192, 228. Sandusky, 64, 66, 77. Sandwich point, 91. Sandy Cove ledge, 189 Salmon point, 44. Saugeen, 116. Scammon's Cove, 108. Scammon's harbor, 108. Scarecrow islaud, 187. Scott's Point shoal, 67. Scott's Middle ground, 91. Scotch Bonnet, 44. Scow Island shoal, 20. Secord point, 141. Seul Choix point, 191, 213. Shaftesbury, 144. Sheboygan, 184, 186, 209, 210, 213. Shegultindah bay, 143, 143. Sherwood's point, 194. Ship bank, 130. Shoal point, 152. ' Simcoo island. 43. Simmon's reef, 168. Single rock, 187. Sibklwit bay, 240. Bister islands, 26. Skilligallee, 168. Skull point, 186. Bleeping Bear, 167. Smith bay, 165, 166. Smith's shoal, 132. Smooth rock, 138. Snake island, 43, 121. Southampton, 115, 118. South bay, 44. South Fox island, 164, 213. South Graham shoal. 169. South Haven, 173, 204. South Manitou island, 167, 168, 203, 213. South Bass island. 67, 68. South point, 136, 146, 148. South spit, 150. Southwest Hawk island, 188. South Park shoal, 177 Spanish River mills, 153. Spectacle reef, 107, 112. Spectacle shoal, 43. Spider island, 144. Spilsbury island, 149. Squaw island, 27, 136, 191. Squirrel island, 96. Stag island, 97. StanDard rock, 227. Starve Island reef, 67. Statute mile, 19. St. Clair Flats, 93, 94. St. Clair Middle ground, 97. St. Clair river, 94, 96, 96. 98 St. Helena island, 161,199. St. Helena shoal, 161. St. Joseph, 173, 174, 176 204, 205, 213. St. Joseph island, 219. St. Lawrence river, 21 t4 29 St. Louis river, 236, 266, 257, St. Martin's bay, 160. St. Martin's island. 160. St. Mary's Falls canal, 220. Steele rock, 137. Stewart rock, 180. Stony point, 31, 41. Straits of Mackinac, 199. Straits of St. Mary, 219. Straubenzee point, 145. Strawberry island, 54, 148. Strawberry Island shoal, 63, 142. Sturgeon bay, 194, 200, 216, 317. Bturgeon Bay ship canal, 187, 188, 211, 212. Sturgeon point, 106. Sugar island, 106, 219. Sulphur island, 152. Sunken rock, 37. Superior City, 386, 348. INOKX. %^ ear, 167. 165, 166. oal. 182. Bk, 188. id, 43, 121. on. 115, 118. 44. island, 164, mm shoal. 169. en, 173, 204. itou island, 167, 213. island. 67, 68. t, 136, 146, 148. 150. Hawk island, c shoal, 177 ver mills, 153. eef, 107, 112. ihoal, 48. nd, 144. sland, 149. nd, 27, 136, 191. land, 96. 97. ock, 227. nd reef, 67. e, 19. latB, 98, 94. Middle ground, Iver, 94, 96, 96, island, 161, 190. shoal, 161. , 178, 174, 176 218. island, 219. ice river, 21 U river, 285, 266, s bay, 160. 8 island, 160. Falls canal, 220. i. 187. ck, 180. It, 81, 41. Mackinac, 199. ISt. Mary, 219. ie point, 146. f island, 64, 148. f Island shoal, bay, 194, 200^ Bay ship canal, , 211, 212. joint, 105. nd, 106, 210. iland, 152. )Ck, 27. Jity. 286, 248. Superior shoal, 2S. Surprise shoal, 183. Sutton's bay. 166. Table of distances. 17, 43. 87. 119, 218, 250, 263. Table of nautical miles, 19. Table of statute miles, 19. Table for converting points into degrees, 16. 16. Table of compass devia- tion, 12. Tail point, 196. Tamarack cove, 188. Tamarack point, 147. Tawas, 103. 104, 110, 111. Telegraph island, 44. Ten foot shoal, 192. Tent Island ehoal, 25. Thames river, 92, 98. The Brothers, 188. Thessalon river, 153. The Triangle, 138. Thirteen-foot shoal, 107. Third Brother island, 26. Thirty-mile point, 84, 40, 41. Thornbury harbor, 125. Thousand islands, 27. Thunder bay, 105. Thunder Bay river, 105, 106, 111. Thunder cape, 251. Thunder Bay island, 100, 112. Tibbett's point, 28. Tilton reef, 121. Tobermory, 123. Tobin'B harbor, 34t Todd's harbor, 340. Toledo, 69. lonawanda, 63. Tonawanda spit, 68. Toronto, 41, 46, 47. Traverse City, 165, 166. Tucker's point, 165. Turtle island, 69, 70. Turtle Island shoal, 69. Twelve-foot rock, 144. Twelve-mile creek, 34. Twin islands, 140. Twin River point, 186. 318. Two creeks, 186. Two harbors, 238, 349. Two rivers, 188. Ulao, 184. Unity dock, 167. Vankoughnet island, 148 Variation chart, 5. Variation of compass, 8, 4, 6. Vermillion. 64. 77. Victoria island, 251. Vienna reef, 162. Wabos island, 147. Waiskabay, 221, 222. Wall island, 181. Washburn, 283. Washington harbor, 240. Washington island, 190. Watts rock, 141. Waugoshance, 162, 199, 200. 218. Waukegan, 180, 207. Wekwemikong, 135. Welland canal, 40. 79. Weller'a bay, 46. West bay, 147. West Sister rock, 130. West Sister island, 68. West flat, 181. West Fox island, 188. West rock, 136. West Rous island, 146. Whale's Back shoal, 34. 193. Wharton point, 141. Whiskey island, 126. Whitby, 46, 51. White Fish point, 187, 828. 211. 242, 243. White lake, 204. White river, 170. White rock, 118. White shingle, 131. White shoals, 162. Wild Fowl bay, 103. Wilkinson's pier, 175. William island, 186. William's landing, 236. Willow creek, 118. Wilson's channel, 163. Wilson's harbor, 84. Windmill point, 93, 98. Wind point, 182. Wolfe island, 43. Wood island, 225. Woodtick island, 96, 97. Teo island, 132. Yorkville, 185. Toung Squaw islet, 186. Zela shoal, 159. t ■ 1' I HOWARD H. BAKER & CO., Ship Chandlers and Sail Makers iftCanila Cordage, Steel and Iron Wire Bope, Blocks, Twines, Cotton Duck, Faints, Oils, Anchors and Chains, and Naval Stores of all kinds. OUR OWN IMPORTATION. Held, Xarina and Opera OlasBes, Barometers, Liquid Compaisea, And Other Nautical Inslrumente. 18 TO 26 TERRACE, - BUFFALO, N. Y. D. C. DEEGAN. MEAT MARKET WHOLESALE AND RETAIL DEALER IN Fresh and Salt Meats, EAXS, SH0ULDEB3, BAOON, LABB and TALLOW, Ho. 619 South Canal Street, - I'^'^Sir.r^"^ - CHICAGO. VESSEL TRADE A SPECIALTY. , ''- r. PARKER & MILLEN, 16 Atwatn St. West, SETBOIT, UiolL Vessel Owners^ Agents MARINE AND FIRE INSURANCE. COMPANIES REPRESENTED; KAHZNll— The Union Marine ''Limited" Eng. ; The British and For- eign Marine Ins. Co. ; Western, Ontario; L.ouisville, Ky. ; Seourityy Conn. ; Exchange, N. Y. fXSIB— Continental, N. Y. ; Firemen's Fund, Cal. ; Union, Cal.; Cooper Ohio; People's, N. Y. COMPLETE WRECKING OUTFIT. Orders by Telegraph or otherwise. Promptly Attended to. Louis Haubhksb. Louis HAnsBisii, Jr. Okoroe W. Hausbbbr. Hausheer & Sons SHIP SUPPLY STORE, 98 and 1 OO River Street, — H®- CLEVELAND, O. ^- Groceries, Meats, and General Ship Supplies. TicMcrnoNK 169. TU<> i>i]|.ivi:rv. J: W. GROVER & SON, Ship Chandlers SAIL MAKERS AJ\rD RIGGERS, IMPORTERS AND WHOLESALE DEALERS IN Wire Bope, ICanila and Tarred Oordage, Canvas, Blocks, Oakum, Tar, Fltoh, Oars, Anchors, Chahs, etc. 117 (fc 119 River Street, and 134 & 135 Dock, CLEVELAND, O. COAL. [Offloe 1383. TELB^HONK Noa.-{Tard 1835. ^Dook •]' RISSER & WARDEN, WHOIiESAIjE Anthracite and Bituminous Coal 335 DEARBORAT STREET. STKAMBOAT COALING DOCK, ILLINOIS CENTRAL SLIP "C BOATS COALED DAY OR NIGHT WITH QUICK DISPATCH. CAPT. GEO. TEBO, Sales Agent, CHICAGO. ^- E. "VI DFALKR IN K\,\, KINDS OF • • • BOA.TS COALED AT ALL HOURS. Dock foot of Bates Street, Lighted by Eleotriolty. •-^ .{ DETROIT Brs 1, Tar, Pitch, lock, 1 Ofiloe iS83. •{Tard 1835. (Dock ; Goal , NIGHT WITH PCH. a. Eleotriolty. MULLEN&COMPANY DEALERS IN Docks at Government Pier, Whiskey Island, and adjoining Globe Dry Dock, all fully equipped with Revolving Derricks. Lighter, Carrying Derrick and 100 2i-Ton Buckets. BOATS COALED DAY or NIGHT. MAIN OFFICE, Perkins' Building, east side Main St. Bridge, DOCE OFFICE, 127 West Biver Street, Tblkphone 8. CLEVELAND, O. Docks at Amlierstburg, Ont. E. L PARRISH & CO. Ship Chandlers -OEAI_ER8 IN uahine hardware, cordage OF ALL KINDS. Naval Stores, Blocks, Naotical Instrnneiits, Etc., Etc. 11 and 13 MAIN STREET, SAIL K3XD RIQOIMO liOFT FOOT OF COMMBHOTAL ST. BUFFALO, N. Y. I n y?- , -71STF'^;/;7--fc;.f;.v--^v;i3,-;7T:;r J. C. QOBS. cr. o. Ghoss & Oo. ti ir Are Able to name Lowest Prioee oa SAILS FOB LABaE VESSELS OB YACHTS, . WEATHEB CLOTHS, BOAT OOVEBS and BIGGINGof Every Desoription. Many yean of practical experience en- able us to guarantee complete satisfac* tion in every particular. If you desire Fine Setting Sails or Wire Rigging fitted in the rnost worlcmanlike manner, pleaae write us. tafjOiur-nrxuMj^ •••n. ■" Detroit Tent and Awning Co. J. C. G088 ana A. I^. BECK, Fropiiutors. Manufacturers of SUPERIOR TENTS OB" 3ECIXTI3S. ftJL if slop, all U Canvas CoTen, Banners ani Bnntini Flait And ererythin^ desired that can be made ont of Canvas. ALSO OONTBAOTOBS FOR COVERING STEAM PIPES AND BOILERS ▲OBirTB FOB MHiLBB'B FATBNT ASBBB108 VBLT. ♦' PlMM Bnd tn niTMtraHd Otttlogae ud Mm LM. Proiupt a»d careful attention paid to inquiries. Offloe and Lofts oyer H. D. EDWABDS A 00., 24 \A(^oodward Avenue (Entranoe on Atwater Street), TiLBPHoira 1430. DETROIT, Mioh, L L. BRGK. o. riOMOB ESSELS md )8oription. perience en- ete satiflfac- you desire Igging fitted nner, please vas. ILEB8 /p. CO., er Straet), OIT, Mioh. n. i